FCC ID: I88P2612HWUFX Dual WAN ADSL2+ VoIP IAD

P-2612HWU-F1 802.11g Wireless ADSL VoIP IAD Default Login Details IP Address User Name:

Password:

http://192.168.1.1 adminpldt 1234567890 Firmware Version 3.70 Edition 1, 8/2009 www.zyxel.com www.zyxel.com Copyright 2009 ZyXEL Communications Corporation About This User's Guide About This User's Guide Intended Audience This manual is intended for people who want to configure the ZyXEL Device using the web configurator. Related Documentation Quick Start Guide The Quick Start Guide is designed to help you get up and running right away. It contains information on setting up your network and configuring for Internet access. Support Disc Refer to the included CD for support documents. Documentation Feedback Send your comments, questions or suggestions to: techwriters@zyxel.com.tw Thank you!

The Technical Writing Team, ZyXEL Communications Corp., 6 Innovation Road II, Science-Based Industrial Park, Hsinchu, 30099, Taiwan. Need More Help?

More help is available at www.zyxel.com. P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 3 About This User's Guide Download Library Search for the latest product updates and documentation from this link. Read the Tech Doc Overview to find out how to efficiently use the User Guide, Quick Start Guide and Command Line Interface Reference Guide in order to better understand how to use your product. Knowledge Base If you have a specific question about your product, the answer may be here. This is a collection of answers to previously asked questions about ZyXEL products. Forum This contains discussions on ZyXEL products. Learn from others who use ZyXEL products and share your experiences as well. Customer Support Should problems arise that cannot be solved by the methods listed above, you should contact your vendor. If you cannot contact your vendor, then contact a ZyXEL office for the region in which you bought the device. See http://www.zyxel.com/web/contact_us.php for contact information. Please have the following information ready when you contact an office. Product model and serial number. Warranty Information. Date that you received your device. Brief description of the problem and the steps you took to solve it. 4 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide Document Conventions Document Conventions Warnings and Notes These are how warnings and notes are shown in this Users Guide. Warnings tell you about things that could harm you or your device. Note: Notes tell you other important information (for example, other things you may need to configure or helpful tips) or recommendations. Syntax Conventions The P-2612HW Series may be referred to as the ZyXEL Device, the device, the system or the product in this Users Guide. Product labels, screen names, field labels and field choices are all in bold font. A key stroke is denoted by square brackets and uppercase text, for example,

[ENTER] means the enter or return key on your keyboard. Enter means for you to type one or more characters and then press the

[ENTER] key. Select or choose means for you to use one of the predefined choices. A right angle bracket ( > ) within a screen name denotes a mouse click. For example, Maintenance > Log > Log Setting means you first click Maintenance in the navigation panel, then the Log sub menu and finally the Log Setting tab to get to that screen. Units of measurement may denote the metric value or the scientific value. For example, k for kilo may denote 1000 or 1024, M for mega may denote 1000000 or 1048576 and so on. e.g., is a shorthand for for instance, and i.e., means that is or in other words. P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 5 Document Conventions Icons Used in Figures Figures in this Users Guide may use the following generic icons. The ZyXEL Device icon is not an exact representation of your device. ZyXEL Device Computer Notebook computer Server DSLAM Firewall Telephone Switch Router 6 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide Safety Warnings Safety Warnings Do NOT use this product near water, for example, in a wet basement or near a swimming pool. Do NOT expose your device to dampness, dust or corrosive liquids. Do NOT store things on the device. Do NOT install, use, or service this device during a thunderstorm. There is a remote risk of electric shock from lightning. Connect ONLY suitable accessories to the device. Do NOT open the device or unit. Opening or removing covers can expose you to dangerous high voltage points or other risks. ONLY qualified service personnel should service or disassemble this device. Please contact your vendor for further information. Make sure to connect the cables to the correct ports. Place connecting cables carefully so that no one will step on them or stumble over them. Always disconnect all cables from this device before servicing or disassembling. Use ONLY an appropriate power adaptor or cord for your device. Connect the power adaptor or cord to the right supply voltage (for example, 110V AC in North America or 230V AC in Europe). Do NOT allow anything to rest on the power adaptor or cord and do NOT place the product where anyone can walk on the power adaptor or cord. Do NOT use the device if the power adaptor or cord is damaged as it might cause electrocution. If the power adaptor or cord is damaged, remove it from the device and the power source. Do NOT attempt to repair the power adaptor or cord. Contact your local vendor to order a new one. Do not use the device outside, and make sure all the connections are indoors. There is a remote risk of electric shock from lightning. Do NOT obstruct the device ventilation slots, as insufficient airflow may harm your device. Use only No. 26 AWG (American Wire Gauge) or larger telecommunication line cord. Antenna Warning! This device meets ETSI and FCC certification requirements when using the included antenna(s). Only use the included antenna(s). Your product is marked with this symbol, which is known as the WEEE mark. WEEE stands for Waste Electronics and Electrical Equipment. It means that used electrical and electronic products should not be mixed with general waste. Used electrical and electronic equipment should be treated separately. P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 7 Safety Warnings 8 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide Contents Overview Contents Overview Introduction ............................................................................................................................23 Introducing the ZyXEL Device ................................................................................................... 25 Introducing the Web Configurator .............................................................................................. 33 Wizards...................................................................................................................................... 41 Tutorial ....................................................................................................................................... 59 Advanced ................................................................................................................................89 Status Screens .......................................................................................................................... 91 WAN Setup .............................................................................................................................. 101 LAN Setup ................................................................................................................................117 Wireless LAN ........................................................................................................................... 133 Network Address Translation (NAT) ........................................................................................ 165 Voice ........................................................................................................................................ 181 Phone Usage ........................................................................................................................... 217 Firewall .................................................................................................................................... 225 Content Filtering ...................................................................................................................... 247 VPN ......................................................................................................................................... 253 Certificates ............................................................................................................................... 287 Static Route ............................................................................................................................. 313 802.1Q/1P ............................................................................................................................... 317 Quality of Service (QoS) .......................................................................................................... 329 Dynamic DNS Setup ................................................................................................................ 345 Remote Management Configuration ........................................................................................ 349 Universal Plug-and-Play (UPnP) ............................................................................................. 361 File Sharing ............................................................................................................................. 375 Sharing a USB Printer ............................................................................................................. 389 Maintenance, Troubleshooting and Specifications ..........................................................409 System ......................................................................................................................................411 Logs ........................................................................................................................................ 417 Call History ............................................................................................................................. 433 Tools ........................................................................................................................................ 439 Diagnostic ............................................................................................................................... 459 Troubleshooting ....................................................................................................................... 461 Product Specifications ............................................................................................................. 471 Appendices and Index .........................................................................................................483 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 9 Contents Overview 10 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide Table of Contents Table of Contents About This User's Guide ..........................................................................................................3 Document Conventions............................................................................................................5 Safety Warnings........................................................................................................................7 Contents Overview ...................................................................................................................9 Table of Contents....................................................................................................................11 Part I: Introduction................................................................................. 23 Chapter 1 Introducing the ZyXEL Device...............................................................................................25 1.1 Overview .............................................................................................................................. 25 1.1.1 Internet Access .......................................................................................................... 25 1.1.2 VoIP Features ............................................................................................................ 27 1.1.3 ZyXEL Devices USB Support .................................................................................... 27 1.2 Ways to Manage the ZyXEL Device .................................................................................... 28 1.3 Good Habits for Managing the ZyXEL Device ..................................................................... 28 1.4 LEDs (Lights) ....................................................................................................................... 28 1.5 The RESET Button .............................................................................................................. 30 1.6 The WLAN Button ................................................................................................................ 30 Chapter 2 Introducing the Web Configurator ........................................................................................33 2.1 Web Configurator Overview ................................................................................................. 33 2.1.1 Accessing the Web Configurator ................................................................................ 33 2.2 Web Configurator Main Screen ........................................................................................... 34 2.2.1 Title Bar ...................................................................................................................... 35 2.2.2 Navigation Panel ........................................................................................................ 35 2.2.3 Main Window .............................................................................................................. 39 2.2.4 Status Bar ................................................................................................................... 39 Chapter 3 Wizards ....................................................................................................................................41 3.1 Overview .............................................................................................................................. 41 3.2 Internet Access Wizard Setup ............................................................................................. 41 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 11 Table of Contents 3.2.1 Manual Configuration ................................................................................................. 44 3.3 Wireless Connection Wizard Setup ..................................................................................... 49 3.3.1 Manually Assign a WPA-PSK key .............................................................................. 52 3.3.2 Manually Assign a WEP Key ...................................................................................... 53 3.4 VoIP Setup Wizard .............................................................................................................. 54 3.4.1 SIP Settings ............................................................................................................... 55 3.4.2 Registration Complete ................................................................................................ 56 Chapter 4 Tutorial.....................................................................................................................................59 4.1 Overview .............................................................................................................................. 59 4.2 How to Set up a Wireless Network ...................................................................................... 59 4.2.1 Example Parameters .................................................................................................. 59 4.2.2 Configuring the AP ..................................................................................................... 60 4.2.3 Configuring the Wireless Client .................................................................................. 62 4.3 Using NAT with Multiple Public IP Addresses ...................................................................... 68 4.3.1 Example Parameters and Scenario ........................................................................... 68 4.3.2 Configuring the WAN Connection with a Static IP Address ........................................ 69 4.3.3 Public IP Address Mapping ........................................................................................ 72 4.3.4 Forwarding Traffic from the WAN to a Local Computer .............................................. 76 4.3.5 Allow WAN-to-LAN Traffic through the Firewall .......................................................... 77 4.3.6 Testing the Connections ............................................................................................. 85 4.4 Using NAT with Multiple Game Players ............................................................................... 85 4.5 How to Make a VoIP Call ..................................................................................................... 86 4.5.1 VoIP Calls With a Registered SIP Account ................................................................ 86 Part II: Advanced.................................................................................... 89 Chapter 5 Status Screens ........................................................................................................................91 5.1 Status Screen ...................................................................................................................... 91 5.2 Any IP Table ........................................................................................................................ 96 5.3 WLAN Status ....................................................................................................................... 96 5.4 Packet Statistics .................................................................................................................. 97 5.5 VoIP Statistics ...................................................................................................................... 99 Chapter 6 WAN Setup.............................................................................................................................101 6.1 Overview ............................................................................................................................ 101 6.1.1 What You Can Do in the WAN Screens ................................................................... 101 6.1.2 What You Need to Know About WAN ...................................................................... 101 12 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide Table of Contents 6.1.3 Before You Begin ..................................................................................................... 102 6.2 The Internet Access Setup Screen ................................................................................... 103 6.2.1 Advanced Internet Access Setup ............................................................................. 106 6.3 The WAN Backup Setup Screen ...................................................................................... 108 6.4 WAN Technical Reference ................................................................................................. 109 6.4.1 Encapsulation ........................................................................................................... 109 6.4.2 Multiplexing ...............................................................................................................111 6.4.3 VPI and VCI ..............................................................................................................111 6.4.4 IP Address Assignment .............................................................................................111 6.4.5 Nailed-Up Connection (PPP) ....................................................................................112 6.4.6 NAT ...........................................................................................................................112 6.4.7 Metric .......................................................................................................................112 6.4.8 Traffic Shaping ..........................................................................................................113 6.5 Traffic Redirect ...................................................................................................................115 Chapter 7 LAN Setup.............................................................................................................................. 117 7.1 Overview .............................................................................................................................117 7.1.1 What You Can Do in the LAN Screens ......................................................................117 7.1.2 What You Need To Know About LAN ........................................................................118 7.1.3 Before You Begin ......................................................................................................118 7.2 The LAN IP Screen .............................................................................................................118 7.2.1 The Advanced LAN Setup Screen ........................................................................... 120 7.2.2 Configuring the Advanced LAN Setup Screen ......................................................... 121 7.3 The LAN Client List Screen ............................................................................................... 122 7.4 The LAN IP Alias Screen ................................................................................................... 124 7.5 LAN Technical Reference .................................................................................................. 125 7.5.1 LANs, WANs and the ZyXEL Device ........................................................................ 126 7.5.2 DHCP Setup ............................................................................................................. 126 7.5.3 DNS Server Addresses ............................................................................................ 126 7.5.4 TCP/IP ...................................................................................................................... 127 7.5.5 RIP Setup ................................................................................................................. 128 7.5.6 Multicast ................................................................................................................... 129 7.5.7 Any IP ....................................................................................................................... 129 Chapter 8 Wireless LAN.........................................................................................................................133 8.1 Overview ............................................................................................................................ 133 8.1.1 What You Can Do in the Wireless LAN Screens ...................................................... 133 8.1.2 What You Need to Know About Wireless ................................................................. 134 8.1.3 Before You Start ....................................................................................................... 136 8.2 AP Screen ........................................................................................................................ 136 8.2.1 No Security ............................................................................................................... 138 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 13 Table of Contents 8.2.2 WEP Encryption ....................................................................................................... 139 8.2.3 WPA(2)-PSK ............................................................................................................ 140 8.2.4 WPA(2) Authentication Screen ................................................................................. 142 8.2.5 Wireless LAN Advanced Setup ............................................................................... 144 8.3 More AP Screen ................................................................................................................ 145 8.3.1 More AP Edit ............................................................................................................ 146 8.4 MAC Filter ..................................................................................................................... 147 8.5 WPS .................................................................................................................................. 148 8.6 WPS Station ...................................................................................................................... 149 8.7 WDS Screen ..................................................................................................................... 150 8.8 Scheduling Screen ........................................................................................................... 152 8.9 Wireless LAN Technical Reference ................................................................................... 153 8.9.1 Additional Wireless Terms ........................................................................................ 153 8.9.2 Wireless Security Overview ..................................................................................... 153 8.9.3 MBSSID ................................................................................................................... 156 8.9.4 Wireless Distribution System (WDS) ........................................................................ 156 8.9.5 WiFi Protected Setup ............................................................................................... 157 Chapter 9 Network Address Translation (NAT)....................................................................................165 9.1 Overview ........................................................................................................................... 165 9.1.1 What You Can Do in the NAT Screens ..................................................................... 165 9.1.2 What You Need To Know About NAT ....................................................................... 165 9.2 NAT General Setup ............................................................................................................ 166 9.3 Port Forwarding ............................................................................................................... 168 9.3.1 Configuring the Port Forwarding Screen .................................................................. 169 9.3.2 Port Forwarding Rule Edit ....................................................................................... 171 9.4 Address Mapping .............................................................................................................. 172 9.4.1 Address Mapping Rule Edit ..................................................................................... 173 9.4.2 SIP ALG .................................................................................................................. 174 9.5 NAT Technical Reference .................................................................................................. 175 9.5.1 NAT Definitions ........................................................................................................ 175 9.5.2 What NAT Does ....................................................................................................... 176 9.5.3 How NAT Works ....................................................................................................... 176 9.5.4 NAT Application ........................................................................................................ 178 9.5.5 NAT Mapping Types ................................................................................................. 178 Chapter 10 Voice.......................................................................................................................................181 10.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................... 181 10.1.1 What You Can Do in the VoIP Screens .................................................................. 181 10.1.2 What You Need to Know About VoIP ..................................................................... 182 10.1.3 Before You Begin ................................................................................................... 183 14 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide Table of Contents 10.2 The SIP Settings Screen ................................................................................................ 183 10.3 The Advanced SIP Setup Screen ................................................................................... 186 10.4 The SIP QoS Screen ...................................................................................................... 189 10.5 The Analog Phone Screen ............................................................................................. 190 10.6 The Advanced Analog Phone Setup Screen .................................................................. 190 10.6.1 Configuring the Advanced Analog Phone Screen .................................................. 191 10.7 The Phone Settings Ext. Table Screen ........................................................................... 193 10.8 The Common Phone Settings Screen ............................................................................ 194 10.9 The Phone Region Screen ............................................................................................. 195 10.10 The Speed Dial Screen .................................................................................................. 196 10.11 Incoming Call Policy Screen ......................................................................................... 199 10.12 SIP Prefix Screen .......................................................................................................... 201 10.13 SIP Technical Reference ............................................................................................... 202 10.13.1 VoIP ...................................................................................................................... 202 10.13.2 SIP ...................................................................................................................... 202 10.13.3 Quality of Service (QoS) .......................................................................................211 10.13.4 Phone Services Overview .................................................................................... 212 Chapter 11 Phone Usage .........................................................................................................................217 11.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................... 217 11.2 Dialing a Telephone Number ............................................................................................ 217 11.3 Using Speed Dial to Dial a Telephone Number ................................................................ 217 11.4 Using Call Park and Pickup ............................................................................................. 217 11.5 Checking the ZyXEL Devices IP Address ....................................................................... 218 11.6 Auto Provisioning and Auto Firmware Upgrade ............................................................... 218 11.7 Phone Services Overview ................................................................................................ 219 11.7.1 The Flash Key ........................................................................................................ 219 11.7.2 Europe Type Supplementary Phone Services ........................................................ 219 11.7.3 USA Type Supplementary Services ....................................................................... 221 11.8 Phone Functions Summary .............................................................................................. 223 Chapter 12 Firewall...................................................................................................................................225 12.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................... 225 12.1.1 What You Can Do in the Firewall Screens ............................................................. 225 12.1.2 What You Need to Know About Firewall ................................................................ 226 12.1.3 Firewall Rule Setup Example ................................................................................. 226 12.2 The Firewall General Screen ........................................................................................... 230 12.3 The Firewall Rule Screen ................................................................................................ 232 12.3.1 Configuring Firewall Rules .................................................................................... 233 12.3.2 Customized Services ............................................................................................ 236 12.3.3 Configuring a Customized Service ....................................................................... 237 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 15 Table of Contents 12.4 The Firewall Threshold Screen ........................................................................................ 237 12.4.1 Threshold Values ................................................................................................... 238 12.4.2 Configuring Firewall Thresholds ............................................................................. 239 12.5 Firewall Technical Reference ........................................................................................... 241 12.5.1 Firewall Rules Overview ......................................................................................... 241 12.5.2 Guidelines For Enhancing Security With Your Firewall .......................................... 242 12.5.3 Security Considerations ......................................................................................... 243 12.5.4 Triangle Route ........................................................................................................ 243 Chapter 13 Content Filtering ...................................................................................................................247 13.1 Overview ......................................................................................................................... 247 13.1.1 What You Can Do in the Content Filter Screens .................................................... 247 13.1.2 What You Need to Know About Content Filtering .................................................. 247 13.1.3 Before You Begin ................................................................................................... 247 13.1.4 Content Filtering Example ...................................................................................... 248 13.2 The Keyword Screen ...................................................................................................... 250 13.3 The Schedule Screen ..................................................................................................... 251 13.4 The Trusted Screen ........................................................................................................ 252 Chapter 14 VPN.........................................................................................................................................253 14.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................... 253 14.1.1 What You Can Do in the VPN Screens .................................................................. 253 14.1.2 What You Need to Know About IPSec VPN ........................................................... 254 14.1.3 Before You Begin ................................................................................................... 255 14.2 VPN Setup Screen ......................................................................................................... 256 14.3 The VPN Edit Screen ..................................................................................................... 258 14.4 Configuring Advanced IKE Settings ............................................................................... 264 14.5 Manual Key Setup ........................................................................................................... 267 14.5.1 Security Parameter Index (SPI) ............................................................................ 267 14.6 Configuring Manual Key ................................................................................................. 268 14.7 Viewing SA Monitor ........................................................................................................ 271 14.8 Configuring VPN Global Setting ..................................................................................... 273 14.9 IPSec VPN Technical Reference ..................................................................................... 273 14.9.1 IPSec Architecture ................................................................................................. 274 14.9.2 IPSec and NAT ....................................................................................................... 274 14.9.3 VPN, NAT, and NAT Traversal ............................................................................... 275 14.9.4 Encapsulation ......................................................................................................... 277 14.9.5 IKE Phases ........................................................................................................... 278 14.9.6 Negotiation Mode ................................................................................................... 279 14.9.7 Keep Alive .............................................................................................................. 279 14.9.8 Remote DNS Server .............................................................................................. 279 16 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide Table of Contents 14.9.9 ID Type and Content .............................................................................................. 280 14.9.10 Pre-Shared Key .................................................................................................... 282 14.9.11 Diffie-Hellman (DH) Key Groups .......................................................................... 282 14.9.12 Telecommuter VPN/IPSec Examples ................................................................... 282 Chapter 15 Certificates ............................................................................................................................287 15.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................... 287 15.1.1 What You Can Do in the Certificate Screens ......................................................... 287 15.1.2 What You Need to Know About Certificates ........................................................... 287 15.1.3 Verifying a Certificate ............................................................................................. 289 15.2 My Certificates ................................................................................................................. 291 15.3 My Certificate Details ...................................................................................................... 293 15.3.1 Using the My Certificate Import Screen ................................................................. 297 15.4 My Certificate Create ...................................................................................................... 298 15.5 Trusted CAs ................................................................................................................... 300 15.6 Trusted CA Import ......................................................................................................... 301 15.7 Trusted CA Details ........................................................................................................... 302 15.8 Trusted Remote Hosts ................................................................................................... 306 15.9 Trusted Remote Host Certificate Details ....................................................................... 307 15.10 Trusted Remote Hosts Import ...................................................................................... 310 Chapter 16 Static Route ...........................................................................................................................313 16.1 Overview ....................................................................................................................... 313 16.1.1 What You Can Do in the Static Route Screens ...................................................... 313 16.2 Configuring Static Route .................................................................................................. 314 16.2.1 Static Route Edit ................................................................................................... 315 Chapter 17 802.1Q/1P...............................................................................................................................317 17.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................... 317 17.1.1 What You Can Do in the 802.1Q/1P Screens ........................................................ 317 17.1.2 What You Need to Know About 802.1Q/1P ........................................................... 317 17.1.3 802.1Q/1P Example ............................................................................................... 319 17.2 The 802.1Q/1P Group Setting Screen ............................................................................. 324 17.2.1 Editing 802.1Q/1P Group Setting ........................................................................... 325 17.3 The 802.1Q/1P Port Setting Screen ................................................................................ 327 Chapter 18 Quality of Service (QoS).......................................................................................................329 18.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................... 329 18.1.1 What You Can Do in the QoS Screens .................................................................. 329 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 17 Table of Contents 18.1.2 What You Need to Know About QoS ..................................................................... 330 18.1.3 QoS Class Setup Example ..................................................................................... 330 18.2 The QoS General Screen ............................................................................................... 333 18.3 The Class Setup Screen ................................................................................................ 335 18.3.1 The Class Configuration Screen ........................................................................... 337 18.4 The QoS Monitor Screen ................................................................................................ 341 18.5 QoS Technical Reference ................................................................................................ 341 18.5.1 IEEE 802.1Q Tag ................................................................................................... 342 18.5.2 IP Precedence ........................................................................................................ 342 18.5.3 DiffServ ................................................................................................................. 342 18.5.4 Automatic Priority Queue Assignment ................................................................... 343 Chapter 19 Dynamic DNS Setup .............................................................................................................345 19.1 Overview ......................................................................................................................... 345 19.1.1 What You Can Do in the DDNS Screen ................................................................. 345 19.1.2 What You Need To Know About DDNS .................................................................. 345 19.2 Configuring Dynamic DNS .............................................................................................. 346 Chapter 20 Remote Management Configuration ...................................................................................349 20.1 Overview ......................................................................................................................... 349 20.1.1 What You Can Do in the Remote Management Screens ....................................... 350 20.1.2 What You Need to Know About Remote Management .......................................... 350 20.2 The WWW Screen ........................................................................................................... 351 20.3 The Telnet Screen ........................................................................................................... 352 20.4 The FTP Screen ............................................................................................................. 353 20.5 The SNMP Screen ........................................................................................................... 354 20.5.1 Configuring SNMP ................................................................................................. 356 20.6 The DNS Screen ............................................................................................................ 357 20.7 The ICMP Screen ............................................................................................................ 358 Chapter 21 Universal Plug-and-Play (UPnP)..........................................................................................361 21.1 Overview ......................................................................................................................... 361 21.1.1 What You Can Do in the UPnP Screen .................................................................. 361 21.1.2 What You Need to Know About UPnP ................................................................... 361 21.2 The UPnP Screen ............................................................................................................ 363 21.3 Installing UPnP in Windows Example .............................................................................. 363 21.4 Using UPnP in Windows XP Example ............................................................................. 367 Chapter 22 File Sharing ...........................................................................................................................375 18 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide Table of Contents 22.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................... 375 22.1.1 What You Can Do in the File-Sharing Screens ...................................................... 375 22.1.2 What You Need to Know About File-Sharing ......................................................... 376 22.1.3 Before You Begin ................................................................................................... 376 22.1.4 File-Sharing Examples ........................................................................................... 377 22.2 The Server Settings Screen ........................................................................................... 381 22.3 The User Name and Password Screen ........................................................................... 383 22.3.1 Add or Edit a User Account .................................................................................... 384 22.4 The Share Configuration Screen ..................................................................................... 384 22.4.1 Default Share Directory List ................................................................................... 385 22.4.2 User-Defined Share Directory List ......................................................................... 385 22.4.3 Add or Edit a User-Defined Share .......................................................................... 386 22.4.4 Browse ................................................................................................................... 387 Chapter 23 Sharing a USB Printer ..........................................................................................................389 23.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................... 389 23.1.1 What You Need to Know About Printer Sharing ..................................................... 389 23.1.2 Before You Begin ................................................................................................... 390 23.1.3 What You Can Do with Printer Sharing .................................................................. 390 23.2 ZyXEL Device Print Server Compatible USB Printers ..................................................... 406 Part III: Maintenance, Troubleshooting and Specifications ............. 409 Chapter 24 System ................................................................................................................................... 411 24.1 Overview ...........................................................................................................................411 24.1.1 What You Can Do in the System Settings Screens .................................................411 24.1.2 What You Need to Know About System Settings ....................................................411 24.2 The General Screen ........................................................................................................ 412 24.3 The Time Setting Screen ................................................................................................ 414 Chapter 25 Logs ......................................................................................................................................417 25.1 Overview ......................................................................................................................... 417 25.1.1 What You Can Do in the Log Screens .................................................................... 417 25.1.2 What You Need To Know About Logs .................................................................... 417 25.2 The View Log Screen ...................................................................................................... 417 25.3 The Log Settings Screen ................................................................................................. 418 25.4 SMTP Error Messages .................................................................................................... 421 25.4.1 Example E-mail Log ............................................................................................... 421 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 19 Table of Contents 25.5 Log Descriptions .............................................................................................................. 422 Chapter 26 Call History ...........................................................................................................................433 26.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................... 433 26.1.1 What You Can Do in the Call History Screens ....................................................... 433 26.2 Call History Summary Screen ........................................................................................ 433 26.3 Viewing the Call History .................................................................................................. 434 26.4 Configuring Call History Settings .................................................................................... 435 Chapter 27 Tools.......................................................................................................................................439 27.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................... 439 27.1.1 What You Can Do in the Tool Screens ................................................................... 439 27.1.2 What You Need To Know About Tools .................................................................... 439 27.1.3 Before You Begin ................................................................................................... 441 27.1.4 Tool Examples ........................................................................................................ 441 27.2 Firmware Upgrade Screen ............................................................................................ 446 27.3 The Configuration Screen ................................................................................................ 449 27.3.1 Reset to Factory Defaults ...................................................................................... 451 27.4 Restart ............................................................................................................................. 452 27.5 Using FTP or TFTP to Back Up Configuration ................................................................ 452 27.5.1 Using the FTP Commands to Back Up Configuration ............................................ 452 27.5.2 FTP Command Configuration Backup Example ................................................... 453 27.5.3 Configuration Backup Using GUI-based FTP Clients ............................................ 453 27.5.4 Backup Configuration Using TFTP ......................................................................... 453 27.5.5 TFTP Command Configuration Backup Example .................................................. 454 27.5.6 Configuration Backup Using GUI-based TFTP Clients .......................................... 455 27.6 Using FTP or TFTP to Restore Configuration ............................................................... 455 27.6.1 Restore Using FTP Session Example .................................................................... 456 27.7 FTP and TFTP Firmware and Configuration File Uploads .............................................. 456 27.7.1 FTP File Upload Command from the DOS Prompt Example ................................. 456 27.7.2 FTP Session Example of Firmware File Upload .................................................... 457 27.7.3 TFTP File Upload ................................................................................................... 457 27.7.4 TFTP Upload Command Example ......................................................................... 458 Chapter 28 Diagnostic .............................................................................................................................459 28.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................... 459 28.1.1 What You Can Do in the Diagnostic Screens ......................................................... 459 28.2 The General Diagnostic Screen ...................................................................................... 459 Chapter 29 Troubleshooting....................................................................................................................461 20 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide Table of Contents 29.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................... 461 29.2 Power, Hardware Connections, and LEDs ...................................................................... 461 29.3 ZyXEL Device Access and Login .................................................................................... 462 29.4 Internet Access ................................................................................................................ 464 29.5 Phone Calls and VoIP ...................................................................................................... 465 29.6 Multiple SIP Accounts ...................................................................................................... 466 29.6.1 Outgoing Calls ........................................................................................................ 467 29.6.2 Incoming Calls ........................................................................................................ 468 29.7 USB Device Connection .................................................................................................. 469 Chapter 30 Product Specifications .........................................................................................................471 Part IV: Appendices and Index ........................................................... 483 Appendix A Setting Up Your Computers IP Address...........................................................485 Appendix B Pop-up Windows, JavaScripts and Java Permissions ...................................... 511 Appendix C IP Addresses and Subnetting ...........................................................................521 Appendix D Wireless LANs ..................................................................................................533 Appendix E Common Services.............................................................................................557 Appendix F Legal Information ..............................................................................................561 Index.......................................................................................................................................565 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 21 Table of Contents 22 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide PART I Introduction Introducing the ZyXEL Device (25) Introducing the Web Configurator (33) Wizards (41) Tutorial (59) 23 24 CHAPTER 1 Introducing the ZyXEL Device 1.1 Overview The ZyXEL Device is an Integrated Access Device (IAD) that combines an ADSL2+

router with Voice over IP (VoIP) communication capabilities to allow you to use a traditional analog telephone to make Internet calls. By integrating DSL and NAT, you are provided with ease of installation and high-speed, shared Internet access. The ZyXEL Device is also a complete security solution with a robust firewall and content filtering. Please refer to the following description of the product name format. H denotes an integrated 4-port hub (switch). W denotes wireless functionality. There is an embedded mini-PCI module for IEEE 802.11g wireless LAN connectivity. All wireless features documented in this users guide refer to the W models only. U denotes a USB port used to share files via a USB memory stick or a USB hard drive. The ZyXEL Device can also function as a print server with an USB printer connected. See the chapter on product specifications for a full list of features. 1.1.1 Internet Access Your ZyXEL Device provides shared Internet access by connecting the DSL port to the DSL or MODEM jack on a splitter or your telephone jack. If you prefer not to use a DSL line and you have another broadband modem or router (such as ADSL) available, you can push the DSL/WAN switch (on the rear panel) to the WAN side and connect the WAN port to the broadband modem or router. This way, you can access the Internet via an Ethernet connection and still use the QoS, Firewall and VoIP functions on the ZyXEL Device. P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 25 Chapter 1 Introducing the ZyXEL Device Computers can connect to the ZyXEL Devices LAN ports (or wirelessly). Figure 1 ZyXEL Devices Router Features LAN Internet You can also configure firewall and content filtering on the ZyXEL Device for secure Internet access. When the firewall is on, all incoming traffic from the Internet to your network is blocked unless it is initiated from your network. This means that probes from the outside to your network are not allowed, but you can safely browse the Internet and download files. Use content filtering to block access to specific web sites, with URLs containing keywords that you specify. You can define time periods and days during which content filtering is enabled and include or exclude particular computers on your network from content filtering. For example, you could block access to certain web sites for the kids. Use QoS to efficiently manage traffic on your network by giving priority to certain types of traffic and/or to particular computers. For example, you could make sure that the ZyXEL Device gives voice over Internet calls high priority, and/or limit bandwidth devoted to the bosss excessive file downloading. 26 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide Chapter 1 Introducing the ZyXEL Device 1.1.2 VoIP Features You can register up to 2 SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) accounts and use the ZyXEL Device to make and receive VoIP telephone calls:

Figure 2 ZyXEL Devices VoIP Features Internet A B PSTN Peer-to-Peer calls (A) - Use the ZyXEL Device to make a call to the recipients IP address without using a SIP proxy server. Calls via a VoIP service provider (B) - The ZyXEL Device sends your call to a VoIP service providers SIP server which forwards your calls to either VoIP or PSTN phones. 1.1.3 ZyXEL Devices USB Support Use the built-in USB 2.0 port to share files via a USB memory stick or a USB hard drive (A). Alternatively, you can add a USB printer (B) and make it available on your local area network. Figure 3 File Sharing Overview A B P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 27 Chapter 1 Introducing the ZyXEL Device 1.2 Ways to Manage the ZyXEL Device Use any of the following methods to manage the ZyXEL Device. Web Configurator. This is recommended for everyday management of the ZyXEL Device using a (supported) web browser. Command Line Interface. Line commands are mostly used for troubleshooting by service engineers. FTP for firmware upgrades and configuration backup/restore. SNMP. The device can be monitored by an SNMP manager. See the SNMP chapter in this Users Guide. SPTGEN. SPTGEN is a text configuration file that allows you to configure the device by uploading an SPTGEN file. This is especially convenient if you need to configure many devices of the same type. 1.3 Good Habits for Managing the ZyXEL Device Do the following things regularly to make the ZyXEL Device more secure and to manage the ZyXEL Device more effectively. Change the password. Use a password thats not easy to guess and that consists of different types of characters, such as numbers and letters. Write down the password and put it in a safe place. Back up the configuration (and make sure you know how to restore it). Restoring an earlier working configuration may be useful if the device becomes unstable or even crashes. If you forget your password, you will have to reset the ZyXEL Device to its factory default settings. If you backed up an earlier configuration file, you would not have to totally re-configure the ZyXEL Device. You could simply restore your last configuration. 1.4 LEDs (Lights) The following graphic displays the labels of the LEDs. Figure 4 LEDs on the Top of the Device 28 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide None of the LEDs are on if the ZyXEL Device is not receiving power. Chapter 1 Introducing the ZyXEL Device Table 1 LED Descriptions LED POWER COLOR STATUS DESCRIPTION Green Red ETHERNET 1-4 Green On Blinking On Off On Blinking Off WLAN Green On Blinking Off On Blinking Off On DSL Green INTERNET Green Blinking On Red WAN Green Off On Blinking Off The ZyXEL Device is receiving power and ready for use. The ZyXEL Device is self-testing. The ZyXEL Device detected an error while self-testing, or there is a device malfunction. The ZyXEL Device is not receiving power. The ZyXEL Device has an Ethernet connection with a device on the Local Area Network (LAN). The ZyXEL Device is sending/receiving data to /from the LAN. The ZyXEL Device does not have an Ethernet connection with the LAN. The wireless network is activated and is operating in IEEE 802.11b/g mode. The ZyXEL Device is communicating with other wireless clients. The wireless network is not activated. This light applies when the ZyXEL Device is in DSL WAN mode. The DSL line is up. The ZyXEL Device is initializing the DSL line. The DSL line is down. The ZyXEL Device has an IP connection but no traffic. Your device has a WAN IP address (either static or assigned by a DHCP server), PPP negotiation was successfully completed (if used) and the DSL connection is up. The ZyXEL Device is sending or receiving IP traffic. The ZyXEL Device attempted to make an IP connection but failed. Possible causes are no response from a DHCP server, no PPPoE response, PPPoE authentication failed. The ZyXEL Device does not have an IP connection. This light applies when the ZyXEL Device is in Ethernet WAN mode. The ZyXEL Device has an Ethernet connection with a device on the WAN. The ZyXEL Device is sending/receiving data to/from the WAN. The ZyXEL Device does not have an Ethernet connection with the WAN. P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 29 Chapter 1 Introducing the ZyXEL Device Table 1 LED Descriptions LED PHONE COLOR STATUS DESCRIPTION Green On Blinking Orange On USB Green Blinking Off On Blinking Off A SIP account is registered for the phone port. A telephone connected to the phone port has its receiver off of the hook or there is an incoming call. A SIP account is registered for the phone port and there is a voice message in the corresponding SIP account. A telephone connected to the phone port has its receiver off of the hook and there is a voice message in the corresponding SIP account. The phone port does not have a SIP account registered. The ZyXEL Device recognizes a USB connection. The ZyXEL Device is sending/receiving data to /from the USB device connected to it. The ZyXEL Device does not detect a USB connection. Refer to the Quick Start Guide for information on hardware connections. 1.5 The RESET Button If you forget your password or cannot access the web configurator, you will need to use the RESET button at the back of the device to reload the factory-default configuration file. This means that you will lose all configurations that you had previously and the passwords will be reset to the defaults. 1 Make sure the POWER LED is on (not blinking). 2 To set the device back to the factory default settings, press the RESET button for ten seconds or until the POWER LED begins to blink and then release it. When the POWER LED begins to blink, the defaults have been restored and the device restarts. 1.6 The WLAN Button Use the WLAN button (

or on. You can also use it to activate WPS in order to quickly set up a wireless network with strong security. Make sure the POWER LED is on (not blinking) before using the WLAN button.

) on the top of the device to turn the wireless LAN off Press the WLAN button for one second and release it. The WLAN LED should change from on to off or vice versa. 30 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide Chapter 1 Introducing the ZyXEL Device Press the WLAN button for five seconds to turn on WPS. See Section 8.9.5.1 on page 157 for more on using WPS to configure your wireless clients. P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 31 Chapter 1 Introducing the ZyXEL Device 32 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide CHAPTER 2 Introducing the Web Configurator 2.1 Web Configurator Overview The web configurator is an HTML-based management interface that allows easy device setup and management via Internet browser. Use Internet Explorer 6.0 and later or Netscape Navigator 7.0 and later versions. The recommended screen resolution is 1024 by 768 pixels. In order to use the web configurator you need to allow:

Web browser pop-up windows from your device. Web pop-up blocking is enabled by default in Windows XP SP (Service Pack) 2. JavaScripts (enabled by default). Java permissions (enabled by default). See Appendix B on page 511 if you need to make sure these functions are allowed in Internet Explorer. 2.1.1 Accessing the Web Configurator 1 Make sure your ZyXEL Device hardware is properly connected (refer to the Quick Start Guide). 2 3 Launch your web browser. Type "192.168.1.1" as the URL. P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 33 Chapter 2 Introducing the Web Configurator 4 A password screen displays. Type adminpldt (default) as the username and 1234567890 as the password, and click Login. Click Cancel to revert to the default password in the password field. If you have changed the password, enter your password and click Login. Figure 5 Password Screen Note: For security reasons, the ZyXEL Device automatically logs you out if you do not use the web configurator for five minutes (default). If this happens, log in again. 2.2 Web Configurator Main Screen Figure 6 Main Screen A C B D As illustrated above, the main screen is divided into these parts:

34 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide Chapter 2 Introducing the Web Configurator A - title bar B - navigation panel C - main window D - status bar 2.2.1 Title Bar The title bar allows you to change the language and provides some icons in the upper right corner. The icons provide the following functions. Table 2 Web Configurator Icons in the Title Bar ICON DESCRIPTION Wizards: Click this icon to go to the configuration wizards. See Chapter 3 on page 41 for more information. Logout: Click this icon to log out of the web configurator. 2.2.2 Navigation Panel Use the menu items on the navigation panel to open screens to configure ZyXEL Device features. The following tables describe each menu item. Table 3 Navigation Panel Summary LINK Status TAB FUNCTION This screen shows the ZyXEL Devices general device and network status information. Use this screen to access the statistics and client list. Network WAN Internet Access Setup LAN IP Client List IP Alias Use this screen to configure ISP parameters, WAN IP address assignment, DNS servers and other advanced properties. Use this screen to configure LAN TCP/IP settings, DHCP settings, enable Any IP and configure other advanced properties. Use this screen to view current DHCP client information and to always assign specific IP addresses to individual MAC addresses (and host names). Use this screen to partition your LAN interface into subnets. P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 35 Chapter 2 Introducing the Web Configurator Table 3 Navigation Panel Summary LINK TAB Wireless LAN AP More AP MAC Filter WPS WPS Station WDS Scheduling NAT General Port Forwarding Address Mapping ALG SIP Settings QoS VoIP SIP Phone Analog Phone Ext. Table Common Region Phone Book Speed Dial Incoming Call Policy SIP Prefix Security FUNCTION Use this screen to configure the wireless LAN settings and WLAN authentication/security settings. Use this screen to configure multiple BSSs on the ZyXEL Device. Use this screen to configure the ZyXEL Device to give exclusive access to specific wireless clients or exclude specific wireless clients from accessing the ZyXEL Device. Use this screen to configure multiple BSSs on the ZyXEL Device. Use this screen to configure WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup) settings. Use this screen to configure your WDS (Wireless Distribution System) links between the ZyXEL Device and other wireless APs. Use this screen to configure when the ZyXEL Device enables or disables the wireless LAN. Use this screen to use WPS to set up your wireless network. Use this screen to make your local servers visible to the outside world. Use this screen to configure network address translation mapping rules. Use this screen to enable or disable SIP ALG. Use this screen to configure your ZyXEL Devices Voice over IP settings. Use this screen to configure your ZyXEL Devices Quality of Service settings for VoIP. Use this screen to set which phone ports use which SIP accounts. Use this screen to assign extension numbers to phones connected to the ZyXEL Device. Use this screen to configure general phone port settings. Use this screen to select your location and call service mode. Use this screen to configure speed dial for SIP phone numbers that you call often. Use this screen to configure call-forwarding. Use this screen to set up numbers you dial on your phone to specify which SIP account you want to use for a call. 36 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide Table 3 Navigation Panel Summary LINK Firewall TAB General Chapter 2 Introducing the Web Configurator FUNCTION Use this screen to activate/deactivate the firewall and the default action to take on network traffic going in specific directions. This screen shows a summary of the firewall rules, and allows you to edit/add a firewall rule. Use this screen to configure the thresholds for determining when to drop sessions that do not become fully established. Use this screen to block access to web sites containing certain keywords in the URL. Use this screen to set the days and times for your device to perform content filtering. Use this screen to exclude a range of users on the LAN from content filtering. Use this screen to configure each VPN tunnel. Use this screen to look at the current status of each VPN tunnel. Use this screen to allow NetBIOS traffic through VPN tunnels. VPN Global Setting My Certificates Use this screen to generate and export self-signed certificates or certification requests and import the ZyXEL Devices CA-signed certificates. Use this screen to save CA certificates to the ZyXEL Device. Use this screen to import self-signed certificates. Trusted CAs Trusted Remote Hosts Rules Threshold Content Filter Keyword Schedule Trusted Setup Monitor VPN Certificates Advanced Static Route Static Route 802.1Q/1P Group Setting Port Setting QoS General Class Setup Monitor Dynamic DNS Dynamic DNS Use this screen to configure IP static routes to tell your device about networks beyond the directly connected remote nodes. Use this screen to activate 802.1Q/1P, specify the management VLAN group, display the VLAN groups and configure the settings for each VLAN group. Use this screen to configure the PVID and assign traffic priority for each port. Use this screen to enable QoS and traffic prioritizing, and configure bandwidth management on the WAN. Use this screen to define a classifier. Use this screen to view each queues statistics. This screen allows you to use a static hostname alias for a dynamic IP address. P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 37 Chapter 2 Introducing the Web Configurator Table 3 Navigation Panel Summary LINK TAB HTTP Telnet FTP SNMP DNS ICMP Remote MGMT UPnP File Sharing FUNCTION Use this screen to configure through which interface(s) and from which IP address(es) users can use HTTP to manage the ZyXEL Device. Use this screen to configure through which interface(s) and from which IP address(es) users can use Telnet to manage the ZyXEL Device. Use this screen to configure through which interface(s) and from which IP address(es) users can use FTP to access the ZyXEL Device. Use this screen to configure your ZyXEL Devices settings for Simple Network Management Protocol management. Use this screen to configure through which interface(s) and from which IP address(es) users can send DNS queries to the ZyXEL Device. Use this screen to set whether or not your device will respond to pings and probes for services that you have not made available. Use this screen to turn UPnP on or off. General Server Setting Use this screen to enable file sharing via the ZyXEL User Name and Password Share Configuration Device. Use this screen to setup a users name and password for secure access to your shared files. Use this screen to view or configure the share directories (folders) on the ZyXEL Device. Maintenance System General Logs Time Setting View Log Log Settings Call History Summary Call History Call History Settings Use this screen to configure your devices name, domain name, management inactivity timeout and password. Use this screen to change your ZyXEL Devices time and date. Use this screen to display your devices logs. Use this screen to select which logs and/or immediate alerts your device is to record. You can also set it to e-

mail the logs to you. Use this screen to view call history summary of a certain period. Use this screen to view the details of the calls performed on the ZyXEL Device. Use this screen to configure to where the ZyXEL Device is to send call records and the schedule for when the ZyXEL Device is to send or save the call records. 38 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide Chapter 2 Introducing the Web Configurator FUNCTION Use this screen to upload firmware to your device. Use this screen to backup and restore your devices configuration (settings) or reset the factory default settings. This screen allows you to reboot the ZyXEL Device without turning the power off. Use this screen to test the connections to other devices. Table 3 Navigation Panel Summary LINK Tools TAB Firmware Configuration Restart Diagnostic General 2.2.3 Main Window The main window displays information and configuration fields. It is discussed in the rest of this document. Right after you log in, the Status screen is displayed. See Chapter 5 on page 91 for more information about the Status screen. 2.2.4 Status Bar Check the status bar when you click Apply or OK to verify that the configuration has been updated. P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 39 Chapter 2 Introducing the Web Configurator 40 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide CHAPTER 3 Wizards 3.1 Overview Use the wizard setup screens to configure your system for Internet access, wireless, and making calls over the Internet with the information given to you by your ISP. Note: See the advanced menu chapters for background information on these fields. 3.2 Internet Access Wizard Setup 1 Click the wizard icon (

) in the top right corner of the web configurator to go to the wizards. 2 Click INTERNET/WIRELESS SETUP to configure the system for Internet access and wireless connection. Figure 7 Wizard Welcome 3 Your ZyXEL Device attempts to detect your DSL connection and your connection type. 3a The following screen appears if a connection is not detected. Check your hardware connections and click Restart the INTERNET/WIRELESS SETUP P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 41 Chapter 3 Wizards Wizard to return to the wizard welcome screen. If you still cannot connect, click Manually configure your Internet connection. Follow the directions in the wizard and enter your Internet setup information as provided to you by your ISP. See Section 3.2.1 on page 44 for more details. If you would like to skip your Internet setup and configure the wireless LAN settings, leave Yes selected and click Next. Figure 8 Auto Detection: No DSL Connection 3b The following screen displays if a PPPoE or PPPoA connection is detected. Enter your Internet account information (username, password and/or service name) exactly as provided by your ISP. Then click Next and see Section 3.3 on page 49 for wireless connection wizard setup. Figure 9 Auto-Detection: PPPoE 42 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide Chapter 3 Wizards 3c The following screen appears if the ZyXEL device detects a connection but not the connection type. Click Next and refer to Section 3.2.1 on page 44 on how to manually configure the ZyXEL Device for Internet access. Figure 10 Auto Detection: Failed P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 43 Chapter 3 Wizards 3.2.1 Manual Configuration 1 If the ZyXEL Device fails to detect your DSL connection type but the physical line is connected, enter your Internet access information in the wizard screen exactly as your service provider gave it to you. Leave the defaults in any fields for which you were not given information. This wizard screen varies depending on the WAN mode you set using the DSL/WAN switch on the back of the ZyXEL Device. Figure 11 Internet Access Wizard Setup: ISP Parameters (DSL WAN) 44 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide Figure 12 Internet Access Wizard Setup: ISP Parameters (Ethernet WAN) Chapter 3 Wizards The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 4 Internet Access Wizard Setup: ISP Parameters LABEL Mode DESCRIPTION This field is not available if you set the WAN mode to Ethernet WAN. Select Routing (default) from the drop-down list box if your ISP give you one IP address only and you want multiple computers to share an Internet account. Select Bridge when your ISP provides you more than one IP address and you want the connected computers to get individual IP address from ISPs DHCP server directly. If you select Bridge, you cannot use Firewall, DHCP server and NAT on the ZyXEL Device. Encapsulation Select the encapsulation type your ISP uses from the Encapsulation drop-down list box. Choices vary depending on what you select in the Mode field. If you set the WAN mode to DSL WAN and select Bridge in the Mode field, select PPPoA or RFC 1483. If you set the WAN mode to DSL WAN and select Routing in the Mode field, select PPPoA, ENET ENCAP or PPPoE. If you set the WAN mode to Ethernet WAN, select ENET ENCAP or PPPoE. This field is not available if you set the WAN mode to Ethernet WAN. Multiplexing Select the method of multiplexing used by your ISP from the drop-down list. Choices are VC or LLC. This field is not available if you set the WAN mode to Ethernet WAN. VPI (Virtual Path Identifier) and VCI (Virtual Channel Identifier) define a virtual circuit. Refer to the appendix for more information. Select the check box to use the default VPI and VCI (8 and 35). Otherwise, clear the check box and enter the VPI and VCI manually in the fields below. Enter the VPI assigned to you. This field may already be configured. Virtual Circuit ID AUTO VPI P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 45 Chapter 3 Wizards Table 4 Internet Access Wizard Setup: ISP Parameters LABEL VCI DESCRIPTION Enter the VCI assigned to you. This field may already be configured. This field is not available when you select Bridge in the Mode field. SIP ALG Back Next Exit Select ON to enable the SIP ALG in the ZyXEL Device and allow SIP calls to pass through NAT. Select OFF to disable the SIP ALG in the ZyXEL Device. Click Back to go back to the previous screen. Click Next to continue to the next wizard screen. The next wizard screen you see depends on what protocol you chose above. Click Exit to close the wizard screen without saving your changes. 2 The next wizard screen varies depending on what mode and encapsulation type you use. All screens shown are with routing mode. Configure the fields and click Next to continue. See Section 3.3 on page 49 for wireless connection wizard setup. Note: When you use the connection wizard to configure the Internet access using PPPoE or PPPoA, the ZyXEL Device is set to get an IP address from the ISP automatically. To set up a static WAN IP address with PPPoE or PPPoA, use the Network > WAN screen. Figure 13 Internet Connection with PPPoE or PPPoA 46 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide The following table describes the fields in this screen. Chapter 3 Wizards Table 5 Internet Connection with PPPoE or PPPoA LABEL User Name DESCRIPTION Enter the user name exactly as your ISP assigned. If assigned a name in the form user@domain where domain identifies a service name, then enter both components exactly as given. Enter the password associated with the user name above. Click Back to go back to the previous wizard screen. Click Apply to save your changes back to the ZyXEL Device. Click Exit to close the wizard screen without saving your changes. Password Back Apply Exit Figure 14 Internet Connection with DHCP (ENET ENCAP) The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 6 Internet Connection with DHCP (ENET ENCAP) LABEL Obtain an IP Address Automatical ly DESCRIPTION A static IP address is a fixed IP that your ISP gives you. A dynamic IP address is not fixed; the ISP assigns you a different one each time you connect to the Internet. Select Obtain an IP Address Automatically if you have a dynamic IP address. Select Static IP Address if your ISP gave you an IP address to use. Static IP Address IP Address Enter your ISP assigned IP address. P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 47 Chapter 3 Wizards Table 6 Internet Connection with DHCP (ENET ENCAP) (continued) LABEL Subnet Mask DESCRIPTION Enter a subnet mask in dotted decimal notation. Refer to the appendix to calculate a subnet mask If you are implementing subnetting. You must specify a gateway IP address (supplied by your ISP) when you use ENET ENCAP (DHCP) in the Encapsulation field in the previous screen. Enter the IP addresses of the DNS servers. The DNS servers are passed to the DHCP clients along with the IP address and the subnet mask. As above. Click Back to go back to the previous wizard screen. Click Apply to save your changes back to the ZyXEL Device. Click Exit to close the wizard screen without saving your changes. Gateway IP address First DNS Server Second DNS Server Back Apply Exit If the user name and/or password you entered for PPPoE connection are not correct, the screen displays as shown next. Click Back to Username and Password setup to go back to the screen where you can modify them. Figure 15 Connection Test Failed-1 48 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide Chapter 3 Wizards If the following screen displays, check if your account is activated or click Restart the Internet/Wireless Setup Wizard to verify your Internet access settings. Figure 16 Connection Test Failed-2. 3.3 Wireless Connection Wizard Setup See the back panel for the ZyXEL Devices unique wireless SSID (network name) and WPA-PSK encryption key. Unless you want to use other wireless settings, you can close the wizard after you configure the Internet connection. 1 Select Yes and click Next to configure wireless settings. Otherwise, select No and skip to Step 6. Figure 17 Connection Test Successful P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 49 Chapter 3 Wizards 2 Use this screen to activate the wireless LAN. Click Next to continue. Figure 18 Wireless LAN Setup Wizard 1 The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 7 Wireless LAN Setup Wizard 1 LABEL Active Back Next Exit DESCRIPTION Select the check box to turn on the wireless LAN. Click Back to display the previous screen. Click Next to proceed to the next screen. Click Exit to close the wizard screen without saving. 3 Configure your wireless settings in this screen. Click Next. Figure 19 Wireless LAN 50 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide Chapter 3 Wizards The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 8 Wireless LAN Setup Wizard 2 LABEL Network Name(SSID) DESCRIPTION Enter a descriptive name (up to 32 printable 7-bit ASCII characters) for the wireless LAN. Channel Selection Security If you change this field on the ZyXEL Device, make sure all wireless stations use the same SSID in order to access the network. The range of radio frequencies used by IEEE 802.11b/g wireless devices is called a channel. Select a channel ID that is not already in use by a neighboring device. Select Manually assign a WPA-PSK key to configure a Pre-Shared Key

(WPA-PSK). Choose this option only if your wireless clients support WPA. See Section 3.3.1 on page 52 for more information. Select Manually assign a WEP key to configure a WEP Key. See Section 3.3.2 on page 53 for more information. Select Disable wireless security to have no wireless LAN security configured and your network is accessible to any wireless networking device that is within range. Click Back to display the previous screen. Click Next to proceed to the next screen. Click Exit to close the wizard screen without saving. Back Next Exit Note: The wireless stations and ZyXEL Device must use the same SSID, channel ID and WEP encryption key (if WEP is enabled), WPA-PSK (if WPA-PSK is enabled) for wireless communication. 4 This screen varies depending on the security mode you selected in the previous screen. Fill in the field (if available) and click Next. P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 51 Chapter 3 Wizards 3.3.1 Manually Assign a WPA-PSK key Choose Manually assign a WPA-PSK key in the Wireless LAN setup screen to set up a Pre-Shared Key. Figure 20 Manually Assign a WPA-PSK key The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 9 Manually Assign a WPA key LABEL Pre-Shared Key DESCRIPTION Type from 8 to 63 case-sensitive ASCII characters. You can set up the most secure wireless connection by configuring WPA in the wireless LAN screens. You need to configure an authentication server to do this. Click Back to display the previous screen. Click Next to proceed to the next screen. Click Exit to close the wizard screen without saving. Back Next Exit 52 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 3.3.2 Manually Assign a WEP Key Choose Manually assign a WEP key to setup WEP Encryption parameters. Figure 21 Manually Assign a WEP key Chapter 3 Wizards The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 10 Manually Assign a WEP key LABEL Key DESCRIPTION The WEP keys are used to encrypt data. Both the ZyXEL Device and the wireless stations must use the same WEP key for data transmission. Enter any 5, 13 or 29 ASCII characters or 10, 26 or 58 hexadecimal characters ("0-9", "A-F") for a 64-bit, 128-bit or 256-bit WEP key respectively. Click Back to display the previous screen. Click Next to proceed to the next screen. Click Exit to close the wizard screen without saving. Back Next Exit 5 Click Apply to save your wireless LAN settings. Figure 22 Wireless LAN Setup 3 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 53 Chapter 3 Wizards 6 Use the read-only summary table to check whether what you have configured is correct. Click Finish to complete and save the wizard setup. Note: No wireless LAN settings display if you chose not to configure wireless LAN settings. Figure 23 Internet Access and WLAN Wizard Setup Complete 7 Launch your web browser and navigate to www.zyxel.com. Internet access is just the beginning. Refer to the rest of this guide for more detailed information on the complete range of ZyXEL Device features. If you cannot access the Internet, open the web configurator again to confirm that the Internet settings you configured in the wizard setup are correct. 3.4 VoIP Setup Wizard Use this wizard to set up your VoIP account(s). Leave the default settings in fields if your VoIP service provider (the company that lets you make phone calls over the Internet) did not provide any information. See Chapter 10 on page 181 and Chapter 11 on page 217 for more information. Note: You must have a SIP account before you can use this wizard. 54 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 3.4.1 SIP Settings Figure 24 VoIP Setup Wizard > SIP Settings Chapter 3 Wizards The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 11 VoIP Setup Wizard > SIP Settings LABEL SIP1 (- SIP10) Settings SIP Number DESCRIPTION Use this screen to configure SIP settings for up to 10 SIP accounts. Enter your SIP number. In the full SIP URI (like 1234@VoIP-

provider.com), this is the part before the @ symbol. You can use up to 127 printable ASCII characters. Enter the IP address or domain name of the SIP server provided by your VoIP service provider. You can use up to 95 printable ASCII characters. It does not matter whether the SIP server is a proxy, redirect or register server. Enter the SIP service domain name. In the full SIP URI (like 1234@VoIP-provider.com), this is the part after the @ symbol. You can use up to 127 printable ASCII Extended set characters. Enter the user name for registering this SIP account, exactly as it was given to you. You can use up to 95 printable ASCII characters. Enter the user name for registering this SIP account, exactly as it was given to you. You can use up to 95 printable ASCII Extended set characters. Select this if you want to set up additional SIP accounts. Click this to go to the previous screen. SIP Server Address SIP Service Domain Authentication User Name Password Check here to set up SIP 2 settings

< Back P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 55 Chapter 3 Wizards Table 11 VoIP Setup Wizard > SIP Settings LABEL Apply Exit DESCRIPTION Click this to register your SIP account(s). Click this to close this screen and return to the main screen. 3.4.2 Registration Complete This screen depends on whether or not the ZyXEL Device successfully registered your SIP account(s). Figure 25 VoIP Setup Wizard > Registration Complete (Success) The following table describes the labels in this screen. DESCRIPTION Click this to open the main wizard screen. See Section 3.2 on page 41. Table 12 VoIP Setup Wizard > Registration Complete (Success) LABEL Return to Wizard Main Page Go to Advanced Setup page Finish Click this to close this screen and return to the main screen. Click this to close this screen and return to the main screen. 56 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide Chapter 3 Wizards If the ZyXEL Device cannot register your SIP account(s), see the Quick Start Guide for troubleshooting suggestions. Figure 26 VoIP Setup Wizard > Registration Complete (Fail) The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 13 VoIP Setup Wizard > Registration Complete (Fail) LABEL

< Back Register Again Click this if you want the ZyXEL Device to try to register your SIP DESCRIPTION Click this to go to the previous screen. Exit account(s) again. Click this to close this screen and return to the main screen. The ZyXEL Device saves the information you provided. P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 57 Chapter 3 Wizards 58 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide CHAPTER 4 Tutorial 4.1 Overview This chapter describes:

how to set up a wireless network. how to use NAT with multiple public IP addresses. how to use NAT with multiple game players. how to make a VoIP call. 4.2 How to Set up a Wireless Network This section gives you examples of how to set up an access point and wireless client for wireless communication using the following parameters. The wireless clients can access the Internet through the ZyXEL Device wirelessly. 4.2.1 Example Parameters SSID Security SSID_Example3 WPA-PSK 802.11 mode

(Pre-Shared Key: ThisismyWPA-PSKpre-sharedkey) Mixed (IEEE 802.11b/g) An access point (AP) or wireless router is referred to as the AP and a computer with a wireless network card or USB adapter is referred to as the wireless client here. The M-302 utility screens are used here as an example. The screens may vary slightly for different models. P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 59 Chapter 4 Tutorial 4.2.2 Configuring the AP Follow the steps below to configure the wireless settings on your AP. 1 Open the Network > Wireless LAN > AP screen in the APs web configurator. Figure 27 AP: Wireless LAN > AP 2 Make sure Active Wireless LAN is selected. 3 Enter SSID_Example3 as the SSID and select a channel which is not used by another AP. 4 Set security mode to WPA-PSK and enter ThisismyWPA-PSKpre-sharedkey in the Pre-Shared Key field. Click Apply. 60 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 5 Click the Advanced Setup button and select Mixed in the 802.11 Mode field. Click Apply. Figure 28 AP: Wireless LAN > AP > Advanced Setup Chapter 4 Tutorial 6 Open the Status screen. Verify your wireless and wireless security settings under Device Information and check if the WLAN connection is up under Interface Status. Figure 29 AP: Status P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 61 Chapter 4 Tutorial 7 Click the WLAN Status hyperlink in the APs Status screen. You can see if any wireless client has connected to the AP. Figure 30 AP: Status: WLAN Station Status 4.2.3 Configuring the Wireless Client This section describes how to connect the wireless client to a network. 4.2.3.1 Connecting to a Wireless LAN The following sections show you how to join a wireless network using the ZyXEL utility, as in the following diagram. The wireless client is labeled C and the access point is labeled AP. Internet C AP There are three ways to connect the client to an access point. Configure nothing and leave the wireless client to automatically scan for and connect to any available network that has no wireless security configured. Manually connect to a network. Configure a profile to have the wireless client automatically connect to a specific network or peer computer. This example illustrates how to manually connect your wireless client to an access point (AP) which is configured for WPA-PSK security and connected to the Internet. Before you connect to the access point, you must know its Service Set IDentity (SSID) and WPA-PSK pre-shared key. In this example, the SSID is SSID_Example3 and the pre-shared key is ThisismyWPA-PSKpre-sharedkey. After you install the ZyXEL utility and then insert the wireless client, follow the steps below to connect to a network using the Site Survey screen. 62 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 1 Open the ZyXEL utility and click the Site Survey tab to open the screen shown next. Figure 31 ZyXEL Utility: Site Survey Chapter 4 Tutorial 2 The wireless client automatically searches for available wireless networks. Click Scan if you want to search again. If no entry displays in the Available Network List, that means there is no wireless network available within range. Make sure the AP or peer computer is turned on or move the wireless client closer to the AP or peer computer. 3 When you try to connect to an AP with security configured, a window will pop up prompting you to specify the security settings. Enter the pre-shared key and leave the encryption type at the default setting. Use the Next button to move on to the next screen. You can use the Back button at any time to return to the previous screen, or the Exit button to return to the Site Survey screen. Figure 32 ZyXEL Utility: Security Settings P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 63 Chapter 4 Tutorial 4 5 The Confirm Save window appears. Check your settings and click Save to continue. Figure 33 ZyXEL Utility: Confirm Save The ZyXEL utility returns to the Link Info screen while it connects to the wireless network using your settings. When the wireless link is established, the ZyXEL utility icon in the system tray turns green and the Link Info screen displays details of the active connection. Check the network information in the Link Info screen to verify that you have successfully connected to the selected network. If the wireless client is not connected to a network, the fields in this screen remain blank. Figure 34 ZyXEL Utility: Link Info 6 Open your Internet browser and enter http://www.zyxel.com or the URL of any other web site in the address bar. If you are able to access the web site, your wireless connection is successfully configured. If you cannot access the web site, try changing the encryption type in the Security Settings screen, check the Troubleshooting section of this User's Guide or contact your network administrator. 64 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide Chapter 4 Tutorial 4.2.3.2 Creating and Using a Profile A profile lets you easily connect to the same wireless network again later. You can also configure different profiles for different networks, for example if you connect a notebook computer to wireless networks at home and at work. This example illustrates how to set up a profile and connect the wireless client to an AP configured for WPA-PSK security. In this example, the SSID is SSID_Example3, the profile name is PN_Example3 and the pre-shared key is ThisismyWPA-PSKpre-sharedkey. You have chosen the profile name PN_Example3. 1 Open the ZyXEL utility and click the Profile tab to open the screen shown next. Click Add to configure a new profile. Figure 35 ZyXEL Utility: Profile 2 The Add New Profile screen appears. The wireless client automatically searches for available wireless networks, and displays them in the Scan Info box. Click Scan if you want to search again. You can also configure your profile for a wireless network that is not in the list. Figure 36 ZyXEL Utility: Add New Profile 3 Give the profile a descriptive name (of up to 32 printable ASCII characters). Select Infrastructure and either manually enter or select the AP's SSID in the Scan Info table and click Select. P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 65 Chapter 4 Tutorial 4 Choose the same encryption method as the AP to which you want to connect (In this example, WPA-PSK). Figure 37 ZyXEL Utility: Profile Security 5 This screen varies depending on the encryption method you selected in the previous screen. Enter the pre-shared key and leave the encryption type at the default setting. Figure 38 ZyXEL Utility: Profile Encryption 6 In the next screen, leave both boxes selected. Figure 39 Profile: Wireless Protocol Settings. 66 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 7 Verify the profile settings in the read-only screen. Click Save to save and go to the next screen. Figure 40 Profile: Confirm Save Chapter 4 Tutorial 8 Click Activate Now to use the new profile immediately. Otherwise, click the Activate Later button. If you clicked Activate Later, you can select the profile from the list in the Profile screen and click Connect to activate it. Note: Only one profile can be activated and used at any given time. Figure 41 Profile: Activate 9 When you activate the new profile, the ZyXEL utility returns to the Link Info screen while it connects to the AP using your settings. When the wireless link is established, the ZyXEL utility icon in the system tray turns green and the Link Info screen displays details of the active connection. 10 Open your Internet browser, enter http://www.zyxel.com or the URL of any other web site in the address bar and press ENTER. If you are able to access the web site, your new profile is successfully configured. 11 If you cannot access the Internet go back to the Profile screen, select the profile you are using and click Edit. Check the details you entered previously. Also, refer to the Troubleshooting section of this User's Guide or contact your network administrator if necessary. P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 67 Chapter 4 Tutorial 4.3 Using NAT with Multiple Public IP Addresses This chapter shows you examples of how to set up your ZyXEL Device if you have more than one fixed (static) IP address from your ISP. 4.3.1 Example Parameters and Scenario The following table shows the public IP addresses from your ISP and your ZyXEL Devices LAN IP address. Public IP Addresses ZyXEL Devices LAN IP Address 1.2.3.4 to 1.2.3.7 192.168.1.1 The following figure shows the network you want to set up in this example. Assign the first public address (1.2.3.4) to the ZyXEL Devices WAN port. Map the second and third public IP addresses (1.2.3.5 and 1.2.3.6) to the web and mail servers (192.168.1.12 and 192.168.1.13) respectively for traffic in both directions. Map the first public address (1.2.3.4) to outgoing traffic from other local computers. Map the first public address (1.2.3.4) to incoming traffic from the WAN. Forward FTP traffic using port 21 from the WAN to a specific local computer

(192.168.1.39). The last public IP address (1.2.3.7) is not mapped to any device and is reserved for future use. Figure 42 Tutorial Example: Using NAT with Static Public IP Addresses WAN LAN FTP 192.168.1.39 Mapping rules:

192.168.1.12 <---> 1.2.3.5 (1-1) 192.168.1.13 <---> 1.2.3.6 (1-1) Other outgoing LAN traffic ---> 1.2.3.4 (M-1) Incoming traffic <--- 1.2.3.4 (Server) Internet FTP 1.2.3.4 1.2.3.5 1.2.3.6 1.2.3.7 192.168.1.39 192.168.1.1 Web 192.168.1.12 Mail 192.168.1.13 To set up this network, we are going to:

68 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide Chapter 4 Tutorial 1 Configure the WAN connection to use the first public IP address (1.2.3.4). 2 Configure NAT address mapping for other public IP addresses (1.2.3.5 and 1.2.3.6). 3 Configure NAT port forwarding to forward FTP traffic from the WAN to a specific computer on your local network. 4.3.2 Configuring the WAN Connection with a Static IP Address The following table shows the information your ISP gave you for Internet connection. Encapsulation VPI/VCI Public IP Addresses Gateway IP Address Subnet Mask User Name Password DNS Server PPPoE 8/33 1.2.3.4 1.2.3.5 1.2.3.6 1.2.3.7 1.2.3.89 255.255.255.0 exampleuser abcd1234 1.2.1.1 1.2.1.2 Follow the steps below to configure your ZyXEL Device for Internet access using PPPoE in this example. Figure 43 Tutorial Example: WAN Connection with a Static Public IP Address LAN WAN 192.168.1.1 1.2.3.4 Internet P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 69 Chapter 4 Tutorial 1 Click Network > WAN. 2 Make sure the DSL/WAN switch (on the back of the ZyXEL Device) is pushed to the DSL side and the WAN mode is ADSL WAN. 3 Select Routing in the Mode field and select PPPoE from the Encapsulation drop-down list box. 4 Enter the information (such as the user name, password and VPI/VCI value) provided by your ISP. If your ISP didnt give you the service name, leave the field blank. 5 In the IP Address section, select Static IP Address and enter the first fixed public IP address (1.2.3.4 in this example). 6 Configure the IP address of the DNS server the ZyXEL Device can query to resolve domain names. Select UserDefined and enter the first and second DNS servers IP addresses given by your ISP. 70 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 7 Click Apply to save your changes. Figure 44 Tutorial Example: WAN Screen Chapter 4 Tutorial P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 71 Chapter 4 Tutorial 8 Go to the Status screen to check your WAN connection status. Make sure the status is not down. Figure 45 Tutorial Example: Status 4.3.3 Public IP Address Mapping To have the local computers and servers use specific WAN IP addresses, you need to map static public IP addresses to them. Note: The one-to-one NAT address mapping rules are for both incoming and outgoing connections. The ZyXEL Device forwards traffic that is initiated from either the LAN or the WAN to the destination IP address. Note: The many-to-one or many-to-many NAT address mapping rules are for outgoing connections only. That means only traffic initiated from the LAN or returned packets are allowed to go through the ZyXEL Device. In this example, you create two one-to-one rules to map the internal web server

(192.168.1.12) and mail server (192.168.1.13) to different static public IP addresses. The many-to-one rule maps a public IP address (1.2.3.4, that is, the ZyXEL Devices WAN IP address) to outgoing LAN traffic. It allows other local 72 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide Chapter 4 Tutorial computers on the same subnet as the ZyXEL Devices LAN IP address to use this IP address to access the Internet. Figure 46 Tutorial Example: Mapping Multiple Public IP Addresses to Inside Servers LAN 192.168.1.39 Mapping rules:

192.168.1.12 <---> 1.2.3.5 (1-1) 192.168.1.13 <---> 1.2.3.6 (1-1) Other outgoing LAN traffic ---> 1.2.3.4 (M-1) WAN 192.168.1.39 Web 192.168.1.12 Mail 192.168.1.13 Internet 1.2.3.4 1.2.3.5 1.2.3.6 1.2.3.7 Note: The ZyXEL Device applies the rules in the order that you specify. You should put any one-to-one rules before a many-to-one rule. 1 Click Network > NAT > General. 2 Enable NAT and select Full Feature as you have multiple public IP addresses to map to private IP addresses. Click Apply. Figure 47 Tutorial Example: NAT > NAT Overview 3 Click the Address Mapping tab. P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 73 Chapter 4 Tutorial 4 Click the first rules Edit icon (

) in the Modify column to display the Edit Address Mapping Rule screen. Figure 48 Tutorial Example: NAT > Address Mapping 5 Map a public IP address to the web server. Select the One-to-One type and enter 192.168.1.12 as the local start IP address and 1.2.3.5 as the global start IP address. Click Apply. Figure 49 Tutorial Example: NAT Address Mapping Edit: One-to-One (1) 6 Click the second rules Edit icon (

). 74 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide Chapter 4 Tutorial 7 Map a public IP address to the mail server. Select the One-to-One type and enter 192.168.1.13 as the local start IP address and 1.2.3.6 as the global start IP address. Click Apply. Figure 50 Tutorial Example: NAT Address Mapping Edit: One-to-One (2) 8 Click the third rules Edit icon (

). 9 Map a public IP address to other outgoing LAN traffic. Select the Many-to-One type and enter 192.168.1.1 as the local start IP address, 192.168.1.254 as the local end IP address and 1.2.3.4 as the global start IP address. Click Apply. Figure 51 Tutorial Example: NAT Address Mapping Edit: Many-to-One P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 75 Chapter 4 Tutorial 10 After the configurations, the Address Mapping screen looks as shown. You still have one IP address (1.2.3.7) that can be assigned to another internal server when you expand your network. Figure 52 Tutorial Example: NAT Address Mapping Done Note: To allow traffic from the WAN to be forwarded through the ZyXEL Device, you must also create a firewall rule. Refer to Section 4.3.5 on page 77 for more information. 4.3.4 Forwarding Traffic from the WAN to a Local Computer A server NAT address mapping rule allows computers behind the NAT be accessible to the outside world. To have the ZyXEL Device forward incoming traffic to a specific computer on your local network, you should also create a port forwarding (server mapping) rule. In this example, you want to forward FTP traffic using port 21 to the computer with the IP address of 192.168.1.39. Figure 53 Tutorial Example: Forwarding Incoming FTP Traffic to a Local Computer LAN FTP 192.168.1.39 Mapping rules:

Incoming traffic <--- 1.2.3.4 (Server) WAN 192.168.1.39 Web 192.168.1.12 Mail 192.168.1.13 Internet FTP 1.2.3.4 1.2.3.5 1.2.3.6 1.2.3.7 76 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide Chapter 4 Tutorial 1 Click Network > NAT > Address Mapping. 2 Click the forth rules Edit icon (

) to configure a server rule. Figure 54 Tutorial Example: NAT Address Mapping Edit: Server 3 Select a number and click the Edit Details link to edit a port forwarding set. 4 Select FTP from the Service Name drop-down list box, and enter 192.168.1.39 as the server IP address. Click Add to add the rule to the table. 5 Click Apply to go back to the Edit Address Mapping Rule screen. Click Apply again. Figure 55 Tutorial Example: NAT Port Forwarding 4.3.5 Allow WAN-to-LAN Traffic through the Firewall By default, the ZyXEL Device blocks any traffic initiated from the WAN to the LAN. To have the ZyXEL Device forward traffic initiated from the WAN to a local computer or server on the LAN, you need to configure a firewall rule to allow it. In this example, you create the firewall rules to allow traffic from the WAN to the following servers on the LAN:

Web server P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 77 Chapter 4 Tutorial Mail server FTP server Figure 56 Tutorial Example: Allow WAN-to-LAN Traffic WAN FTP Internet LAN FTP 192.168.1.39 192.168.1.39 Web 192.168.1.12 Mail 192.168.1.13 1 Click Security > Firewall. 2 Make sure the firewall is enabled and traffic from the WAN to the LAN is dropped. Figure 57 Tutorial Example: Firewall > General 3 Go to the Rules screen. 78 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 4 Select the WAN to LAN packet direction and click the Add button to create a new firewall rule. Figure 58 Tutorial Example: Firewall Rules: WAN to LAN Chapter 4 Tutorial 5 Configure a firewall rule to allow traffic from the WAN to the web server. Select Any in the Destination Address List box and click Delete. Select Single Address as the destination address type. Enter 192.168.1.12 and click Add >>. Figure 59 Tutorial Example: Firewall Rule: WAN to LAN Address Edit for Web Server P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 79 Chapter 4 Tutorial 6 Select Any(All) in the Available Services box on the left, and click Add >> to add it to the Selected Services box on the right. Click Apply. Figure 60 Tutorial Example: Firewall Rule: WAN to LAN Service Edit for Web Server 80 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide Chapter 4 Tutorial 7 Click the Add button to configure a firewall rule to allow traffic from the WAN to the mail server. Select Any in the Destination Address List box and click Delete. Select Single Address as the destination address type. Enter 192.168.1.13 and click Add. Figure 61 Tutorial Example: Firewall Rule: WAN to LAN Address Edit for Mail Server P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 81 Chapter 4 Tutorial 8 Select Any(All) in the Available Services box on the left, and click Add >> to add it to the Selected Services box on the right. Click Apply. Figure 62 Tutorial Example: Firewall Rule: WAN to LAN Service Edit for Mail Server 82 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide Chapter 4 Tutorial 9 Click the Add button to configure a firewall rule to allow FTP traffic from the WAN to the FTP server. Select Any in the Destination Address List box and click Delete. Select Single Address as the destination address type. Enter 192.168.1.39 and click Add. Figure 63 Tutorial Example: Firewall Rule: WAN to LAN Address Edit for FTP Server P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 83 Chapter 4 Tutorial 10 Select FTP(TCP:20,21) in the Available Services box on the left, and click Add

>> to add it to the Selected Services box on the right. Click Apply. Figure 64 Tutorial Example: Firewall Rule: WAN to LAN Service Edit for FTP Server 11 When you are done, the Rules screen looks as shown. Figure 65 Tutorial Example: Firewall Rules Done 84 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 4.3.6 Testing the Connections Chapter 4 Tutorial 1 Open the web browser on one of the local computers and enter any web sites URL in the address bar. If you can access the web site, your WAN connection and NAT address mapping are configured successfully. If you cannot access it, make sure you entered the correct information in the WAN and NAT Address Mapping screens. Also check that the Internet account is active and the computers IP address is in the same subnet as the ZyXEL Device. 2 Open your web browser and try accessing the web server (1.2.3.5) from the outside network. If you cannot access the web server, make sure the NAT address mapping rule is configured correctly and there is a firewall rule to allow HTTP traffic from the WAN to the web server. 3 Try accessing the FTP server (1.2.3.4) from the outside network to send or retrieve a file. If you cannot access the FTP server, make sure the NAT port forwarding rule is active and there is a firewall rule to allow FTP traffic from the WAN to FTP server. 4.4 Using NAT with Multiple Game Players If two users (behind the ZyXEL Device) want to connect to the same server to play online games at the same time, but the server does not allow more than one login from the same IP address, you can configure a many-to-many rule instead of a many-to-one rule. In this example, you have four static IP addresses (1.2.3.4 to 1.2.3.7) from your ISP. After you set up your WAN connection (see Section 4.3.2 on page 69), use the NAT > Address Mapping screen to map the third and forth public IP addresses to the mail server (192.168.1.12) and web server (192.168.1.13) respectively. The first and second public IP addresses are mapped to other outgoing LAN traffic. See Section 4.3.3 on page 72 for more information about IP address mapping. P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 85 Chapter 4 Tutorial When you finish configuration, the screen looks as shown. Figure 66 Tutorial Example: NAT Address Mapping Done: Game Playing Note: To allow traffic from the WAN to be forwarded through the ZyXEL Device, you must also create a firewall rule. Refer to Section 4.3.5 on page 77 for more information. 4.5 How to Make a VoIP Call You can register a SIP account with the SIP server and make voice calls over the Internet to another VoIP device. 4.5.1 VoIP Calls With a Registered SIP Account To use a registered SIP account, you should have applied for a SIP account with the VoIP service provider. 4.5.1.1 SIP Account Registration Follow the steps below to register and activate your SIP account. 1 Make sure your ZyXEL Device is connected to the Internet. 2 Open the web configurator. 86 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide Chapter 4 Tutorial 3 Go to the Status screen to check if your SIP account has been registered successfully. If registration failed, check your Internet connection and click Register to register your SIP account again. Figure 67 Tutorial Example: Status 4.5.1.2 Analog Phone Configuration 1 Click VoIP > Phone to open the Analog Phone screen. 2 Select Phone1 to configure the first phone port. 3 Select SIP1 from the SIP Account drop-down list box in the Outgoing Call Use section to have the phone (connected to the first phone port) use the registered SIP1 account to make outgoing calls. 4 Select the SIP1 check box in the Incoming Call apply to section to have the phone (connected to the first phone port) receive phone calls for the SIP1 account. P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 87 Chapter 4 Tutorial 5 Click Apply to save your changes. Figure 68 Tutorial Example: Analog Phone 4.5.1.3 Making a VoIP Call 1 Make sure you connect a telephone to the first phone port on the ZyXEL Device. 2 Make sure the ZyXEL Device is on and connected to the Internet. 3 Pick up the phone receiver. 4 Dial the VoIP phone number you want to call. 88 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide PART II Advanced Status Screens (91) Sharing a USB Printer (389) WAN Setup (101) LAN Setup (117) Wireless LAN (133) Network Address Translation (NAT) (165) Voice (181) Phone Usage (217) Firewall (225) Content Filtering (247) VPN (253) Certificates (287) Static Route (313) 802.1Q/1P (317) Quality of Service (QoS) (329) Dynamic DNS Setup (345) Remote Management Configuration (349) Universal Plug-and-Play (UPnP) (361) File Sharing (375) 89 90 CHAPTER 5 Status Screens Use the Status screens to look at the current status of the device, system resources, interfaces (LAN, WAN and WLAN), and SIP accounts. You can also register and unregister SIP accounts. The Status screen also provides detailed information from Any IP and DHCP and statistics from VoIP, and traffic. 5.1 Status Screen Click Status to open this screen. The screen varies slightly depending on the WAN mode you set using the DSL/WAN switch. Figure 69 Status Screen (ADSL WAN mode) P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 91 Chapter 5 Status Screens Figure 70 Status Screen (Ethernet WAN mode) Each field is described in the following table. DESCRIPTION Table 14 Status Screen LABEL Refresh Interval Enter how often you want the ZyXEL Device to update this screen. Apply Device Information Click this to update this screen immediately. Host Name Model Number MAC Address ZyNOS Firmware Version DSL Firmware Version This field displays the ZyXEL Device system name. It is used for identification. You can change this in the Maintenance > System >

General screens System Name field. This is the model name of your device. This is the MAC (Media Access Control) or Ethernet address unique to your ZyXEL Device. This field displays the current version of the firmware inside the device. It also shows the date the firmware version was created. Click this to go to the screen where you can change it. This field is not available when the WAN mode is Ethernet WAN. This field displays the current version of the devices DSL modem code. 92 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide Chapter 5 Status Screens Table 14 Status Screen LABEL WAN Information DESCRIPTION DSL Mode This field is not available when the WAN mode is Ethernet WAN. IP Address IP Subnet Mask Default Gateway VPI/VCI LAN Information IP Address IP Subnet Mask DHCP WLAN Information SSID Channel Security WPS Status Security Firewall This is the DSL standard that your ZyXEL Device is using. This field displays the current IP address of the ZyXEL Device in the WAN. Click this to go to the screen where you can change it. This field displays the current subnet mask in the WAN. This is the IP address of the default gateway, if applicable. This field is not available when the WAN mode is Ethernet WAN. This is the Virtual Path Identifier and Virtual Channel Identifier that you entered in the wizard or WAN screen. This field displays the current IP address of the ZyXEL Device in the LAN. Click this to go to the screen where you can change it. This field displays the current subnet mask in the LAN. This field displays what DHCP services the ZyXEL Device is providing to the LAN. Choices are:

Server - The ZyXEL Device is a DHCP server in the LAN. It assigns IP addresses to other computers in the LAN. Relay - The ZyXEL Device acts as a surrogate DHCP server and relays DHCP requests and responses between the remote server and the clients. None - The ZyXEL Device is not providing any DHCP services to the LAN. Click this to go to the screen where you can change it. This is the descriptive name used to identify the ZyXEL Device in the wireless LAN. Click this to go to the screen where you can change it. This is the channel number used by the ZyXEL Device now. This displays the type of security mode the ZyXEL Device is using in the wireless LAN. This displays the status of WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup). Click this to go to the screen where you can change it. This displays whether or not wireless LAN is enabled. This displays whether or not the ZyXEL Devices firewall is activated. Click this to go to the screen where you can change it. P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 93 Chapter 5 Status Screens Table 14 Status Screen LABEL Content Filter System Status System Uptime Current Date/Time System Mode CPU Usage Memory Usage Interface Status Interface Status Rate DESCRIPTION This displays whether or not the ZyXEL Devices content filtering is activated. Click this to go to the screen where you can change it. This field displays how long the ZyXEL Device has been running since it last started up. The ZyXEL Device starts up when you plug it in, when you restart it (Maintenance > Tools > Restart), or when you reset it

(see Section 1.5 on page 30). This field displays the current date and time in the ZyXEL Device. You can change this in Maintenance > System > Time Setting. This displays whether the ZyXEL Device is functioning as a router or a bridge. This field displays what percentage of the ZyXEL Devices processing ability is currently used. When this percentage is close to 100%, the ZyXEL Device is running at full load, and the throughput is not going to improve anymore. If you want some applications to have more throughput, you should turn off other applications. This field displays what percentage of the ZyXEL Devices memory is currently used. Usually, this percentage should not increase much. If memory usage does get close to 100%, the ZyXEL Device is probably becoming unstable, and you should restart the device. See Section 27.4 on page 452, or turn off the device (unplug the power) for a few seconds. This column displays each interface the ZyXEL Device has. This field indicates whether or not the ZyXEL Device is using the interface. For the DSL interface, this field displays Down (line is down), Up (line is up or connected) if you're using Ethernet encapsulation and Down

(line is down), Up (line is up or connected), Idle (line (ppp) idle), Dial

(starting to trigger a call) and Drop (dropping a call) if you're using PPPoE encapsulation. For the WAN interface, this field displays Up when the ZyXEL Device is using the interface and Down when the ZyXEL Device is not using the interface. For the LAN interface, this field displays Up when the ZyXEL Device is using the interface and Down when the ZyXEL Device is not using the interface. For the WLAN interface, it displays Active when WLAN is enabled or InActive when WLAN is disabled. For the LAN interface, this displays the port speed and duplex setting. For the WAN interface, this displays the port speed and duplex setting. For the DSL interface, it displays the downstream and upstream transmission rate. For the WLAN interface, it displays the maximum transmission rate when WLAN is enabled or N/A when WLAN is disabled. 94 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide Chapter 5 Status Screens Table 14 Status Screen LABEL Summary DESCRIPTION Client List AnyIP Table WLAN Status VPN Status Packet Statistics VoIP Statistics VoIP Status Account Registration URI Click this link to view current DHCP client information. See Section 7.3 on page 122. Click this link to view a list of IP addresses and MAC addresses of computers, which are not in the same subnet as the ZyXEL Device. See Section 5.2 on page 96. Click this link to display the MAC address(es) of the wireless stations that are currently associating with the ZyXEL Device. See Section 5.3 on page 96. Click this link to view the ZyXEL Devices current VPN connections. See Section 14.7 on page 271. Click this link to view port status and packet specific statistics. See Section 5.4 on page 97. Click this link to view statistics about your VoIP usage. See Section 5.5 on page 99. This column displays each SIP account in the ZyXEL Device. This field displays the current registration status of the SIP account. You have to register SIP accounts with a SIP server to use VoIP. If the SIP account is already registered with the SIP server, Click Unregister to delete the SIP accounts registration in the SIP server. This does not cancel your SIP account, but it deletes the mapping between your SIP identity and your IP address or domain name. The second field displays Registered. If the SIP account is not registered with the SIP server, Click Register to have the ZyXEL Device attempt to register the SIP account with the SIP server. The second field displays the reason the account is not registered. Inactive - The SIP account is not active. You can activate it in VoIP >

SIP > SIP Settings. Register Fail - The last time the ZyXEL Device tried to register the SIP account with the SIP server, the attempt failed. The ZyXEL Device automatically tries to register the SIP account when you turn on the ZyXEL Device or when you activate it. This field displays the account number and service domain of the SIP account. You can change these in VoIP > SIP > SIP Settings. P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 95 Chapter 5 Status Screens 5.2 Any IP Table Click Status > AnyIP Table to access this screen. Use this screen to view the IP address and MAC address of each computer that is using the ZyXEL Device but is in a different subnet than the ZyXEL Device. Figure 71 Any IP Table Each field is described in the following table. Table 15 Any IP Table LABEL

IP Address MAC Address Refresh DESCRIPTION This field is a sequential value. It is not associated with a specific entry. This field displays the IP address of each computer that is using the ZyXEL Device but is in a different subnet than the ZyXEL Device. This field displays the MAC address of the computer that is using the ZyXEL Device but is in a different subnet than the ZyXEL Device. Click this to update this screen. 5.3 WLAN Status Click Status > WLAN Status to access this screen. Use this screen to view the wireless stations that are currently associated to the ZyXEL Device. Figure 72 WLAN Status 96 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide Chapter 5 Status Screens The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 16 WLAN Status LABEL

MAC Address This field displays the MAC (Media Access Control) address of an DESCRIPTION This is the index number of an associated wireless station. Association TIme Refresh associated wireless station. This field displays the time a wireless station first associated with the ZyXEL Device. Click Refresh to reload this screen. 5.4 Packet Statistics Click Status > Packet Statistics to access this screen. Read-only information here includes port status and packet specific statistics. Also provided are "system up time" and "poll interval(s)". The Poll Interval(s) field is configurable. The screen varies slightly depending on the WAN mode you set using the DSL/WAN switch. Figure 73 Packet Statistics P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 97 Chapter 5 Status Screens The following table describes the fields in this screen. DESCRIPTION Table 17 Packet Statistics LABEL System Monitor System up Time Current Date/

Time CPU Usage Memory Usage WAN Port Statistics Link Status WAN IP Address Upstream Speed Downstream Speed Rate This is the elapsed time the system has been up. This field displays your ZyXEL Devices present date and time. This field specifies the percentage of CPU utilization. This field specifies the percentage of memory utilization. This is the status of your WAN link. This is the IP address of the ZyXEL Devices WAN port. This is the upstream speed of your ZyXEL Device DSL interface. This is the downstream speed of your ZyXEL Device DSL interface. This is the port speed and duplex setting of your Ethernet WAN connection. This field displays the remote node index number and link type. Link types are Ethernet and PPPoE. This field displays Down (line is down), Up (line is up or connected) if you're using Ethernet encapsulation and Down (line is down), Up

(line is up or connected), Idle (line (ppp) idle), Dial (starting to trigger a call) and Drop (dropping a call) if you're using PPPoE encapsulation. This field displays the number of packets transmitted on this port. This field displays the number of packets received on this port. This field displays the number of error packets on this port. This field displays the number of bytes transmitted in the last second. This field displays the number of bytes received in the last second. This field displays the elapsed time this port has been up. This field displays Ethernet (LAN ports). This displays the port speed and duplex setting. This field displays the number of packets transmitted on this interface. This field displays the number of packets received on this interface. This is the number of collisions on this interfaces. Type the time interval for the browser to refresh system statistics. Click this to apply the new poll interval you entered in the Poll Interval field above. Click this button to halt the refreshing of the system statistics. Node-Link Status TxPkts RxPkts Errors Tx B/s Rx B/s Up Time LAN Port Statistics Interface Status TxPkts RxPkts Collisions Poll Interval(s) Set Interval Stop 98 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide Chapter 5 Status Screens 5.5 VoIP Statistics Click Status > VoIP Statistics to access this screen. Figure 74 VoIP Statistics Each field is described in the following table. DESCRIPTION Table 18 VoIP Statistics LABEL SIP Status Account Registration This column displays each SIP account in the ZyXEL Device. This field displays the current registration status of the SIP account. You can change this in the Status screen. Registered - The SIP account is registered with a SIP server. Register Fail - The last time the ZyXEL Device tried to register the SIP account with the SIP server, the attempt failed. The ZyXEL Device automatically tries to register the SIP account when you turn on the ZyXEL Device or when you activate it. Inactive - The SIP account is not active. You can activate it in VoIP >

SIP > SIP Settings. This field displays the last time you successfully registered the SIP account. It displays N/A if you never successfully registered this account. This field displays the account number and service domain of the SIP account. You can change these in VoIP > SIP > SIP Settings. This field displays the transport protocol the SIP account uses. SIP accounts always use UDP. This field indicates whether or not there are any messages waiting for the SIP account. This field displays the last number that called the SIP account. It displays N/A if no number has ever dialed the SIP account. Last Registration URI Protocol Message Waiting Last Incoming Number P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 99 Chapter 5 Status Screens Table 18 VoIP Statistics LABEL Last Outgoing Number Call Statistics Phone Hook DESCRIPTION This field displays the last number the SIP account called. It displays N/

A if the SIP account has never dialed a number. This field displays each phone port in the ZyXEL Device. This field indicates whether the phone is on the hook or off the hook. On - The phone is hanging up or already hung up. Status Off - The phone is dialing, calling, or connected. This field displays the current state of the phone call. N/A - There are no current VoIP calls, incoming calls or outgoing calls being made. DIAL - The callees phone is ringing. RING - The phone is ringing for an incoming VoIP call. Process - There is a VoIP call in progress. DISC - The callees line is busy, the callee hung up or your phone was left off the hook. This field displays what voice codec is being used for a current VoIP call through a phone port. This field displays the SIP number of the party that is currently engaged in a VoIP call through a phone port. This field displays how long the current call has lasted. This field displays the number of packets the ZyXEL Device has transmitted in the current call. This field displays the number of packets the ZyXEL Device has received in the current call. This field displays how quickly the ZyXEL Device has transmitted packets in the current call. The rate is the average number of bytes transmitted per second. This field displays how quickly the ZyXEL Device has received packets in the current call. The rate is the average number of bytes transmitted per second. Enter how often you want the ZyXEL Device to update this screen, and click Set Interval. Click this to make the ZyXEL Device update the screen based on the amount of time you specified in Poll Interval. Click this to make the ZyXEL Device stop updating the screen. Codec Peer Number Duration Tx Pkts Rx Pkts Tx B/s Rx B/s Poll Interval(s) Set Interval Stop 100 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide CHAPTER 6 WAN Setup 6.1 Overview This chapter discusses the ZyXEL Devices WAN screens. Use these screens to configure your ZyXEL Device for Internet access. A WAN (Wide Area Network) connection is an outside connection to another network or the Internet. It connects your private networks (such as a LAN (Local Area Network) and other networks, so that a computer in one location can communicate with computers in other locations. Figure 75 LAN and WAN LAN WAN Internet 6.1.1 What You Can Do in the WAN Screens Use the Internet Access Setup screen (Section 6.2 on page 103) to configure the WAN settings on the ZyXEL Device for Internet access. Use the WAN Backup Setup screen (Section 6.3 on page 108) to set up a backup gateway that helps forward traffic to its destination when the default WAN connection is down. 6.1.2 What You Need to Know About WAN Encapsulation Method Encapsulation is used to include data from an upper layer protocol into a lower layer protocol. To set up a WAN connection to the Internet, you need to use the same encapsulation method used by your ISP (Internet Service Provider). If your P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 101 Chapter 6 WAN Setup ISP offers a dial-up Internet connection using PPPoE (PPP over Ethernet) or PPPoA, they should also provide a username and password (and service name) for user authentication. WAN IP Address The WAN IP address is an IP address for the ZyXEL Device, which makes it accessible from an outside network. It is used by the ZyXEL Device to communicate with other devices in other networks. It can be static (fixed) or dynamically assigned by the ISP each time the ZyXEL Device tries to access the Internet. If your ISP assigns you a static WAN IP address, they should also assign you the subnet mask and DNS server IP address(es) (and a gateway IP address if you use the Ethernet or ENET ENCAP encapsulation method). Finding Out More See Section 6.4 on page 109 for advanced technical information on WAN. See Chapter 4 on page 59 for WAN tutorials. 6.1.3 Before You Begin You need to know your Internet access settings such as encapsulation and WAN IP address. Get this information from your ISP. 102 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide Chapter 6 WAN Setup 6.2 The Internet Access Setup Screen Use this screen to change your ZyXEL Devices WAN settings. Click Network >

WAN > Internet Access Setup. The screen differs by the WAN mode and encapsulation you select. Figure 76 Network > WAN > Internet Access Setup (PPPoE) P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 103 Chapter 6 WAN Setup The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 19 Network > WAN > Internet Access Setup LABEL WAN Mode DESCRIPTION Set the WAN mode to DSL WAN or Ethernet WAN using the DSL/

WAN switch on the back of the ZyXEL Device. When you set the DSL/WAN switch to the DSL side, the ZyXEL Device restarts automatically and this shows DSL WAN. The WAN port will be disabled automatically. When you set the DSL/WAN switch to the WAN side, the ZyXEL Device restarts automatically and this shows Ethernet WAN. The DSL port will be disabled automatically. This allows the ZyXEL Device to work as an Ethernet gateway, instead of a DSL router. To access the Internet, connect the WAN port to a broadband modem or router. This field is not available if you set the WAN mode to Ethernet WAN. Select Routing (default) from the drop-down list box if your ISP give you one IP address only and you want multiple computers to share an Internet account. Select Bridge when your ISP provides you more than one IP address and you want the connected computers to get individual IP address from ISPs DHCP server directly. If you select Bridge, you cannot use Firewall, DHCP server and NAT on the ZyXEL Device. Select the method of encapsulation used by your ISP from the drop-

down list box. Choices vary depending on the mode you select in the Mode field. If you set the WAN mode to DSL WAN and select Bridge in the Mode field, select PPPoA or RFC 1483. If you set the WAN mode to DSL WAN and select Routing in the Mode field, select PPPoA, ENET ENCAP or PPPoE. If you set the WAN mode to Ethernet WAN, select ENET ENCAP or PPPoE.

(PPPoE or PPPoA encapsulation only) Enter the user name exactly as your ISP assigned. If assigned a name in the form user@domain where domain identifies a service name, then enter both components exactly as given.

(PPPoE or PPPoA encapsulation only) Enter the password associated with the user name above.

(PPPoE only) Type the name of your PPPoE service here. This field is not available if you set the WAN mode to Ethernet WAN. Select the method of multiplexing used by your ISP from the drop-

down list. Choices are VC or LLC. General Mode Encapsulation User Name Password Service Name Multiplexing Virtual Circuit ID These fields are not available if you set the WAN mode to Ethernet WAN. VPI (Virtual Path Identifier) and VCI (Virtual Channel Identifier) define a virtual circuit. Refer to the appendix for more information. The valid range for the VPI is 0 to 255. Enter the VPI assigned to you. VPI 104 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide Chapter 6 WAN Setup Table 19 Network > WAN > Internet Access Setup (continued) LABEL VCI DESCRIPTION The valid range for the VCI is 32 to 65535 (0 to 31 is reserved for local management of ATM traffic). Enter the VCI assigned to you. IP Address IP Address Subnet Mask Gateway IP address DNS Server First DNS Server Second DNS Server Third DNS Server Connection This option is available if you set the WAN mode to Ethernet WAN or select Routing in the Mode field. A static IP address is a fixed IP that your ISP gives you. A dynamic IP address is not fixed; the ISP assigns you a different one each time you connect to the Internet. Select Obtain an IP Address Automatically if you have a dynamic IP address; otherwise select Static IP Address and type your ISP assigned IP address in the IP Address field below. Enter a subnet mask in dotted decimal notation when you select DHCP in the Encapsulation field. You must specify a gateway IP address (supplied by your ISP) when you select DHCP in the Encapsulation field. Select Obtained From ISP if your ISP dynamically assigns DNS server information (and the ZyXEL Device's WAN IP address) and you select Obtain an IP Address Automatically. Select UserDefined if you have the IP address of a DNS server. Enter the DNS server's IP address in the field to the right. If you chose UserDefined, but leave the IP address set to 0.0.0.0, UserDefined changes to None after you click Apply. If you set a second choice to User-Defined, and enter the same IP address, the second UserDefined changes to None after you click Apply. Select None if you do not want to configure DNS servers. You must have another DNS server on your LAN, or else the computers must have their DNS server addresses manually configured. If you do not configure a DNS server, you must know the IP address of a computer in order to access it.

(PPPoE encapsulation only) Nailed-Up Connection Connect on Demand Select Nailed-Up Connection when you want your connection up all the time. The ZyXEL Device will try to bring up the connection automatically if it is disconnected. Select Connect on Demand when you don't want the connection up all the time and specify an idle time-out in the Max Idle Timeout field. Max Idle Timeout Specify an idle time-out in the Max Idle Timeout field when you Apply Cancel Advanced Setup select Connect on Demand. The default setting is 0, which means the Internet session will not timeout. Click Apply to save the changes. Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh. Click this button to display the Advanced WAN Setup screen and edit more details of your WAN setup. P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 105 Chapter 6 WAN Setup 6.2.1 Advanced Internet Access Setup Use this screen to edit your ZyXEL Device's advanced WAN settings. Click the Advanced Setup button in the Internet Access Setup screen. The screen appears as shown. Figure 77 Network > WAN > Internet Access Setup: Advanced Setup The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 20 Network > WAN > Internet Access Setup: Advanced Setup LABEL RIP & Multicast Setup RIP Direction DESCRIPTION This section is not available when you configure the ZyXEL Device to be in bridge mode. RIP (Routing Information Protocol) allows a router to exchange routing information with other routers. Use this field to control how much routing information the ZyXEL Device sends and receives on the subnet. RIP Version Multicast Select the RIP direction from None, Both, In Only and Out Only. This field is not configurable if you select None in the RIP Direction field. Select the RIP version from RIP-1, RIP-2B and RIP-2M. Multicast packets are sent to a group of computers on the LAN and are an alternative to unicast packets (packets sent to one computer) and broadcast packets (packets sent to every computer). IGMP (Internet Group Multicast Protocol) is a network-layer protocol used to establish membership in a multicast group. The ZyXEL Device supports both IGMP version 1 (IGMP-v1) and IGMP-v2. Select None to disable it. 106 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide Chapter 6 WAN Setup Table 20 Network > WAN > Internet Access Setup: Advanced Setup (continued) LABEL ATM QoS ATM QoS Type These fields are not available if you set the WAN mode to Ethernet WAN. DESCRIPTION Select CBR (Continuous Bit Rate) to specify fixed (always-on) bandwidth for voice or data traffic. Select UBR (Unspecified Bit Rate) for applications that are non-time sensitive, such as e-mail. Select VBR-RT

(real-time Variable Bit Rate) type for applications with bursty connections that require closely controlled delay and delay variation. Select VBR-nRT (non real-time Variable Bit Rate) type for connections that do not require closely controlled delay and delay variation. Divide the DSL line rate (bps) by 424 (the size of an ATM cell) to find the Peak Cell Rate (PCR). This is the maximum rate at which the sender can send cells. Type the PCR here. The Sustained Cell Rate (SCR) sets the average cell rate (long-term) that can be transmitted. Type the SCR, which must be less than the PCR. Note that system default is 0 cells/sec. Maximum Burst Size (MBS) refers to the maximum number of cells that can be sent at the peak rate. Type the MBS, which is less than 65535. The Maximum Transmission Unit (MTU) defines the size of the largest packet allowed on an interface or connection. Enter the MTU in this field. Peak Cell Rate Sustain Cell Rate Maximum Burst Size MTU For ENET ENCAP, the MTU value is 1500. For PPPoE, the MTU value is 1492. Back Apply Cancel For PPPoA and RFC 1483, the MTU is 65535. Click Back to return to the previous screen. Click Apply to save the changes. Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh. P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 107 Chapter 6 WAN Setup 6.3 The WAN Backup Setup Screen Use this screen to configure your ZyXEL Devices WAN backup. Click Network >

WAN > WAN Backup Setup. This screen is not available if you set the WAN mode to Ethernet WAN in the Internet Access Setup screen. Figure 78 Network > WAN > WAN Backup Setup The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 21 Network > WAN > WAN Backup LABEL Backup Type DESCRIPTION Select the method that the ZyXEL Device uses to check the DSL connection. Check WAN IP Address1-3 Fail Tolerance Select DSL Link to have the ZyXEL Device check if the connection to the DSLAM is up. Select ICMP to have the ZyXEL Device periodically ping the IP addresses configured in the Check WAN IP Address fields. Configure this field to test your ZyXEL Device's WAN accessibility. Type the IP address of a reliable nearby computer (for example, your ISP's DNS server address). Note: If you activate either traffic redirect or dial backup, you must configure at least one IP address here. When using a WAN backup connection, the ZyXEL Device periodically pings the addresses configured here and uses the other WAN backup connection (if configured) if there is no response. Type the number of times (2 recommended) that your ZyXEL Device may ping the IP addresses configured in the Check WAN IP Address field without getting a response before switching to a WAN backup connection (or a different WAN backup connection). 108 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide Chapter 6 WAN Setup Table 21 Network > WAN > WAN Backup LABEL Recovery Interval DESCRIPTION When the ZyXEL Device is using a lower priority connection (usually a WAN backup connection), it periodically checks whether or not it can use a higher priority connection. Timeout Type the number of seconds (30 recommended) for the ZyXEL Device to wait between checks. Allow more time if your destination IP address handles lots of traffic. Type the number of seconds (3 recommended) for your ZyXEL Device to wait for a ping response from one of the IP addresses in the Check WAN IP Address field before timing out the request. The WAN connection is considered "down" after the ZyXEL Device times out the number of times specified in the Fail Tolerance field. Use a higher value in this field if your network is busy or congested. Traffic Redirect Traffic redirect forwards traffic to a backup gateway when the ZyXEL Active Traffic Redirect Device cannot connect to the Internet. Select this check box to have the ZyXEL Device use traffic redirect if the normal WAN connection goes down. Note: If you activate traffic redirect, you must configure at least one Check WAN IP Address. Metric This field sets this route's priority among the routes the ZyXEL Device uses. The metric represents the "cost of transmission". A router determines the best route for transmission by choosing a path with the lowest

"cost". RIP routing uses hop count as the measurement of cost, with a minimum of "1" for directly connected networks. The number must be between "1" and "15"; a number greater than "15" means the link is down. The smaller the number, the lower the "cost". Type the IP address of your backup gateway in dotted decimal notation. The ZyXEL Device automatically forwards traffic to this IP address if the ZyXEL Device's Internet connection terminates. Click Apply to save the changes. Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh. Backup Gateway Apply Cancel 6.4 WAN Technical Reference This section provides some technical background information about the topics covered in this chapter. 6.4.1 Encapsulation Be sure to use the encapsulation method required by your ISP. The ZyXEL Device supports the following methods. P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 109 Chapter 6 WAN Setup 6.4.1.1 ENET ENCAP The MAC Encapsulated Routing Link Protocol (ENET ENCAP) is only implemented with the IP network protocol. IP packets are routed between the Ethernet interface and the WAN interface and then formatted so that they can be understood in a bridged environment. For instance, it encapsulates routed Ethernet frames into bridged ATM cells. ENET ENCAP requires that you specify a gateway IP address in the Gateway IP Address field in the wizard or WAN screen. You can get this information from your ISP. 6.4.1.2 PPP over Ethernet The ZyXEL Device supports PPPoE (Point-to-Point Protocol over Ethernet). PPPoE is an IETF Draft standard (RFC 2516) specifying how a personal computer (PC) interacts with a broadband modem (DSL, cable, wireless, and so on.) connection. The PPPoE option is for a dial-up connection using PPPoE. For the service provider, PPPoE offers an access and authentication method that works with existing access control systems (for example RADIUS). One of the benefits of PPPoE is the ability to let you access one of multiple network services, a function known as dynamic service selection. This enables the service provider to easily create and offer new IP services for individuals. Operationally, PPPoE saves significant effort for both you and the ISP or carrier, as it requires no specific configuration of the broadband modem at the customer site. By implementing PPPoE directly on the ZyXEL Device (rather than individual computers), the computers on the LAN do not need PPPoE software installed, since the ZyXEL Device does that part of the task. Furthermore, with NAT, all of the LANs computers will have access. 6.4.1.3 PPPoA PPPoA stands for Point to Point Protocol over ATM Adaptation Layer 5 (AAL5). A PPPoA connection functions like a dial-up Internet connection. The ZyXEL Device encapsulates the PPP session based on RFC1483 and sends it through an ATM PVC

(Permanent Virtual Circuit) to the Internet Service Providers (ISP) DSLAM (Digital Subscriber Line (DSL) Access Multiplexer). Please refer to RFC 2364 for more information on PPPoA. Refer to RFC 1661 for more information on PPP. 6.4.1.4 RFC 1483 RFC 1483 describes two methods for Multiprotocol Encapsulation over ATM Adaptation Layer 5 (AAL5). The first method allows multiplexing of multiple protocols over a single ATM virtual circuit (LLC-based multiplexing) and the second 110 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide method assumes that each protocol is carried over a separate ATM virtual circuit

(VC-based multiplexing). Please refer to RFC 1483 for more detailed information. Chapter 6 WAN Setup 6.4.2 Multiplexing There are two conventions to identify what protocols the virtual circuit (VC) is carrying. Be sure to use the multiplexing method required by your ISP. VC-based Multiplexing In this case, by prior mutual agreement, each protocol is assigned to a specific virtual circuit; for example, VC1 carries IP, and so on. VC-based multiplexing may be dominant in environments where dynamic creation of large numbers of ATM VCs is fast and economical. LLC-based Multiplexing In this case one VC carries multiple protocols with protocol identifying information being contained in each packet header. Despite the extra bandwidth and processing overhead, this method may be advantageous if it is not practical to have a separate VC for each carried protocol, for example, if charging heavily depends on the number of simultaneous VCs. 6.4.3 VPI and VCI Be sure to use the correct Virtual Path Identifier (VPI) and Virtual Channel Identifier (VCI) numbers assigned to you. The valid range for the VPI is 0 to 255 and for the VCI is 32 to 65535 (0 to 31 is reserved for local management of ATM traffic). Please see the appendix for more information. 6.4.4 IP Address Assignment A static IP is a fixed IP that your ISP gives you. A dynamic IP is not fixed; the ISP assigns you a different one each time. The Single User Account feature can be enabled or disabled if you have either a dynamic or static IP. However the encapsulation method assigned influences your choices for IP address and ENET ENCAP gateway. IP Assignment with PPPoA or PPPoE Encapsulation If you have a dynamic IP, then the IP Address and Gateway IP Address fields are not applicable (N/A). If you have a static IP, then you only need to fill in the IP Address field and not the Gateway IP Address field. P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 111 Chapter 6 WAN Setup IP Assignment with RFC 1483 Encapsulation In this case the IP address assignment must be static. IP Assignment with ENET ENCAP Encapsulation In this case you can have either a static or dynamic IP. For a static IP you must fill in all the IP Address and Gateway IP Address fields as supplied by your ISP. However for a dynamic IP, the ZyXEL Device acts as a DHCP client on the WAN port and so the IP Address and Gateway IP Address fields are not applicable

(N/A) as the DHCP server assigns them to the ZyXEL Device. 6.4.5 Nailed-Up Connection (PPP) A nailed-up connection is a dial-up line where the connection is always up regardless of traffic demand. The ZyXEL Device does two things when you specify a nailed-up connection. The first is that idle timeout is disabled. The second is that the ZyXEL Device will try to bring up the connection when turned on and whenever the connection is down. A nailed-up connection can be very expensive for obvious reasons. Do not specify a nailed-up connection unless your telephone company offers flat-

rate service or you need a constant connection and the cost is of no concern. 6.4.6 NAT NAT (Network Address Translation - NAT, RFC 1631) is the translation of the IP address of a host in a packet, for example, the source address of an outgoing packet, used within one network to a different IP address known within another network. 6.4.7 Metric The metric represents the "cost of transmission". A router determines the best route for transmission by choosing a path with the lowest "cost". RIP routing uses hop count as the measurement of cost, with a minimum of "1" for directly connected networks. The number must be between "1" and "15"; a number greater than "15" means the link is down. The smaller the number, the lower the

"cost". The metric sets the priority for the ZyXEL Devices routes to the Internet. For example, if the normal route has a metric of "1" and the traffic-redirect route has a metric of "2", then the normal route acts as the primary default route. If the normal route fails to connect to the Internet, the ZyXEL Device tries the traffic-

redirect route next. 112 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 6.4.8 Traffic Shaping Chapter 6 WAN Setup Traffic Shaping is an agreement between the carrier and the subscriber to regulate the average rate and fluctuations of data transmission over an ATM network. This agreement helps eliminate congestion, which is important for transmission of real time data such as audio and video connections. Peak Cell Rate (PCR) is the maximum rate at which the sender can send cells. This parameter may be lower (but not higher) than the maximum line speed. 1 ATM cell is 53 bytes (424 bits), so a maximum speed of 832Kbps gives a maximum PCR of 1962 cells/sec. This rate is not guaranteed because it is dependent on the line speed. Sustained Cell Rate (SCR) is the mean cell rate of each bursty traffic source. It specifies the maximum average rate at which cells can be sent over the virtual connection. SCR may not be greater than the PCR. Maximum Burst Size (MBS) is the maximum number of cells that can be sent at the PCR. After MBS is reached, cell rates fall below SCR until cell rate averages to the SCR again. At this time, more cells (up to the MBS) can be sent at the PCR again. If the PCR, SCR or MBS is set to the default of "0", the system will assign a maximum value that correlates to your upstream line rate. The following figure illustrates the relationship between PCR, SCR and MBS. Figure 79 Example of Traffic Shaping 6.4.8.1 ATM Traffic Classes These are the basic ATM traffic classes defined by the ATM Forum Traffic Management 4.0 Specification. P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 113 Chapter 6 WAN Setup Constant Bit Rate (CBR) Constant Bit Rate (CBR) provides fixed bandwidth that is always available even if no data is being sent. CBR traffic is generally time-sensitive (doesn't tolerate delay). CBR is used for connections that continuously require a specific amount of bandwidth. A PCR is specified and if traffic exceeds this rate, cells may be dropped. Examples of connections that need CBR would be high-resolution video and voice. Variable Bit Rate (VBR) The Variable Bit Rate (VBR) ATM traffic class is used with bursty connections. Connections that use the Variable Bit Rate (VBR) traffic class can be grouped into real time (VBR-RT) or non-real time (VBR-nRT) connections. The VBR-RT (real-time Variable Bit Rate) type is used with bursty connections that require closely controlled delay and delay variation. It also provides a fixed amount of bandwidth (a PCR is specified) but is only available when data is being sent. An example of an VBR-RT connection would be video conferencing. Video conferencing requires real-time data transfers and the bandwidth requirement varies in proportion to the video image's changing dynamics. The VBR-nRT (non real-time Variable Bit Rate) type is used with bursty connections that do not require closely controlled delay and delay variation. It is commonly used for "bursty" traffic typical on LANs. PCR and MBS define the burst levels, SCR defines the minimum level. An example of an VBR-nRT connection would be non-time sensitive data file transfers. Unspecified Bit Rate (UBR) The Unspecified Bit Rate (UBR) ATM traffic class is for bursty data transfers. However, UBR doesn't guarantee any bandwidth and only delivers traffic when the network has spare bandwidth. An example application is background file transfer. 114 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide Chapter 6 WAN Setup 6.5 Traffic Redirect Traffic redirect forwards traffic to a backup gateway when the ZyXEL Device cannot connect to the Internet. An example is shown in the figure below. Figure 80 Traffic Redirect Example LAN WAN Internet Backup Gateway The following network topology allows you to avoid triangle route security issues when the backup gateway is connected to the LAN. Use IP alias to configure the LAN into two or three logical networks with the ZyXEL Device itself as the gateway for each LAN network. Put the protected LAN in one subnet (Subnet 1 in the following figure) and the backup gateway in another subnet (Subnet 2). Configure filters that allow packets from the protected LAN (Subnet 1) to the backup gateway (Subnet 2). Figure 81 Traffic Redirect LAN Setup Subnet 1 192.168.1.0 - 192.168.1.24 LAN WAN Internet Backup Gateway Subnet 2 192.168.2.0 - 192.168.2.24 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 115 Chapter 6 WAN Setup 116 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide CHAPTER 7 LAN Setup 7.1 Overview A Local Area Network (LAN) is a shared communication system to which many computers are attached. A LAN is usually located in one immediate area such as a building or floor of a building. The LAN screens can help you configure a LAN DHCP server and manage IP addresses. LAN DSL Internet See Section 7.5 on page 125 for more information on LANs. See Appendix C on page 521 for more information on IP addresses and subnetting. 7.1.1 What You Can Do in the LAN Screens Use the LAN IP screen (Section 7.2 on page 118) to set the LAN IP address and subnet mask of your ZyXEL device. You can also edit your ZyXEL Device's RIP, multicast, any IP, DHCP, and Windows Networking settings from this screen. Use the Client List screen (Section 7.3 on page 122) to assign IP addresses on the LAN to specific individual computers based on their MAC Addresses. Use the IP Alias screen (Section 7.4 on page 124) to change your ZyXEL Devices IP alias settings. P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 117 Chapter 7 LAN Setup 7.1.2 What You Need To Know About LAN IP Address Similar to the way houses on a street share a common street name, so too do computers on a LAN share one common network number. This is known as an Internet Protocol address. Subnet Mask The subnet mask specifies the network number portion of an IP address. Your ZyXEL Device will compute the subnet mask automatically based on the IP address that you entered. You don't need to change the subnet mask computed by the ZyXEL Device unless you are instructed to do otherwise. DHCP DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) allows clients to obtain TCP/IP configuration at start-up from a server. This ZyXEL Device has a built-in DHCP server capability that assigns IP addresses and DNS servers to systems that support DHCP client capability. DNS DNS (Domain Name System) maps a domain name to its corresponding IP address and vice versa. The DNS server is extremely important because without it, you must know the IP address of a computer before you can access it. The DNS server addresses you enter when you set up DHCP are passed to the client machines along with the assigned IP address and subnet mask. 7.1.3 Before You Begin Find out the MAC addresses of your network devices if you intend to add them to the DHCP Client List screen. 7.2 The LAN IP Screen Click Network > LAN to open the IP screen. See Section 7.1 on page 117 for background information. Use this screen to set the Local Area Network IP address 118 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide Chapter 7 LAN Setup and subnet mask of your ZyXEL Device and configure the DNS server information that the ZyXEL Device sends to the DHCP client devices on the LAN. Figure 82 Network > LAN > IP The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 22 Network > LAN > IP LABEL LAN TCP/IP IP Address DESCRIPTION IP Subnet Mask DHCP Setup DHCP Enter the LAN IP address you want to assign to your ZyXEL Device in dotted decimal notation, for example, 192.168.1.1 (factory default). Type the subnet mask of your network in dotted decimal notation, for example 255.255.255.0 (factory default). Your ZyXEL Device automatically computes the subnet mask based on the IP address you enter, so do not change this field unless you are instructed to do so. If set to Server, your ZyXEL Device can assign IP addresses, an IP default gateway and DNS servers to LAN computers and other devices that are DHCP clients. If set to None, the DHCP server will be disabled. You need to manually configure the IP addresses of the computers and other devices on your LAN. If set to Relay, the ZyXEL Device acts as a surrogate DHCP server and relays DHCP requests and responses between the remote server and the clients. Enter the IP address of the actual, remote DHCP server in the Remote DHCP Server field in this case. When DHCP is used, the following items need to be set:

P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 119 Chapter 7 LAN Setup Table 22 Network > LAN > IP (continued) LABEL IP Pool Starting Address Pool Size Remote DHCP Server DNS Server DNS Servers Assigned by DHCP Server First DNS Server DESCRIPTION This field specifies the first of the contiguous addresses in the IP address pool. This field specifies the size, or count of the IP address pool. If Relay is selected in the DHCP field above then enter the IP address of the actual remote DHCP server here. The ZyXEL Device passes a DNS (Domain Name System) server IP address to the DHCP clients. Second DNS Server Third DNS Server Apply Cancel Advanced Setup Select Obtained From ISP if your ISP dynamically assigns DNS server information (and the ZyXEL Device's WAN IP address). Select UserDefined if you have the IP address of a DNS server. Enter the DNS server's IP address in the field to the right. If you chose UserDefined, but leave the IP address set to 0.0.0.0, UserDefined changes to None after you click Apply. If you set a second choice to UserDefined, and enter the same IP address, the second User-

Defined changes to None after you click Apply. Select DNS Relay to have the ZyXEL Device act as a DNS proxy only when the ISP uses IPCP DNS server extensions. The ZyXEL Device's LAN IP address displays in the field to the right (read-only). The ZyXEL Device tells the DHCP clients on the LAN that the ZyXEL Device itself is the DNS server. When a computer on the LAN sends a DNS query to the ZyXEL Device, the ZyXEL Device forwards the query to the real DNS server learned through IPCP and relays the response back to the computer. You can only select DNS Relay for one of the three servers;

if you select DNS Relay for a second or third DNS server, that choice changes to None after you click Apply. Select None if you do not want to configure DNS servers. You must have another DHCP sever on your LAN, or else the computers must have their DNS server addresses manually configured. If you do not configure a DNS server, you must know the IP address of a computer in order to access it. Click Apply to save your changes back to the ZyXEL Device. Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh. Click this button to display the Advanced LAN Setup screen and edit more details of your LAN setup. 7.2.1 The Advanced LAN Setup Screen RIP RIP (Routing Information Protocol) allows a router to exchange routing information with other routers. 120 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide Chapter 7 LAN Setup Multicast and IGMP Traditionally, IP packets are transmitted in one of either two ways - Unicast (1 sender - 1 recipient) or Broadcast (1 sender - everybody on the network). Multicast delivers IP packets to a group of hosts on the network - not everybody and not just 1. IGMP (Internet Group Multicast Protocol) is a network-layer protocol used to establish membership in a Multicast group - it is not used to carry user data. There are two versions 1 and 2. IGMP version 2 is an improvement over version 1 but IGMP version 1 is still in wide use. 7.2.2 Configuring the Advanced LAN Setup Screen Use this screen to edit your ZyXEL Device's RIP, multicast, Any IP, and Windows Networking settings. Click the Advanced Setup button in the LAN IP screen. The screen appears as shown. Figure 83 Network > LAN > IP > Advanced Setup The following table describes the labels in this screen. DESCRIPTION Table 23 Network > LAN > IP > Advanced Setup LABEL RIP & Multicast Setup RIP Direction RIP Version Multicast Select the RIP direction from None, Both, In Only and Out Only. Select the RIP version from RIP-1, RIP-2B and RIP-2M. IGMP (Internet Group Multicast Protocol) is a network-layer protocol used to establish membership in a multicast group. The ZyXEL Device supports both IGMP version 1 (IGMP-v1) and IGMP-v2. Select None to disable it. P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 121 Chapter 7 LAN Setup Table 23 Network > LAN > IP > Advanced Setup (continued) LABEL Any IP Setup DESCRIPTION Enable Any IP to allow a computer to access the Internet without changing its network settings (such as IP address and subnet mask), even when the IP addresses of the computer and the ZyXEL Device are not in the same subnet. When you disable Any IP, only computers with dynamic IP addresses or static IP addresses in the same subnet as the ZyXEL Devices LAN IP address can connect to the ZyXEL Device or access the Internet through the ZyXEL Device. NetBIOS (Network Basic Input/Output System) are TCP or UDP packets that enable a computer to connect to and communicate with a LAN. For some dial-up services such as PPPoE or PPTP, NetBIOS packets cause unwanted calls. However it may sometimes be necessary to allow NetBIOS packets to pass through to the WAN in order to find a computer on the WAN. Select this to forward NetBIOS packets from the LAN to the WAN and from the WAN to the LAN. If your firewall is enabled with the default policy set to block WAN to LAN traffic, you also need to enable the default WAN to LAN firewall rule that forwards NetBIOS traffic. Clear this option to block all NetBIOS packets going from the LAN to the WAN and from the WAN to the LAN. Click Back to return to the previous screen. Click Apply to save the changes. Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh. Windows Networking

(NetBIOS over TCP/IP) Allow between LAN and WAN Back Apply Cancel 7.3 The LAN Client List Screen Use this table to assign IP addresses on the LAN to specific individual computers based on their MAC Addresses. Every Ethernet device has a unique MAC (Media Access Control) address. The MAC address is assigned at the factory and consists of six pairs of hexadecimal characters, for example, 00:A0:C5:00:00:02. 122 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide Chapter 7 LAN Setup Click Network > LAN > Client List to open the following screen. Use this screen to change your ZyXEL Devices static DHCP settings. Figure 84 Network > LAN > Client List The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 24 Network > LAN > Client List LABEL IP Address DESCRIPTION Enter the IP address that you want to assign to the computer on your LAN with the MAC address that you will also specify. Enter the MAC address of a computer on your LAN. Click Add to add a static DHCP entry. This is the index number of the static IP table entry (row). This field displays whether the client is connected to the ZyXEL Device. This field displays the computer host name. This field displays the IP address relative to the # field listed above. The MAC (Media Access Control) or Ethernet address on a LAN (Local Area Network) is unique to your computer (six pairs of hexadecimal notation). A network interface card such as an Ethernet adapter has a hardwired address that is assigned at the factory. This address follows an industry standard that ensures no other adapter has a similar address. Select the check box in the heading row to automatically select all check boxes or select the check box(es) in each entry to have the ZyXEL Device always assign the selected entry(ies)s IP address(es) to the corresponding MAC address(es) (and host name(s)). You can select up to 128 entries in this table. Click the modify icon to have the IP address field editable and change it. Click Apply to save your changes back to the ZyXEL Device. Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh. Click Refresh to reload the DHCP table. MAC Address Add

Status Host Name IP Address MAC Address Reserve Modify Apply Cancel Refresh P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 123 Chapter 7 LAN Setup 7.4 The LAN IP Alias Screen IP alias partitions a physical network into different logical networks over the same Ethernet interface. The ZyXEL Device supports three logical LAN interfaces via its single physical Ethernet interface with the ZyXEL Device itself as the gateway for each LAN network. With IP alias, you can also configure firewall rules to control access between the LAN's logical networks (subnets). The following figure shows a LAN divided into subnets A, B, and C. Figure 85 Physical Network & Partitioned Logical Networks Ethernet Interface A: 192.168.1.1 - 192.168.1.24 B: 192.168.2.1 - 192.168.2.24 C: 192.168.3.1 - 192.168.3.24 Note: Make sure that the subnets of the logical networks do not overlap. Click Network > LAN > IP Alias to open the following screen. Use this screen to change your ZyXEL Devices IP alias settings. Figure 86 Network > LAN > IP Alias 124 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide Chapter 7 LAN Setup The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 25 Network > LAN > IP Alias LABEL IP Alias 1, 2 IP Address DESCRIPTION Select this to configure another LAN network for the ZyXEL Device. Enter the IP address of your ZyXEL Device in dotted decimal notation. IP Subnet Mask RIP Direction RIP Version Apply Cancel Alternatively, click the right mouse button to copy and/or paste the IP address. Your ZyXEL Device will automatically calculate the subnet mask based on the IP address that you assign. Unless you are implementing subnetting, use the subnet mask computed by the ZyXEL Device. RIP (Routing Information Protocol, RFC 1058 and RFC 1389) allows a router to exchange routing information with other routers. The RIP Direction field controls the sending and receiving of RIP packets. Select the RIP direction from Both/In Only/Out Only/None. When set to Both or Out Only, the ZyXEL Device will broadcast its routing table periodically. When set to Both or In Only, it will incorporate the RIP information that it receives; when set to None, it will not send any RIP packets and will ignore any RIP packets received. The RIP Version field controls the format and the broadcasting method of the RIP packets that the ZyXEL Device sends (it recognizes both formats when receiving). RIP-1 is universally supported but RIP-2 carries more information. RIP-1 is probably adequate for most networks, unless you have an unusual network topology. Both RIP-2B and RIP-2M sends the routing data in RIP-2 format; the difference being that RIP-2B uses subnet broadcasting while RIP-2M uses multicasting. Multicasting can reduce the load on non-router machines since they generally do not listen to the RIP multicast address and so will not receive the RIP packets. However, if one router uses multicasting, then all routers on your network must use multicasting, also. By default, RIP direction is set to Both and the Version set to RIP-1. Click Apply to save your changes back to the ZyXEL Device. Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh. 7.5 LAN Technical Reference This section provides some technical background information about the topics covered in this chapter. P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 125 Chapter 7 LAN Setup 7.5.1 LANs, WANs and the ZyXEL Device The actual physical connection determines whether the ZyXEL Device ports are LAN or WAN ports. There are two separate IP networks, one inside the LAN network and the other outside the WAN network as shown next. Figure 87 LAN and WAN IP Addresses LAN WAN Internet 7.5.2 DHCP Setup DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol, RFC 2131 and RFC 2132) allows individual clients to obtain TCP/IP configuration at start-up from a server. You can configure the ZyXEL Device as a DHCP server or disable it. When configured as a server, the ZyXEL Device provides the TCP/IP configuration for the clients. If you turn DHCP service off, you must have another DHCP server on your LAN, or else the computer must be manually configured. IP Pool The ZyXEL Device is pre-configured with a pool of IP addresses for the DHCP clients (DHCP Pool). See the product specifications in the appendices. Do not assign static IP addresses from the DHCP pool to your LAN computers. 7.5.3 DNS Server Addresses DNS (Domain Name System) maps a domain name to its corresponding IP address and vice versa. The DNS server is extremely important because without it, you must know the IP address of a computer before you can access it. The DNS server addresses you enter when you set up DHCP are passed to the client machines along with the assigned IP address and subnet mask. There are two ways that an ISP disseminates the DNS server addresses. 126 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide Chapter 7 LAN Setup The ISP tells you the DNS server addresses, usually in the form of an information sheet, when you sign up. If your ISP gives you DNS server addresses, enter them in the DNS Server fields in the DHCP Setup screen. Some ISPs choose to disseminate the DNS server addresses using the DNS server extensions of IPCP (IP Control Protocol) after the connection is up. If your ISP did not give you explicit DNS servers, chances are the DNS servers are conveyed through IPCP negotiation. The ZyXEL Device supports the IPCP DNS server extensions through the DNS proxy feature. If the DNS Server fields in the DHCP Setup screen are set to DNS Relay, the ZyXEL Device tells the DHCP clients that it itself is the DNS server. When a computer sends a DNS query to the ZyXEL Device, the ZyXEL Device acts as a DNS proxy and forwards the query to the real DNS server learned through IPCP and relays the response back to the computer. Please note that DNS proxy works only when the ISP uses the IPCP DNS server extensions. It does not mean you can leave the DNS servers out of the DHCP setup under all circumstances. If your ISP gives you explicit DNS servers, make sure that you enter their IP addresses in the DHCP Setup screen. 7.5.4 TCP/IP The ZyXEL Device has built-in DHCP server capability that assigns IP addresses and DNS servers to systems on the LAN that support DHCP client capability. IP Address and Subnet Mask Similar to the way houses on a street share a common street name, so too do computers on a LAN share one common network number. Where you obtain your network number depends on your particular situation. If the ISP or your network administrator assigns you a block of registered IP addresses, follow their instructions in selecting the IP addresses and the subnet mask. If the ISP did not explicitly give you an IP network number, then most likely you have a single user account and the ISP will assign you a dynamic IP address when the connection is established. If this is the case, it is recommended that you select a network number from 192.168.0.0 to 192.168.255.0 and you must enable the Network Address Translation (NAT) feature of the ZyXEL Device. The Internet Assigned Number Authority (IANA) reserved this block of addresses specifically for private use; please do not use any other number unless you are told otherwise. Let's say you select 192.168.1.0 as the network number; which covers 254 individual addresses, from 192.168.1.1 to 192.168.1.254 (zero and 255 are reserved). In other words, the first three numbers specify the network number while the last number identifies an individual computer on that network. P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 127 Chapter 7 LAN Setup Once you have decided on the network number, pick an IP address that is easy to remember, for instance, 192.168.1.1, for your ZyXEL Device, but make sure that no other device on your network is using that IP address. The subnet mask specifies the network number portion of an IP address. Your ZyXEL Device will compute the subnet mask automatically based on the IP address that you entered. You don't need to change the subnet mask computed by the ZyXEL Device unless you are instructed to do otherwise. Private IP Addresses Every machine on the Internet must have a unique address. If your networks are isolated from the Internet, for example, only between your two branch offices, you can assign any IP addresses to the hosts without problems. However, the Internet Assigned Numbers Authority (IANA) has reserved the following three blocks of IP addresses specifically for private networks:

10.0.0.0 10.255.255.255 172.16.0.0 172.31.255.255 192.168.0.0 192.168.255.255 You can obtain your IP address from the IANA, from an ISP or it can be assigned from a private network. If you belong to a small organization and your Internet access is through an ISP, the ISP can provide you with the Internet addresses for your local networks. On the other hand, if you are part of a much larger organization, you should consult your network administrator for the appropriate IP addresses. Note: Regardless of your particular situation, do not create an arbitrary IP address;

always follow the guidelines above. For more information on address assignment, please refer to RFC 1597, Address Allocation for Private Internets and RFC 1466, Guidelines for Management of IP Address Space. 7.5.5 RIP Setup RIP (Routing Information Protocol) allows a router to exchange routing information with other routers. The RIP Direction field controls the sending and receiving of RIP packets. When set to:

Both - the ZyXEL Device will broadcast its routing table periodically and incorporate the RIP information that it receives. In Only - the ZyXEL Device will not send any RIP packets but will accept all RIP packets received. Out Only - the ZyXEL Device will send out RIP packets but will not accept any RIP packets received. 128 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide Chapter 7 LAN Setup None - the ZyXEL Device will not send any RIP packets and will ignore any RIP packets received. The Version field controls the format and the broadcasting method of the RIP packets that the ZyXEL Device sends (it recognizes both formats when receiving). RIP-1 is universally supported; but RIP-2 carries more information. RIP-1 is probably adequate for most networks, unless you have an unusual network topology. Both RIP-2B and RIP-2M sends the routing data in RIP-2 format; the difference being that RIP-2B uses subnet broadcasting while RIP-2M uses multicasting. 7.5.6 Multicast Traditionally, IP packets are transmitted in one of either two ways - Unicast (1 sender - 1 recipient) or Broadcast (1 sender - everybody on the network). Multicast delivers IP packets to a group of hosts on the network - not everybody and not just 1. IGMP (Internet Group Multicast Protocol) is a network-layer protocol used to establish membership in a Multicast group - it is not used to carry user data. IGMP version 2 (RFC 2236) is an improvement over version 1 (RFC 1112) but IGMP version 1 is still in wide use. If you would like to read more detailed information about interoperability between IGMP version 2 and version 1, please see sections 4 and 5 of RFC 2236. The class D IP address is used to identify host groups and can be in the range 224.0.0.0 to 239.255.255.255. The address 224.0.0.0 is not assigned to any group and is used by IP multicast computers. The address 224.0.0.1 is used for query messages and is assigned to the permanent group of all IP hosts (including gateways). All hosts must join the 224.0.0.1 group in order to participate in IGMP. The address 224.0.0.2 is assigned to the multicast routers group. The ZyXEL Device supports both IGMP version 1 (IGMP-v1) and IGMP version 2

(IGMP-v2). At start up, the ZyXEL Device queries all directly connected networks to gather group membership. After that, the ZyXEL Device periodically updates this information. IP multicasting can be enabled/disabled on the ZyXEL Device LAN and/or WAN interfaces in the web configurator (LAN; WAN). Select None to disable IP multicasting on these interfaces. 7.5.7 Any IP Traditionally, you must set the IP addresses and the subnet masks of a computer and the ZyXEL Device to be in the same subnet to allow the computer to access the Internet (through the ZyXEL Device). In cases where your computer is required to use a static IP address in another network, you may need to manually P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 129 Chapter 7 LAN Setup configure the network settings of the computer every time you want to access the Internet via the ZyXEL Device. With the Any IP feature and NAT enabled, the ZyXEL Device allows a computer to access the Internet without changing the network settings (such as IP address and subnet mask) of the computer, when the IP addresses of the computer and the ZyXEL Device are not in the same subnet. Whether a computer is set to use a dynamic or static (fixed) IP address, you can simply connect the computer to the ZyXEL Device and access the Internet. The following figure depicts a scenario where a computer is set to use a static private IP address in the corporate environment. In a residential house where a ZyXEL Device is installed, you can still use the computer to access the Internet without changing the network settings, even when the IP addresses of the computer and the ZyXEL Device are not in the same subnet. Figure 88 Any IP Example 192.168.10.1 Internet Internet 192.168.10.1 192.168.1.1 The Any IP feature does not apply to a computer using either a dynamic IP address or a static IP address that is in the same subnet as the ZyXEL Devices IP address. Note: You must enable NAT/SUA to use the Any IP feature on the ZyXEL Device. How Any IP Works Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) is a protocol for mapping an Internet Protocol address (IP address) to a physical machine address, also known as a Media Access Control or MAC address, on the local area network. IP routing table is defined on IP Ethernet devices (the ZyXEL Device) to decide which hop to use, to help forward data along to its specified destination. 130 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide Chapter 7 LAN Setup The following lists out the steps taken, when a computer tries to access the Internet for the first time through the ZyXEL Device. 1 When a computer (which is in a different subnet) first attempts to access the Internet, it sends packets to its default gateway (which is not the ZyXEL Device) by looking at the MAC address in its ARP table. 2 When the computer cannot locate the default gateway, an ARP request is broadcast on the LAN. 3 4 The ZyXEL Device receives the ARP request and replies to the computer with its own MAC address. The computer updates the MAC address for the default gateway to the ARP table. Once the ARP table is updated, the computer is able to access the Internet through the ZyXEL Device. 5 When the ZyXEL Device receives packets from the computer, it creates an entry in the IP routing table so it can properly forward packets intended for the computer. After all the routing information is updated, the computer can access the ZyXEL Device and the Internet as if it is in the same subnet as the ZyXEL Device. P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 131 Chapter 7 LAN Setup 132 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide CHAPTER 8 Wireless LAN 8.1 Overview The blue circle marks a wireless LAN in the following figure. Wireless clients (A and B) connect to an access point (AP) to access other devices (such as the printer) or the Internet. Your ZyXEL Device works as an AP when you install a compatible WLAN card. Figure 89 Example of a Wireless Network Ethernet AP A B 8.1.1 What You Can Do in the Wireless LAN Screens This chapter describes the ZyXEL Devices Network > Wireless LAN screens. Use these screens to set up your ZyXEL Devices wireless connection. P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 133 Chapter 8 Wireless LAN Use the AP screen (see Section 8.2 on page 136) to turn the wireless connection on or off, set up wireless security, configure the MAC filter, set up Quality of Service and make other basic configuration changes. Use the Wireless LAN: Advanced Setup screen (see Section 8.2.5 on page 144) to change the wireless mode, and make other advanced wireless configuration changes. Use the More AP screen (see Section 8.3 on page 145) to set up multiple wireless networks on your ZyXEL Device. Use the MAC Filter screen (see Section 8.4 on page 147) to configure a MAC

(Media Access Control) address filter to restrict access to the wireless network. Use the WPS screen and the WPS Station screen to use WiFi Protected Setup

(WPS). WPS lets you set up a secure network quickly, when connecting to other WPS-enabled devices. Use the WPS screen (see Section 8.5 on page 148) to enable or disable WPS, generate a security PIN (Personal Identification Number) and see information about the ZyXEL Devices WPS status. Use the WPS Station (see Section 8.6 on page 149) screen to set up WPS by pressing a button or using a PIN. Use the WDS screen (see Section 8.7 on page 150) to set up a Wireless Distribution System, in which the ZyXEL Device acts as a bridge with other ZyXEL access points. Use the Scheduling screen (see Section 8.8 on page 152) to schedule a time period for the wireless LAN to operate each day. You dont necessarily need to use all these screens to set up your wireless connection. For example, you may just want to set up a network name, a wireless radio channel and some security in the AP screen. 8.1.2 What You Need to Know About Wireless Wireless Basics Every device in the same wireless network must use the same Service Set IDentity (SSID). The SSID is the name of the wireless network. If two wireless networks overlap, they should use different channels. Like radio stations or television channels, each wireless network uses a specific channel, or frequency, to send and receive information. Wireless Network Construction Wireless networks consist of wireless clients, access points and bridges. A wireless client is a radio connected to a users computer. 134 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide Chapter 8 Wireless LAN An access point is a radio with a wired connection to a network, which can connect with numerous wireless clients and let them access the network. A bridge is a radio that relays communications between access points and wireless clients, extending a networks range. Traditionally, a wireless network operates in one of two ways. An infrastructure type of network has one or more access points and one or more wireless clients. The wireless clients connect to the access points. An ad-hoc type of network is one in which there is no access point. Wireless clients connect to one another in order to exchange information. Security Security stops unauthorized devices from using the wireless network. It can also protect the information that is sent in the wireless network.Use the strongest security that every wireless client in the wireless network supports. Table 26 Wireless Security Levels SECURITY LEVEL Weakest SECURITY TYPE No Security MAC Address Filtering WEP Encryption IEEE 802.1x EAP with RADIUS Server Authentication WPA-PSK (Wi-Fi Protected Access Pre-Shared Key) WPA (Wi-Fi Protected Access) WPA-PSK2 WPA2 Strongest Note: WPA2 or WPA2-PSK security is recommended. WPA2-PSK and WPA-PSK do not employ user authentication and are known as the personal version of WPA. WEP is better than no security, but it is still possible for unauthorized devices to figure out the original information pretty quickly. MAC Address Filter Every Ethernet device has a unique MAC (Media Access Control) address. The MAC address consists of twelve hexadecimal characters (0-9, and A to F), and it is usually written in the following format: 0A:A0:00:BB:CC:DD. P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 135 Chapter 8 Wireless LAN The MAC address filter controls access to the wireless network. You can use the MAC address of each wireless client to allow or deny access to the wireless network. Finding Out More See Chapter 4 on page 59 for a tutorial showing how to set up your wireless connection in an example scenario. See Section 8.9 on page 153 for advanced technical information on wireless networks. 8.1.3 Before You Start Before you start using these screens, ask yourself the following questions. See Section 8.1.2 on page 134 if some of the terms used here do not make sense to you. What wireless standards do the other wireless devices support (IEEE 802.11g, for example)? What is the most appropriate standard to use?

What security options do the other wireless devices support (WPA-PSK, for example)? What is the best one to use?

Do the other wireless devices support WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup)? If so, you can set up a well-secured network very easily. Even if some of your devices support WPS and some do not, you can use WPS to set up your network and then add the non-WPS devices manually, although this is somewhat more complicated to do. What advanced options do you want to configure, if any? If you want to configure advanced options such as Quality of Service, ensure that you know precisely what you want to do. If you do not want to configure advanced options, leave them alone. 8.2 AP Screen Note: If you are configuring the ZyXEL Device from a computer connected to the wireless LAN and you change the ZyXEL Devices SSID or security settings, you will lose your wireless connection when you press Apply to confirm. You must then change the wireless settings of your computer to match the ZyXEL Devices new settings. 136 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide Click Network > Wireless LAN to open the AP screen. Figure 90 Network > Wireless LAN > AP Chapter 8 Wireless LAN The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 27 Network > Wireless LAN > AP LABEL Active Wireless LAN Network Name (SSID) DESCRIPTION Click the check box to activate wireless LAN. The SSID (Service Set IDentity) identifies the service set with which a wireless device is associated. Wireless devices associating to the access point (AP) must have the same SSID. Enter a descriptive name (up to 32 printable 7-bit ASCII characters) for the wireless LAN. Note: If you are configuring the ZyXEL Device from a computer connected to the wireless LAN and you change the ZyXEL Devices SSID or WEP settings, you will lose your wireless connection when you press Apply to confirm. You must then change the wireless settings of your computer to match the ZyXEL Devices new settings. Select this check box to hide the SSID in the outgoing beacon frame so a station cannot obtain the SSID through scanning using a site survey tool. Select this option and click Apply to have the ZyXEL Device scan for and select a channel which is not used by another device. The ZyXEL Device automatically scans for and selects a channel whenever the device reboots or the wireless setting is changed. Select this option and set the operating frequency/channel depending on your particular region. Select a channel from the drop-down list box. Click this button to have the ZyXEL Device immediately scan for and select a channel which is not used by another device. See the following sections for more details about this field. Static WEP, WPA and WPA2 are available only when WPS is disabled. Click Apply to save your changes back to the ZyXEL Device. Hide SSID Auto-Scan Channel Channel Selection Scan Security Mode Apply P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 137 Chapter 8 Wireless LAN Table 27 Network > Wireless LAN > AP (continued) LABEL Cancel Advanced Setup DESCRIPTION Click Cancel to reload the previous configuration for this screen. Click Advanced Setup to display the Wireless Advanced Setup screen and edit more details of your WLAN setup. 8.2.1 No Security Select No Security to allow wireless devices to communicate with the access points without any data encryption. Note: If you do not enable any wireless security on your ZyXEL Device, your network is accessible to any wireless networking device that is within range. Figure 91 Network > Wireless LAN > AP: No Security 138 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide Chapter 8 Wireless LAN 8.2.2 WEP Encryption In order to configure and enable WEP encryption; click Network > Wireless LAN to display the AP screen. Select Static WEP from the Security Mode list. Figure 92 Network > Wireless LAN > AP: Static WEP Encryption The following table describes the wireless LAN security labels in this screen. Table 28 Network > Wireless LAN > AP: Static WEP Encryption LABEL Security Mode Passphrase DESCRIPTION Choose Static WEP from the drop-down list box. WEP Key Enter a passphrase (up to 32 printable characters) and clicking Generate. The ZyXEL Device automatically generates a WEP key. The WEP key is used to encrypt data. Both the ZyXEL Device and the wireless stations must use the same WEP key for data transmission. If you want to manually set the WEP key, enter any 5 or 13 characters

(ASCII string) or 10 or 26 hexadecimal characters ("0-9", "A-F") for a 64-

bit or 128-bit WEP key respectively. P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 139 Chapter 8 Wireless LAN 8.2.3 WPA(2)-PSK In order to configure and enable WPA(2)-PSK authentication; click Network >

Wireless LAN to display the AP screen. Select WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK from the Security Mode list. Figure 93 Network > Wireless LAN > AP: WPA(2)-PSK The following table describes the wireless LAN security labels in this screen. Table 29 Network > Wireless LAN > AP: WPA(2)-PSK LABEL Security Mode WPA Compatible DESCRIPTION Choose WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK from the drop-down list box. This field is only available for WPA2-PSK. Select this if you want the ZyXEL Device to support WPA-PSK and WPA2-PSK simultaneously. The encryption mechanisms used for WPA(2) and WPA(2)-PSK are the same. The only difference between the two is that WPA(2)-PSK uses a simple common password, instead of user-specific credentials. Pre-Shared Key Type a pre-shared key from 8 to 63 case-sensitive ASCII characters

(including spaces and symbols). 140 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide Chapter 8 Wireless LAN Table 29 Network > Wireless LAN > AP: WPA(2)-PSK LABEL ReAuthentication Timer (in seconds) DESCRIPTION Specify how often wireless stations have to resend usernames and passwords in order to stay connected. Enter a time interval between 10 and 9999 seconds. The default time interval is 1800 seconds (30 minutes). Idle Timeout Group Key Update Timer Note: If wireless station authentication is done using a RADIUS server, the reauthentication timer on the RADIUS server has priority. The ZyXEL Device automatically disconnects a wireless station from the wired network after a period of inactivity. The wireless station needs to enter the username and password again before access to the wired network is allowed. The default time interval is 3600 seconds (or 1 hour). The Group Key Update Timer is the rate at which the AP (if using WPA(2)-PSK key management) or RADIUS server (if using WPAWPA(2) key management) sends a new group key out to all clients. The re-keying process is the WPA(2) equivalent of automatically changing the WEP key for an AP and all stations in a WLAN on a periodic basis. Setting of the Group Key Update Timer is also supported in WPA(2)-PSK mode. The ZyXEL Device default is 1800 seconds (30 minutes). P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 141 Chapter 8 Wireless LAN 8.2.4 WPA(2) Authentication Screen In order to configure and enable WPA authentication; click the Wireless LAN link under Network to display the AP screen. Select WPA or WPA2 from the Security Mode list. Figure 94 Network > Wireless LAN > AP: WPA(2) The following table describes the wireless LAN security labels in this screen. Table 30 Network > Wireless LAN > AP: WPA(2) LABEL Security Mode WPA Compatible DESCRIPTION Choose WPA or WPA2 from the drop-down list box. This field is only available for WPA2. Select this if you want the ZyXEL Device to support WPA and WPA2 simultaneously. 142 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide Chapter 8 Wireless LAN Table 30 Network > Wireless LAN > AP: WPA(2) LABEL ReAuthentication Timer (in seconds) DESCRIPTION Specify how often wireless stations have to resend usernames and passwords in order to stay connected. Enter a time interval between 10 and 9999 seconds. The default time interval is 1800 seconds (30 minutes). Idle Timeout Group Key Update Timer Note: If wireless station authentication is done using a RADIUS server, the reauthentication timer on the RADIUS server has priority. The ZyXEL Device automatically disconnects a wireless station from the wired network after a period of inactivity. The wireless station needs to enter the username and password again before access to the wired network is allowed. The default time interval is 3600 seconds (or 1 hour). The Group Key Update Timer is the rate at which the AP (if using WPA(2)-PSK key management) or RADIUS server (if using WPA(2) key management) sends a new group key out to all clients. The re-

keying process is the WPA(2) equivalent of automatically changing the WEP key for an AP and all stations in a WLAN on a periodic basis. Setting of the Group Key Update Timer is also supported in WPA(2)-PSK mode. The ZyXEL Device default is 1800 seconds (30 minutes). Authentication Server IP Address Port Number Enter the IP address of the external authentication server in dotted decimal notation. Enter the port number of the external authentication server. The default port number is 1812. You need not change this value unless your network administrator instructs you to do so with additional information. Shared Secret Enter a password (up to 31 alphanumeric characters) as the key to be shared between the external authentication server and the ZyXEL Device. The key must be the same on the external authentication server and your ZyXEL Device. The key is not sent over the network. Accounting Server (optional) IP Address Port Number Enter the IP address of the external accounting server in dotted decimal notation. Enter the port number of the external accounting server. The default port number is 1813. You need not change this value unless your network administrator instructs you to do so with additional information. Shared Secret Enter a password (up to 31 alphanumeric characters) as the key to be shared between the external accounting server and the ZyXEL Device. The key must be the same on the external accounting server and your ZyXEL Device. The key is not sent over the network. P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 143 Chapter 8 Wireless LAN 8.2.5 Wireless LAN Advanced Setup To configure advanced wireless settings, click the Advanced Setup button in the AP screen. The screen appears as shown. Figure 95 Network > Wireless LAN > AP > Advanced Setup The following table describes the labels in this screen. DESCRIPTION Table 31 Network > Wireless LAN > AP > Advanced Setup LABEL Wireless Advanced Setup RTS/CTS Threshold Fragmentation Threshold Output Power Level Enter a value between 0 and 2432. It is the maximum data fragment size that can be sent. Enter a value between 256 and 2432. Set the output power of the ZyXEL Device in this field. The higher the number, the greater the output power. If there is a high density of APs in the area, decrease the output power of the ZyXEL Device to reduce interference with other APs. See the product specifications for more information on your ZyXEL Devices output power. Select a preamble type. Choices are Long, Short or Dynamic. The default setting is Long. See the appendix for more information. Select 802.11b Only to allow only IEEE 802.11b compliant WLAN devices to associate with the ZyXEL Device. Select 802.11g Only to allow only IEEE 802.11g compliant WLAN devices to associate with the ZyXEL Device. Select Mixed to allow either IEEE 802.11b or IEEE 802.11g compliant WLAN devices to associate with the ZyXEL Device. The transmission rate of your ZyXEL Device might be reduced. Click this to return to the previous screen without saving changes. Click Apply to save your changes back to the ZyXEL Device. Click Cancel to reload the previous configuration for this screen. Preamble 802.11 Mode Back Apply Cancel 144 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide Chapter 8 Wireless LAN 8.3 More AP Screen This screen allows you to enable and configure multiple BSSs on the ZyXEL Device. Click Network > Wireless LAN > More AP. The following screen displays. Figure 96 Network > Wireless LAN > More AP The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 32 Network > Wireless LAN > More AP LABEL

Active SSID DESCRIPTION This is the index number of each SSID profile. Select the check box to activate an SSID profile. An SSID profile is the set of parameters relating to one of the ZyXEL Devices BSSs. The SSID (Service Set IDentifier) identifies the Service Set with which a wireless device is associated. This field displays the name of the wireless profile on the network. When a wireless client scans for an AP to associate with, this is the name that is broadcast and seen in the wireless client utility. This field indicates the security mode of the SSID profile. Click the Edit icon to configure the SSID profile. Click the Remove icon to delete the SSID profile. Click Apply to save your changes back to the ZyXEL Device. Click Cancel to reload the previous configuration for this screen. Security Modify Apply Cancel P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 145 Chapter 8 Wireless LAN 8.3.1 More AP Edit Use this screen to edit an SSID profile. Click the Edit icon next to an SSID in the More AP screen. The following screen displays. Figure 97 Network > Wireless LAN > More AP > Edit See Appendix E on page 557 for a list of commonly-used services and destination ports. The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 33 Network > Wireless LAN > More AP > Edit LABEL Network Name

(SSID) DESCRIPTION The SSID (Service Set IDentity) identifies the service set with which a wireless device is associated. Enter a descriptive name (up to 32 printable 7-bit ASCII characters) for the wireless LAN. Note: If you are configuring the ZyXEL Device from a computer connected to the wireless LAN and you change the ZyXEL Devices SSID or security settings, you will lose your wireless connection when you press Apply to confirm. You must then change the wireless settings of your computer to match the ZyXEL Devices new settings. Select this check box to hide the SSID in the outgoing beacon frame so a station cannot obtain the SSID through scanning using a site survey tool. See Section 8.2 on page 136 for more details about this field. This shows whether the wireless devices with the MAC addresses listed are allowed or denied to access the ZyXEL Device using this SSID. Click this button to go to the MAC Filter screen to configure MAC filter settings. See Section 8.4 on page 147 for more details. Click this to return to the previous screen without saving changes. Click Apply to save your changes back to the ZyXEL Device. Click Cancel to reload the previous configuration for this screen. Hide SSID Security Mode MAC Filter Edit Back Apply Cancel 146 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide Chapter 8 Wireless LAN 8.4 MAC Filter Use this screen to change your ZyXEL Devices MAC filter settings. Click Network

> Wireless LAN > MAC Filter. The screen appears as shown. Figure 98 Network > Wireless LAN > MAC Filter The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 34 Network > Wireless LAN > MAC Filter LABEL Active MAC Filter Filter Action Define the filter action for the list of MAC addresses in the MAC Address DESCRIPTION Select the check box to enable MAC address filtering. table. Select Deny to block access to the ZyXEL Device, MAC addresses not listed will be allowed to access the ZyXEL Device Select Allow to permit access to the ZyXEL Device, MAC addresses not listed will be denied access to the ZyXEL Device. This is the index number of the MAC address. Set P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 147 Chapter 8 Wireless LAN Table 34 Network > Wireless LAN > MAC Filter LABEL MAC Address DESCRIPTION Enter the MAC addresses of the wireless devices that are allowed or denied access to the ZyXEL Device in these address fields. Enter the MAC addresses in a valid MAC address format, that is, six hexadecimal character pairs, for example, 12:34:56:78:9a:bc. Click Apply to save your changes back to the ZyXEL Device. Click Cancel to reload the previous configuration for this screen. Apply Cancel 8.5 WPS Use this screen to configure WiFi Protected Setup (WPS) on your ZyXEL Device. WPS allows you to quickly set up a wireless network with strong security, without having to configure security settings manually. Set up each WPS connection between two devices. Both devices must support WPS. See Appendix D on page 533 for more information about WPS. Click Network > Wireless LAN >WPS. The following screen displays. Figure 99 Network > Wireless LAN > WPS The following table describes the labels in this screen. DESCRIPTION Table 35 Network > Wireless LAN > WPS LABEL WPS Setup Enable WPS PIN Number Select the check box to activate WPS on the ZyXEL Device. This shows the PIN (Personal Identification Number) of the ZyXEL Device. Enter this PIN in the configuration utility of the device you want to connect to using WPS. The PIN is not necessary when you use WPS push-button method. 148 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide Chapter 8 Wireless LAN Table 35 Network > Wireless LAN > WPS LABEL Generate WPS Status DESCRIPTION Click this button to have the ZyXEL Device create a new PIN. This displays Configured when the ZyXEL Device has connected to a wireless network using WPS or Enable WPS is selected and wireless or wireless security settings have been changed. The current wireless and wireless security settings also appear in the screen. This displays Unconfigured if WPS is disabled and there is no wireless or wireless security changes on the ZyXEL Device or you click Release_Configuration to remove the configured wireless and wireless security settings. This button is available when the WPS status is Configured. Click this button to remove all configured wireless and wireless security settings for WPS connections on the ZyXEL Device. Click Apply to save your changes back to the ZyXEL Device. Click Refresh to reload the previous configuration for this screen. Release_Co nfiguration Apply Refresh 8.6 WPS Station Use this screen to set up a WPS wireless network using either Push Button Configuration (PBC) or PIN Configuration. Click Network > Wireless LAN >WPS Station. The following screen displays. Figure 100 Network > Wireless LAN > WPS Station P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 149 Chapter 8 Wireless LAN The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 36 Network > Wireless LAN > WPS Station LABEL Push Button DESCRIPTION Click this button to add another WPS-enabled wireless device (within wireless range of the ZyXEL Device) to your wireless network. This button may either be a physical button on the outside of device, or a menu button similar to the Push Button on this screen. Note: You must press the other wireless devices WPS button within two minutes of pressing this button. Or input station's PIN number Enter the PIN of the device that you are setting up a WPS connection with and click Start to authenticate and add the wireless device to your wireless network. You can find the PIN either on the outside of the device, or by checking the devices settings. Note: You must also activate WPS on that device within two minutes to have it present its PIN to the ZyXEL Device. 8.7 WDS Screen Use this screen to set up your WDS (Wireless Distribution System) links between the ZyXEL Device and other wireless APs. You need to know the MAC address of the peer device. Once the security settings of peer sides match one another, the connection between devices is made. Note: WDS security is independent of the security settings between the ZyXEL Device and any wireless clients. At the time of writing, WDS is compatible with some ZyXEL Devices only. Not all models support WDS links. Check your other ZyXEL Devices documentation. 150 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide

Click Network > Wireless LAN > WDS. The following screen displays. Figure 101 Network > Wireless LAN > WDS Chapter 8 Wireless LAN The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 37 Network > Wireless LAN > WDS LABEL Enable WDS Security DESCRIPTION Select this option and the type of the key used to encrypt data between APs. All the wireless APs (including the ZyXEL Device) must use the same pre-shared key for data transmission. If you de-select this option, the data sent between APs is not encrypted. Anyone can read it. Select this to use TKIP (Temporal Key Integrity Protocol) encryption. Select this to use AES (Advanced Encryption Standard) encryption. This is the index number of the individual WDS link. Select this to activate the link between the ZyXEL Device and the peer device to which this entry refers. When you do not select the check box this link is down. Type the MAC address of the peer device in a valid MAC address format

(six hexadecimal character pairs, for example 12:34:56:78:9a:bc). Enter a Pre-Shared Key (PSK) from 8 to 63 case-sensitive ASCII characters (including spaces and symbols). Click Apply to save your changes back to the ZyXEL Device. Click Cancel to reload the previous configuration for this screen. TKIP AES

Active Remote Bridge MAC Address PSK Apply Cancel P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 151 Chapter 8 Wireless LAN 8.8 Scheduling Screen Click Network > Wireless LAN > Scheduling to open the Wireless LAN Scheduling screen. Use this screen to configure when the ZyXEL Device enables or disables the wireless LAN. Figure 102 Network > Wireless LAN > Scheduling The following table describes the labels in this screen. DESCRIPTION Select this to activate wireless LAN scheduling on your ZyXEL Device. Table 38 Network > Wireless LAN > Scheduling LABEL Enable Wireless LAN Scheduling WLAN status Day The following times Select On or Off to enable or disable the wireless LAN. Select the day(s) you want to turn the wireless LAN on or off. Specify the time period during which to apply the schedule. For example, if you decide to turn off the wireless LAN everyday, but you set an exception from 12:00 to 1:30. Then the wireless LAN is only available from 12:00 to 1:30 everyday. Click this to save your changes. Click this to restore your previously saved settings. Apply Reset 152 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide Chapter 8 Wireless LAN 8.9 Wireless LAN Technical Reference This section discusses wireless LANs in depth. For more information, see the appendix. 8.9.1 Additional Wireless Terms The following table describes some wireless network terms and acronyms used in the ZyXEL Devices Web Configurator. Table 39 Additional Wireless Terms TERM RTS/CTS Threshold In a wireless network which covers a large area, wireless devices DESCRIPTION are sometimes not aware of each others presence. This may cause them to send information to the AP at the same time and result in information colliding and not getting through. By setting this value lower than the default value, the wireless devices must sometimes get permission to send information to the ZyXEL Device. The lower the value, the more often the devices must get permission. If this value is greater than the fragmentation threshold value (see below), then wireless devices never have to get permission to send information to the ZyXEL Device. A preamble affects the timing in your wireless network. There are two preamble modes: long and short. If a device uses a different preamble mode than the ZyXEL Device does, it cannot communicate with the ZyXEL Device. The process of verifying whether a wireless device is allowed to use the wireless network. A small fragmentation threshold is recommended for busy networks, while a larger threshold provides faster performance if the network is not very busy. Preamble Authentication Fragmentation Threshold 8.9.2 Wireless Security Overview The following sections introduce different types of wireless security you can set up in the wireless network. 8.9.2.1 SSID Normally, the ZyXEL Device acts like a beacon and regularly broadcasts the SSID in the area. You can hide the SSID instead, in which case the ZyXEL Device does not broadcast the SSID. In addition, you should change the default SSID to something that is difficult to guess. P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 153 Chapter 8 Wireless LAN This type of security is fairly weak, however, because there are ways for unauthorized wireless devices to get the SSID. In addition, unauthorized wireless devices can still see the information that is sent in the wireless network. 8.9.2.2 MAC Address Filter Every device that can use a wireless network has a unique identification number, called a MAC address.1 A MAC address is usually written using twelve hexadecimal characters2; for example, 00A0C5000002 or 00:A0:C5:00:00:02. To get the MAC address for each device in the wireless network, see the devices Users Guide or other documentation. You can use the MAC address filter to tell the ZyXEL Device which devices are allowed or not allowed to use the wireless network. If a device is allowed to use the wireless network, it still has to have the correct information (SSID, channel, and security). If a device is not allowed to use the wireless network, it does not matter if it has the correct information. This type of security does not protect the information that is sent in the wireless network. Furthermore, there are ways for unauthorized wireless devices to get the MAC address of an authorized device. Then, they can use that MAC address to use the wireless network. 8.9.2.3 User Authentication Authentication is the process of verifying whether a wireless device is allowed to use the wireless network. You can make every user log in to the wireless network before they can use it. However, every device in the wireless network has to support IEEE 802.1x to do this. For wireless networks, you can store the user names and passwords for each user in a RADIUS server. This is a server used in businesses more than in homes. If you do not have a RADIUS server, you cannot set up user names and passwords for your users. Unauthorized wireless devices can still see the information that is sent in the wireless network, even if they cannot use the wireless network. Furthermore, there are ways for unauthorized wireless users to get a valid user name and password. Then, they can use that user name and password to use the wireless network. 1. Some wireless devices, such as scanners, can detect wireless networks but cannot use wireless networks. These kinds of wireless devices might not have MAC addresses. 2. Hexadecimal characters are 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, A, B, C, D, E, and F. 154 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide Chapter 8 Wireless LAN 8.9.2.4 Encryption Wireless networks can use encryption to protect the information that is sent in the wireless network. Encryption is like a secret code. If you do not know the secret code, you cannot understand the message. The types of encryption you can choose depend on the type of authentication.

(See Section 8.9.2.3 on page 154 for information about this.) Table 40 Types of Encryption for Each Type of Authentication Weakest NO AUTHENTICATION RADIUS SERVER No Security Static WEP WPA-PSK Stronges t WPA2-PSK WPA WPA2 For example, if the wireless network has a RADIUS server, you can choose WPA or WPA2. If users do not log in to the wireless network, you can choose no encryption, Static WEP, WPA-PSK, or WPA2-PSK. Usually, you should set up the strongest encryption that every device in the wireless network supports. For example, suppose you have a wireless network with the ZyXEL Device and you do not have a RADIUS server. Therefore, there is no authentication. Suppose the wireless network has two devices. Device A only supports WEP, and device B supports WEP and WPA. Therefore, you should set up Static WEP in the wireless network. Note: It is recommended that wireless networks use WPA-PSK, WPA, or stronger encryption. The other types of encryption are better than none at all, but it is still possible for unauthorized wireless devices to figure out the original information pretty quickly. When you select WPA2 or WPA2-PSK in your ZyXEL Device, you can also select an option (WPA compatible) to support WPA as well. In this case, if some of the devices support WPA and some support WPA2, you should set up WPA2-PSK or WPA2 (depending on the type of wireless network login) and select the WPA compatible option in the ZyXEL Device. Many types of encryption use a key to protect the information in the wireless network. The longer the key, the stronger the encryption. Every device in the wireless network must have the same key. P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 155 Chapter 8 Wireless LAN 8.9.3 MBSSID Traditionally, you needed to use different APs to configure different Basic Service Sets (BSSs). As well as the cost of buying extra APs, there was also the possibility of channel interference. The ZyXEL Devices MBSSID (Multiple Basic Service Set IDentifier) function allows you to use one access point to provide several BSSs simultaneously. You can then assign varying QoS priorities and/or security modes to different SSIDs. Wireless devices can use different BSSIDs to associate with the same AP. 8.9.3.1 Notes on Multiple BSSs A maximum of eight BSSs are allowed on one AP simultaneously. You must use different keys for different BSSs. If two wireless devices have different BSSIDs (they are in different BSSs), but have the same keys, they may hear each others communications (but not communicate with each other). MBSSID should not replace but rather be used in conjunction with 802.1x security. 8.9.4 Wireless Distribution System (WDS) The ZyXEL Device can act as a wireless network bridge and establish WDS

(Wireless Distribution System) links with other APs. You need to know the MAC addresses of the APs you want to link to. Once the security settings of peer sides match one another, the connection between devices is made. At the time of writing, WDS security is compatible with other ZyXEL access points only. Refer to your other access points documentation for details. The following example illustrates how WDS link works between APs. Notebook computer A is a wireless client connecting to access point AP 1. AP 1 has no wired Internet connection, but can establish a WDS link with access point AP 2, which does. When AP 1 has a WDS link with AP 2, the notebook computer can access the Internet through AP 2. Figure 103 WDS Link Example A WDS AP 1 AP 2 Internet 156 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 8.9.5 WiFi Protected Setup Chapter 8 Wireless LAN Your ZyXEL Device supports WiFi Protected Setup (WPS), which is an easy way to set up a secure wireless network. WPS is an industry standard specification, defined by the WiFi Alliance. WPS allows you to quickly set up a wireless network with strong security, without having to configure security settings manually. Each WPS connection works between two devices. Both devices must support WPS (check each devices documentation to make sure). Depending on the devices you have, you can either press a button (on the device itself, or in its configuration utility) or enter a PIN (a unique Personal Identification Number that allows one device to authenticate the other) in each of the two devices. When WPS is activated on a device, it has two minutes to find another device that also has WPS activated. Then, the two devices connect and set up a secure network by themselves. 8.9.5.1 Push Button Configuration WPS Push Button Configuration (PBC) is initiated by pressing a button on each WPS-enabled device, and allowing them to connect automatically. You do not need to enter any information. Not every WPS-enabled device has a physical WPS button. Some may have a WPS PBC button in their configuration utilities instead of or in addition to the physical button. Take the following steps to set up WPS using the button. 1 Ensure that the two devices you want to set up are within wireless range of one another. 2 3 Look for a WPS button on each device. If the device does not have one, log into its configuration utility and locate the button (see the devices Users Guide for how to do this - for the ZyXEL Device, see Section 8.6 on page 149). Press the button on one of the devices (it doesnt matter which). For the ZyXEL Device you must press the WPS button for more than three seconds. 4 Within two minutes, press the button on the other device. The registrar sends the network name (SSID) and security key through an secure connection to the enrollee. If you need to make sure that WPS worked, check the list of associated wireless clients in the APs configuration utility. If you see the wireless client in the list, WPS was successful. P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 157 Chapter 8 Wireless LAN 8.9.5.2 PIN Configuration Each WPS-enabled device has its own PIN (Personal Identification Number). This may either be static (it cannot be changed) or dynamic (in some devices you can generate a new PIN by clicking on a button in the configuration interface). Use the PIN method instead of the push-button configuration (PBC) method if you want to ensure that the connection is established between the devices you specify, not just the first two devices to activate WPS in range of each other. However, you need to log into the configuration interfaces of both devices to use the PIN method. When you use the PIN method, you must enter the PIN from one device (usually the wireless client) into the second device (usually the Access Point or wireless router). Then, when WPS is activated on the first device, it presents its PIN to the second device. If the PIN matches, one device sends the network and security information to the other, allowing it to join the network. Take the following steps to set up a WPS connection between an access point or wireless router (referred to here as the AP) and a client device using the PIN method. 1 Ensure WPS is enabled on both devices. 2 Access the WPS section of the APs configuration interface. See the devices Users Guide for how to do this. 3 Look for the clients WPS PIN; it will be displayed either on the device, or in the WPS section of the clients configuration interface (see the devices Users Guide for how to find the WPS PIN - for the ZyXEL Device, see Section 8.5 on page 148). 4 Enter the clients PIN in the APs configuration interface. Note: If the client devices configuration interface has an area for entering another devices PIN, you can either enter the clients PIN in the AP, or enter the APs PIN in the client - it does not matter which. 5 Start WPS on both devices within two minutes. Note: Use the configuration utility to activate WPS, not the push-button on the device itself. 6 On a computer connected to the wireless client, try to connect to the Internet. If you can connect, WPS was successful. If you cannot connect, check the list of associated wireless clients in the APs configuration utility. If you see the wireless client in the list, WPS was successful. 158 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide Chapter 8 Wireless LAN The following figure shows a WPS-enabled wireless client (installed in a notebook computer) connecting to the WPS-enabled AP via the PIN method. Figure 104 Example WPS Process: PIN Method ENROLLEE REGISTRAR WPS This devices WPS PIN: 123456 WPS Enter WPS PIN from other device:

WPS WPS START START WITHIN 2 MINUTES SECURE EAP TUNNEL SSID WPA(2)-PSK COMMUNICATION 8.9.5.3 How WPS Works When two WPS-enabled devices connect, each device must assume a specific role. One device acts as the registrar (the device that supplies network and security settings) and the other device acts as the enrollee (the device that receives network and security settings. The registrar creates a secure EAP (Extensible Authentication Protocol) tunnel and sends the network name (SSID) and the WPA-

PSK or WPA2-PSK pre-shared key to the enrollee. Whether WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK is used depends on the standards supported by the devices. If the registrar is already part of a network, it sends the existing information. If not, it generates the SSID and WPA(2)-PSK randomly. P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 159 Chapter 8 Wireless LAN The following figure shows a WPS-enabled client (installed in a notebook computer) connecting to a WPS-enabled access point. Figure 105 How WPS works ACTIVATE WPS WITHIN 2 MINUTES ACTIVATE WPS ENROLLEE WPS HANDSHAKE SECURE TUNNEL SECURITY INFO COMMUNICATION REGISTRAR The roles of registrar and enrollee last only as long as the WPS setup process is active (two minutes). The next time you use WPS, a different device can be the registrar if necessary. The WPS connection process is like a handshake; only two devices participate in each WPS transaction. If you want to add more devices you should repeat the process with one of the existing networked devices and the new device. Note that the access point (AP) is not always the registrar, and the wireless client is not always the enrollee. All WPS-certified APs can be a registrar, and so can some WPS-enabled wireless clients. By default, a WPS devices is unconfigured. This means that it is not part of an existing network and can act as either enrollee or registrar (if it supports both functions). If the registrar is unconfigured, the security settings it transmits to the enrollee are randomly-generated. Once a WPS-enabled device has connected to another device using WPS, it becomes configured. A configured wireless client can still act as enrollee or registrar in subsequent WPS connections, but a configured access point can no longer act as enrollee. It will be the registrar in all subsequent WPS connections in which it is involved. If you want a configured AP to act as an enrollee, you must reset it to its factory defaults. 160 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 8.9.5.4 Example WPS Network Setup Chapter 8 Wireless LAN This section shows how security settings are distributed in an example WPS setup. The following figure shows an example network. In step 1, both AP1 and Client 1 are unconfigured. When WPS is activated on both, they perform the handshake. In this example, AP1 is the registrar, and Client 1 is the enrollee. The registrar randomly generates the security information to set up the network, since it is unconfigured and has no existing information. Figure 106 WPS: Example Network Step 1 ENROLLEE CLIENT 1 SECURITY INFO REGISTRAR AP1 In step 2, you add another wireless client to the network. You know that Client 1 supports registrar mode, but it is better to use AP1 for the WPS handshake with the new client since you must connect to the access point anyway in order to use the network. In this case, AP1 must be the registrar, since it is configured (it already has security information for the network). AP1 supplies the existing security information to Client 2. Figure 107 WPS: Example Network Step 2 REGISTRAR AP1 EXISTING CONNECTION O F Y I N R I T U C E S CLIENT 1 ENROLLEE CLIENT 2 In step 3, you add another access point (AP2) to your network. AP2 is out of range of AP1, so you cannot use AP1 for the WPS handshake with the new access P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 161 Chapter 8 Wireless LAN point. However, you know that Client 2 supports the registrar function, so you use it to perform the WPS handshake instead. Figure 108 WPS: Example Network Step 3 CLIENT 1 REGISTRAR CLIENT 2 EXISTING CONNECTION N T I O C E N N O G C T I N X I S E SECURITY INFO AP1 ENROLLEE AP2 8.9.5.5 Limitations of WPS WPS has some limitations of which you should be aware. WPS works in Infrastructure networks only (where an AP and a wireless client communicate). It does not work in Ad-Hoc networks (where there is no AP). When you use WPS, it works between two devices only. You cannot enroll multiple devices simultaneously, you must enroll one after the other. For instance, if you have two enrollees and one registrar you must set up the first enrollee (by pressing the WPS button on the registrar and the first enrollee, for example), then check that it successfully enrolled, then set up the second device in the same way. WPS works only with other WPS-enabled devices. However, you can still add non-WPS devices to a network you already set up using WPS. WPS works by automatically issuing a randomly-generated WPA-PSK or WPA2-

PSK pre-shared key from the registrar device to the enrollee devices. Whether the network uses WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK depends on the device. You can check the configuration interface of the registrar device to discover the key the network is using (if the device supports this feature). Then, you can enter the key into the non-WPS device and join the network as normal (the non-WPS device must also support WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK). 162 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide Chapter 8 Wireless LAN When you use the PBC method, there is a short period (from the moment you press the button on one device to the moment you press the button on the other device) when any WPS-enabled device could join the network. This is because the registrar has no way of identifying the correct enrollee, and cannot differentiate between your enrollee and a rogue device. This is a possible way for a hacker to gain access to a network. You can easily check to see if this has happened. WPS works between only two devices simultaneously, so if another device has enrolled your device will be unable to enroll, and will not have access to the network. If this happens, open the access points configuration interface and look at the list of associated clients (usually displayed by MAC address). It does not matter if the access point is the WPS registrar, the enrollee, or was not involved in the WPS handshake; a rogue device must still associate with the access point to gain access to the network. Check the MAC addresses of your wireless clients

(usually printed on a label on the bottom of the device). If there is an unknown MAC address you can remove it or reset the AP. P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 163 Chapter 8 Wireless LAN 164 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide CHAPTER 9 Network Address Translation

(NAT) 9.1 Overview NAT (Network Address Translation - NAT, RFC 1631) is the translation of the IP address of a host in a packet, for example, the source address of an outgoing packet, used within one network to a different IP address known within another network. 9.1.1 What You Can Do in the NAT Screens Use the NAT General Setup screen (Section 9.2 on page 166) to configure the NAT setup settings. Use the Port Forwarding screen (Section 9.3 on page 168) to configure forward incoming service requests to the server(s) on your local network. Use the Address Mapping screen (Section 9.4 on page 172) to change your ZyXEL Devices address mapping settings. Use the SIP ALG screen (Section 9.4.2 on page 174) to enable and disable the SIP (VoIP) ALG in the ZyXEL Device. 9.1.2 What You Need To Know About NAT Inside/Outside and Global/Local Inside/outside denotes where a host is located relative to the ZyXEL Device, for example, the computers of your subscribers are the inside hosts, while the web servers on the Internet are the outside hosts. Global/local denotes the IP address of a host in a packet as the packet traverses a router, for example, the local address refers to the IP address of a host when the packet is in the local network, while the global address refers to the IP address of the host when the same packet is traveling in the WAN side. P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 165 Chapter 9 Network Address Translation (NAT) NAT In the simplest form, NAT changes the source IP address in a packet received from a subscriber (the inside local address) to another (the inside global address) before forwarding the packet to the WAN side. When the response comes back, NAT translates the destination address (the inside global address) back to the inside local address before forwarding it to the original inside host. Port Forwarding A port forwarding set is a list of inside (behind NAT on the LAN) servers, for example, web or FTP, that you can make visible to the outside world even though NAT makes your whole inside network appear as a single computer to the outside world. SUA (Single User Account) Versus NAT SUA (Single User Account) is a ZyNOS implementation of a subset of NAT that supports two types of mapping, Many-to-One and Server. The ZyXEL Device also supports Full Feature NAT to map multiple global IP addresses to multiple private LAN IP addresses of clients or servers using mapping types as outlined in Table 48 on page 179. Choose SUA Only if you have just one public WAN IP address for your ZyXEL Device. Choose Full Feature if you have multiple public WAN IP addresses for your ZyXEL Device. Finding Out More See Section 9.5 on page 175 for advanced technical information on NAT. 9.2 NAT General Setup Note: You must create a firewall rule in addition to setting up SUA/NAT, to allow traffic from the WAN to be forwarded through the ZyXEL Device. 166 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide Chapter 9 Network Address Translation (NAT) Click Network > NAT to open the following screen. Figure 109 Network > NAT > General The following table describes the labels in this screen. DESCRIPTION Select this check box to enable NAT. Table 41 Network > NAT > General LABEL Active Network Address Translation

(NAT) SUA Only Select this radio button if you have just one public WAN IP address for your ZyXEL Device. Full Feature Select this radio button if you have multiple public WAN IP addresses for Max NAT/

Firewall Session Per User Apply Cancel your ZyXEL Device. When computers use peer to peer applications, such as file sharing applications, they need to establish NAT sessions. If you do not limit the number of NAT sessions a single client can establish, this can result in all of the available NAT sessions being used. In this case, no additional NAT sessions can be established, and users may not be able to access the Internet. Each NAT session establishes a corresponding firewall session. Use this field to limit the number of NAT/Firewall sessions client computers can establish through the ZyXEL Device. If your network has a small number of clients using peer to peer applications, you can raise this number to ensure that their performance is not degraded by the number of NAT sessions they can establish. If your network has a large number of users using peer to peer applications, you can lower this number to ensure no single client is exhausting all of the available NAT sessions. Click Apply to save your changes back to the ZyXEL Device. Click Cancel to reload the previous configuration for this screen. P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 167 Chapter 9 Network Address Translation (NAT) 9.3 Port Forwarding Note: This screen is available only when you select SUA only in the NAT > General screen. Use the Port Forwarding screen to forward incoming service requests to the server(s) on your local network. You may enter a single port number or a range of port numbers to be forwarded, and the local IP address of the desired server. The port number identifies a service; for example, web service is on port 80 and FTP on port 21. In some cases, such as for unknown services or where one server can support more than one service (for example both FTP and web service), it might be better to specify a range of port numbers. You can allocate a server IP address that corresponds to a port or a range of ports. The most often used port numbers and services are shown in Appendix E on page 557. Please refer to RFC 1700 for further information about port numbers. Note: Many residential broadband ISP accounts do not allow you to run any server processes (such as a Web or FTP server) from your location. Your ISP may periodically check for servers and may suspend your account if it discovers any active services at your location. If you are unsure, refer to your ISP. Default Server IP Address In addition to the servers for specified services, NAT supports a default server IP address. A default server receives packets from ports that are not specified in this screen. Note: If you do not assign a Default Server IP address, the ZyXEL Device discards all packets received for ports that are not specified here or in the remote management setup. Configuring Servers Behind Port Forwarding (Example) Let's say you want to assign ports 21-25 to one FTP, Telnet and SMTP server (A in the example), port 80 to another (B in the example) and assign a default server IP address of 192.168.1.35 to a third (C in the example). You assign the LAN IP 168 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide Chapter 9 Network Address Translation (NAT) addresses and the ISP assigns the WAN IP address. The NAT network appears as a single host on the Internet. Figure 110 Multiple Servers Behind NAT Example A=192.168.1.33 LAN WAN B=192.168.1.34 Internet 192.168.1.1 IP Address assigned by ISP C=192.168.1.35 D=192.168.1.36 9.3.1 Configuring the Port Forwarding Screen Click Network > NAT > Port Forwarding to open the following screen. See Appendix E on page 557 for port numbers commonly used for particular services. Figure 111 Network > NAT > Port Forwarding P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 169 Chapter 9 Network Address Translation (NAT) The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 42 Network > NAT > Port Forwarding LABEL Default Server Setup Default Server DESCRIPTION In addition to the servers for specified services, NAT supports a default server. A default server receives packets from ports that are not specified in this screen. If you do not assign a Default Server IP address, the ZyXEL Device discards all packets received for ports that are not specified here or in the remote management setup. Port Forwarding Service Name Server IP Address Add

Active Service Name Start Port End Port Server IP Address Modify Apply Cancel Select a service from the drop-down list box. Enter the IP address of the server for the specified service. Click this button to add a rule to the table below. This is the rule index number (read-only). This field indicates whether the rule is active or not. Clear the check box to disable the rule. Select the check box to enable it. This is a services name. This is the first port number that identifies a service. This is the last port number that identifies a service. This is the servers IP address. Click the edit icon to go to the screen where you can edit the port forwarding rule. Click the delete icon to delete an existing port forwarding rule. Note that subsequent address mapping rules move up by one when you take this action. Click Apply to save your changes back to the ZyXEL Device. Click Cancel to return to the previous configuration. 170 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide Chapter 9 Network Address Translation (NAT) 9.3.2 Port Forwarding Rule Edit Use this screen to add or edit a port forwarding rule. Select User define in the Service Name field of the Port Forwarding screen or click an existing rules edit icon in the Port Forwarding screen to display the screen shown next. Figure 112 Network > NAT > Port Forwarding > Edit The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 43 Network > NAT > Port Forwarding > Edit LABEL Active Service Name Enter a name to identify this port-forwarding rule. Start Port DESCRIPTION Click this check box to enable the rule. Enter a port number in this field. To forward only one port, enter the port number again in the End Port field. To forward a series of ports, enter the start port number here and the end port number in the End Port field. Enter a port number in this field. End Port To forward only one port, enter the port number again in the Start Port field above and then enter it again in this field. To forward a series of ports, enter the last port number in a series that begins with the port number in the Start Port field above. Enter the inside IP address of the server here. Click Back to return to the previous screen. Click Apply to save your changes back to the ZyXEL Device. Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh. Server IP Address Back Apply Cancel P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 171 Chapter 9 Network Address Translation (NAT) 9.4 Address Mapping Note: The Address Mapping screen is available only when you select Full Feature in the NAT > General screen. Ordering your rules is important because the ZyXEL Device applies the rules in the order that you specify. When a rule matches the current packet, the ZyXEL Device takes the corresponding action and the remaining rules are ignored. If there are any empty rules before your new configured rule, your configured rule will be pushed up by that number of empty rules. For example, if you have already configured rules 1 to 6 in your current set and now you configure rule number 9. In the set summary screen, the new rule will be rule 7, not 9. Now if you delete rule 4, rules 5 to 7 will be pushed up by 1 rule, so old rules 5, 6 and 7 become new rules 4, 5 and 6. To change your ZyXEL Devices address mapping settings, click Network > NAT

> Address Mapping to open the following screen. Figure 113 Network > NAT > Address Mapping The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 44 Network > NAT > Address Mapping LABEL

Local Start IP DESCRIPTION This is the rule index number. This is the starting Inside Local IP Address (ILA). Local IP addresses are N/A for Server port mapping. This is the end Inside Local IP Address (ILA). If the rule is for all local IP addresses, then this field displays 0.0.0.0 as the Local Start IP address and 255.255.255.255 as the Local End IP address. This field is N/A for One-to-one and Server mapping types. This is the starting Inside Global IP Address (IGA). Enter 0.0.0.0 here if you have a dynamic IP address from your ISP. You can only do this for Many-to-One and Server mapping types. Local End IP Global Start IP 172 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide Chapter 9 Network Address Translation (NAT) Table 44 Network > NAT > Address Mapping (continued) LABEL Global End IP DESCRIPTION This is the ending Inside Global IP Address (IGA). This field is N/A for One-to-one, Many-to-One and Server mapping types. 1-1: One-to-one mode maps one local IP address to one global IP address. Note that port numbers do not change for the One-to-one NAT mapping type. Type M-1: Many-to-One mode maps multiple local IP addresses to one global IP address. This is equivalent to SUA (i.e., PAT, port address translation), ZyXEL's Single User Account feature that previous ZyXEL routers supported only. M-M Ov (Overload): Many-to-Many Overload mode maps multiple local IP addresses to shared global IP addresses. MM No (No Overload): Many-to-Many No Overload mode maps each local IP address to unique global IP addresses. Modify Server: This type allows you to specify inside servers of different services behind the NAT to be accessible to the outside world. Click the edit icon to go to the screen where you can edit the address mapping rule. Click the delete icon to delete an existing address mapping rule. Note that subsequent address mapping rules move up by one when you take this action. 9.4.1 Address Mapping Rule Edit To edit an address mapping rule, click the rules edit icon in the Address Mapping screen to display the screen shown next. Figure 114 Network > NAT > Address Mapping > Edit P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 173 Chapter 9 Network Address Translation (NAT) The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 45 Network > NAT > Address Mapping > Edit LABEL Type DESCRIPTION Choose the port mapping type from one of the following. One-to-One: One-to-One mode maps one local IP address to one global IP address. Note that port numbers do not change for One-to-one NAT mapping type. Many-to-One: Many-to-One mode maps multiple local IP addresses to one global IP address. This is equivalent to SUA (i.e., PAT, port address translation), ZyXEL's Single User Account feature that previous ZyXEL routers supported only. Many-to-Many Overload: Many-to-Many Overload mode maps multiple local IP addresses to shared global IP addresses. Many-to-Many No Overload: Many-to-Many No Overload mode maps each local IP address to unique global IP addresses. Server: This type allows you to specify inside servers of different services behind the NAT to be accessible to the outside world. Local Start IP This is the starting local IP address (ILA). Local IP addresses are N/A for Local End IP Server port mapping. This is the end local IP address (ILA). If your rule is for all local IP addresses, then enter 0.0.0.0 as the Local Start IP address and 255.255.255.255 as the Local End IP address. This field is N/A for One-to-One and Server mapping types. This is the starting global IP address (IGA). Enter 0.0.0.0 here if you have a dynamic IP address from your ISP. Global Start IP Global End IP This is the ending global IP address (IGA). This field is N/A for One-to-

Server Mapping Set Edit Details Back Apply Cancel One, Many-to-One and Server mapping types. Only available when Type is set to Server. Select a number from the drop-down menu to choose a port forwarding set. Click this link to go to the Port Forwarding screen to edit a port forwarding set that you have selected in the Server Mapping Set field. Click Back to return to the previous screen. Click Apply to save your changes to the ZyXEL Device. Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh. 9.4.2 SIP ALG A SIP Application Layer Gateway (ALG) allows SIP calls to pass through NAT by examining and translating IP addresses embedded in the data stream. When the ZyXEL Device registers with the SIP register server, the SIP ALG translates the ZyXEL Devices private IP address inside the SIP data stream to a public IP address. You do not need to use STUN or an outbound proxy if your ZyXEL Device is behind a SIP ALG. 174 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide Chapter 9 Network Address Translation (NAT) Use this screen to enable and disable the SIP (VoIP) ALG in the ZyXEL Device. To access this screen, click Network > NAT > ALG. Figure 115 Network > NAT > ALG Each field is described in the following table. Table 46 Network > NAT > ALG LABEL Enable SIP ALG Select this to make sure SIP (VoIP) works correctly with port-

DESCRIPTION Apply Reset forwarding and address-mapping rules. Click this to save your changes and to apply them to the ZyXEL Device. Click this to return to previously saved configuration. 9.5 NAT Technical Reference This section provides some technical background information about the topics covered in this chapter. 9.5.1 NAT Definitions Inside/outside denotes where a host is located relative to the ZyXEL Device, for example, the computers of your subscribers are the inside hosts, while the web servers on the Internet are the outside hosts. Global/local denotes the IP address of a host in a packet as the packet traverses a router, for example, the local address refers to the IP address of a host when the packet is in the local network, while the global address refers to the IP address of the host when the same packet is traveling in the WAN side. Note that inside/outside refers to the location of a host, while global/local refers to the IP address of a host used in a packet. Thus, an inside local address (ILA) is the IP address of an inside host in a packet when the packet is still in the local network, while an inside global address (IGA) is the IP address of the same inside P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 175 Chapter 9 Network Address Translation (NAT) host when the packet is on the WAN side. The following table summarizes this information. Table 47 NAT Definitions ITEM DESCRIPTION This refers to the host on the LAN. Inside This refers to the host on the WAN. Outside Local This refers to the packet address (source or destination) as the packet travels on the LAN. This refers to the packet address (source or destination) as the packet travels on the WAN. Global NAT never changes the IP address (either local or global) of an outside host. 9.5.2 What NAT Does In the simplest form, NAT changes the source IP address in a packet received from a subscriber (the inside local address) to another (the inside global address) before forwarding the packet to the WAN side. When the response comes back, NAT translates the destination address (the inside global address) back to the inside local address before forwarding it to the original inside host. Note that the IP address (either local or global) of an outside host is never changed. The global IP addresses for the inside hosts can be either static or dynamically assigned by the ISP. In addition, you can designate servers, for example, a web server and a telnet server, on your local network and make them accessible to the outside world. If you do not define any servers (for Many-to-One and Many-to-

Many Overload mapping see Table 48 on page 179), NAT offers the additional benefit of firewall protection. With no servers defined, your ZyXEL Device filters out all incoming inquiries, thus preventing intruders from probing your network. For more information on IP address translation, refer to RFC 1631, The IP Network Address Translator (NAT). 9.5.3 How NAT Works Each packet has two addresses a source address and a destination address. For outgoing packets, the ILA (Inside Local Address) is the source address on the LAN, and the IGA (Inside Global Address) is the source address on the WAN. For incoming packets, the ILA is the destination address on the LAN, and the IGA is the destination address on the WAN. NAT maps private (local) IP addresses to globally unique ones required for communication with hosts on other networks. It replaces the original IP source address (and TCP or UDP source port numbers for Many-to-One and Many-to-Many Overload NAT mapping) in each packet and then forwards it to the Internet. The ZyXEL Device keeps track of the original addresses 176 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide Chapter 9 Network Address Translation (NAT) and port numbers so incoming reply packets can have their original values restored. The following figure illustrates this. Figure 116 How NAT Works LAN 192.168.1.13 192.168.1.12 SA 192.168.1.10 NAT Table Inside Local IP Address 192.168.1.10 192.168.1.11 192.168.1.12 192.168.1.13 Inside Global IP Address IGA 1 IGA 2 IGA 3 IGA 4 WAN SA IGA1 Internet Inside Local Address (ILA) Inside Global Address (IGA) 192.168.1.11 192.168.1.10 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 177 Chapter 9 Network Address Translation (NAT) 9.5.4 NAT Application The following figure illustrates a possible NAT application, where three inside LANs

(logical LANs using IP alias) behind the ZyXEL Device can communicate with three distinct WAN networks. Figure 117 NAT Application With IP Alias Corporation B Corporation A Server in Admin Network

=IP1 (IGA 1) Internet Server in Sales Network

=IP2 (IGA 2) LAN2: 192.168.1.X Network Server Admin=192.168.1.1 NAT Server 192.168.1.1 LAN2: 192.168.2.X Network Server Sales=192.168.2.1 NAT Server 192.168.2.1 LAN3: 192.168.3.X Network Server R&D=192.168.3.1 NAT Server 192.168.3.1 Server in R&D Network

=IP3 (IGA 3) WAN Addresses: LAN Addresses: (Default IPs) IGA 1 ---------------> 192.168.1.1 IGA 2 ---------------> 192.168.2.1 IGA 3 ---------------> 192.168.3.1 9.5.5 NAT Mapping Types NAT supports five types of IP/port mapping. They are:

One to One: In One-to-One mode, the ZyXEL Device maps one local IP address to one global IP address. Many to One: In Many-to-One mode, the ZyXEL Device maps multiple local IP addresses to one global IP address. This is equivalent to SUA (for instance, PAT, port address translation), ZyXELs Single User Account feature that previous ZyXEL routers supported (the SUA Only option in todays routers). 178 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide Chapter 9 Network Address Translation (NAT) Many to Many Overload: In Many-to-Many Overload mode, the ZyXEL Device maps the multiple local IP addresses to shared global IP addresses. Many-to-Many No Overload: In Many-to-Many No Overload mode, the ZyXEL Device maps each local IP address to a unique global IP address. Server: This type allows you to specify inside servers of different services behind the NAT to be accessible to the outside world. Port numbers do NOT change for One-to-One and Many-to-Many No Overload NAT mapping types. The following table summarizes these types. Table 48 NAT Mapping Types TYPE One-to-One Many-to-One (SUA/PAT) IP MAPPING ILA1 IGA1 ILA1 IGA1 Many-to-Many Overload Many-to-Many No Overload Server ILA2 IGA1 ILA1 IGA1 ILA2 IGA2 ILA3 IGA1 ILA4 IGA2 ILA1 IGA1 ILA2 IGA2 ILA3 IGA3 Server 1 IP IGA1 Server 2 IP IGA1 Server 3 IP IGA1 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 179 Chapter 9 Network Address Translation (NAT) 180 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide CHAPTER 10 Voice 10.1 Overview Use this chapter to:

Connect an analog phone to the ZyXEL Device. Make phone calls over the Internet, as well as the regular phone network. Configure settings such as speed dial and distinctive ringing. Configure network settings to optimize the voice quality of your phone calls. 10.1.1 What You Can Do in the VoIP Screens These screens allow you to configure your ZyXEL Device to make phone calls over the Internet and your regular phone line, and to set up the phones you connect to the ZyXEL Device. Use the SIP Settings screen (Section 10.2 on page 183) to set up information about your SIP account. Use the SIP QoS screen (Section 10.4 on page 189) to configure Quality of Service for VoIP calls. QoS can give VoIP traffic higher priority on the network so it gets dealt with more quickly. Use the Analog Phone screen (Section 10.5 on page 190) to control which SIP accounts the phones connected to the ZyXEL Device use. Use the Advanced Analog Phone Setup screen (Section 10.6 on page 190) to configure audio settings such as volume levels for the phones connected to the ZyXEL Device. Use the EXT. Table screen (Section 10.7 on page 193) to configure extension numbers for the phones connected to the ZyXEL Device so they can be separately identified for intercom use. Use the Common Phone Settings screen (Section 10.8 on page 194) to turn immediate dialing on or off. Use the Region screen (Section 10.9 on page 195) to change settings that depend on the country you are in. Use the Speed Dial screen (Section 10.10 on page 196) to set up shortcuts for dialing frequently-used (VoIP) phone numbers. P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 181 Chapter 10 Voice Use the Incoming Call Policy screen (Section 10.11 on page 199) to configure how the ZyXEL Device deals with incoming calls. Use the SIP Prefix screen (Section 10.12 on page 201) to set up numbers you dial on your phone that specify which SIP account you want to use. You dont necessarily need to use all these screens to set up your account. In fact, if your service provider did not supply information on a particular field in a screen, it is usually best to leave it at its default setting. 10.1.2 What You Need to Know About VoIP VoIP VoIP stands for Voice over IP. IP is the Internet Protocol, which is the message-

carrying standard the Internet runs on. So, Voice over IP is the sending of voice signals (speech) over the Internet (or another network that uses the Internet Protocol). SIP SIP stands for Session Initiation Protocol. SIP is a signalling standard that lets one network device (like a computer or the ZyXEL Device) send messages to another. In VoIP, these messages are about phone calls over the network. For example, when you dial a number on your ZyXEL Device, it sends a SIP message over the network asking the other device (the number you dialed) to take part in the call. SIP Accounts A SIP account is a type of VoIP account. It is an arrangement with a service provider that lets you make phone calls over the Internet. When you set the ZyXEL Device to use your SIP account to make calls, the ZyXEL Device is able to send all the information about the phone call to your service provider on the Internet. Strictly speaking, you dont need a SIP account. It is possible for one SIP device

(like the ZyXEL Device) to call another without involving a SIP service provider. However, the networking difficulties involved in doing this make it tremendously impractical under normal circumstances. Your SIP account provider removes these difficulties by taking care of the call routing and setup - figuring out how to get your call to the right place in a way that you and the other person can talk to one another. How to Find Out More See Chapter 4 on page 59 for a tutorial showing how to set up these screens in an example scenario. 182 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide Chapter 10 Voice See Section 10.13 on page 202 for advanced technical information on SIP. 10.1.3 Before You Begin Before you can use these screens, you need to have a VoIP account already set up. If you dont have one yet, you can sign up with a VoIP service provider over the Internet. You should have the information your VoIP service provider gave you ready, before you start to configure the ZyXEL Device. 10.2 The SIP Settings Screen The ZyXEL Device uses a SIP account to make outgoing VoIP calls and check if an incoming calls destination number matches your SIP accounts SIP number. In order to make or receive a VoIP call, you need to enable and configure a SIP account, and map it to a phone port. The SIP account contains information that allows your ZyXEL Device to connect to your VoIP service provider. If you want to make only peer-to-peer VoIP calls, there is no VoIP service provider involved, so the SIP account information does not have to match a real VoIP service providers SIP account. You can make up the SIP numbers. However, you should still activate a SIP account and configure its number and map it to a phone port, so that the person you call knows what SIP number you are using and the ZyXEL Device knows to which phone port it should forward an incoming VoIP call. You must use speed dial to make peer-to-peer VoIP calls. See Section 10.5 on page 190 for how to map a SIP account to a phone port. P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 183 Chapter 10 Voice Use this screen to maintain basic information about each SIP account. You can also enable and disable each SIP account. To access this screen, click VoIP > SIP

> SIP Settings. Figure 118 VoIP > SIP > SIP Settings Each field is described in the following table. Table 49 VoIP > SIP > SIP Settings LABEL SIP Account DESCRIPTION Select the SIP account you want to see in this screen. If you change this field, the screen automatically refreshes. SIP Settings Active SIP Account Number SIP Local Port SIP Server Address SIP Server Port Select this if you want the ZyXEL Device to use this account. Clear it if you do not want the ZyXEL Device to use this account. Enter your SIP number. In the full SIP URI, this is the part before the @

symbol. You can use up to 127 printable ASCII characters. Enter the ZyXEL Devices listening port number, if your VoIP service provider gave you one. Otherwise, keep the default value. Enter the IP address or domain name of the SIP server provided by your VoIP service provider. You can use up to 95 printable ASCII characters. It does not matter whether the SIP server is a proxy, redirect or register server. Enter the SIP servers listening port number, if your VoIP service provider gave you one. Otherwise, keep the default value. 184 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide Chapter 10 Voice Table 49 VoIP > SIP > SIP Settings LABEL REGISTER Server Address DESCRIPTION Enter the IP address or domain name of the SIP register server, if your VoIP service provider gave you one. Otherwise, enter the same address you entered in the SIP Server Address field. You can use up to 95 printable ASCII characters. Enter the SIP register servers listening port number, if your VoIP service provider gave you one. Otherwise, enter the same port number you entered in the SIP Server Port field. Enter the SIP service domain name. In the full SIP URI, this is the part after the @ symbol. You can use up to 127 printable ASCII Extended set characters. Select this if you want to send identification when you make VoIP phone calls. Clear this if you do not want to send identification. REGISTER Server Port SIP Service Domain Send Caller ID Authentication User Name Password Enter the user name for registering this SIP account, exactly as it was given to you. You can use up to 95 printable ASCII characters. Enter the user name for registering this SIP account, exactly as it was given to you. You can use up to 95 printable ASCII Extended set characters. Click this to save your changes and to apply them to the ZyXEL Device. Apply Cancel Click this to set every field in this screen to its last-saved value. Advanced Setup Click this to edit the advanced settings for this SIP account. The Advanced SIP Setup screen appears. P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 185 Chapter 10 Voice 10.3 The Advanced SIP Setup Screen Click VoIP > SIP > SIP Settings to open the SIP Settings screen. Select a SIP account and click Advanced Setup to open the Advanced SIP Setup screen. Use this screen to maintain advanced settings for each SIP account. Figure 119 VoIP > SIP Settings > Advanced 186 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide Each field is described in the following table. Chapter 10 Voice Table 50 VoIP > SIP Settings > Advanced LABEL SIP Account SIP Server Settings URL Type DESCRIPTION This field displays the SIP account you see in this screen. Select whether or not to include the SIP service domain name when the ZyXEL Device sends the SIP number. SIP - include the SIP service domain name. Expiration Duration Register Re-

send timer TEL - do not include the SIP service domain name. Enter the number of seconds your SIP account is registered with the SIP register server before it is deleted. The ZyXEL Device automatically tries to re-register your SIP account when one-half of this time has passed. (The SIP register server might have a different expiration.) Enter the number of seconds the ZyXEL Device waits before it tries again to register the SIP account, if the first try failed or if there is no response. Session Expires Enter the number of seconds the ZyXEL Device lets a SIP session Min-SE RTP Port Range Start Port End Port remain idle (without traffic) before it automatically disconnects the session. Enter the minimum number of seconds the ZyXEL Device lets a SIP session remain idle (without traffic) before it automatically disconnects the session. When two SIP devices start a SIP session, they must agree on an expiration time for idle sessions. This field is the shortest expiration time that the ZyXEL Device accepts. Enter the listening port number(s) for RTP traffic, if your VoIP service provider gave you this information. Otherwise, keep the default values. To enter one port number, enter the port number in the Start Port and End Port fields. To enter a range of ports, enter the port number at the beginning of the range in the Start Port field. enter the port number at the end of the range in the End Port field. Select the type of voice coder/decoder (codec) that you want the ZyXEL Device to use. G.711 provides higher voice quality but requires more bandwidth (64 kbps). Voice Compression G.711A is typically used in Europe. G.711u is typically used in North America and Japan. G.726 operates at 16, 24, 32 or 40 kbps. By contrast, G.729 only requires 8 kbps. The ZyXEL Device must use the same codec as the peer. When two SIP devices start a SIP session, they must agree on a codec. P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 187 Chapter 10 Voice DESCRIPTION Select the ZyXEL Devices first choice for voice coder/decoder. Table 50 VoIP > SIP Settings > Advanced LABEL Primary Compression Type Secondary Compression Type Third Compression Type DTMF Mode Select the ZyXEL Devices second choice for voice coder/decoder. Select None if you only want the ZyXEL Device to accept the first choice. Select the ZyXEL Devices third choice for voice coder/decoder. Select None if you only want the ZyXEL Device to accept the first or second choice. Control how the ZyXEL Device handles the tones that your telephone makes when you push its buttons. You should use the same mode your VoIP service provider uses. RFC 2833 - send the DTMF tones in RTP packets. PCM - send the DTMF tones in the voice data stream. This method works best when you are using a codec that does not use compression

(like G.711). Codecs that use compression (like G.729 and G.726) can distort the tones. SIP INFO - send the DTMF tones in SIP messages. Select this if your VoIP service provider has a SIP outbound server to handle voice calls. This allows the ZyXEL Device to work with any type of NAT router and eliminates the need for STUN or a SIP ALG. Turn off any SIP ALG on a NAT router in front of the ZyXEL Device to keep it from re-translating the IP address (since this is already handled by the outbound proxy server). Enter the IP address or domain name of the SIP outbound proxy server. Enter the SIP outbound proxy servers listening port, if your VoIP service provider gave you one. Otherwise, keep the default value. Select this if you want to hear a waiting (beeping) dial tone on your phone when you have at least one voice message. Your VoIP service provider must support this feature. Outbound Proxy Enable Server Address Server Port MWI (Message Waiting Indication) Enable Expiration Time Keep the default value for this field, unless your VoIP service provider tells you to change it. Enter the number of seconds the SIP server should provide the message waiting service each time the ZyXEL Device subscribes to the service. Before this time passes, the ZyXEL Device automatically subscribes again. Call Forward Call Forward Table Back Select which call forwarding table you want the ZyXEL Device to use for incoming calls. You set up these tables in VoIP > Phone Book >

Incoming Call Policy. Click this to return to the SIP Settings screen without saving your changes. 188 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide Chapter 10 Voice Table 50 VoIP > SIP Settings > Advanced LABEL Apply Cancel DESCRIPTION Click this to save your changes and to apply them to the ZyXEL Device. Click this to set every field in this screen to its last-saved value. 10.4 The SIP QoS Screen Use this screen to maintain ToS and VLAN settings for the ZyXEL Device. To access this screen, click VoIP > SIP > QoS. Figure 120 VoIP > SIP > QoS Each field is described in the following table. Table 51 VoIP > SIP > QoS LABEL SIP TOS Priority Setting RTP TOS Priority Setting Voice VLAN ID DESCRIPTION Enter the priority for SIP voice transmissions. The ZyXEL Device creates Type of Service priority tags with this priority to voice traffic that it transmits. Enter the priority for RTP voice transmissions. The ZyXEL Device creates Type of Service priority tags with this priority to RTP traffic that it transmits. Select this if the ZyXEL Device has to be a member of a VLAN to communicate with the SIP server. Ask your network administrator, if you are not sure. Enter the VLAN ID provided by your network administrator in the field on the right. Your LAN and gateway must be configured to use VLAN tags. Apply Cancel Otherwise, clear this field. Click this to save your changes and to apply them to the ZyXEL Device. Click this to set every field in this screen to its last-saved value. P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 189 Chapter 10 Voice 10.5 The Analog Phone Screen Use this screen to control which SIP accounts and PSTN line each phone uses. To access this screen, click VoIP > Phone > Analog Phone. Figure 121 VoIP > Phone > Analog Phone Each field is described in the following table. Table 52 VoIP > Phone > Analog Phone LABEL Phone Port Settings SIP Account DESCRIPTION This is the phone port in the ZyXEL Device. Select the SIP account you want to use when making outgoing calls with the analog phone connected to this phone port. Select a SIP account if you want to receive phone calls for the selected SIP account on this phone port. Incoming Call apply to If you select more than one SIP account for incoming calls, there is no way to distinguish between them when you receive phone calls. If you do not select a source for incoming calls, you cannot receive any calls on this phone port. Apply Click this to save your changes and to apply them to the ZyXEL Device. Click this to set every field in this screen to its last-saved value. Cancel Advanced Setup Click this to edit the advanced settings for this phone port. The Advanced Analog Phone Setup screen appears. 10.6 The Advanced Analog Phone Setup Screen Use this screen to configure the volume, echo cancellation and VAD (Voice Activity Detection) settings for each individual phone port on the ZyXEL Device. You can also select which SIP account to use for making outgoing calls. 190 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide Chapter 10 Voice Voice Activity Detection/Silence Suppression Voice Activity Detection (VAD) detects whether or not speech is present. This lets the ZyXEL Device reduce the bandwidth that a call uses by not transmitting silent packets when you are not speaking. Comfort Noise Generation When using VAD, the ZyXEL Device generates comfort noise when the other party is not speaking. The comfort noise lets you know that the line is still connected as total silence could easily be mistaken for a lost connection. Echo Cancellation G.168 is an ITU-T standard for eliminating the echo caused by the sound of your voice reverberating in the telephone receiver while you talk. 10.6.1 Configuring the Advanced Analog Phone Screen To access this screen, click Advanced Setup in VoIP > Phone > Analog Phone. Figure 122 VoIP > Phone > Analog Phone > Advanced P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 191 Fax Option G.711 Fax Passthrough T.38 Fax Relay Dialing Interval Selection Dialing Interval Selection Voice Active Detector VAD Support Chapter 10 Voice Each field is described in the following table. Table 53 VoIP > Phone > Analog Phone > Advanced LABEL Analog Phone Echo Cancellation Active G.168 DESCRIPTION This field displays the analog phone port you see in this screen. Select this if you want to eliminate the echo caused by the sound of your voice reverberating in the telephone receiver while you talk. This field controls how the ZyXEL Device handles fax messages. Select this if the ZyXEL Device should use G.711 to send fax messages. The peer devices must also use G.711. Select this if the ZyXEL Device should send fax messages as UDP or TCP/IP packets through IP networks. This provides better quality, but it may have inter-operability problems. The peer devices must also use T.38. Enter the number of seconds the ZyXEL Device should wait after you stop dialing numbers before it makes the phone call. The value depends on how quickly you dial phone numbers. If you select Active Immediate Dial in VoIP > Phone > Common, you can press the pound key (#) to tell the ZyXEL Device to make the phone call immediately, regardless of this setting. Select this if the ZyXEL Device should stop transmitting when you are not speaking. This reduces the bandwidth the ZyXEL Device uses. Auto Dial Active Auto Dial Select this if you want the ZyXEL Device to automatically dial the phone number you enter in the Auto Dial Phone Number field as soon as you take the phone off the hook. If you select Active Auto Dial, enter the phone number you want the ZyXEL Device to automatically dial in this field. Click this to return to the Analog Phone screen without saving your changes. Click this to save your changes. Click this to set every field in this screen to its last-saved value. Auto Dial Phone Number Back Apply Cancel 192 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 10.7 The Phone Settings Ext. Table Screen Chapter 10 Voice Each phone connected to the ZyXEL Device has an extension number so that it can be separately identified for intercom use. The default settings of extension numbers are shown in the following table. Table 54 Default Ext. Numbers PHONE Analog Phone 1 Analog Phone 2 DEFAULT EXT. NUMBER 11 12 An extension number is composed of a group number and a sub number. If group number is not enabled, the extension number is simply the sub number. You can assign a group number to several phones and use this number to call the group of phones. When you dial a group number, all of the phones with the same group number ring. The phone that picks up first gets the line, and the other phones stop ringing. Click VoIP > Phone > Ext. Table to access this screen. Figure 123 VoIP > Phone > Ext. Table Each field is described in the following table. Table 55 VoIP > Phone > Ext. Table LABEL Enable Group Number Phone DESCRIPTION Select this if you want to enable group number for the DECT and analog phones connected to the ZyXEL Device. Use these fields to assign extension numbers to the phones connected to the ZyXEL Device. This is an index number of the phone to be assigned an extension number.

P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 193 Chapter 10 Voice Table 55 VoIP > Phone > Ext. Table LABEL Group Number DESCRIPTION Enter a group number for this phone. The maximum length of a group number is one digit. This is only available when the check box of Enable Group Number is selected. For example, you can assign Phone 1 and Phone 2 a group number 5 and leave the sub numbers at default (11 and 12). When you dial 5, both Phone 1 and Phone 2 ring. If Phone 1 picks up the line first, it gets the line and Phone 2 stops ringing. Sub Number Enter a sub number for this phone. The maximum length of a sub number is two digits. When the check box of Enable Group Number is not selected, the extension number is simply the sub number. This read-only field displays the extension number which is a combination of Group Number and Sub Number. When you change group number or sub number, the extension number automatically refreshes. Use extension number to make calls between phones connected to the ZyXEL Device. Click this to save your changes and to apply them to the ZyXEL Device. Click this to set every field in this screen to its last-saved value. Extension Number Apply Cancel 10.8 The Common Phone Settings Screen Use this screen to activate and deactivate immediate dialing. To access this screen, click VoIP > Phone > Common. Figure 124 VoIP > Phone > Common 194 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide Each field is described in the following table. Chapter 10 Voice Table 56 VoIP > Phone > Common LABEL Immediate Dial Active Immediate Dial DESCRIPTION Select this if you want to use the pound key (#) to tell the ZyXEL Device to make the phone call immediately, instead of waiting the number of seconds you selected in the Dialing Interval Selection in VoIP >

Phone > Analog Phone > Advanced Setup. If you select this, dial the phone number, and then press the pound key. The ZyXEL Device makes the call immediately, instead of waiting. You can still wait, if you want. Click this to save your changes and to apply them to the ZyXEL Device. Click this to set every field in this screen to its last-saved value. Apply Cancel 10.9 The Phone Region Screen Use this screen to maintain settings that depend on which region of the world the ZyXEL Device is in. To access this screen, click VoIP > Phone > Region. Figure 125 VoIP > Phone > Region P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 195 Chapter 10 Voice Each field is described in the following table. Table 57 VoIP > Phone > Region LABEL Region Settings Select the place in which the ZyXEL Device is located. Call Service Mode DESCRIPTION Select the mode for supplementary phone services (call hold, call waiting, call transfer and three-way conference calls) that your VoIP service provider supports. Europe Type - use supplementary phone services in European mode USA Type - use supplementary phone services American mode You might have to subscribe to these services to use them. Contact your VoIP service provider. Click this to save your changes and to apply them to the ZyXEL Device. Click this to set every field in this screen to its last-saved value. Apply Cancel 10.10 The Speed Dial Screen Use this screen to add, edit, or remove speed-dial numbers for outgoing calls. Speed dial provides shortcuts for dialing frequently-used (VoIP) phone numbers. You also have to create speed-dial entries if you want to make peer-to-peer calls or call SIP numbers that contain letters. Once you have configured a speed dial rule, you can use a shortcut (the speed dial number, #01 for example) on your phone's keypad to call the phone number. In peer-to-peer calls, you call another VoIP device directly without going through a VoIP service providers SIP server. Select Non-Proxy (Use IP or URL) in the Type column and enter the callees IP address or domain name. The ZyXEL Device 196 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide Chapter 10 Voice sends SIP INVITE requests to the peer VoIP device when you use the speed dial entry. Figure 126 Phone Book > Speed Dial Each field is described in the following table. Table 58 Phone Book > Speed Dial LABEL Speed Dial

Number DESCRIPTION Use this section to create or edit speed-dial entries. Select the speed-dial number you want to use for this phone number. Enter the SIP number you want the ZyXEL Device to call when you dial the speed-dial number. Enter a name to identify the party you call when you dial the speed-dial number. You can use up to 127 printable ASCII characters. Select Use Proxy if you want to use one of your SIP accounts to call this phone number. Select Non-Proxy (Use IP or URL) if you want to use a different SIP server or if you want to make a peer-to-peer call. In this case, enter the IP address or domain name of the SIP server or the other party in the field below. Click this to use the information in the Speed Dial section to update the Speed Dial Phone Book section. Use this section to look at all the speed-dial entries and to erase them. Name Type Add Speed Dial Phone Book P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 197 Chapter 10 Voice Table 58 Phone Book > Speed Dial LABEL

DESCRIPTION This field displays the speed-dial number you should dial to use this entry. This field displays the SIP number the ZyXEL Device calls when you dial the speed-dial number. This field displays the name of the party you call when you dial the speed-dial number. This field is blank, if the speed-dial entry uses one of your SIP accounts. Otherwise, this field shows the IP address or domain name of the SIP server or other party. (This field corresponds with the Type field in the Speed Dial section.) Use this field to edit or erase the speed-dial entry. Click the Edit icon to copy the information for this speed-dial entry into the Speed Dial section, where you can change it. Click the Remove icon to erase this speed-dial entry. Click this to erase all the speed-dial entries. Click this to set every field in this screen to its last-saved value. Number Name Destination Modify Clear Cancel 198 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide Chapter 10 Voice 10.11 Incoming Call Policy Screen Use this screen to maintain rules for handling incoming calls. You can block, redirect, or accept them. To access this screen, click VoIP > Phone Book >

Incoming Call Policy. Figure 127 Phone Book > Incoming Call Policy You can create two sets of call-forwarding rules. Each one is stored in a call-

forwarding table. Each field is described in the following table. Table 59 Phone Book > Incoming Call Policy LABEL Table Number DESCRIPTION Select the call-forwarding table you want to see in this screen. If you change this field, the screen automatically refreshes. The ZyXEL Device checks these rules, in the order in which they appear, after it checks the rules in the Advanced Setup section. Select this if you want the ZyXEL Device to forward all incoming calls to the specified phone number, regardless of other rules in the Forward to Number Setup section. Specify the phone number in the field on the right. Forward to Number Setup Unconditional Forward to Number P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 199 Chapter 10 Voice Table 59 Phone Book > Incoming Call Policy LABEL Busy Forward to Number DESCRIPTION Select this if you want the ZyXEL Device to forward incoming calls to the specified phone number if the phone port is busy. Specify the phone number in the field on the right. If you have call waiting, the incoming call is forwarded to the specified phone number if you reject or ignore the second incoming call. Select this if you want the ZyXEL Device to forward incoming calls to the specified phone number if the call is unanswered. (See No Answer Waiting Time.) Specify the phone number in the field on the right. This field is used by the No Answer Forward to Number feature and No Answer conditions below. No Answer Forward to Number No Answer Waiting Time Enter the number of seconds the ZyXEL Device should wait for you to answer an incoming call before it considers the call is unanswered. Advanced Setup The ZyXEL Device checks these rules after it checks the rules in the

Activate Incoming Call Number Forward to Number Condition Apply Cancel Forward to Number Setup section. This field is a sequential value, and it is not associated with a specific rule. The sequence is important, however. The ZyXEL Device checks each rule in order, and it only follows the first one that applies. Select this to enable this rule. Clear this to disable this rule. Enter the phone number to which this rule applies. Enter the phone number to which you want to forward incoming calls from the Incoming Call Number. You may leave this field blank, depending on the Condition. Select the situations in which you want to forward incoming calls from the Incoming Call Number, or select an alternative action. Unconditional - The ZyXEL Device immediately forwards any calls from the Incoming Call Number to the Forward to Number. Busy - The ZyXEL Device forwards any calls from the Incoming Call Number to the Forward to Number when your SIP account already has a call connected. No Answer - The ZyXEL Device forwards any calls from the Incoming Call Number to the Forward to Number when the call is unanswered.

(See No Answer Waiting Time.) Block - The ZyXEL Device rejects calls from the Incoming Call Number. Accept - The ZyXEL Device allows calls from the Incoming Call Number. You might create a rule with this condition if you do not want incoming calls from someone to be forwarded by rules in the Forward to Number section. Click this to save your changes and to apply them to the ZyXEL Device. Click this to set every field in this screen to its last-saved value. 200 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide Chapter 10 Voice 10.12 SIP Prefix Screen The SIP prefix screen allows you to set up numbers you dial on your phone to specify which SIP account you want to use for a call. If you dial only the phone number (no prefix number) the ZyXEL Device uses default SIP settings to make the call. Click VoIP > Phone Book > SIP Prefix. The following screen displays. Figure 128 Phone Book > SIP Prefix Each field is described in the following table. DESCRIPTION Table 60 Phone Book > SIP Prefix LABEL SIP Selection by Prefix

Prefix Select the index number of the rule you want to edit. Enter the prefix number (1 ~ 8 digits). This is the number you dial before you dial the phone number. Select the SIP account you want to use to make outgoing calls when you dial the number in the Prefix field. This field displays the SIP service domain name you entered when configuring this SIP account. Click this to use the information in the SIP Selection by Prefix section to update the SIP Prefix Phone Book section. SIP Index SIP Domain Add P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 201 Chapter 10 Voice Table 60 Phone Book > SIP Prefix LABEL SIP Prefix Phone Book

Prefix DESCRIPTION This section displays all SIP prefix numbers currently configured on the ZyXEL Device. This is a read-only index number. This field displays the SIP prefix number you dial (before you dial the phone number) in order to use the SIP account specified in the SIP Index field. This field displays the SIP account used to make outgoing calls when you dial the number in the Prefix field. This field displays the SIP domain of the corresponding SIP account. Use this field to edit or erase the SIP prefix entry. SIP Index SIP Domain Modify Click the Edit icon to copy the information for this SIP prefix entry into the SIP Prefix section, where you can change it. Clear Cancel Click the Remove icon to erase this SIP prefix entry. Click this to erase all the SIP prefix entries. Click this to set every field in this screen to its last-saved value. 10.13 SIP Technical Reference This section contains background material relevant to the VoIP > SIP screens. 10.13.1 VoIP VoIP is the sending of voice signals over Internet Protocol. This allows you to make phone calls and send faxes over the Internet at a fraction of the cost of using the traditional circuit-switched telephone network. You can also use servers to run telephone service applications like PBX services and voice mail. Internet Telephony Service Provider (ITSP) companies provide VoIP service. Circuit-switched telephone networks require 64 kilobits per second (Kbps) in each direction to handle a telephone call. VoIP can use advanced voice coding techniques with compression to reduce the required bandwidth. 10.13.2 SIP The Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) is an application-layer control (signaling) protocol that handles the setting up, altering and tearing down of voice and multimedia sessions over the Internet. SIP signaling is separate from the media for which it handles sessions. The media that is exchanged during the session can use a different path from that of the 202 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide Chapter 10 Voice signaling. SIP handles telephone calls and can interface with traditional circuit-

switched telephone networks. SIP Identities A SIP account uses an identity (sometimes referred to as a SIP address). A complete SIP identity is called a SIP URI (Uniform Resource Identifier). A SIP account's URI identifies the SIP account in a way similar to the way an e-mail address identifies an e-mail account. The format of a SIP identity is SIP-

Number@SIP-Service-Domain. SIP Number The SIP number is the part of the SIP URI that comes before the @ symbol. A SIP number can use letters like in an e-mail address (johndoe@your-ITSP.com for example) or numbers like a telephone number (1122334455@VoIP-provider.com for example). SIP Service Domain The SIP service domain of the VoIP service provider is the domain name in a SIP URI. For example, if the SIP address is 1122334455@VoIP-provider.com, then VoIP-provider.com is the SIP service domain. SIP Registration Each ZyXEL Device is an individual SIP User Agent (UA). To provide voice service, it has a public IP address for SIP and RTP protocols to communicate with other servers. A SIP user agent has to register with the SIP registrar and must provide information about the users it represents, as well as its current IP address (for the routing of incoming SIP requests). After successful registration, the SIP server knows that the users (identified by their dedicated SIP URIs) are represented by the UA, and knows the IP address to which the SIP requests and responses should be sent. Registration is initiated by the User Agent Client (UAC) running in the VoIP gateway (the ZyXEL Device). The gateway must be configured with information letting it know where to send the REGISTER message, as well as the relevant user and authorization data. A SIP registration has a limited lifespan. The User Agent Client must renew its registration within this lifespan. If it does not do so, the registration data will be deleted from the SIP registrar's database and the connection broken. P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 203 Chapter 10 Voice The ZyXEL Device attempts to register all enabled subscriber ports when it is switched on. When you enable a subscriber port that was previously disabled, the ZyXEL Device attempts to register the port immediately. Authorization Requirements SIP registrations (and subsequent SIP requests) require a username and password for authorization. These credentials are validated via a challenge /

response system using the HTTP digest mechanism (as detailed in RFC3261, "SIP:

Session Initiation Protocol"). SIP Servers SIP is a client-server protocol. A SIP client is an application program or device that sends SIP requests. A SIP server responds to the SIP requests. When you use SIP to make a VoIP call, it originates at a client and terminates at a server. A SIP client could be a computer or a SIP phone. One device can act as both a SIP client and a SIP server. SIP User Agent A SIP user agent can make and receive VoIP telephone calls. This means that SIP can be used for peer-to-peer communications even though it is a client-server protocol. In the following figure, either A or B can act as a SIP user agent client to initiate a call. A and B can also both act as a SIP user agent to receive the call. Figure 129 SIP User Agent SIP Proxy Server A SIP proxy server receives requests from clients and forwards them to another server. In the following example, you want to use client device A to call someone who is using client device C. 1 The client device (A in the figure) sends a call invitation to the SIP proxy server

(B). 204 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 2 The SIP proxy server forwards the call invitation to C. Figure 130 SIP Proxy Server Chapter 10 Voice SIP Redirect Server A SIP redirect server accepts SIP requests, translates the destination address to an IP address and sends the translated IP address back to the device that sent the request. Then the client device that originally sent the request can send requests to the IP address that it received back from the redirect server. Redirect servers do not initiate SIP requests. In the following example, you want to use client device A to call someone who is using client device C. 1 Client device A sends a call invitation for C to the SIP redirect server (B). 2 The SIP redirect server sends the invitation back to A with Cs IP address (or domain name). P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 205 Chapter 10 Voice 3 Client device A then sends the call invitation to client device C. Figure 131 SIP Redirect Server SIP Register Server A SIP register server maintains a database of SIP identity-to-IP address (or domain name) mapping. The register server checks your user name and password when you register. RTP When you make a VoIP call using SIP, the RTP (Real time Transport Protocol) is used to handle voice data transfer. See RFC 1889 for details on RTP. Pulse Code Modulation Pulse Code Modulation (PCM) measures analog signal amplitudes at regular time intervals and converts them into bits. SIP Call Progression The following figure displays the basic steps in the setup and tear down of a SIP call. A calls B. Table 61 SIP Call Progression A 1. INVITE B 2. Ringing 206 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide Chapter 10 Voice Table 61 SIP Call Progression (continued) A B 3. OK 4. ACK 6. BYE 5.Dialogue (voice traffic) 7. OK 1 A sends a SIP INVITE request to B. This message is an invitation for B to participate in a SIP telephone call. 2 B sends a response indicating that the telephone is ringing. 3 B sends an OK response after the call is answered. 4 A then sends an ACK message to acknowledge that B has answered the call. 5 Now A and B exchange voice media (talk). 6 After talking, A hangs up and sends a BYE request. 7 B replies with an OK response confirming receipt of the BYE request and the call is terminated. SIP Call Progression Through Proxy Servers Usually, the SIP UAC sets up a phone call by sending a request to the SIP proxy server. Then, the proxy server looks up the destination to which the call should be forwarded (according to the URI requested by the SIP UAC). The request may be forwarded to more than one proxy server before arriving at its destination. The response to the request goes to all the proxy servers through which the request passed, in reverse sequence. Once the session is set up, session traffic is sent between the UAs directly, bypassing all the proxy servers in between. P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 207 Chapter 10 Voice The following figure shows the SIP and session traffic flow between the user agents (UA 1 and UA 2) and the proxy servers (this example shows two proxy servers, PROXY 1 and PROXY 2). Figure 132 SIP Call Through Proxy Servers PROXY 1 PROXY 2 SIP SIP UA 1 SIP & RTP SIP UA 2 The following table shows the SIP call progression. Table 62 SIP Call Progression UA 1 PROXY 1 Invite PROXY 2 UA 2 Invite 100 Trying 180 Ringing 200 OK Invite 100 Trying 180 Ringing 200 OK 180 Ringing 200 OK RTP BYE ACK RTP 200 OK 1 User Agent 1 sends a SIP INVITE request to Proxy 1. This message is an invitation to User Agent 2 to participate in a SIP telephone call. Proxy 1 sends a response indicating that it is trying to complete the request. 208 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide Chapter 10 Voice 2 Proxy 1 sends a SIP INVITE request to Proxy 2. Proxy 2 sends a response indicating that it is trying to complete the request. 3 Proxy 2 sends a SIP INVITE request to User Agent 2. 4 User Agent 2 sends a response back to Proxy 2 indicating that the phone is ringing. The response is relayed back to User Agent 1 via Proxy 1. 5 User Agent 2 sends an OK response to Proxy 2 after the call is answered. This is also relayed back to User Agent 1 via Proxy 1. 6 User Agent 1 and User Agent 2 exchange RTP packets containing voice data directly, without involving the proxies. 7 When User Agent 2 hangs up, he sends a BYE request. 8 User Agent 1 replies with an OK response confirming receipt of the BYE request, and the call is terminated. Voice Coding A codec (coder/decoder) codes analog voice signals into digital signals and decodes the digital signals back into analog voice signals. The ZyXEL Device supports the following codecs. G.711 is a Pulse Code Modulation (PCM) waveform codec. PCM measures analog signal amplitudes at regular time intervals and converts them into digital samples. G.711 provides very good sound quality but requires 64 kbps of bandwidth. G.726 is an Adaptive Differential PCM (ADPCM) waveform codec that uses a lower bitrate than standard PCM conversion. ADPCM converts analog audio into digital signals based on the difference between each audio sample and a prediction based on previous samples. The more similar the audio sample is to the prediction, the less space needed to describe it. G.726 operates at 16, 24, 32 or 40 kbps. G.729 is an Analysis-by-Synthesis (AbS) hybrid waveform codec that uses a filter based on information about how the human vocal tract produces sounds. G.729 provides good sound quality and reduces the required bandwidth to 8 kbps. PSTN Call Setup Signaling Dual-Tone MultiFrequency (DTMF) signaling uses pairs of frequencies (one lower frequency and one higher frequency) to set up calls. It is also known as Touch Tone. Each of the keys on a DTMF telephone corresponds to a different pair of frequencies. P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 209 Chapter 10 Voice Pulse dialing sends a series of clicks to the local phone office in order to dial numbers.3 MWI (Message Waiting Indication) Enable Message Waiting Indication (MWI) enables your phone to give you a messagewaiting (beeping) dial tone when you have a voice message(s). Your VoIP service provider must have a messaging system that sends message waiting status SIP packets as defined in RFC 3842. Custom Tones (IVR) IVR (Interactive Voice Response) is a feature that allows you to use your telephone to interact with the ZyXEL Device. The ZyXEL Device allows you to record custom tones for the Caller Ringing Tone and On Hold Tone functions. The same recordings apply to both the caller ringing and on hold tones. Table 63 Custom Tones Details LABEL Total Time for All Tones Time per Individual Tone 20 seconds Total Number of Tones Recordable 8 DESCRIPTION 128 seconds for all custom tones combined You can record up to 8 different custom tones but the total time must be 128 seconds or less. Recording Custom Tones Use the following steps if you would like to create new tones or change your tones:

1 2 3 4 Pick up the phone and press **** on your phones keypad and wait for the message that says you are in the configuration menu. Press a number from 1101~1108 on your phone followed by the # key. Play your desired music or voice recording into the receivers mouthpiece. Press the # key. You can continue to add, listen to, or delete tones, or you can hang up the receiver when you are done. Listening to Custom Tones Do the following to listen to a custom tone:

3. The ZyXEL Device does not support pulse dialing at the time of writing. 210 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 1 2 3 1 2 Chapter 10 Voice Pick up the phone and press **** on your phones keypad and wait for the message that says you are in the configuration menu. Press a number from 1201~1208 followed by the # key to listen to the tone. You can continue to add, listen to, or delete tones, or you can hang up the receiver when you are done. Deleting Custom Tones Do the following to delete a custom tone:

Pick up the phone and press **** on your phones keypad and wait for the message that says you are in the configuration menu. Press a number from 1301~1308 followed by the # key to delete the tone of your choice. Press 14 followed by the # key if you wish to clear all your custom tones. You can continue to add, listen to, or delete tones, or you can hang up the receiver when you are done. 10.13.3 Quality of Service (QoS) Quality of Service (QoS) refers to both a network's ability to deliver data with minimum delay, and the networking methods used to provide bandwidth for real-

time multimedia applications. Type of Service (ToS) Network traffic can be classified by setting the ToS (Type of Service) values at the data source (for example, at the ZyXEL Device) so a server can decide the best method of delivery, that is the least cost, fastest route and so on. DiffServ DiffServ is a class of service (CoS) model that marks packets so that they receive specific per-hop treatment at DiffServ-compliant network devices along the route based on the application types and traffic flow. Packets are marked with DiffServ Code Points (DSCP) indicating the level of service desired. This allows the intermediary DiffServ-compliant network devices to handle the packets differently depending on the code points without the need to negotiate paths or remember state information for every flow. In addition, applications do not have to request a particular service or give advanced notice of where the traffic is going.4 4. The ZyXEL Device does not support DiffServ at the time of writing. P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 211 Chapter 10 Voice DSCP and Per-Hop Behavior DiffServ defines a new DS (Differentiated Services) field to replace the Type of Service (TOS) field in the IP header. The DS field contains a 2-bit unused field and a 6-bit DSCP field which can define up to 64 service levels. The following figure illustrates the DS field. DSCP is backward compatible with the three precedence bits in the ToS octet so that non-DiffServ compliant, ToS-enabled network device will not conflict with the DSCP mapping. Figure 133 DiffServ: Differentiated Service Field DSCP

(6-bit) Unused

(2-bit) The DSCP value determines the forwarding behavior, the PHB (Per-Hop Behavior), that each packet gets across the DiffServ network. Based on the marking rule, different kinds of traffic can be marked for different priorities of forwarding. Resources can then be allocated according to the DSCP values and the configured policies. VLAN Tagging Virtual Local Area Network (VLAN) allows a physical network to be partitioned into multiple logical networks. Only stations within the same group can communicate with each other. Your ZyXEL Device can add IEEE 802.1Q VLAN ID tags to voice frames that it sends to the network. This allows the ZyXEL Device to communicate with a SIP server that is a member of the same VLAN group. Some ISPs use the VLAN tag to identify voice traffic and give it priority over other traffic. 10.13.4 Phone Services Overview Supplementary services such as call hold, call waiting, and call transfer. are generally available from your VoIP service provider. The ZyXEL Device supports the following services:

Call Hold Call Waiting Making a Second Call Call Transfer Call Forwarding (see Section 10.11 on page 199) 212 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide Chapter 10 Voice Three-Way Conference Internal Calls Call Park and Pickup Do not Disturb Note: To take full advantage of the supplementary phone services available through the ZyXEL Device's phone ports, you may need to subscribe to the services from your VoIP service provider. The Flash Key Flashing means to press the hook for a short period of time (a few hundred milliseconds) before releasing it. On newer telephones, there should be a "flash"

key (button) that generates the signal electronically. If the flash key is not available, you can tap (press and immediately release) the hook by hand to achieve the same effect. However, using the flash key is preferred since the timing is much more precise. With manual tapping, if the duration is too long, it may be interpreted as hanging up by the ZyXEL Device. You can invoke all the supplementary services by using the flash key. Europe Type Supplementary Phone Services This section describes how to use supplementary phone services with the Europe Type Call Service Mode. Commands for supplementary services are listed in the table below. After pressing the flash key, if you do not issue the sub-command before the default sub-command timeout (2 seconds) expires or issue an invalid sub-

command, the current operation will be aborted. Table 64 European Flash Key Commands COMMAND SUB-

DESCRIPTION COMMAND Flash Flash Flash Flash 0 1 2 Put a current call on hold to place a second call. Switch back to the call (if there is no second call). Drop the call presently on hold or reject an incoming call which is waiting for answer. Disconnect the current phone connection and answer the incoming call or resume with caller presently on hold. 1. Switch back and forth between two calls. 2. Put a current call on hold to answer an incoming call. 3. Separate the current three-way conference call into two individual calls (one is on-line, the other is on hold). P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 213 Chapter 10 Voice Table 64 European Flash Key Commands COMMAND SUB-

DESCRIPTION Flash Flash COMMAND 3

*98#

Create three-way conference connection. Transfer the call to another phone. European Call Hold Call hold allows you to put a call (A) on hold by pressing the flash key. If you have another call, press the flash key and then 2 to switch back and forth between caller A and B by putting either one on hold. Press the flash key and then 0 to disconnect the call presently on hold and keep the current call on line. Press the flash key and then 1 to disconnect the current call and resume the call on hold. If you hang up the phone but a caller is still on hold, there will be a remind ring. European Call Waiting This allows you to place a call on hold while you answer another incoming call on the same telephone (directory) number. If there is a second call to a telephone number, you will hear a call waiting tone. Take one of the following actions. Reject the second call. Press the flash key and then press 0. Disconnect the first call and answer the second call. Either press the flash key and press 1, or just hang up the phone and then answer the phone after it rings. Put the first call on hold and answer the second call. Press the flash key and then 2. European Call Transfer Do the following to transfer an incoming call (that you have answered) to another phone. 1 Press the flash key to put the caller on hold. 2 When you hear the dial tone, dial *98# followed by the number to which you want to transfer the call. to operate the Intercom. 214 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide Chapter 10 Voice 3 After you hear the ring signal or the second party answers it, hang up the phone. European Three-Way Conference Use the following steps to make three-way conference calls. 1 When you are on the phone talking to someone, press the flash key to put the caller on hold and get a dial tone. 2 Dial a phone number directly to make another call. 3 When the second call is answered, press the flash key and press 3 to create a three-way conversation. 4 Hang up the phone to drop the connection. 5 If you want to separate the activated three-way conference into two individual connections (one is on-line, the other is on hold), press the flash key and press 2. USA Type Supplementary Services This section describes how to use supplementary phone services with the USA Type Call Service Mode. Commands for supplementary services are listed in the table below. After pressing the flash key, if you do not issue the sub-command before the default sub-command timeout (2 seconds) expires or issue an invalid sub-

command, the current operation will be aborted. Table 65 USA Flash Key Commands COMMAND SUB-

DESCRIPTION COMMAND Flash Flash

*98#

USA Call Hold Put a current call on hold to place a second call. After the second call is successful, press the flash key again to have a three-way conference call. Put a current call on hold to answer an incoming call. Transfer the call to another phone. Call hold allows you to put a call (A) on hold by pressing the flash key. If you have another call, press the flash key to switch back and forth between caller A and B by putting either one on hold. If you hang up the phone but a caller is still on hold, there will be a remind ring. P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 215 Chapter 10 Voice USA Call Waiting This allows you to place a call on hold while you answer another incoming call on the same telephone (directory) number. If there is a second call to your telephone number, you will hear a call waiting tone. Press the flash key to put the first call on hold and answer the second call. USA Call Transfer Do the following to transfer an incoming call (that you have answered) to another phone. 1 Press the flash key to put the caller on hold. 2 When you hear the dial tone, dial *98# followed by the number to which you want to transfer the call. to operate the Intercom. 3 After you hear the ring signal or the second party answers it, hang up the phone. USA Three-Way Conference Use the following steps to make three-way conference calls. 1 When you are on the phone talking to someone (party A), press the flash key to put the caller on hold and get a dial tone. 2 Dial a phone number directly to make another call (to party B). 3 When party B answers the second call, press the flash key to create a three-way conversation. 4 Hang up the phone to drop the connection. 5 6 7 If you want to separate the activated three-way conference into two individual connections (with party A on-line and party B on hold), press the flash key. If you want to go back to the three-way conversation, press the flash key again. If you want to separate the activated three-way conference into two individual connections again, press the flash key. This time the party B is on-line and party A is on hold. 216 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide CHAPTER 11 Phone Usage 11.1 Overview This chapter describes how to use a phone connected to your ZyXEL Device for basic tasks. Note: Not all service providers support all features. 11.2 Dialing a Telephone Number The PHONE LED turns green when your SIP account is registered. Dial a SIP number like 12345 on your phones keypad. Use speed dial entries (see Section 10.10 on page 196) for peer-to-peer calls or SIP numbers that use letters. Dial the speed dial entry on your telephones keypad. Use your VoIP service providers dialing plan to call regular telephone numbers. 11.3 Using Speed Dial to Dial a Telephone Number After configuring the speed dial entry and adding it to the phonebook, press the speed dial entrys key combination on your phones keypad. 11.4 Using Call Park and Pickup Do the following to put a call on hold on one phone and continue it on another

(connected to the ZyXEL Device). This feature may not be supported by all service providers. P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 217 Chapter 11 Phone Usage 1 During the call, press *97# and then any number (up to 8 digits long). You need to remember this number in order to pick up the call on another phone. Hang up the receiver. 2 Pick up another phones receiver. Press #97# followed by the same number you entered before to continue the call. 11.5 Checking the ZyXEL Devices IP Address Do the following to listen to the ZyXEL Devices current IP address. 1 2 3 4 Pick up your phones receiver. Press **** on your phones keypad and wait for the message that says you are in the configuration menu. Press 5 followed by the # key. Listen to the IP address and make a note of it. 5 Hang up the receiver. 11.6 Auto Provisioning and Auto Firmware Upgrade If your service provider uses an auto-provisioning server to set up your device, you must first enter the HTTP pincode (supplied by your service provider). This authenticates your ZyXEL Device with the auto provisioning server, allowing you to use the service. On a phone connected to the device, enter *99**, your SIP number, *, the HTTP pincode you were given, then #. For example, if your SIP number is 0123456 and the HTTP pincode you were given is 9876, you would enter *99**0123456*9876#. During auto-provisioning, the ZyXEL Device checks to see if there is a newer firmware version (if your service provider activates this feature). If newer firmware is available, the ZyXEL Device plays a recording when you pick up your phones handset. Press *99# to upgrade the ZyXEL Devices firmware. Press #99# to not upgrade the ZyXEL Devices firmware. 218 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide Chapter 11 Phone Usage 11.7 Phone Services Overview Supplementary services such as call hold, call waiting, and call transfer. are generally available from your VoIP service provider. The ZyXEL Device supports the following services:

Call Hold Call Waiting Making a Second Call Call Transfer Call Forwarding (see Section 10.11 on page 199) Three-Way Conference Internal Calls Call Park and Pickup Do not Disturb Note: To take full advantage of the supplementary phone services available through the ZyXEL Device's phone port, you may need to subscribe to the services from your VoIP service provider. 11.7.1 The Flash Key Flashing means to press the hook for a short period of time (a few hundred milliseconds) before releasing it. On newer telephones, there should be a "flash"

key (button) that generates the signal electronically. If the flash key is not available, you can tap (press and immediately release) the hook by hand to achieve the same effect. However, using the flash key is preferred since the timing is much more precise. With manual tapping, if the duration is too long, it may be interpreted as hanging up by the ZyXEL Device. You can invoke all the supplementary services by using the flash key. 11.7.2 Europe Type Supplementary Phone Services This section describes how to use supplementary phone services with the Europe Type Call Service Mode. Commands for supplementary services are listed in the table below. P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 219 Chapter 11 Phone Usage After pressing the flash key, if you do not issue the sub-command before the default sub-command timeout (2 seconds) expires or issue an invalid sub-

command, the current operation will be aborted. Table 66 European Flash Key Commands COMMAND SUB-

COMMAND DESCRIPTION Flash Flash Flash Flash 0 1 2 Flash Flash 3

*98#

Put a current call on hold to place a second call. Switch back to the call (if there is no second call). Drop the call presently on hold or reject an incoming call which is waiting for answer. Disconnect the current phone connection and answer the incoming call or resume with caller presently on hold. 1. Switch back and forth between two calls. 2. Put a current call on hold to answer an incoming call. 3. Separate the current three-way conference call into two individual calls (one is on-line, the other is on hold). Create three-way conference connection. Transfer the call to another phone. 11.7.2.1 European Call Hold Call hold allows you to put a call (A) on hold by pressing the flash key. If you have another call, press the flash key and then 2 to switch back and forth between caller A and B by putting either one on hold. Press the flash key and then 0 to disconnect the call presently on hold and keep the current call on line. Press the flash key and then 1 to disconnect the current call and resume the call on hold. If you hang up the phone but a caller is still on hold, there will be a remind ring. 11.7.2.2 European Call Waiting This allows you to place a call on hold while you answer another incoming call on the same telephone (directory) number. If there is a second call to a telephone number, you will hear a call waiting tone. Take one of the following actions. Reject the second call. Press the flash key and then press 0. 220 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide Chapter 11 Phone Usage Disconnect the first call and answer the second call. Either press the flash key and press 1, or just hang up the phone and then answer the phone after it rings. Put the first call on hold and answer the second call. Press the flash key and then 2. 11.7.2.3 European Call Transfer Do the following to transfer an incoming call (that you have answered) to another phone. 1 Press the flash key to put the caller on hold. 2 When you hear the dial tone, dial *98# followed by the number to which you want to transfer the call. to operate the Intercom. 3 After you hear the ring signal or the second party answers it, hang up the phone. 11.7.2.4 European Three-Way Conference Use the following steps to make three-way conference calls. 1 When you are on the phone talking to someone, press the flash key to put the caller on hold and get a dial tone. 2 Dial a phone number directly to make another call. 3 When the second call is answered, press the flash key and press 3 to create a three-way conversation. 4 Hang up the phone to drop the connection. 5 If you want to separate the activated three-way conference into two individual connections (one is on-line, the other is on hold), press the flash key and press 2. 11.7.3 USA Type Supplementary Services This section describes how to use supplementary phone services with the USA Type Call Service Mode. Commands for supplementary services are listed in the table below. P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 221 Chapter 11 Phone Usage After pressing the flash key, if you do not issue the sub-command before the default sub-command timeout (2 seconds) expires or issue an invalid sub-

command, the current operation will be aborted. Table 67 USA Flash Key Commands COMMAND SUB-

COMMAND DESCRIPTION Flash Flash

*98#

11.7.3.1 USA Call Hold Put a current call on hold to place a second call. After the second call is successful, press the flash key again to have a three-way conference call. Put a current call on hold to answer an incoming call. Transfer the call to another phone. Call hold allows you to put a call (A) on hold by pressing the flash key. If you have another call, press the flash key to switch back and forth between caller A and B by putting either one on hold. If you hang up the phone but a caller is still on hold, there will be a remind ring. 11.7.3.2 USA Call Waiting This allows you to place a call on hold while you answer another incoming call on the same telephone (directory) number. If there is a second call to your telephone number, you will hear a call waiting tone. Press the flash key to put the first call on hold and answer the second call. 11.7.3.3 USA Call Transfer Do the following to transfer an incoming call (that you have answered) to another phone. 1 Press the flash key to put the caller on hold. 2 When you hear the dial tone, dial *98# followed by the number to which you want to transfer the call. to operate the Intercom. 3 After you hear the ring signal or the second party answers it, hang up the phone. 11.7.3.4 USA Three-Way Conference Use the following steps to make three-way conference calls. 222 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide Chapter 11 Phone Usage 1 When you are on the phone talking to someone (party A), press the flash key to put the caller on hold and get a dial tone. 2 Dial a phone number directly to make another call (to party B). 3 When party B answers the second call, press the flash key to create a three-way conversation. 4 Hang up the phone to drop the connection. 5 6 7 If you want to separate the activated three-way conference into two individual connections (with party A on-line and party B on hold), press the flash key. If you want to go back to the three-way conversation, press the flash key again. If you want to separate the activated three-way conference into two individual connections again, press the flash key. This time the party B is on-line and party A is on hold. 11.8 Phone Functions Summary The following table shows the key combinations you can enter on your phones keypad to use certain features. Table 68 Phone Functions Summary ACTION FUNCTION

*99**

HTTP pincode DESCRIPTION Use this if your service provider gave you a personal identification number to enter in order to start using the service. See Section 11.6 on page 218.

*99#

#99#

Enable firmware update Use these to upload or not upload new firmware to Disable firmware update

*98#

Call transfer

*97#

#97#

Call park Call pickup

*66#

Call return

*95#

#95#

*41#

#41#

Enable Do Not Disturb Disable Do Not Disturb Enable call waiting Disable call waiting the ZyXEL Device, if requested by your service provider. See Section 11.6 on page 218. Transfer a call to another phone. See Section 11.7.2 on page 219 (Europe type) and Section 11.7.3 on page 221 (USA type). Use these to place a call on hold on one phone and then continue it on another (if supported by your service provider). See Chapter 30 on page 471. Place a call to the last person who called you. See Chapter 30 on page 471. Use these to set your phone not to ring when someone calls you, or to turn this function off. Chapter 30 on page 471 Use these to allow you to put a call on hold while answering another, or to turn this function off. See Section 11.7.2 on page 219 (Europe type) and Section 11.7.3 on page 221 (USA type). P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 223 Chapter 11 Phone Usage Table 68 Phone Functions Summary ACTION FUNCTION

*21#

#21#

Enable call forward Disable call forward

*22*

Uncondition forward

*23*

No answer forward

*24*

Busy forward

*70

*85 One shot Call Waiting Disable One shot Call Waiting Enable DESCRIPTION Use these to allow you to use the call forwarding tables you set in the ZyXEL Device, or to turn this function off. See Section 10.11 on page 199. Forward all incoming calls. See Section 10.11 on page 199. Forward incoming calls if you do not answer. See Section 10.11 on page 199. Forward calls if you are already making a call. See Section 10.11 on page 199. Activate or deactivate call waiting on the next call only. See Section 11.7.2 on page 219 (Europe type) and Section 11.7.3 on page 221 (USA type) 224 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide CHAPTER 12 Firewall 12.1 Overview Use the ZyXEL Device firewall screens to enable and configure the firewall that protects your ZyXEL Device and network from attacks by hackers on the Internet and control access to it. By default the firewall:

allows traffic that originates from your LAN computers to go to all other networks. blocks traffic that originates on other networks from going to the LAN. The following figure illustrates the default firewall action. User A can initiate an IM

(Instant Messaging) session from the LAN to the WAN (1). Return traffic for this session is also allowed (2). However other traffic initiated from the WAN is blocked

(3 and 4). Figure 134 Default Firewall Action LAN WAN A 1 2 3 4 12.1.1 What You Can Do in the Firewall Screens Use the General screen (Section 12.2 on page 230) to enable firewall and/or triangle route on the ZyXEL Device, and set the default action that the firewall takes on packets that do not match any of the firewall rules. Use the Rules screen (Section 12.3 on page 232) to view the configured firewall rules and add, edit or remove a firewall rule. P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 225 Chapter 12 Firewall Use the Threshold screen (Section 12.4 on page 237) to set the thresholds that the ZyXEL Device uses to determine when to start dropping sessions that do not become fully established (half-open sessions). 12.1.2 What You Need to Know About Firewall DoS Denials of Service (DoS) attacks are aimed at devices and networks with a connection to the Internet. Their goal is not to steal information, but to disable a device or network so users no longer have access to network resources. The ZyXEL Device is pre-configured to automatically detect and thwart all known DoS attacks. Anti-Probing If an outside user attempts to probe an unsupported port on your ZyXEL Device, an ICMP response packet is automatically returned. This allows the outside user to know the ZyXEL Device exists. The ZyXEL Device supports anti-probing, which prevents the ICMP response packet from being sent. This keeps outsiders from discovering your ZyXEL Device when unsupported ports are probed. ICMP Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP) is a message control and error-reporting protocol between a host server and a gateway to the Internet. ICMP uses Internet Protocol (IP) datagrams, but the messages are processed by the TCP/IP software and directly apparent to the application user. DoS Thresholds For DoS attacks, the ZyXEL Device uses thresholds to determine when to drop sessions that do not become fully established. These thresholds apply globally to all sessions. You can use the default threshold values, or you can change them to values more suitable to your security requirements. Finding Out More See Section 12.1.3 on page 226 for an example of setting up a firewall. See Section 12.5 on page 241 for advanced technical information on firewall. 12.1.3 Firewall Rule Setup Example The following Internet firewall rule example allows a hypothetical MyService connection from the Internet. 226 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide Chapter 12 Firewall 1 Click Security > Firewall > Rules. 2 Select WAN to LAN in the Packet Direction field. Figure 135 Firewall Example: Rules 3 In the Rules screen, select the index number after that you want to add the rule. For example, if you select 6, your new rule becomes number 7 and the previous rule 7 (if there is one) becomes rule 8. 4 Click Add to display the firewall rule configuration screen. 5 In the Edit Rule screen, click the Edit Customized Services link to open the Customized Service screen. 6 Click an index number to display the Customized Services Config screen and configure the screen as follows and click Apply. Figure 136 Edit Custom Port Example 7 Select Any in the Destination Address List box and then click Delete. P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 227 Chapter 12 Firewall 8 Configure the destination address screen as follows and click Add. Figure 137 Firewall Example: Edit Rule: Destination Address 9 Use the Add >> and Remove buttons between Available Services and Selected Services list boxes to configure it as follows. Click Apply when you are done. 228 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide Chapter 12 Firewall Note: Custom services show up with an * before their names in the Services list box and the Rules list box. Figure 138 Firewall Example: Edit Rule: Select Customized Services On completing the configuration procedure for this Internet firewall rule, the Rules screen should look like the following. P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 229 Chapter 12 Firewall Rule 1 allows a MyService connection from the WAN to IP addresses 10.0.0.10 through 10.0.0.15 on the LAN. Figure 139 Firewall Example: Rules: MyService 12.2 The Firewall General Screen Use this screen to configure the firewall settings. Click Security > Firewall to display the following screen. Figure 140 Security > Firewall > General 230 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide The following table describes the labels in this screen. Chapter 12 Firewall Table 69 Security > Firewall > General LABEL Active Firewall Bypass Triangle Route DESCRIPTION Select this check box to activate the firewall. The ZyXEL Device performs access control and protects against Denial of Service (DoS) attacks when the firewall is activated. If an alternate gateway on the LAN has an IP address in the same subnet as the ZyXEL Devices LAN IP address, return traffic may not go through the ZyXEL Device. This is called an asymmetrical or triangle route. This causes the ZyXEL Device to reset the connection, as the connection has not been acknowledged. Select this check box to have the ZyXEL Device permit the use of asymmetrical route topology on the network (not reset the connection). Note: Allowing asymmetrical routes may let traffic from the WAN go directly to the LAN without passing through the ZyXEL Device. A better solution is to use IP alias to put the ZyXEL Device and the backup gateway on separate subnets. See Section 12.5.4.1 on page 243 for an example. Packet Direction This is the direction of travel of packets (LAN to LAN / Router, LAN to WAN, WAN to WAN / Router, WAN to LAN). Firewall rules are grouped based on the direction of travel of packets to which they apply. For example, LAN to LAN / Router means packets traveling from a computer/subnet on the LAN to either another computer/subnet on the LAN interface of the ZyXEL Device or the ZyXEL Device itself. Use the drop-down list boxes to select the default action that the firewall is to take on packets that are traveling in the selected direction and do not match any of the firewall rules. Select Drop to silently discard the packets without sending a TCP reset packet or an ICMP destination-unreachable message to the sender. Select Reject to deny the packets and send a TCP reset packet (for a TCP packet) or an ICMP destination-unreachable message (for a UDP packet) to the sender. Select Permit to allow the passage of the packets. Select the check box to create a log (when the above action is taken) for packets that are traveling in the selected direction and do not match any of your customized rules. Click this to display more information. Click this to display less information. Click this to save your changes. Click this to restore your previously saved settings. Default Action Log Expand... Basic... Apply Cancel P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 231 Chapter 12 Firewall 12.3 The Firewall Rule Screen Note: The ordering of your rules is very important as rules are applied in turn. Refer to Section 12.5 on page 241 for more information. Click Security > Firewall > Rules to bring up the following screen. This screen displays a list of the configured firewall rules. Note the order in which the rules are listed. Figure 141 Security > Firewall > Rules The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 70 Security > Firewall > Rules LABEL Firewall Rules Storage Space in Use DESCRIPTION This read-only bar shows how much of the ZyXEL Device's memory for recording firewall rules it is currently using. When you are using 80% or less of the storage space, the bar is green. When the amount of space used is over 80%, the bar is red. Use the drop-down list box to select a direction of travel of packets for which you want to configure firewall rules. Select an index number and click Add to add a new firewall rule after the selected index number. For example, if you select 6, your new rule becomes number 7 and the previous rule 7 (if there is one) becomes rule 8. The following read-only fields summarize the rules you have created that apply to traffic traveling in the selected packet direction. The firewall rules that you configure (summarized below) take priority over the general firewall action settings in the General screen. This is your firewall rule number. The ordering of your rules is important as rules are applied in turn. This field displays whether a firewall is turned on or not. Select the check box to enable the rule. Clear the check box to disable the rule. Packet Direction Create a new rule after rule number

Active 232 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide Chapter 12 Firewall Table 70 Security > Firewall > Rules (continued) LABEL Source IP DESCRIPTION This drop-down list box displays the source addresses or ranges of addresses to which this firewall rule applies. Please note that a blank source or destination address is equivalent to Any. Destination IP This drop-down list box displays the destination addresses or ranges of addresses to which this firewall rule applies. Please note that a blank source or destination address is equivalent to Any. This drop-down list box displays the services to which this firewall rule applies. See Appendix E on page 557 for more information. This field displays whether the firewall silently discards packets (Drop), discards packets and sends a TCP reset packet or an ICMP destination-

unreachable message to the sender (Reject) or allows the passage of packets (Permit). This field tells you whether a schedule is specified (Yes) or not (No). This field shows you whether a log is created when packets match this rule (Yes) or not (No). Click the Edit icon to go to the screen where you can edit the rule. Click the Remove icon to delete an existing firewall rule. A window displays asking you to confirm that you want to delete the firewall rule. Note that subsequent firewall rules move up by one when you take this action. Click the Move icon to display the Move the rule to field. Type a number in the Move the rule to field and click the Move button to move the rule to the number that you typed. The ordering of your rules is important as they are applied in order of their numbering. Click this to save your changes. Click this to restore your previously saved settings. Service Action Schedule Log Modify Order Apply Cancel 12.3.1 Configuring Firewall Rules Refer to Section 12.1.2 on page 226 for more information. P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 233 Chapter 12 Firewall Use this screen to configure firewall rules. In the Rules screen, select an index number and click Add or click a rules Edit icon to display this screen and refer to the following table for information on the labels. Figure 142 Security > Firewall > Rules > Edit 234 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide The following table describes the labels in this screen. Chapter 12 Firewall DESCRIPTION Table 71 Security > Firewall > Rules: Edit LABEL Edit Rule Active Action for Matched Packet Select this option to enable this firewall rule. Use the drop-down list box to select whether to discard (Drop), deny and send an ICMP destination-unreachable message to the sender of

(Reject) or allow the passage of (Permit) packets that match this rule. Source/Destination Address Address Type Do you want your rule to apply to packets with a particular (single) IP, a range of IP addresses (for instance, 192.168.1.10 to 192.169.1.50), a subnet or any IP address? Select an option from the drop-down list box that includes: Single Address, Range Address, Subnet Address and Any Address. Enter the single IP address or the starting IP address in a range here. Enter the ending IP address in a range here. Enter the subnet mask here, if applicable. Click Add >> to add a new address to the Source or Destination Address box. You can add multiple addresses, ranges of addresses, and/or subnets. To edit an existing source or destination address, select it from the box and click Edit <<. Highlight an existing source or destination address from the Source or Destination Address box above and click Delete to remove it. Please see Appendix E on page 557 for more information on services available. Highlight a service from the Available Services box on the left, then click Add >> to add it to the Selected Services box on the right. To remove a service, highlight it in the Selected Services box on the right, then click Remove. Click the Edit Customized Services link to bring up the screen that you use to configure a new custom service that is not in the predefined list of services. Select everyday or the day(s) of the week to apply the rule. Select All Day or enter the start and end times in the hour-minute format to apply the rule. This field determines if a log for packets that match the rule is created or not. Go to the Log Settings page and select the Access Control logs category to have the ZyXEL Device record these logs. Start IP Address End IP Address Subnet Mask Add >>

Edit <<

Delete Services Available/

Selected Services Edit Customized Service Schedule Day to Apply Time of Day to Apply (24-Hour Format) Log Log Packet Detail Information Alert P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 235 Chapter 12 Firewall DESCRIPTION Select the check box to have the ZyXEL Device generate an alert when the rule is matched. Table 71 Security > Firewall > Rules: Edit (continued) LABEL Send Alert Message to Administrator When Matched Back Apply Cancel Click this to return to the previous screen without saving. Click this to save your changes. Click this to restore your previously saved settings. 12.3.2 Customized Services Configure customized services and port numbers not predefined by the ZyXEL Device. For a comprehensive list of port numbers and services, visit the IANA

(Internet Assigned Number Authority) website. See Appendix E on page 557 for some examples. Click the Edit Customized Services link while editing a firewall rule to configure a custom service port. This displays the following screen. Figure 143 Security > Firewall > Rules: Edit: Edit Customized Services The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 72 Security > Firewall > Rules: Edit: Edit Customized Services LABEL No. DESCRIPTION This is the number of your customized port. Click a rules number of a service to go to the Firewall Customized Services Config screen to configure or edit a customized service. This is the name of your customized service. This shows the IP protocol (TCP, UDP or TCP/UDP) that defines your customized service. This is the port number or range that defines your customized service. Click this to return to the Firewall Edit Rule screen. Name Protocol Port Back 236 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide Chapter 12 Firewall 12.3.3 Configuring a Customized Service Use this screen to add a customized rule or edit an existing rule. Click a rule number in the Firewall Customized Services screen to display the following screen. Figure 144 Security > Firewall > Rules: Edit: Edit Customized Services: Config The following table describes the labels in this screen. DESCRIPTION Table 73 Security > Firewall > Rules: Edit: Edit Customized Services: Config LABEL Config Service Name Service Type Choose the IP port (TCP, UDP or TCP/UDP) that defines your customized Type a unique name for your custom port. port from the drop down list box. Port Configuration Type Click Single to specify one port only or Range to specify a span of ports that define your customized service. Type a single port number or the range of port numbers that define your customized service. Click this to return to the previous screen without saving. Click this to save your changes. Click this to restore your previously saved settings. Click this to delete the current rule. Port Number Back Apply Cancel Delete 12.4 The Firewall Threshold Screen For DoS attacks, the ZyXEL Device uses thresholds to determine when to start dropping sessions that do not become fully established (half-open sessions). These thresholds apply globally to all sessions. P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 237 Chapter 12 Firewall For TCP, half-open means that the session has not reached the established state-

the TCP three-way handshake has not yet been completed. Under normal circumstances, the application that initiates a session sends a SYN (synchronize) packet to the receiving server. The receiver sends back an ACK (acknowledgment) packet and its own SYN, and then the initiator responds with an ACK

(acknowledgment). After this handshake, a connection is established. Figure 145 Three-Way Handshake For UDP, half-open means that the firewall has detected no return traffic. An unusually high number (or arrival rate) of half-open sessions could indicate a DOS attack. 12.4.1 Threshold Values If everything is working properly, you probably do not need to change the threshold settings as the default threshold values should work for most small offices. Tune these parameters when you believe the ZyXEL Device has been receiving DoS attacks that are not recorded in the logs or the logs show that the ZyXEL Device is classifying normal traffic as DoS attacks. Factors influencing choices for threshold values are:

1 2 3 The maximum number of opened sessions. The minimum capacity of server backlog in your LAN network. The CPU power of servers in your LAN network. 4 Network bandwidth. 5 Type of traffic for certain servers. Reduce the threshold values if your network is slower than average for any of these factors (especially if you have servers that are slow or handle many tasks and are often busy). 238 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide Chapter 12 Firewall If you often use P2P applications such as file sharing with eMule or eDonkey, its recommended that you increase the threshold values since lots of sessions will be established during a small period of time and the ZyXEL Device may classify them as DoS attacks. 12.4.2 Configuring Firewall Thresholds The ZyXEL Device also sends alerts whenever TCP Maximum Incomplete is exceeded. The global values specified for the threshold and timeout apply to all TCP connections. Click Firewall > Threshold to bring up the next screen. Figure 146 Security > Firewall > Threshold The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 74 Security > Firewall > Threshold LABEL Denial of Service Thresholds DESCRIPTION The ZyXEL Device measures both the total number of existing half-

open sessions and the rate of session establishment attempts. Both TCP and UDP half-open sessions are counted in the total number and rate measurements. Measurements are made once a minute. One Minute Low This is the rate of new half-open sessions per minute that causes the firewall to stop deleting half-open sessions. The ZyXEL Device continues to delete half-open sessions as necessary, until the rate of new connection attempts drops below this number. P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 239 Chapter 12 Firewall Table 74 Security > Firewall > Threshold (continued) LABEL One Minute High This is the rate of new half-open sessions per minute that causes the DESCRIPTION firewall to start deleting half-open sessions. When the rate of new connection attempts rises above this number, the ZyXEL Device deletes half-open sessions as required to accommodate new connection attempts. For example, if you set the one minute high to 100, the ZyXEL Device starts deleting half-open sessions when more than 100 session establishment attempts have been detected in the last minute. It stops deleting half-open sessions when the number of session establishment attempts detected in a minute goes below the number set as the one minute low. This is the number of existing half-open sessions that causes the firewall to stop deleting half-open sessions. The ZyXEL Device continues to delete half-open requests as necessary, until the number of existing half-open sessions drops below this number. This is the number of existing half-open sessions that causes the firewall to start deleting half-open sessions. When the number of existing half-open sessions rises above this number, the ZyXEL Device deletes half-open sessions as required to accommodate new connection requests. Do not set Maximum Incomplete High to lower than the current Maximum Incomplete Low number. For example, if you set the maximum incomplete high to 100, the ZyXEL Device starts deleting half-open sessions when the number of existing half-open sessions rises above 100. It stops deleting half-open sessions when the number of existing half-open sessions drops below the number set as the maximum incomplete low. An unusually high number of half-open sessions with the same destination host address could indicate that a DoS attack is being launched against the host. Specify the number of existing half-open TCP sessions with the same destination host IP address that causes the firewall to start dropping half-open sessions to that same destination host IP address. Enter a number between 1 and 256. As a general rule, you should choose a smaller number for a smaller network, a slower system or limited bandwidth. The ZyXEL Device sends alerts whenever the TCP Maximum Incomplete is exceeded. Select the action that ZyXEL Device should take when the TCP maximum incomplete threshold is reached. You can have the ZyXEL Device either:

Delete the oldest half open session when a new connection request comes. or Maximum Incomplete Low Maximum Incomplete High TCP Maximum Incomplete Action taken when TCP Maximum Incomplete reached threshold Apply Cancel Deny new connection requests for the number of minutes that you specify (between 1 and 255). Click this to save your changes. Click this to restore your previously saved settings. 240 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide Chapter 12 Firewall 12.5 Firewall Technical Reference This section provides some technical background information about the topics covered in this chapter. 12.5.1 Firewall Rules Overview Your customized rules take precedence and override the ZyXEL Devices default settings. The ZyXEL Device checks the source IP address, destination IP address and IP protocol type of network traffic against the firewall rules (in the order you list them). When the traffic matches a rule, the ZyXEL Device takes the action specified in the rule. Firewall rules are grouped based on the direction of travel of packets to which they apply:

LAN to LAN/ Router LAN to WAN WAN to LAN WAN to WAN/ Router Note: The LAN includes both the LAN port and the WLAN. By default, the ZyXEL Devices stateful packet inspection allows packets traveling in the following directions:

LAN to LAN/ Router These rules specify which computers on the LAN can manage the ZyXEL Device

(remote management) and communicate between networks or subnets connected to the LAN interface (IP alias). Note: You can also configure the remote management settings to allow only a specific computer to manage the ZyXEL Device. LAN to WAN These rules specify which computers on the LAN can access which computers or services on the WAN. By default, the ZyXEL Devices stateful packet inspection drops packets traveling in the following directions:

WAN to LAN These rules specify which computers on the WAN can access which computers or services on the LAN. Note: You also need to configure NAT port forwarding (or full featured NAT address mapping rules) to allow computers on the WAN to access devices on the LAN. P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 241 Chapter 12 Firewall WAN to WAN/ Router By default the ZyXEL Device stops computers on the WAN from managing the ZyXEL Device or using the ZyXEL Device as a gateway to communicate with other computers on the WAN. You could configure one of these rules to allow a WAN computer to manage the ZyXEL Device. Note: You also need to configure the remote management settings to allow a WAN computer to manage the ZyXEL Device. You may define additional rules and sets or modify existing ones but please exercise extreme caution in doing so. For example, you may create rules to:

Block certain types of traffic, such as IRC (Internet Relay Chat), from the LAN to the Internet. Allow certain types of traffic, such as Lotus Notes database synchronization, from specific hosts on the Internet to specific hosts on the LAN. Allow everyone except your competitors to access a web server. Restrict use of certain protocols, such as Telnet, to authorized users on the LAN. These custom rules work by comparing the source IP address, destination IP address and IP protocol type of network traffic to rules set by the administrator. Your customized rules take precedence and override the ZyXEL Devices default rules. 12.5.2 Guidelines For Enhancing Security With Your Firewall 1 Change the default password via web configurator. 2 3 Think about access control before you connect to the network in any way. Limit who can access your router. 4 Don't enable any local service (such as telnet or FTP) that you don't use. Any enabled service could present a potential security risk. A determined hacker might be able to find creative ways to misuse the enabled services to access the firewall or the network. 5 6 For local services that are enabled, protect against misuse. Protect by configuring the services to communicate only with specific peers, and protect by configuring rules to block packets for the services at specific interfaces. Protect against IP spoofing by making sure the firewall is active. 7 Keep the firewall in a secured (locked) room. 242 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 12.5.3 Security Considerations Chapter 12 Firewall Note: Incorrectly configuring the firewall may block valid access or introduce security risks to the ZyXEL Device and your protected network. Use caution when creating or deleting firewall rules and test your rules after you configure them. Consider these security ramifications before creating a rule:

1 Does this rule stop LAN users from accessing critical resources on the Internet?

For example, if IRC is blocked, are there users that require this service?

2 Is it possible to modify the rule to be more specific? For example, if IRC is blocked for all users, will a rule that blocks just certain users be more effective?

3 Does a rule that allows Internet users access to resources on the LAN create a security vulnerability? For example, if FTP ports (TCP 20, 21) are allowed from the Internet to the LAN, Internet users may be able to connect to computers with running FTP servers. 4 Does this rule conflict with any existing rules?

Once these questions have been answered, adding rules is simply a matter of entering the information into the correct fields in the web configurator screens. 12.5.4 Triangle Route When the firewall is on, your ZyXEL Device acts as a secure gateway between your LAN and the Internet. In an ideal network topology, all incoming and outgoing network traffic passes through the ZyXEL Device to protect your LAN against attacks. Figure 147 Ideal Firewall Setup LAN 1 2 WAN Internet 12.5.4.1 The Triangle Route Problem A traffic route is a path for sending or receiving data packets between two Ethernet devices. You may have more than one connection to the Internet

(through one or more ISPs). If an alternate gateway is on the LAN (and its IP address is in the same subnet as the ZyXEL Devices LAN IP address), the triangle P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 243 Chapter 12 Firewall route (also called asymmetrical route) problem may occur. The steps below describe the triangle route problem. 1 A computer on the LAN initiates a connection by sending out a SYN packet to a receiving server on the WAN. 2 3 The ZyXEL Device reroutes the SYN packet through Gateway A on the LAN to the WAN. The reply from the WAN goes directly to the computer on the LAN without going through the ZyXEL Device. As a result, the ZyXEL Device resets the connection, as the connection has not been acknowledged. Figure 148 Triangle Route Problem LAN 1 3 2 WAN ISP 1 ISP 2 Internet 12.5.4.2 Solving the Triangle Route Problem A If you have the ZyXEL Device allow triangle route sessions, traffic from the WAN can go directly to a LAN computer without passing through the ZyXEL Device and its firewall protection. Another solution is to use IP alias. IP alias allows you to partition your network into logical sections over the same Ethernet interface. Your ZyXEL Device supports up to three logical LAN interfaces with the ZyXEL Device being the gateway for each logical network. Its like having multiple LAN networks that actually use the same physical cables and ports. By putting your LAN and Gateway A in different subnets, all returning network traffic must pass through the ZyXEL Device to your LAN. The following steps describe such a scenario. 1 A computer on the LAN initiates a connection by sending a SYN packet to a receiving server on the WAN. 244 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide Chapter 12 Firewall 2 3 4 The ZyXEL Device reroutes the packet to Gateway A, which is in Subnet 2. The reply from the WAN goes to the ZyXEL Device. The ZyXEL Device then sends it to the computer on the LAN in Subnet 1. Figure 149 IP Alias LAN Subnet 1 1 4 2 Subnet 2 3 A WAN ISP 1 ISP 2 Internet P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 245 Chapter 12 Firewall 246 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide CHAPTER 13 Content Filtering 13.1 Overview Internet content filtering allows you to block web sites based on keywords in the URL. 13.1.1 What You Can Do in the Content Filter Screens Use the Keyword screen (Section 13.2 on page 250) to block web sites based on a keyword in the URL. Use the Schedule screen (Section 13.3 on page 251) to specify the days and times keyword blocking is active. Use the Trusted screen (Section 13.4 on page 252) to exclude computers and other devices on your LAN from the keyword blocking filter. 13.1.2 What You Need to Know About Content Filtering URL The URL (Uniform Resource Locator) identifies and helps locates resources on a network. On the Internet the URL is the web address that you type in the address bar of your Internet browser, for example http://www.zyxel.com. Finding Out More See Section 13.1.4 on page 248 for an example of setting up content filtering. 13.1.3 Before You Begin To use the Trusted screen, you need the IP addresses of devices on your network. See the LAN section (Section 13.4 on page 252) for more information. P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 247 Chapter 13 Content Filtering 13.1.4 Content Filtering Example The following shows the steps required for a parent (Bob) to set up content filtering on a home network in order to limit his childrens access to certain web sites. In the following example, all URLs containing the word bad are blocked. 1 Click Security > Content Filter to display the following screen. 2 Select Active Keyword Blocking. 3 In the Keyword field type keywords to identify websites to be blocked. 4 Click Add Keyword for each keyword to be entered. 5 Click Apply. Figure 150 Security > Content Filter > Keyword: Example Bobs son arrives home from school at four, while his parents arrive later, at about 7pm. So keyword blocking is enabled for these times on weekdays and not on the weekend when the parents are at home. 1 Click Security > Content Filter > Schedule to display the following screen. 2 Click Edit Daily to Block and select all weekdays. 3 Under Start Time and End Time, type the times for blocking to begin and end

(4pm ~ 7pm in this example). 248 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 4 Click Apply. Figure 151 Security > Content Filter > Schedule: Example Chapter 13 Content Filtering The children can access the family computer in the living room, while only the parents use another computer in the study room. So keyword blocking is only needed on the family computer and the study computer can be excluded from keyword blocking. Bobs home network is on the domain 192.168.1.xxx. Bob gave his home computer a static IP address of 192.168.1.2 and the study computer a static IP address of 192.168.1.3. To exclude the study computer from keyword blocking he follows these steps. 1 Click Security > Content Filter > Trusted to display the following screen. 2 In the Start IP Address and End IP Address fields, type 192.168.1.3. 3 Click Apply. Figure 152 Security > Content Filter > Trusted: Example That finishes setting up keyword blocking on the home computer. P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 249 Chapter 13 Content Filtering 13.2 The Keyword Screen Use this screen to block sites containing certain keywords in the URL. For example, if you enable the keyword "bad", the ZyXEL Device blocks all sites containing this keyword including the URL http://www.website.com/bad.html. To have your ZyXEL Device block websites containing keywords in their URLs, click Security > Content Filter. The screen appears as shown. Figure 153 Security > Content Filtering > Keyword The following table describes the labels in this screen. DESCRIPTION Select this check box to enable this feature. Table 75 Security > Content Filtering > Keyword LABEL Active Keyword Blocking Block Websites that contain these keywords in the URL:

Delete Clear All Keyword This box contains the list of all the keywords that you have configured the ZyXEL Device to block. Highlight a keyword in the box and click this to remove it. Click this to remove all of the keywords from the list. Type a keyword in this field. You may use any character (up to 127 characters). Wildcards are not allowed. Click this after you have typed a keyword. Add Keyword Repeat this procedure to add other keywords. Up to 64 keywords are allowed. When you try to access a web page containing a keyword, you will get a message telling you that the content filter is blocking this request. 250 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide Chapter 13 Content Filtering Table 75 Security > Content Filtering > Keyword (continued) LABEL Apply Cancel DESCRIPTION Click this to save your changes. Click this to restore your previously saved settings. 13.3 The Schedule Screen Use this screen to set the days and times for the ZyXEL Device to perform content filtering. Click Security > Content Filter > Schedule. The screen appears as shown. Figure 154 Security > Content Filter > Schedule The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 76 Security > Content Filter: Schedule LABEL Schedule DESCRIPTION Select Block Everyday to make the content filtering active everyday. Otherwise, select Edit Daily to Block and configure which days of the week (or everyday) and which time of the day you want the content filtering to be active. Select the check box to have the content filtering to be active on the selected day. Enter the time when you want the content filtering to take effect in hour-

minute format. Enter the time when you want the content filtering to stop in hour-minute format. Active Start TIme End Time P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 251 Chapter 13 Content Filtering Table 76 Security > Content Filter: Schedule (continued) LABEL Apply Cancel DESCRIPTION Click this to save your changes. Click this to restore your previously saved settings. 13.4 The Trusted Screen Use this screen to exclude a range of users on the LAN from content filtering on your ZyXEL Device. Click Security > Content Filter > Trusted. The screen appears as shown. Figure 155 Security > Content Filter: Trusted The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 77 Security > Content Filter: Trusted LABEL Start IP Address DESCRIPTION Type the IP address of a computer (or the beginning IP address of a specific range of computers) on the LAN that you want to exclude from content filtering. Type the ending IP address of a specific range of users on your LAN that you want to exclude from content filtering. Leave this field blank if you want to exclude an individual computer. Click this to save your changes. Click this to restore your previously saved settings. End IP Address Apply Cancel 252 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide CHAPTER 14 VPN 14.1 Overview A virtual private network (VPN) provides secure communications between sites without the expense of leased site-to-site lines. A secure VPN is a combination of tunneling, encryption, authentication, access control and auditing. It is used to transport traffic over the Internet or any insecure network that uses TCP/IP for communication. Internet Protocol Security (IPSec) is a standards-based VPN that offers flexible solutions for secure data communications across a public network like the Internet. IPSec is built around a number of standardized cryptographic techniques to provide confidentiality, data integrity and authentication at the IP layer. The following figure is an example of an IPSec VPN tunnel. Figure 156 VPN: Example Internet VPN Tunnel X Y 14.1.1 What You Can Do in the VPN Screens Use the Setup screen (Section 14.2 on page 256) to view the configured VPN policies and add, edit or remove a VPN policy. Use the Monitor screen (Section 14.7 on page 271) to display and manage the current active VPN connections. Use the VPN Global Setting screen (Section 14.8 on page 273) to allow NetBIOS packets passing through the VPN connection. P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 253 Chapter 14 VPN 14.1.2 What You Need to Know About IPSec VPN A VPN tunnel is usually established in two phases. Each phase establishes a security association (SA), a contract indicating what security parameters the ZyXEL Device and the remote IPSec router will use. The first phase establishes an Internet Key Exchange (IKE) SA between the ZyXEL Device and remote IPSec router. The second phase uses the IKE SA to securely establish an IPSec SA through which the ZyXEL Device and remote IPSec router can send data between computers on the local network and remote network. The following figure illustrates this. Figure 157 VPN: IKE SA and IPSec SA A B IPSec SA Internet IKE SA X Y In this example, a computer in network A is exchanging data with a computer in network B. Inside networks A and B, the data is transmitted the same way data is normally transmitted in the networks. Between routers X and Y, the data is protected by tunneling, encryption, authentication, and other security features of the IPSec SA. The IPSec SA is established securely using the IKE SA that routers X and Y established first. My IP Address My IP Address is the WAN IP address of the ZyXEL Device. The ZyXEL Device has to rebuild the VPN tunnel if My IP Address changes after setup. The following applies if this field is configured as 0.0.0.0:

The ZyXEL Device uses the current ZyXEL Device WAN IP address (static or dynamic) to set up the VPN tunnel. Secure Gateway Address Secure Gateway Address is the WAN IP address or domain name of the remote IPSec router (secure gateway). 254 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide Chapter 14 VPN If the remote secure gateway has a static WAN IP address, enter it in the Secure Gateway Address field. You may alternatively enter the remote secure gateways domain name (if it has one) in the Secure Gateway Address field. You can also enter a remote secure gateways domain name in the Secure Gateway Address field if the remote secure gateway has a dynamic WAN IP address and is using DDNS. The ZyXEL Device has to rebuild the VPN tunnel each time the remote secure gateways WAN IP address changes (there may be a delay until the DDNS servers are updated with the remote gateways new WAN IP address). Dynamic Secure Gateway Address If the remote secure gateway has a dynamic WAN IP address and does not use DDNS, enter 0.0.0.0 as the secure gateways address. In this case only the remote secure gateway can initiate SAs. This may be useful for telecommuters initiating a VPN tunnel to the company network (see Section 14.9.12 on page 282 for configuration examples). The Secure Gateway IP Address may be configured as 0.0.0.0 only when using IKE key management and not Manual key management. Finding Out More See Section 14.9 on page 273 for advanced technical information on IPSec VPN. 14.1.3 Before You Begin If a VPN tunnel uses Telnet, FTP, WWW, then you should configure remote management (Remote MGMT) to allow access for that service. P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 255 Chapter 14 VPN 14.2 VPN Setup Screen The following figure helps explain the main fields in the web configurator. Figure 158 IPSec Summary Fields Local Network Remote Network Remote IPSec Router VPN Tunnel Local IP Address My IP Address Secure Gateway IP Address Remote IP Address Local and remote IP addresses must be static. Click Security > VPN to open the VPN Setup screen. This is a menu of your IPSec rules (tunnels). The IPSec summary menu is read-only. Edit a VPN by selecting an index number and then configuring its associated submenus. Figure 159 Security > VPN > Setup 256 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide The following table describes the fields in this screen. Chapter 14 VPN Table 78 Security > VPN > Setup LABEL No. Active DESCRIPTION This is the VPN policy index number. Click a number to edit VPN policies. This field displays whether the VPN policy is active or not. A Yes signifies that this VPN policy is active. No signifies that this VPN policy is not active. This field displays the identification name for this VPN policy. Name Local Address This is the IP address(es) of computer(s) on your local network behind your ZyXEL Device. The same (static) IP address is displayed twice when the Local Address Type field in the VPN Setup - Edit screen is configured to Single. The beginning and ending (static) IP addresses, in a range of computers are displayed when the Local Address Type field in the VPN Setup -

Edit screen is configured to Range. A (static) IP address and a subnet mask are displayed when the Local Address Type field in the VPN Setup - Edit screen is configured to Subnet. This is the IP address(es) of computer(s) on the remote network behind the remote IPSec router. This field displays N/A when the Secure Gateway Address field displays 0.0.0.0. In this case only the remote IPSec router can initiate the VPN. The same (static) IP address is displayed twice when the Remote Address Type field in the VPN Setup - Edit screen is configured to Single. The beginning and ending (static) IP addresses, in a range of computers are displayed when the Remote Address Type field in the VPN Setup -

Edit screen is configured to Range. A (static) IP address and a subnet mask are displayed when the Remote Address Type field in the VPN Setup - Edit screen is configured to Subnet. This field displays Tunnel or Transport mode (Tunnel is the default selection). This field displays the security protocols used for an SA. Both AH and ESP increase ZyXEL Device processing requirements and communications latency (delay). This is the static WAN IP address or URL of the remote IPSec router. This field displays 0.0.0.0 when you configure the Secure Gateway Address field in the VPN-IKE screen to 0.0.0.0. Click the Edit icon to go to the screen where you can edit the VPN configuration. Click the Remove icon to remove an existing VPN configuration. Click this to save your changes and apply them to the ZyXEL Device. Click this return your settings to their last saved values. Remote Address Encap. IPSec Algorithm Secure Gateway IP Modify Apply Cancel P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 257 Chapter 14 VPN 14.3 The VPN Edit Screen Click an Edit icon in the VPN Setup screen to edit VPN policies. Figure 160 Security > VPN > Setup > Edit The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 79 Security > VPN > Setup > Edit LABEL IPSec Setup Active DESCRIPTION Select this check box to activate this VPN policy. This option determines whether a VPN rule is applied before a packet leaves the firewall. 258 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide Chapter 14 VPN Table 79 Security > VPN > Setup > Edit LABEL Keep Alive DESCRIPTION Select either Yes or No from the drop-down list box. NAT Traversal Name IPSec Key Mode Negotiation Mode Encapsulation Mode DNS Server (for IPSec VPN) Local Local Address Type Select Yes to have the ZyXEL Device automatically reinitiate the SA after the SA lifetime times out, even if there is no traffic. The remote IPSec router must also have keep alive enabled in order for this feature to work. This function is available if the VPN Protocol is ESP. Select this check box if you want to set up a VPN tunnel when there are NAT routers between the ZyXEL Device and remote IPSec router. The remote IPSec router must also enable NAT traversal, and the NAT routers have to forward UDP port 500 packets to the remote IPSec router behind the NAT router. Type up to 32 characters to identify this VPN policy. You may use any character, including spaces, but the ZyXEL Device drops trailing spaces. Select IKE or Manual from the drop-down list box. IKE provides more protection so it is generally recommended. Manual is a useful option for troubleshooting if you have problems using IKE key management. Select Main or Aggressive from the drop-down list box. Multiple SAs connecting through a secure gateway must have the same negotiation mode. Select Tunnel mode or Transport mode from the drop-down list box. If there is a private DNS server that services the VPN, type its IP address here. The ZyXEL Device assigns this additional DNS server to the ZyXEL Device's DHCP clients that have IP addresses in this IPSec rule's range of local addresses. A DNS server allows clients on the VPN to find other computers and servers on the VPN by their (private) domain names. Specify the IP addresses of the devices behind the ZyXEL Device that can use the VPN tunnel. The local IP addresses must correspond to the remote IPSec router's configured remote IP addresses. Two active SAs cannot have the local and remote IP address(es) both the same. Two active SAs can have the same local or remote IP address, but not both. You can configure multiple SAs between the same local and remote IP addresses, as long as only one is active at any time. Use the drop-down menu to choose Single, Range, or Subnet. Select Single for a single IP address. Select Range for a specific range of IP addresses. Select Subnet to specify IP addresses on a network by their subnet mask. IP Address Start When the Local Address Type field is configured to Single, enter a

(static) IP address on the LAN behind your ZyXEL Device. When the Local Address Type field is configured to Range, enter the beginning

(static) IP address, in a range of computers on your LAN behind your ZyXEL Device. When the Local Address Type field is configured to Subnet, this is a (static) IP address on the LAN behind your ZyXEL Device. P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 259 Chapter 14 VPN Table 79 Security > VPN > Setup > Edit LABEL End / Subnet Mask DESCRIPTION When the Local Address Type field is configured to Single, this field is N/A. When the Local Address Type field is configured to Range, enter the end (static) IP address, in a range of computers on the LAN behind your ZyXEL Device. When the Local Address Type field is configured to Subnet, this is a subnet mask on the LAN behind your ZyXEL Device. Specify the IP addresses of the devices behind the remote IPSec router that can use the VPN tunnel. The remote IP addresses must correspond to the remote IPSec router's configured local IP addresses. Remote Two active SAs cannot have the local and remote IP address(es) both the same. Two active SAs can have the same local or remote IP address, but not both. You can configure multiple SAs between the same local and remote IP addresses, as long as only one is active at any time. Use the drop-down menu to choose Single, Range, or Subnet. Select Single with a single IP address. Select Range for a specific range of IP addresses. Select Subnet to specify IP addresses on a network by their subnet mask. Remote Address Type IP Address Start When the Remote Address Type field is configured to Single, enter a

(static) IP address on the network behind the remote IPSec router. When the Remote Address Type field is configured to Range, enter the beginning (static) IP address, in a range of computers on the network behind the remote IPSec router. When the Remote Address Type field is configured to Subnet, enter a (static) IP address on the network behind the remote IPSec router. When the Remote Address Type field is configured to Single, this field is N/A. When the Remote Address Type field is configured to Range, enter the end (static) IP address, in a range of computers on the network behind the remote IPSec router. When the Remote Address Type field is configured to Subnet, enter a subnet mask on the network behind the remote IPSec router. Select IP to identify this ZyXEL Device by its IP address. Select DNS to identify this ZyXEL Device by a domain name. Select E-mail to identify this ZyXEL Device by an e-mail address. End / Subnet Mask Address Information Local ID Type 260 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide Chapter 14 VPN Table 79 Security > VPN > Setup > Edit LABEL Content DESCRIPTION When you select IP in the Local ID Type field, type the IP address of your computer in the local Content field. The ZyXEL Device automatically uses the IP address in the My IP Address field (refer to the My IP Address field description) if you configure the local Content field to 0.0.0.0 or leave it blank. My IP Address Peer ID Type Content It is recommended that you type an IP address other than 0.0.0.0 in the local Content field or use the DNS or E-mail ID type in the following situations. When there is a NAT router between the two IPSec routers. When you want the remote IPSec router to be able to distinguish between VPN connection requests that come in from IPSec routers with dynamic WAN IP addresses. When you select DNS or E-mail in the Local ID Type field, type a domain name or e-mail address by which to identify this ZyXEL Device in the local Content field. Use up to 31 ASCII characters including spaces, although trailing spaces are truncated. The domain name or e-

mail address is for identification purposes only and can be any string. Enter the WAN IP address of your ZyXEL Device. The VPN tunnel has to be rebuilt if this IP address changes. The following applies if this field is configured as 0.0.0.0:

The ZyXEL Device uses the current ZyXEL Device WAN IP address

(static or dynamic) to set up the VPN tunnel. Select IP to identify the remote IPSec router by its IP address. Select DNS to identify the remote IPSec router by a domain name. Select E-mail to identify the remote IPSec router by an e-mail address. The configuration of the peer content depends on the peer ID type. For IP, type the IP address of the computer with which you will make the VPN connection. If you configure this field to 0.0.0.0 or leave it blank, the ZyXEL Device will use the address in the Secure Gateway Address field (refer to the Secure Gateway Address field description). For DNS or E-mail, type a domain name or e-mail address by which to identify the remote IPSec router. Use up to 31 ASCII characters including spaces, although trailing spaces are truncated. The domain name or e-mail address is for identification purposes only and can be any string. It is recommended that you type an IP address other than 0.0.0.0 or use the DNS or E-mail ID type in the following situations:

When there is a NAT router between the two IPSec routers. When you want the ZyXEL Device to distinguish between VPN connection requests that come in from remote IPSec routers with dynamic WAN IP addresses. P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 261 Chapter 14 VPN Table 79 Security > VPN > Setup > Edit LABEL Secure Gateway Address DESCRIPTION Type the WAN IP address or the URL (up to 31 characters) of the IPSec router with which you're making the VPN connection. Set this field to 0.0.0.0 if the remote IPSec router has a dynamic WAN IP address (the IPSec Key Mode field must be set to IKE). In order to have more than one active rule with the Secure Gateway Address field set to 0.0.0.0, the ranges of the local IP addresses cannot overlap between rules. If you configure an active rule with 0.0.0.0 in the Secure Gateway Address field and the LANs full IP address range as the local IP address, then you cannot configure any other active rules with the Secure Gateway Address field set to 0.0.0.0. Select ESP if you want to use ESP (Encapsulation Security Payload). The ESP protocol (RFC 2406) provides encryption as well as some of the services offered by AH. If you select ESP here, you must select options from the Encryption Algorithm and Authentication Algorithm fields (described below). Click the button to use a pre-shared key for authentication, and type in your pre-shared key. A pre-shared key identifies a communicating party during a phase 1 IKE negotiation. It is called "pre-shared"

because you have to share it with another party before you can communicate with them over a secure connection. Type from 8 to 31 case-sensitive ASCII characters or from 16 to 62 hexadecimal ("0-9", "A-F") characters. You must precede a hexadecimal key with a "0x (zero x), which is not counted as part of the 16 to 62 character range for the key. For example, in

"0x0123456789ABCDEF", 0x denotes that the key is hexadecimal and 0123456789ABCDEF is the key itself. Both ends of the VPN tunnel must use the same pre-shared key. You will receive a PYLD_MALFORMED (payload malformed) packet if the same pre-shared key is not used on both ends. Click the button to use a certificate for authentication. Select the certificate you want to use from the list. You can create, import and configure certificates in the Security > Certificates screens, or click the My Certificates link. Click this to go to the Security > Certificates > My Certificates screen. If you do not click Apply first, your VPN settings will not be saved. Security Protocol VPN Protocol Pre-Shared Key Certificate My Certificates 262 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide Chapter 14 VPN Table 79 Security > VPN > Setup > Edit LABEL Encryption Algorithm DESCRIPTION Select DES, 3DES, AES or NULL from the drop-down list box. When you use one of these encryption algorithms for data communications, both the sending device and the receiving device must use the same secret key, which can be used to encrypt and decrypt the message or to generate and verify a message authentication code. The DES encryption algorithm uses a 56-bit key. Triple DES (3DES) is a variation on DES that uses a 168-bit key. As a result, 3DES is more secure than DES. It also requires more processing power, resulting in increased latency and decreased throughput. This implementation of AES uses a 128-bit key. AES is faster than 3DES. Authentication Algorithm Select NULL to set up a tunnel without encryption. When you select NULL, you do not enter an encryption key. Select SHA1 or MD5 from the drop-down list box. MD5 (Message Digest 5) and SHA1 (Secure Hash Algorithm) are hash algorithms used to authenticate packet data. The SHA1 algorithm is generally considered stronger than MD5, but is slower. Select MD5 for minimal security and SHA-1 for maximum security. Click Back to return to the previous screen. Click Apply to save your changes back to the ZyXEL Device. Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh. Back Apply Cancel Advanced Setup Click Advanced Setup to configure more detailed settings of your IKE key management. P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 263 Chapter 14 VPN 14.4 Configuring Advanced IKE Settings Click Advanced Setup in the VPN Setup-Edit screen to open this screen. Figure 161 Security > VPN > Setup > Edit > Advanced Setup The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 80 Security > VPN > Setup > Edit > Advanced Setup LABEL VPN - IKE -

Advanced Setup Protocol DESCRIPTION Enable Replay Detection Enter 1 for ICMP, 6 for TCP, 17 for UDP, and so on. 0 is the default and signifies any protocol. As a VPN setup is processing intensive, the system is vulnerable to Denial of Service (DoS) attacks The IPSec receiver can detect and reject old or duplicate packets to protect against replay attacks. Select YES from the drop-down menu to enable replay detection, or select NO to disable it. Local Start Port 0 is the default and signifies any port. Type a port number from 0 to End 65535. Some of the most common IP ports are: 21, FTP; 53, DNS; 23, Telnet; 80, HTTP; 25, SMTP; 110, POP3. Enter a port number in this field to define a port range. This port number must be greater than that specified in the previous field. If Local Start Port is left at 0, End will also remain at 0. 264 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide Chapter 14 VPN Table 80 Security > VPN > Setup > Edit > Advanced Setup (continued) LABEL Remote Start Port DESCRIPTION 0 is the default and signifies any port. Type a port number from 0 to 65535. Some of the most common IP ports are: 21, FTP; 53, DNS; 23, Telnet; 80, HTTP; 25, SMTP; 110, POP3. Enter a port number in this field to define a port range. This port number must be greater than that specified in the previous field. If Remote Start Port is left at 0, End will also remain at 0. End Phase 1 Negotiation Mode Pre-Shared Key Encryption Algorithm Authentication Algorithm SA Life Time

(Seconds) Key Group Select Main or Aggressive from the drop-down list box. Multiple SAs connecting through a secure gateway must have the same negotiation mode. Type your pre-shared key in this field. A pre-shared key identifies a communicating party during a phase 1 IKE negotiation. It is called

"pre-shared" because you have to share it with another party before you can communicate with them over a secure connection. Type from 8 to 31 case-sensitive ASCII characters or from 16 to 62 hexadecimal ("0-9", "A-F") characters. You must precede a hexadecimal key with a "0x (zero x), which is not counted as part of the 16 to 62-character range for the key. For example, in

"0x0123456789ABCDEF", 0x denotes that the key is hexadecimal and 0123456789ABCDEF is the key itself. Both ends of the VPN tunnel must use the same pre-shared key. You will receive a PYLD_MALFORMED (payload malformed) packet if the same pre-shared key is not used on both ends. Select DES, 3DES or AES from the drop-down list box. When you use one of these encryption algorithms for data communications, both the sending device and the receiving device must use the same secret key, which can be used to encrypt and decrypt the message or to generate and verify a message authentication code. The DES encryption algorithm uses a 56-bit key. Triple DES (3DES) is a variation on DES that uses a 168-bit key. As a result, 3DES is more secure than DES. It also requires more processing power, resulting in increased latency and decreased throughput. This implementation of AES uses a 128-bit key. AES is faster than 3DES. Select SHA1 or MD5 from the drop-down list box. MD5 (Message Digest 5) and SHA1 (Secure Hash Algorithm) are hash algorithms used to authenticate packet data. The SHA1 algorithm is generally considered stronger than MD5, but is slower. Select MD5 for minimal security and SHA-1 for maximum security. Define the length of time before an IPSec SA automatically renegotiates in this field. It may range from 60 to 3,000,000 seconds

(almost 35 days). A short SA Life Time increases security by forcing the two VPN gateways to update the encryption and authentication keys. However, every time the VPN tunnel renegotiates, all users accessing remote resources are temporarily disconnected. You must choose a key group for phase 1 IKE setup. DH1 (default) refers to Diffie-Hellman Group 1 a 768 bit random number. DH2 refers to Diffie-Hellman Group 2 a 1024 bit (1Kb) random number. P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 265 Chapter 14 VPN DESCRIPTION Table 80 Security > VPN > Setup > Edit > Advanced Setup (continued) LABEL Phase 2 Active Protocol Encryption Algorithm Use the drop-down list box to choose from ESP or AH. This field is available when you select ESP in the Active Protocol field. Select DES, 3DES, AES or NULL from the drop-down list box. When you use one of these encryption algorithms for data communications, both the sending device and the receiving device must use the same secret key, which can be used to encrypt and decrypt the message or to generate and verify a message authentication code. The DES encryption algorithm uses a 56-bit key. Triple DES (3DES) is a variation on DES that uses a 168-bit key. As a result, 3DES is more secure than DES. It also requires more processing power, resulting in increased latency and decreased throughput. This implementation of AES uses a 128-bit key. AES is faster than 3DES. Select NULL to set up a tunnel without encryption. When you select NULL, you do not enter an encryption key. Select SHA1 or MD5 from the drop-down list box. MD5 (Message Digest 5) and SHA1 (Secure Hash Algorithm) are hash algorithms used to authenticate packet data. The SHA1 algorithm is generally considered stronger than MD5, but is slower. Select MD5 for minimal security and SHA-1 for maximum security. Define the length of time before an IKE SA automatically renegotiates in this field. It may range from 60 to 3,000,000 seconds (almost 35 days). A short SA Life Time increases security by forcing the two VPN gateways to update the encryption and authentication keys. However, every time the VPN tunnel renegotiates, all users accessing remote resources are temporarily disconnected. Select Tunnel mode or Transport mode from the drop-down list box. Perfect Forward Secrecy (PFS) is disabled (NONE) by default in phase 2 IPSec SA setup. This allows faster IPSec setup, but is not so secure. Choose DH1 or DH2 from the drop-down list box to enable PFS. DH1 refers to Diffie-Hellman Group 1 a 768 bit random number. DH2 refers to Diffie-Hellman Group 2 a 1024 bit (1Kb) random number (more secure, yet slower). Click Back to return to the previous screen. Click Apply to save your changes back to the ZyXEL Device and return to the VPN-IKE screen. Click Cancel to return to the VPN-IKE screen without saving your changes. Authentication Algorithm SA Life Time

(Seconds) Encapsulation Perfect Forward Secrecy (PFS) Back Apply Cancel 266 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide Chapter 14 VPN 14.5 Manual Key Setup Manual key management is useful if you have problems with IKE key management. 14.5.1 Security Parameter Index (SPI) An SPI is used to distinguish different SAs terminating at the same destination and using the same IPSec protocol. This data allows for the multiplexing of SAs to a single gateway. The SPI (Security Parameter Index) along with a destination IP address uniquely identify a particular Security Association (SA). The SPI is transmitted from the remote VPN gateway to the local VPN gateway. The local VPN gateway then uses the network, encryption and key values that the administrator associated with the SPI to establish the tunnel. Current ZyXEL implementation assumes identical outgoing and incoming SPIs. P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 267 Chapter 14 VPN 14.6 Configuring Manual Key You only configure VPN manual key when you select Manual in the IPSec Key Mode field on the VPN Setup-Edit screen. This is the VPN Setup - Manual Key screen as shown next. Figure 162 Security > VPN > Setup > Manual Key The following table describes the fields in this screen. DESCRIPTION Table 81 Security > VPN > Setup > Manual Key LABEL IPSec Setup Active Name Select this check box to activate this VPN policy. Type up to 32 characters to identify this VPN policy. You may use any character, including spaces, but the ZyXEL Device drops trailing spaces. 268 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide Chapter 14 VPN Table 81 Security > VPN > Setup > Manual Key (continued) LABEL IPSec Key Mode DESCRIPTION Select IKE or Manual from the drop-down list box. Manual is a useful option for troubleshooting if you have problems using IKE key management. Type a number (base 10) from 1 to 999999 for the Security Parameter Index. Select Tunnel mode or Transport mode from the drop-down list box. SPI Encapsulation Mode DNS Server (for IPSec VPN) Local Local Address Type If there is a private DNS server that services the VPN, type its IP address here. The ZyXEL Device assigns this additional DNS server to the ZyXEL Device 's DHCP clients that have IP addresses in this IPSec rule's range of local addresses. A DNS server allows clients on the VPN to find other computers and servers on the VPN by their (private) domain names. Local IP addresses must be static and correspond to the remote IPSec router's configured remote IP addresses. Two active SAs cannot have the local and remote IP address(es) both the same. Two active SAs can have the same local or remote IP address, but not both. You can configure multiple SAs between the same local and remote IP addresses, as long as only one is active at any time. Use the drop-down menu to choose Single, Range, or Subnet. Select Single for a single IP address. Select Range for a specific range of IP addresses. Select Subnet to specify IP addresses on a network by their subnet mask. IP Address Start When the Local Address Type field is configured to Single, enter a

(static) IP address on the LAN behind your ZyXEL Device. When the Local Address Type field is configured to Range, enter the beginning

(static) IP address, in a range of computers on your LAN behind your ZyXEL Device. When the Local Address Type field is configured to Subnet, this is a (static) IP address on the LAN behind your ZyXEL Device. When the Local Address Type field is configured to Single, this field is N/A. When the Local Address Type field is configured to Range, enter the end (static) IP address, in a range of computers on the LAN behind your ZyXEL Device. When the Local Address Type field is configured to Subnet, this is a subnet mask on the LAN behind your ZyXEL Device. Remote IP addresses must be static and correspond to the remote IPSec router's configured local IP addresses. End / Subnet Mask Remote Two active SAs cannot have the local and remote IP address(es) both the same. Two active SAs can have the same local or remote IP address, but not both. You can configure multiple SAs between the same local and remote IP addresses, as long as only one is active at any time. Use the drop-down menu to choose Single, Range, or Subnet. Select Single with a single IP address. Select Range for a specific range of IP addresses. Select Subnet to specify IP addresses on a network by their subnet mask. Remote Address Type P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 269 Chapter 14 VPN Table 81 Security > VPN > Setup > Manual Key (continued) LABEL IP Address Start When the Remote Address Type field is configured to Single, enter a DESCRIPTION

(static) IP address on the network behind the remote IPSec router. When the Remote Address Type field is configured to Range, enter the beginning (static) IP address, in a range of computers on the network behind the remote IPSec router. When the Remote Address Type field is configured to Subnet, enter a (static) IP address on the network behind the remote IPSec router. When the Remote Address Type field is configured to Single, this field is N/A. When the Remote Address Type field is configured to Range, enter the end (static) IP address, in a range of computers on the network behind the remote IPSec router. When the Remote Address Type field is configured to Subnet, enter a subnet mask on the network behind the remote IPSec router. Enter the WAN IP address of your ZyXEL Device. The VPN tunnel has to be rebuilt if this IP address changes. The following applies if this field is configured as 0.0.0.0:

The ZyXEL Device uses the current ZyXEL Device WAN IP address

(static or dynamic) to set up the VPN tunnel. Type the WAN IP address or the URL (up to 31 characters) of the IPSec router with which you're making the VPN connection. Select ESP if you want to use ESP (Encapsulation Security Payload). The ESP protocol (RFC 2406) provides encryption as well as some of the services offered by AH. If you select ESP here, you must select options from the Encryption Algorithm and Authentication Algorithm fields (described next). Select DES, 3DES or NULL from the drop-down list box. When DES is used for data communications, both sender and receiver must know the same secret key, which can be used to encrypt and decrypt the message or to generate and verify a message authentication code. The DES encryption algorithm uses a 56-bit key. Triple DES (3DES) is a variation on DES that uses a 168-bit key. As a result, 3DES is more secure than DES. It also requires more processing power, resulting in increased latency and decreased throughput. Select NULL to set up a tunnel without encryption. When you select NULL, you do not enter an encryption key. With DES, type a unique key 8 characters long. With 3DES, type a unique key 24 characters long. Any characters may be used, including spaces, but trailing spaces are truncated. Select SHA1 or MD5 from the drop-down list box. MD5 (Message Digest 5) and SHA1 (Secure Hash Algorithm) are hash algorithms used to authenticate packet data. The SHA1 algorithm is generally considered stronger than MD5, but is slower. Select MD5 for minimal security and SHA-1 for maximum security. End / Subnet Mask Address Information My IP Address Secure Gateway Address Security Protocol IPSec Protocol Encryption Algorithm Encapsulation Key (only with ESP) Authentication Algorithm 270 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide Chapter 14 VPN Table 81 Security > VPN > Setup > Manual Key (continued) LABEL Authentication Key DESCRIPTION Type a unique authentication key to be used by IPSec if applicable. Enter 16 characters for MD5 authentication or 20 characters for SHA-

1 authentication. Any characters may be used, including spaces, but trailing spaces are truncated. Click Back to return to the previous screen. Click Apply to save your changes back to the ZyXEL Device. Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh. Back Apply Cancel 14.7 Viewing SA Monitor Click Security > VPN > Monitor to open the screen as shown. Use this screen to display and manage active VPN connections. A Security Association (SA) is the group of security settings related to a specific VPN tunnel. This screen displays active VPN connections. Use Refresh to display active VPN connections. This screen is read-only. The following table describes the fields in this tab. When there is outbound traffic but no inbound traffic, the SA times out automatically after two minutes. A tunnel with no outbound or inbound traffic is

"idle" and does not timeout until the SA lifetime period expires. See Section P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 271 Chapter 14 VPN 14.9.7 on page 279on keep alive to have the ZyXEL Device renegotiate an IPSec SA when the SA lifetime expires, even if there is no traffic. Figure 163 Security > VPN > Monitor The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 82 Security > VPN > Monitor LABEL No Name Encapsulation IPSec Algorithm Disconnect DESCRIPTION This is the security association index number. This field displays the identification name for this VPN policy. This field displays Tunnel or Transport mode. This field displays the security protocol, encryption algorithm, and authentication algorithm used in each VPN tunnel. Select one of the security associations, and then click Disconnect to stop that security association. Click Refresh to display the current active VPN connection(s). Refresh 272 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide Chapter 14 VPN 14.8 Configuring VPN Global Setting To change your ZyXEL Devices global settings, click VPN > VPN Global Setting. The screen appears as shown. Figure 164 Security > VPN > Global Setting The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 83 Security > VPN > Global Setting LABEL Windows Networking

(NetBIOS over TCP/

IP) DESCRIPTION NetBIOS (Network Basic Input/Output System) are TCP or UDP packets that enable a computer to find other computers. It may sometimes be necessary to allow NetBIOS packets to pass through VPN tunnels in order to allow local computers to find computers on the remote network and vice versa. Select this check box to send NetBIOS packets through the VPN connection. Click Apply to save your changes back to the ZyXEL Device. Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh. Allow NetBIOS Traffic Through All IPSec Tunnels Apply Cancel 14.9 IPSec VPN Technical Reference This section provides some technical background information about the topics covered in this chapter. P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 273 Chapter 14 VPN 14.9.1 IPSec Architecture The overall IPSec architecture is shown as follows. Figure 165 IPSec Architecture IPSec Algorithms The ESP (Encapsulating Security Payload) Protocol (RFC 2406) and AH

(Authentication Header) protocol (RFC 2402) describe the packet formats and the default standards for packet structure (including implementation algorithms). The Encryption Algorithm describes the use of encryption techniques such as DES

(Data Encryption Standard) and Triple DES algorithms. The Authentication Algorithms, HMAC-MD5 (RFC 2403) and HMAC-SHA-1 (RFC 2404, provide an authentication mechanism for the AH and ESP protocols. Key Management Key management allows you to determine whether to use IKE (ISAKMP) or manual key configuration in order to set up a VPN. 14.9.2 IPSec and NAT Read this section if you are running IPSec on a host computer behind the ZyXEL Device. NAT is incompatible with the AH protocol in both Transport and Tunnel mode. An IPSec VPN using the AH protocol digitally signs the outbound packet, both data 274 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide Chapter 14 VPN payload and headers, with a hash value appended to the packet. When using AH protocol, packet contents (the data payload) are not encrypted. A NAT device in between the IPSec endpoints will rewrite either the source or destination address with one of its own choosing. The VPN device at the receiving end will verify the integrity of the incoming packet by computing its own hash value, and complain that the hash value appended to the received packet doesn't match. The VPN device at the receiving end doesn't know about the NAT in the middle, so it assumes that the data has been maliciously altered. IPSec using ESP in Tunnel mode encapsulates the entire original packet

(including headers) in a new IP packet. The new IP packet's source address is the outbound address of the sending VPN gateway, and its destination address is the inbound address of the VPN device at the receiving end. When using ESP protocol with authentication, the packet contents (in this case, the entire original packet) are encrypted. The encrypted contents, but not the new headers, are signed with a hash value appended to the packet. Tunnel mode ESP with authentication is compatible with NAT because integrity checks are performed over the combination of the "original header plus original payload," which is unchanged by a NAT device. Transport mode ESP with authentication is not compatible with NAT. Table 84 VPN and NAT SECURITY PROTOCOL AH AH ESP ESP MODE Transpor t Tunnel Transpor t Tunnel NAT N N N Y 14.9.3 VPN, NAT, and NAT Traversal NAT is incompatible with the AH protocol in both transport and tunnel mode. An IPSec VPN using the AH protocol digitally signs the outbound packet, both data payload and headers, with a hash value appended to the packet, but a NAT device between the IPSec endpoints rewrites the source or destination address. As a result, the VPN device at the receiving end finds a mismatch between the hash value and the data and assumes that the data has been maliciously altered. NAT is not normally compatible with ESP in transport mode either, but the ZyXEL Devices NAT Traversal feature provides a way to handle this. NAT traversal P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 275 Chapter 14 VPN allows you to set up an IKE SA when there are NAT routers between the two IPSec routers. Figure 166 NAT Router Between IPSec Routers A Internet B Normally you cannot set up an IKE SA with a NAT router between the two IPSec routers because the NAT router changes the header of the IPSec packet. NAT traversal solves the problem by adding a UDP port 500 header to the IPSec packet. The NAT router forwards the IPSec packet with the UDP port 500 header unchanged. In Figure 166 on page 276, when IPSec router A tries to establish an IKE SA, IPSec router B checks the UDP port 500 header, and IPSec routers A and B build the IKE SA. For NAT traversal to work, you must:

Use ESP security protocol (in either transport or tunnel mode). Use IKE keying mode. Enable NAT traversal on both IPSec endpoints. Set the NAT router to forward UDP port 500 to IPSec router A. Finally, NAT is compatible with ESP in tunnel mode because integrity checks are performed over the combination of the "original header plus original payload,"

which is unchanged by a NAT device. The compatibility of AH and ESP with NAT in tunnel and transport modes is summarized in the following table. Table 85 VPN and NAT SECURITY PROTOCOL AH AH ESP ESP MODE Transport Tunnel Transport Tunnel NAT N N Y*

Y Y* - This is supported in the ZyXEL Device if you enable NAT traversal. 276 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide Chapter 14 VPN 14.9.4 Encapsulation The two modes of operation for IPSec VPNs are Transport mode and Tunnel mode. Figure 167 Transport and Tunnel Mode IPSec Encapsulation Transport Mode Transport mode is used to protect upper layer protocols and only affects the data in the IP packet. In Transport mode, the IP packet contains the security protocol

(AH or ESP) located after the original IP header and options, but before any upper layer protocols contained in the packet (such as TCP and UDP). With ESP, protection is applied only to the upper layer protocols contained in the packet. The IP header information and options are not used in the authentication process. Therefore, the originating IP address cannot be verified for integrity against the data. With the use of AH as the security protocol, protection is extended forward into the IP header to verify the integrity of the entire packet by use of portions of the original IP header in the hashing process. Tunnel Mode Tunnel mode encapsulates the entire IP packet to transmit it securely. A Tunnel mode is required for gateway services to provide access to internal systems. Tunnel mode is fundamentally an IP tunnel with authentication and encryption. This is the most common mode of operation. Tunnel mode is required for gateway to gateway and host to gateway communications. Tunnel mode communications have two sets of IP headers:

Outside header: The outside IP header contains the destination IP address of the VPN gateway. Inside header: The inside IP header contains the destination IP address of the final system behind the VPN gateway. The security protocol appears after the outer IP header and before the inside IP header. P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 277 Chapter 14 VPN 14.9.5 IKE Phases There are two phases to every IKE (Internet Key Exchange) negotiation phase 1

(Authentication) and phase 2 (Key Exchange). A phase 1 exchange establishes an IKE SA and the second one uses that SA to negotiate SAs for IPSec. Figure 168 Two Phases to Set Up the IPSec SA In phase 1 you must:

Choose a negotiation mode. Authenticate the connection by entering a pre-shared key. Choose an encryption algorithm. Choose an authentication algorithm. Choose a Diffie-Hellman public-key cryptography key group (DH1 or DH2). Set the IKE SA lifetime. This field allows you to determine how long an IKE SA should stay up before it times out. An IKE SA times out when the IKE SA lifetime period expires. If an IKE SA times out when an IPSec SA is already established, the IPSec SA stays connected. In phase 2 you must:

Choose which protocol to use (ESP or AH) for the IKE key exchange. Choose an encryption algorithm. Choose an authentication algorithm Choose whether to enable Perfect Forward Secrecy (PFS) using Diffie-Hellman public-key cryptography see Appendix D on page 533. Select None (the default) to disable PFS. Choose Tunnel mode or Transport mode. 278 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide Chapter 14 VPN Set the IPSec SA lifetime. This field allows you to determine how long the IPSec SA should stay up before it times out. The ZyXEL Device automatically renegotiates the IPSec SA if there is traffic when the IPSec SA lifetime period expires. The ZyXEL Device also automatically renegotiates the IPSec SA if both IPSec routers have keep alive enabled, even if there is no traffic. If an IPSec SA times out, then the IPSec router must renegotiate the SA the next time someone attempts to send traffic. 14.9.6 Negotiation Mode The phase 1 Negotiation Mode you select determines how the Security Association (SA) will be established for each connection through IKE negotiations. Main Mode ensures the highest level of security when the communicating parties are negotiating authentication (phase 1). It uses 6 messages in three round trips: SA negotiation, Diffie-Hellman exchange and an exchange of nonces (a nonce is a random number). This mode features identity protection

(your identity is not revealed in the negotiation). Aggressive Mode is quicker than Main Mode because it eliminates several steps when the communicating parties are negotiating authentication (phase 1). However the trade-off is that faster speed limits its negotiating power and it also does not provide identity protection. It is useful in remote access situations where the address of the initiator is not know by the responder and both parties want to use pre-shared key authentication. 14.9.7 Keep Alive When you initiate an IPSec tunnel with keep alive enabled, the ZyXEL Device automatically renegotiates the tunnel when the IPSec SA lifetime period expires

(see Section 14.9.5 on page 278 for more on the IPSec SA lifetime). In effect, the IPSec tunnel becomes an always on connection after you initiate it. Both IPSec routers must have a ZyXEL Device-compatible keep alive feature enabled in order for this feature to work. If the ZyXEL Device has its maximum number of simultaneous IPSec tunnels connected to it and they all have keep alive enabled, then no other tunnels can take a turn connecting to the ZyXEL Device because the ZyXEL Device never drops the tunnels that are already connected. When there is outbound traffic with no inbound traffic, the ZyXEL Device automatically drops the tunnel after two minutes. 14.9.8 Remote DNS Server In cases where you want to use domain names to access Intranet servers on a remote network that has a DNS server, you must identify that DNS server. You P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 279 Chapter 14 VPN cannot use DNS servers on the LAN or from the ISP since these DNS servers cannot resolve domain names to private IP addresses on the remote network The following figure depicts an example where three VPN tunnels are created from ZyXEL Device A; one to branch office 2, one to branch office 3 and another to headquarters. In order to access computers that use private domain names on the headquarters (HQ) network, the ZyXEL Device at branch office 1 uses the Intranet DNS server in headquarters. The DNS server feature for VPN does not work with Windows 2000 or Windows XP. Figure 169 VPN Host using Intranet DNS Server Example ISP DNS Servers 212.54.64.170 212.54.54.171 1 LAN DNS:212.54.64.170 212.54.64.171 Internet A VPN DNS: 10.1.1.10

= VPN Tunnel Remote IPSec Router HQ 10.1.1.1/200 Intranet DNS 10.1.1.10 2 192.168.1.1/50 3 172.16.1.1/50 If you do not specify an Intranet DNS server on the remote network, then the VPN host must use IP addresses to access the computers on the remote network. 14.9.9 ID Type and Content With aggressive negotiation mode (seeSection 14.9.6 on page 279), the ZyXEL Device identifies incoming SAs by ID type and content since this identifying information is not encrypted. This enables the ZyXEL Device to distinguish between multiple rules for SAs that connect from remote IPSec routers that have dynamic WAN IP addresses. Telecommuters can use separate passwords to simultaneously connect to the ZyXEL Device from IPSec routers with dynamic IP addresses (seeSection 14.9.12 on page 282 for a telecommuter configuration example). Regardless of the ID type and content configuration, the ZyXEL Device does not allow you to save multiple active rules with overlapping local and remote IP addresses. 280 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide Chapter 14 VPN With main mode (seeSection 14.9.6 on page 279), the ID type and content are encrypted to provide identity protection. In this case the ZyXEL Device can only distinguish between up to 12 different incoming SAs that connect from remote IPSec routers that have dynamic WAN IP addresses. The ZyXEL Device can distinguish up to 12 incoming SAs because you can select between three encryption algorithms (DES, 3DES and AES), two authentication algorithms (MD5 and SHA1) and two key groups (DH1 and DH2) when you configure a VPN rule

(seeSection 14.4 on page 264). The ID type and content act as an extra level of identification for incoming SAs. The type of ID can be a domain name, an IP address or an e-mail address. The content is the IP address, domain name, or e-mail address. Table 86 Local ID Type and Content Fields LOCAL ID TYPE=

IP CONTENT=

Type the IP address of your computer or leave the field blank to have the ZyXEL Device automatically use its own IP address. Type a domain name (up to 31 characters) by which to identify this ZyXEL Device. Type an e-mail address (up to 31 characters) by which to identify this ZyXEL Device. The domain name or e-mail address that you use in the Content field is used for identification purposes only and does not need to be a real domain name or e-mail address. Table 87 Peer ID Type and Content Fields PEER ID TYPE=

IP CONTENT=

Type the IP address of the computer with which you will make the VPN connection or leave the field blank to have the ZyXEL Device automatically use the address in the Secure Gateway Address field. Type a domain name (up to 31 characters) by which to identify the remote IPSec router. Type an e-mail address (up to 31 characters) by which to identify the remote IPSec router. The domain name or e-mail address that you use in the Content field is used for identification purposes only and does not need to be a real domain name or e-mail address. The domain name also does not have to match the remote routers IP address or what you configure in the Secure Gateway Address field below. DNS E-mail DNS E-mail 14.9.9.1 ID Type and Content Examples Two IPSec routers must have matching ID type and content configuration in order to set up a VPN tunnel. P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 281 Chapter 14 VPN The two ZyXEL Devices in this example can complete negotiation and establish a VPN tunnel. Table 88 Matching ID Type and Content Configuration Example ZYXEL DEVICE A Local ID type: E-mail Local ID content:

tom@yourcompany.com Peer ID type: IP Peer ID content: 1.1.1.2 ZYXEL DEVICE B Local ID type: IP Local ID content: 1.1.1.2 Peer ID type: E-mail Peer ID content: tom@yourcompany.com The two ZyXEL Devices in this example cannot complete their negotiation because ZyXEL Device Bs Local ID type is IP, but ZyXEL Device As Peer ID type is set to E-mail. An ID mismatched message displays in the IPSEC LOG. Table 89 Mismatching ID Type and Content Configuration Example ZYXEL DEVICE A Local ID type: IP Local ID content: 1.1.1.10 Peer ID type: E-mail Peer ID content: aa@yahoo.com ZYXEL DEVICE B Local ID type: IP Local ID content: 1.1.1.10 Peer ID type: IP Peer ID content: N/A 14.9.10 Pre-Shared Key A pre-shared key identifies a communicating party during a phase 1 IKE negotiation (see Section 14.9.5 on page 278 for more on IKE phases). It is called pre-shared because you have to share it with another party before you can communicate with them over a secure connection. 14.9.11 Diffie-Hellman (DH) Key Groups Diffie-Hellman (DH) is a public-key cryptography protocol that allows two parties to establish a shared secret over an unsecured communications channel. Diffie-

Hellman is used within IKE SA setup to establish session keys. 768-bit (Group 1 -

DH1) and 1024-bit (Group 2 DH2) Diffie-Hellman groups are supported. Upon completion of the Diffie-Hellman exchange, the two peers have a shared secret, but the IKE SA is not authenticated. For authentication, use pre-shared keys. 14.9.12 Telecommuter VPN/IPSec Examples The following examples show how multiple telecommuters can make VPN connections to a single ZyXEL Device at headquarters. The telecommuters use IPSec routers with dynamic WAN IP addresses. The ZyXEL Device at headquarters has a static public IP address. 282 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide Chapter 14 VPN 14.9.12.1 Telecommuters Sharing One VPN Rule Example See the following figure and table for an example configuration that allows multiple telecommuters (A, B and C in the figure) to use one VPN rule to simultaneously access a ZyXEL Device at headquarters (HQ in the figure). The telecommuters do not have domain names mapped to the WAN IP addresses of their IPSec routers. The telecommuters must all use the same IPSec parameters but the local IP addresses (or ranges of addresses) should not overlap. Figure 170 Telecommuters Sharing One VPN Rule Example A B C LAN 192.168.2.12 192.168.3.2 LAN LAN 192.168.4.15 Internet HQ LAN 192.168.1.10 Table 90 Telecommuters Sharing One VPN Rule Example FIELDS My IP Address:

HEADQUARTERS Public static IP address TELECOMMUTERS 0.0.0.0 (dynamic IP address assigned by the ISP) Public static IP address Secure Gateway IP Address:

0.0.0.0 With this IP address only the telecommuter can initiate the IPSec tunnel. 192.168.1.10 Local IP Address: Telecommuter A: 192.168.2.12 Telecommuter B: 192.168.3.2 Telecommuter C: 192.168.4.15 192.168.1.10 0.0.0.0 (N/A) Remote IP Address:

14.9.12.2 Telecommuters Using Unique VPN Rules Example In this example the telecommuters (A, B and C in the figure) use IPSec routers with domain names that are mapped to their dynamic WAN IP addresses (use Dynamic DNS to do this). With aggressive negotiation mode (see Section 14.9.6 on page 279), the ZyXEL Device can use the ID types and contents to distinguish between VPN rules. Telecommuters can each use a separate VPN rule to simultaneously access a ZyXEL Device at headquarters. They can use different IPSec parameters. The local IP addresses (or ranges of addresses) of the rules configured on the ZyXEL Device P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 283 Chapter 14 VPN at headquarters can overlap. The local IP addresses of the rules configured on the telecommuters IPSec routers should not overlap. See the following table and figure for an example where three telecommuters each use a different VPN rule for a VPN connection with a ZyXEL Device located at headquarters. The ZyXEL Device at headquarters (HQ in the figure) identifies each incoming SA by its ID type and content and uses the appropriate VPN rule to establish the VPN connection. The ZyXEL Device at headquarters can also initiate VPN connections to the telecommuters since it can find the telecommuters by resolving their domain names. Figure 171 Telecommuters Using Unique VPN Rules Example A B C LAN 192.168.2.12 192.168.3.2 LAN LAN 192.168.4.15 Internet HQ LAN 192.168.1.10 Table 91 Telecommuters Using Unique VPN Rules Example TELECOMMUTERS All Telecommuter Rules:

My IP Address 0.0.0.0 Secure Gateway Address:

bigcompanyhq.com Remote IP Address: 192.168.1.10 Peer ID Type: E-mail Peer ID Content: bob@bigcompanyhq.com HEADQUARTERS All Headquarters Rules:

My IP Address: bigcompanyhq.com Local IP Address: 192.168.1.10 Local ID Type: E-mail Local ID Content: bob@bigcompanyhq.com Telecommuter A

(telecommutera.dydns.org) Local ID Type: IP Local ID Content: 192.168.2.12 Local IP Address: 192.168.2.12 Headquarters ZyXEL Device Rule 1:

Peer ID Type: IP Peer ID Content: 192.168.2.12 Secure Gateway Address:

telecommuter1.com Remote Address 192.168.2.12 284 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide Chapter 14 VPN Table 91 Telecommuters Using Unique VPN Rules Example (continued) TELECOMMUTERS Telecommuter B

(telecommuterb.dydns.org) Local ID Type: DNS Local ID Content: telecommuterb.com Local IP Address: 192.168.3.2 HEADQUARTERS Headquarters ZyXEL Device Rule 2:

Peer ID Type: DNS Peer ID Content: telecommuterb.com Secure Gateway Address:

telecommuterb.com Remote Address 192.168.3.2 Telecommuter C

(telecommuterc.dydns.org) Local ID Type: E-mail Local ID Content: myVPN@myplace.com Peer ID Content: myVPN@myplace.com Local IP Address: 192.168.4.15 Headquarters ZyXEL Device Rule 3:

Peer ID Type: E-mail Secure Gateway Address:

telecommuterc.com Remote Address 192.168.4.15 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 285 Chapter 14 VPN 286 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide CHAPTER 15 Certificates 15.1 Overview The ZyXEL Device can use certificates (also called digital IDs) to authenticate users. Certificates are based on public-private key pairs. A certificate contains the certificate owners identity and public key. Certificates provide a way to exchange public keys for use in authentication. 15.1.1 What You Can Do in the Certificate Screens Use the My Certificate screens (see Section 15.2 on page 291) to generate and export self-signed certificates or certification requests and import the ZyXEL Devices CA-signed certificates. Use the Trusted CA screens (see Section 15.5 on page 300) to save the certificates of trusted CAs to the ZyXEL Device. You can also export the certificates to a computer. Use the Trusted Remote Hosts screens (see Section 15.8 on page 306) to import self-signed certificates from trusted remote hosts. 15.1.2 What You Need to Know About Certificates Certification Authorities A Certification Authority (CA) issues certificates and guarantees the identity of each certificate owner. There are commercial certification authorities like CyberTrust or VeriSign and government certification authorities. You can use the ZyXEL Device to generate certification requests that contain identifying information and public keys and then send the certification requests to a certification authority. Public and Private Keys When using public-key cryptology for authentication, each host has two keys. One key is public and can be made openly available; the other key is private and must be kept secure. Public-key encryption in general works as follows. P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 287 Chapter 15 Certificates 1 2 3 4 Tim wants to send a private message to Jenny. Tim generates a public-private key pair. What is encrypted with one key can only be decrypted using the other. Tim keeps the private key and makes the public key openly available. Tim uses his private key to encrypt the message and sends it to Jenny. Jenny receives the message and uses Tims public key to decrypt it. 5 Additionally, Jenny uses her own private key to encrypt a message and Tim uses Jennys public key to decrypt the message. The ZyXEL Device uses certificates based on public-key cryptology to authenticate users attempting to establish a connection. The method used to secure the data that you send through an established connection depends on the type of connection. For example, a VPN tunnel might use the triple DES encryption algorithm. The certification authority uses its private key to sign certificates. Anyone can then use the certification authoritys public key to verify the certificates. Certification Path A certification path is the hierarchy of certification authority certificates that validate a certificate. The ZyXEL Device does not trust a certificate if any certificate on its path has expired or been revoked. Certificate Directory Servers Certification authorities maintain directory servers with databases of valid and revoked certificates. A directory of certificates that have been revoked before the scheduled expiration is called a CRL (Certificate Revocation List). The ZyXEL Device can check a peers certificate against a directory servers list of revoked certificates. The framework of servers, software, procedures and policies that handles keys is called PKI (public-key infrastructure). Advantages of Certificates Certificates offer the following benefits. The ZyXEL Device only has to store the certificates of the certification authorities that you decide to trust, no matter how many devices you need to authenticate. Key distribution is simple and very secure since you can freely distribute public keys and you never need to transmit private keys. 288 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide Chapter 15 Certificates Self-signed Certificates You can have the ZyXEL Device act as a certification authority and sign its own certificates. 15.1.3 Verifying a Certificate Before you import a trusted CA or trusted remote host certificate into the ZyXEL Device, you should verify that you have the actual certificate. This is especially true of trusted CA certificates since the ZyXEL Device also trusts any valid certificate signed by any of the imported trusted CA certificates. You can use a certificates fingerprint to verify it. A certificates fingerprint is a message digest calculated using the MD5 or SHA1 algorithms. The following procedure describes how to check a certificates fingerprint to verify that you have the actual certificate. 1 Browse to where you have the certificate saved on your computer. 2 Make sure that the certificate has a .cer or .crt file name extension. Figure 172 Certificates on Your Computer P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 289 Chapter 15 Certificates 3 Double-click the certificates icon to open the Certificate window. Click the Details tab and scroll down to the Thumbprint Algorithm and Thumbprint fields. Figure 173 Certificate Details 4 Use a secure method to verify that the certificate owner has the same information in the Thumbprint Algorithm and Thumbprint fields. The secure method may very based on your situation. Possible examples would be over the telephone or through an HTTPS connection. 290 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide Chapter 15 Certificates 15.2 My Certificates Click Security > Certificates > My Certificates to open the My Certificates screen. This is the ZyXEL Devices summary list of certificates and certification requests. Certificates display in black and certification requests display in gray. Figure 174 Security > Certificates > My Certificates The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 92 Security > Certificates > My Certificates LABEL PKI Storage Space in Use DESCRIPTION This bar displays the percentage of the ZyXEL Devices PKI storage space that is currently in use. The bar turns from green to red when the maximum is being approached. When the bar is red, you should consider deleting expired or unnecessary certificates before adding more certificates. This button displays when the ZyXEL Device has the factory default certificate. The factory default certificate is common to all devices of this model. ZyXEL recommends that you use this button to replace the factory default certificate with one that uses your ZyXEL Device's MAC address. This field displays the certificate index number. The certificates are listed in alphabetical order. This field displays the name used to identify this certificate. It is recommended that you give each certificate a unique name. Replace

Name P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 291 Chapter 15 Certificates Table 92 Security > Certificates > My Certificates (continued) LABEL Type DESCRIPTION This field displays what kind of certificate this is. Subject Issuer Valid From Valid To Modify REQ represents a certification request and is not yet a valid certificate. Send a certification request to a certification authority, which then issues a certificate. Use the My Certificate Import screen to import the certificate and replace the request. SELF represents a self-signed certificate.

*SELF represents the default self-signed certificate, which the ZyXEL Device uses to sign imported trusted remote host certificates. CERT represents a certificate issued by a certification authority. This field displays identifying information about the certificates owner, such as CN (Common Name), OU (Organizational Unit or department), O (Organization or company) and C (Country). It is recommended that each certificate have unique subject information. This field displays identifying information about the certificates issuing certification authority, such as a common name, organizational unit or department, organization or company and country. With self-signed certificates, this is the same information as in the Subject field. This field displays the date that the certificate becomes applicable. The text displays in red and includes a Not Yet Valid! message if the certificate has not yet become applicable. This field displays the date that the certificate expires. The text displays in red and includes an Expiring! or Expired! message if the certificate is about to expire or has already expired. Click the Edit icon to open a screen with an in-depth list of information about the certificate. Click the Remove icon to remove the certificate. A window displays asking you to confirm that you want to delete the certificate. You cannot delete a certificate that one or more features is configured to use. Do the following to delete a certificate that shows *SELF in the Type field. 1. Make sure that no other features, such as HTTPS, VPN, SSH are configured to use the *SELF certificate. 2. Click the Edit icon next to another self-signed certificate (see the description on the Create button if you need to create a self-signed certificate). 3. Select the Default self-signed certificate which signs the imported remote host certificates check box. 4. Click Apply to save the changes and return to the My Certificates screen. 5. The certificate that originally showed *SELF displays SELF and you can delete it now. Note that subsequent certificates move up by one when you take this action 292 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide Chapter 15 Certificates Table 92 Security > Certificates > My Certificates (continued) LABEL Create DESCRIPTION Click Create to go to the screen where you can have the ZyXEL Device generate a certificate or a certification request. Click Import to open a screen where you can save the certificate that you have enrolled from a certification authority from your computer to the ZyXEL Device. Click Refresh to display the current validity status of the certificates. Import Refresh 15.3 My Certificate Details Click Security > Certificates > My Certificates to open the My Certificates screen (see Figure 174 on page 291). Click the edit icon to open the My Certificate Details screen. Use this screen to view in-depth certificate information and change the certificates name. P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 293 Chapter 15 Certificates If it is a self-signed certificate, you can also set the ZyXEL Device to use the certificate to sign the imported trusted remote host certificates. Figure 175 Security > Certificates > My Certificates > Details The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 93 Security > Certificates > My Certificates > Details LABEL Certificate Name DESCRIPTION This field displays the identifying name of this certificate. If you want to change the name, type up to 31 characters to identify this certificate. You may use any character (not including spaces). Select this check box to have the ZyXEL Device use this certificate to sign the trusted remote host certificates that you import to the ZyXEL Device. This check box is only available with self-signed certificates. Property Default self-

signed certificate which signs the imported remote host certificates. If this check box is already selected, you cannot clear it in this screen, you must select this check box in another self-signed certificates details screen. This automatically clears the check box in the details screen of the certificate that was previously set to sign the imported trusted remote host certificates. 294 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide Chapter 15 Certificates Table 93 Security > Certificates > My Certificates > Details (continued) LABEL Certification Path Click the Refresh button to have this read-only text box display the hierarchy of certification authorities that validate the certificate (and the certificate itself). DESCRIPTION If the issuing certification authority is one that you have imported as a trusted certification authority, it may be the only certification authority in the list (along with the certificate itself). If the certificate is a self-signed certificate, the certificate itself is the only one in the list. The ZyXEL Device does not trust the certificate and displays Not trusted in this field if any certificate on the path has expired or been revoked. Click Refresh to display the certification path. These read-only fields display detailed information about the certificate. This field displays general information about the certificate. CA-signed means that a Certification Authority signed the certificate. Self-signed means that the certificates owner signed the certificate (not a certification authority). X.509 means that this certificate was created and signed according to the ITU-T X.509 recommendation that defines the formats for public-key certificates. This field displays the X.509 version number. This field displays the certificates identification number given by the certification authority or generated by the ZyXEL Device. This field displays information that identifies the owner of the certificate, such as Common Name (CN), Organizational Unit (OU), Organization (O) and Country (C). This field displays identifying information about the certificates issuing certification authority, such as Common Name, Organizational Unit, Organization and Country. With self-signed certificates, this is the same as the Subject Name field. This field displays the type of algorithm that was used to sign the certificate. The ZyXEL Device uses rsa-pkcs1-sha1 (RSA public-

private key encryption algorithm and the SHA1 hash algorithm). Some certification authorities may use rsa-pkcs1-md5 (RSA public-

private key encryption algorithm and the MD5 hash algorithm). This field displays the date that the certificate becomes applicable. The text displays in red and includes a Not Yet Valid! message if the certificate has not yet become applicable. This field displays the date that the certificate expires. The text displays in red and includes an Expiring! or Expired! message if the certificate is about to expire or has already expired. This field displays the type of algorithm that was used to generate the certificates key pair (the ZyXEL Device uses RSA encryption) and the length of the key set in bits (1024 bits for example). This field displays the certificate owners IP address (IP), domain name (DNS) or e-mail address (EMAIL). Refresh Certificate Information Type Version Serial Number Subject Issuer Signature Algorithm Valid From Valid To Key Algorithm Subject Alternative Name P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 295 Chapter 15 Certificates Table 93 Security > Certificates > My Certificates > Details (continued) LABEL Key Usage DESCRIPTION This field displays for what functions the certificates key can be used. For example, DigitalSignature means that the key can be used to sign certificates and KeyEncipherment means that the key can be used to encrypt text. This field displays general information about the certificate. For example, Subject Type=CA means that this is a certification authoritys certificate and Path Length Constraint=1 means that there can only be one certification authority in the certificates path. This is the certificates message digest that the ZyXEL Device calculated using the MD5 algorithm. This is the certificates message digest that the ZyXEL Device calculated using the SHA1 algorithm. This read-only text box displays the certificate or certification request in Privacy Enhanced Mail (PEM) format. PEM uses 64 ASCII characters to convert the binary certificate into a printable form. You can copy and paste a certification request into a certification authoritys web page, an e-mail that you send to the certification authority or a text editor and save the file on a management computer for later manual enrollment. You can copy and paste a certificate into an e-mail to send to friends or colleagues or you can copy and paste a certificate into a text editor and save the file on a management computer for later distribution

(via floppy disk for example). Click Back to return to the previous screen. Click this button and then Save in the File Download screen. The Save As screen opens, browse to the location that you want to use and click Save. Click Apply to save your changes back to the ZyXEL Device. You can only change the name, except in the case of a self-signed certificate, which you can also set to be the default self-signed certificate that signs the imported trusted remote host certificates. Click Cancel to quit and return to the My Certificates screen. Basic Constraint MD5 Fingerprint SHA1 Fingerprint Certificate in PEM

(Base-64) Encoded Format Back Export Apply Cancel You can only import a certificate that matches a corresponding certification request that was generated by the ZyXEL Device (the certification request contains the private key). The certificate you import replaces the corresponding request in the My Certificates screen. One exception is that you can import a PKCS#12 format certificate without a corresponding certification request since the certificate includes the private key. Note: Remove any spaces from the certificates filename before you import it. Certificate File Formats The certification authority certificate that you want to import has to be in one of these file formats:

296 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide Chapter 15 Certificates Binary X.509: This is an ITU-T recommendation that defines the formats for X.509 certificates. PEM (Base-64) encoded X.509: This Privacy Enhanced Mail format uses 64 ASCII characters to convert a binary X.509 certificate into a printable form. Binary PKCS#7: This is a standard that defines the general syntax for data

(including digital signatures) that may be encrypted. The ZyXEL Device currently allows the importation of a PKS#7 file that contains a single certificate. PEM (Base-64) encoded PKCS#7: This Privacy Enhanced Mail (PEM) format uses 64 ASCII characters to convert a binary PKCS#7 certificate into a printable form. Binary PKCS#12: This is a format for transferring public key and private key certificates. The private key in a PKCS #12 file is within a password-encrypted envelope. The files password is not connected to your certificates public or private passwords. Exporting a PKCS #12 file creates this and you must provide it to decrypt the contents when you import the file into the ZyXEL Device. Note: Be careful not to convert a binary file to text during the transfer process. It is easy for this to occur since many programs use text files by default. 15.3.1 Using the My Certificate Import Screen Click Security > Certificates > My Certificates and then Import to open the My Certificate Import screen. Follow the instructions in this screen to save an existing certificate to the ZyXEL Device. Figure 176 Security > Certificates > My Certificates > Import The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 94 Security > Certificates > My Certificates > Import LABEL File Path Type in the location of the file you want to upload in this field or click Browse DESCRIPTION Browse to find it. Click Browse to find the certificate file you want to upload. P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 297 Chapter 15 Certificates Table 94 Security > Certificates > My Certificates > Import LABEL Back Apply Cancel DESCRIPTION Click Back to return to the previous screen. Click Apply to save the certificate on the ZyXEL Device. Click Cancel to clear your settings. 15.4 My Certificate Create Click Security > Certificates > My Certificates > Create to open the My Certificate Create screen. Use this screen to have the ZyXEL Device create a self-signed certificate, enroll a certificate with a certification authority or generate a certification request. Figure 177 Security > Certificates > My Certificate Create The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 95 Security > Certificates > My Certificates > Create LABEL Certificate Name DESCRIPTION Type up to 31 ASCII characters (not including spaces) to identify this certificate. Use these fields to record information that identifies the owner of the certificate. You do not have to fill in every field, although the Common Name is mandatory. The certification authority may add fields (such as a serial number) to the subject information when it issues a certificate. It is recommended that each certificate have unique subject information. Subject Information 298 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide Chapter 15 Certificates Table 95 Security > Certificates > My Certificates > Create (continued) LABEL Common Name DESCRIPTION Select a radio button to identify the certificates owner by IP address, domain name or e-mail address. Type the IP address (in dotted decimal notation), domain name or e-mail address in the field provided. The domain name or e-mail address can be up to 31 ASCII characters. The domain name or e-mail address is for identification purposes only and can be any string. Organizational Unit Type up to 127 characters to identify the organizational unit or Organization Country Key Length department to which the certificate owner belongs. You may use any character, including spaces, but the ZyXEL Device drops trailing spaces. Type up to 127 characters to identify the company or group to which the certificate owner belongs. You may use any character, including spaces, but the ZyXEL Device drops trailing spaces. Type up to 127 characters to identify the nation where the certificate owner is located. You may use any character, including spaces, but the ZyXEL Device drops trailing spaces. Select a number from the drop-down list box to determine how many bits the key should use (512 to 2048). The longer the key, the more secure it is. A longer key also uses more PKI storage space. Enrollment Options These radio buttons deal with how and when the certificate is to be Create a self-

signed certificate Create a certification request and save it locally for later manual enrollment generated. Select Create a self-signed certificate to have the ZyXEL Device generate the certificate and act as the Certification Authority (CA) itself. This way you do not need to apply to a certification authority for certificates. Select Create a certification request and save it locally for later manual enrollment to have the ZyXEL Device generate and store a request for a certificate. Use the My Certificate Details screen to view the certification request and copy it to send to the certification authority. Copy the certification request from the My Certificate Details screen (see Section 15.3 on page 293) and then send it to the certification authority. Click Back to return to the previous screen. Click Apply to begin certificate or certification request generation. Click Cancel to quit and return to the My Certificates screen. Back Apply Cancel After you click Apply in the My Certificate Create screen, you see a screen that tells you the ZyXEL Device is generating the self-signed certificate or certification request. After the ZyXEL Device successfully enrolls a certificate or generates a certification request or a self-signed certificate, you see a screen with a Return button that takes you back to the My Certificates screen. If you configured the My Certificate Create screen to have the ZyXEL Device enroll a certificate and the certificate enrollment is not successful, you see a screen with a Return button that takes you back to the My Certificate Create P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 299 Chapter 15 Certificates screen. Click Return and check your information in the My Certificate Create screen. Make sure that the certification authority information is correct and that your Internet connection is working properly if you want the ZyXEL Device to enroll a certificate online. 15.5 Trusted CAs Click Security > Certificates > Trusted CAs to open the Trusted CAs screen. This screen displays a summary list of certificates of the certification authorities that you have set the ZyXEL Device to accept as trusted. The ZyXEL Device accepts any valid certificate signed by a certification authority on this list as being trustworthy; thus you do not need to import any certificate that is signed by one of these certification authorities. Figure 178 Security > Certificates > Trusted CAs The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 96 Security > Certificates > Trusted CAs LABEL PKI Storage Space in Use DESCRIPTION This bar displays the percentage of the ZyXEL Devices PKI storage space that is currently in use. The bar turns from blue to red when the maximum is being approached. When the bar is red, you should consider deleting expired or unnecessary certificates before adding more certificates. This field displays the certificate index number. The certificates are listed in alphabetical order. This field displays the name used to identify this certificate. P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide

Name 300

Chapter 27 Tools If the upload was not successful, the following screen will appear. Click Return to go back to the Configuration screen. Figure 295 Configuration Upload Error 27.3.1 Reset to Factory Defaults Click the Reset button to clear all user-entered configuration information and return the ZyXEL Device to its factory defaults. The following warning screen appears. Figure 296 Reset Warning Message Figure 297 Reset In Process Message You can also press the RESET button on the rear panel to reset the factory defaults of your ZyXEL Device. Refer to Section 1.5 on page 30 for more information on the RESET button. P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 451 Chapter 27 Tools 27.4 Restart System restart allows you to reboot the ZyXEL Device without turning the power off. Click Maintenance > Tools > Restart. Click Restart to have the ZyXEL Device reboot. This does not affect the ZyXEL Device's configuration. Figure 298 Maintenance > Tools > Restart Screen 27.5 Using FTP or TFTP to Back Up Configuration This section covers how to use FTP or TFTP to save your devices configuration file to your computer. 27.5.1 Using the FTP Commands to Back Up Configuration 1 Launch the FTP client on your computer. 2 Enter open, followed by a space and the IP address of your ZyXEL Device. 3 Enter your username as requested (the default is admin). 4 Press [ENTER] when prompted for a password. 5 Enter bin to set transfer mode to binary. 6 Use get to transfer files from the ZyXEL Device to the computer, for example, get rom-0 config.rom transfers the configuration file on the ZyXEL Device to your computer and renames it config.rom. See earlier in this chapter for more information on filename conventions. 7 Enter quit to exit the ftp prompt. 452 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 27.5.2 FTP Command Configuration Backup Example This figure gives an example of using FTP commands from the DOS command prompt to save your devices configuration onto your computer. Chapter 27 Tools Figure 299 FTP Session Example 331 Enter PASS command Password:

230 Logged in ftp> bin 200 Type I OK ftp> get rom-0 zyxel.rom 200 Port command okay 150 Opening data connection for STOR ras 226 File received OK ftp: 16384 bytes sent in 1.10Seconds 297.89Kbytes/sec. ftp> quit 27.5.3 Configuration Backup Using GUI-based FTP Clients The following table describes some of the commands that you may see in GUI-

based FTP clients. Table 163 General Commands for GUI-based FTP Clients COMMAND Host Address Login Type DESCRIPTION Enter the address of the host server. Anonymous. This is when a user I.D. and password is automatically supplied to the server for anonymous access. Anonymous logins will work only if your ISP or service administrator has enabled this option. Normal. The server requires a unique User ID and Password to login. Transfer files in either ASCII (plain text format) or in binary mode. Specify the default remote directory (path). Specify the default local directory (path). Transfer Type Initial Remote Directory Initial Local Directory 27.5.4 Backup Configuration Using TFTP The ZyXEL Device supports the up/downloading of the firmware and the configuration file using TFTP (Trivial File Transfer Protocol) over LAN. Although TFTP should work over WAN as well, it is not recommended. P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 453 Chapter 27 Tools To use TFTP, your computer must have both telnet and TFTP clients. To backup the configuration file, follow the procedure shown next. 1 Use telnet from your computer to connect to the ZyXEL Device and log in. Because TFTP does not have any security checks, the ZyXEL Device records the IP address of the telnet client and accepts TFTP requests only from this address. 2 Enter command sys stdio 0 to disable the management idle timeout, so the TFTP transfer will not be interrupted. Enter command sys stdio 5 to restore the five-minute management idle timeout (default) when the file transfer is complete. 3 Launch the TFTP client on your computer and connect to the ZyXEL Device. Set the transfer mode to binary before starting data transfer. 4 Use the TFTP client (see the example below) to transfer files between the ZyXEL Device and the computer. The file name for the configuration file is rom-0 (rom-

zero, not capital o). Note that the telnet connection must be active before and during the TFTP transfer. For details on TFTP commands (see following example), please consult the documentation of your TFTP client program. For UNIX, use get to transfer from the ZyXEL Device to the computer and binary to set binary transfer mode. 27.5.5 TFTP Command Configuration Backup Example The following is an example TFTP command:

tftp [-i] host get rom-0 config.rom where i specifies binary image transfer mode (use this mode when transferring binary files), host is the ZyXEL Device IP address, get transfers the file source on the ZyXEL Device (rom-0, name of the configuration file on the ZyXEL Device) to the file destination on the computer and renames it config.rom. 454 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 27.5.6 Configuration Backup Using GUI-based TFTP Clients The following table describes some of the fields that you may see in GUI-based TFTP clients. Chapter 27 Tools Table 164 General Commands for GUI-based TFTP Clients COMMAN D Host DESCRIPTION Enter the IP address of the ZyXEL Device. 192.168.1.1 is the ZyXEL Devices default IP address when shipped. Use Send to upload the file to the ZyXEL Device and Fetch to back up the file on your computer. Enter the path and name of the firmware file (*.bin extension) or configuration file (*.rom extension) on your computer. This is the filename on the ZyXEL Device. The filename for the firmware is ras and for the configuration file, is rom-0. Transfer the file in binary mode. Stop transfer of the file. Send/

Fetch Local File Remote File Binary Abort Refer to Section on page 440 to read about configurations that disallow TFTP and FTP over WAN. 27.6 Using FTP or TFTP to Restore Configuration This section shows you how to restore a previously saved configuration. Note that this function erases the current configuration before restoring a previous back up configuration; please do not attempt to restore unless you have a backup configuration file stored on disk. FTP is the preferred method for restoring your current computer configuration to your device since FTP is faster. Please note that you must wait for the system to automatically restart after the file transfer is complete. Do not interrupt the file transfer process as this may PERMANENTLY DAMAGE your device. When the Restore Configuration process is complete, the device automatically restarts. P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 455 Chapter 27 Tools 27.6.1 Restore Using FTP Session Example Figure 300 Restore Using FTP Session Example ftp> put config.rom rom-0 200 Port command okay 150 Opening data connection for STOR rom-0 226 File received OK 221 Goodbye for writing flash ftp: 16384 bytes sent in 0.06Seconds 273.07Kbytes/sec. ftp>quit Refer to Section on page 440 to read about configurations that disallow TFTP and FTP over WAN. 27.7 FTP and TFTP Firmware and Configuration File Uploads This section shows you how to upload firmware and configuration files. Do not interrupt the file transfer process as this may PERMANENTLY DAMAGE your device. FTP is the preferred method for uploading the firmware and configuration. To use this feature, your computer must have an FTP client. The following sections give examples of how to upload the firmware and the configuration files. 27.7.1 FTP File Upload Command from the DOS Prompt Example 1 Launch the FTP client on your computer. 2 Enter open, followed by a space and the IP address of your device. 3 Enter your username as requested (the default is admin). 4 Press [ENTER] when prompted for a password. 5 Enter bin to set transfer mode to binary. 456 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide Chapter 27 Tools 6 Use put to transfer files from the computer to the device, for example, put firmware.bin ras transfers the firmware on your computer (firmware.bin) to the device and renames it ras. Similarly, put config.rom rom-0 transfers the configuration file on your computer (config.rom) to the device and renames it rom-0. Likewise get rom-0 config.rom transfers the configuration file on the device to your computer and renames it config.rom. See earlier in this chapter for more information on filename conventions. 7 Enter quit to exit the ftp prompt. 27.7.2 FTP Session Example of Firmware File Upload Figure 301 FTP Session Example of Firmware File Upload 331 Enter PASS command Password:

230 Logged in ftp> bin 200 Type I OK ftp> put firmware.bin ras 200 Port command okay 150 Opening data connection for STOR ras 226 File received OK ftp: 1103936 bytes sent in 1.10Seconds 297.89Kbytes/sec. ftp> quit More commands (found in GUI-based FTP clients) are listed earlier in this chapter. Refer to Section on page 440 to read about configurations that disallow TFTP and FTP over WAN. 27.7.3 TFTP File Upload The device also supports the uploading of firmware files using TFTP (Trivial File Transfer Protocol) over LAN. Although TFTP should work over WAN as well, it is not recommended. To use TFTP, your computer must have both telnet and TFTP clients. To transfer the firmware and the configuration file, follow the procedure shown next. 1 Use telnet from your computer to connect to the device and log in. Because TFTP does not have any security checks, the device records the IP address of the telnet client and accepts TFTP requests only from this address. P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 457 Chapter 27 Tools 2 Enter the command sys stdio 0 to disable the management idle timeout, so the TFTP transfer will not be interrupted. Enter command sys stdio 5 to restore the five-minute management idle timeout (default) when the file transfer is complete. 3 Launch the TFTP client on your computer and connect to the device. Set the transfer mode to binary before starting data transfer. 4 Use the TFTP client (see the example below) to transfer files between the device and the computer. The file name for the firmware is ras. Note that the telnet connection must be active and the device in CI mode before and during the TFTP transfer. For details on TFTP commands (see following example), please consult the documentation of your TFTP client program. For UNIX, use get to transfer from the device to the computer, put the other way around, and binary to set binary transfer mode. 27.7.4 TFTP Upload Command Example The following is an example TFTP command:

tftp [-i] host put firmware.bin ras Where i specifies binary image transfer mode (use this mode when transferring binary files), host is the devices IP address, put transfers the file source on the computer (firmware.bin name of the firmware on the computer) to the file destination on the remote host (ras - name of the firmware on the device). Commands that you may see in GUI-based TFTP clients are listed earlier in this chapter. 458 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide CHAPTER 28 Diagnostic 28.1 Overview These read-only screens display information to help you identify problems with the ZyXEL Device. 28.1.1 What You Can Do in the Diagnostic Screens Use the General Diagnostic screen (Section 28.2 on page 459) to ping an IP address. 28.2 The General Diagnostic Screen Click Maintenance > Diagnostic to open the screen shown next. Figure 302 Maintenance > Diagnostic > General P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 459 Chapter 28 Diagnostic The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 165 Maintenance > Diagnostic > General LABEL TCP/IP Address Ping DESCRIPTION Type the IP address of a computer that you want to ping in order to test a connection. Click this button to ping the IP address that you entered. 460 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide CHAPTER 29 Troubleshooting 29.1 Overview This chapter offers some suggestions to solve problems you might encounter. The potential problems are divided into the following categories. Power, Hardware Connections, and LEDs ZyXEL Device Access and Login Internet Access Phone Calls and VoIP Multiple SIP Accounts USB Device Connection 29.2 Power, Hardware Connections, and LEDs The ZyXEL Device does not turn on. None of the LEDs turn on. 1 Make sure the ZyXEL Device is turned on. 2 Make sure you are using the power adaptor or cord included with the ZyXEL Device. 3 Make sure the power adaptor or cord is connected to the ZyXEL Device and plugged in to an appropriate power source. Make sure the power source is turned on. 4 5 Turn the ZyXEL Device off and on. If the problem continues, contact the vendor. P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 461 Chapter 29 Troubleshooting One of the LEDs does not behave as expected. 1 Make sure you understand the normal behavior of the LED. See Section 1.4 on page 28. 2 Check the hardware connections. See the Quick Start Guide. 3 4 5 Inspect your cables for damage. Contact the vendor to replace any damaged cables. Turn the ZyXEL Device off and on. If the problem continues, contact the vendor. 29.3 ZyXEL Device Access and Login I forgot the IP address for the ZyXEL Device. 1 2 3 The default IP address is 192.168.1.1. If you changed the IP address and have forgotten it, you might get the IP address of the ZyXEL Device by looking up the IP address of the default gateway for your computer. To do this in most Windows computers, click Start > Run, enter cmd, and then enter ipconfig. The IP address of the Default Gateway might be the IP address of the ZyXEL Device (it depends on the network), so enter this IP address in your Internet browser. If this does not work, you have to reset the device to its factory defaults. See Section 1.5 on page 30. I cannot see or access the Login screen in the web configurator. 1 Make sure you are using the correct IP address. The default IP address is 192.168.1.1. If you changed the IP address (Section on page 127), use the new IP address. 462 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide Chapter 29 Troubleshooting If you changed the IP address and have forgotten it, see the troubleshooting suggestions for I forgot the IP address for the ZyXEL Device. 2 Check the hardware connections, and make sure the LEDs are behaving as expected. See the Quick Start Guide. 3 Make sure your Internet browser does not block pop-up windows and has JavaScripts and Java enabled. See Appendix B on page 511. 4 If you disabled Any IP (Section 7.2.1 on page 120), make sure your computer is in the same subnet as the ZyXEL Device. (If you know that there are routers between your computer and the ZyXEL Device, skip this step.) If there is a DHCP server on your network, make sure your computer is using a dynamic IP address. See Appendix A on page 485. Your ZyXEL Device is a DHCP server by default. If there is no DHCP server on your network, make sure your computers IP address is in the same subnet as the ZyXEL Device. See Appendix A on page 485. 5 Reset the device to its factory defaults, and try to access the ZyXEL Device with the default IP address. See Section 1.5 on page 30. 6 If the problem continues, contact the network administrator or vendor, or try one of the advanced suggestions. Advanced Suggestions Try to access the ZyXEL Device using another service, such as Telnet. If you can access the ZyXEL Device, check the remote management settings and firewall rules to find out why the ZyXEL Device does not respond to HTTP. If your computer is connected to the WAN port or is connected wirelessly, use a computer that is connected to a ETHERNET port. I can see the Login screen, but I cannot log in to the ZyXEL Device. 1 Make sure you have entered the user name and password correctly. The default user name is admin. These fields are case-sensitive, so make sure [Caps Lock] is not on. 2 3 You cannot log in to the web configurator while someone is using Telnet to access the ZyXEL Device. Log out of the ZyXEL Device in the other session, or ask the person who is logged in to log out. Turn the ZyXEL Device off and on. P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 463 Chapter 29 Troubleshooting 4 If this does not work, you have to reset the device to its factory defaults. See Section 29.2 on page 461. I cannot Telnet to the ZyXEL Device. See the troubleshooting suggestions for I cannot see or access the Login screen in the web configurator. Ignore the suggestions about your browser. I cannot use FTP to upload / download the configuration file. / I cannot use FTP to upload new firmware. See the troubleshooting suggestions for I cannot see or access the Login screen in the web configurator. Ignore the suggestions about your browser. 29.4 Internet Access I cannot access the Internet. 1 Check the hardware connections, and make sure the LEDs are behaving as expected. See the Quick Start Guide and Section 1.4 on page 28. 2 Make sure you entered your ISP account information correctly in the wizard. These fields are case-sensitive, so make sure [Caps Lock] is not on. 3 If you are trying to access the Internet wirelessly, make sure the wireless settings in the wireless client are the same as the settings in the AP. 4 Disconnect all the cables from your device, and follow the directions in the Quick Start Guide again. 5 If the problem continues, contact your ISP. I cannot access the Internet anymore. I had access to the Internet (with the ZyXEL Device), but my Internet connection is not available anymore. 464 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 1 Check the hardware connections, and make sure the LEDs are behaving as expected. See the Quick Start Guide and Section 1.4 on page 28. Chapter 29 Troubleshooting 2 3 Turn the ZyXEL Device off and on. If the problem continues, contact your ISP. The Internet connection is slow or intermittent. 1 There might be a lot of traffic on the network. Look at the LEDs, and check Section 1.4 on page 28. If the ZyXEL Device is sending or receiving a lot of information, try closing some programs that use the Internet, especially peer-to-peer applications. 2 Check the signal strength. If the signal strength is low, try moving the ZyXEL Device closer to the AP if possible, and look around to see if there are any devices that might be interfering with the wireless network (for example, microwaves, other wireless networks, and so on). 3 4 Turn the ZyXEL Device off and on. If the problem continues, contact the network administrator or vendor, or try one of the advanced suggestions. Advanced Suggestions Check the settings for bandwidth management. If it is disabled, you might consider activating it. If it is enabled, you might consider changing the allocations. Check the settings for QoS. If it is disabled, you might consider activating it. If it is enabled, you might consider raising or lowering the priority for some applications. 29.5 Phone Calls and VoIP The telephone port wont work or the telephone lacks a dial tone. 1 Check the telephone connections and telephone wire. P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 465 Chapter 29 Troubleshooting I can access the Internet, but cannot make VoIP calls. 1 2 3 The PHONE light should come on. Make sure that your telephone is connected to the PHONE port. You can also check the VoIP status in the Status screen. If the VoIP settings are correct, use speed dial to make peer-to-peer calls. If you can make a call using speed dial, there may be something wrong with the SIP server, contact your VoIP service provider. 29.6 Multiple SIP Accounts You can set up two SIP accounts on your ZyXEL Device and your ZyXEL Device is equipped with two phone ports. By default your ZyXEL Device uses SIP account 1 with both phone ports for outgoing calls, and it uses SIP accounts 1 and 2 for incoming calls. With this setting, you always use SIP account 1 for your outgoing calls and you cannot distinguish which SIP account the calls are coming in through. If you want to control the use of different dialing plans for accounting purposes or other reasons, you need to configure your phone ports in order to control which SIP account you are using when placing or receiving calls. 466 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide Chapter 29 Troubleshooting 29.6.1 Outgoing Calls The following figure represents the default behavior of your ZyXEL Device when two SIP accounts are configured and you are using two phones. When you place a call from phone port 1 or phone port 2, the ZyXEL Device will use SIP account 1. Figure 303 Outgoing Calls: Default PHONE 1 Internet SIP 1 SIP 2 PHONE 2 In the next example, phone port 1 is configured to use SIP account 1 and phone port 2 is configured to use SIP account 2. In this case, every time you place a call through phone port 1, you are using your SIP account 1. Similarly, every time you place a call through phone port 2, you are using your SIP account 2. To apply these configuration changes you need to configure the Analog Phone screen. See Section 10.5 on page 190. Figure 304 Outgoing Calls: Individual Configuration PHONE 1 Internet SIP 1 SIP 2 467 PHONE 2 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide Chapter 29 Troubleshooting 29.6.2 Incoming Calls The following example shows the default behavior of your ZyXEL Device for incoming calls when two SIP accounts are configured and you are using two phones. When a call comes in from your SIP account 1, the phones connected to both phone port 1 and phone port 2 ring. Similarly, when a call comes in from your SIP account 2, the phones connected to both phone port 1 and phone port 2 ring. In either case you are not sure which SIP account the call is coming from. Figure 305 Incoming Calls: Default PHONE 1 Internet SIP 1 SIP 2 PHONE 2 In the next example, phone port 1 is configured to use SIP account 1 and phone port 2 is configured to use SIP account 2 for incoming calls. In this case, every time you receive a call from your SIP account 1, the phone connected to phone port 1 rings. Similarly, every time you receive a call from your SIP account 2, 468 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide Chapter 29 Troubleshooting phone port 2 rings. To apply these configuration changes you need to configure the Analog Phone screen. See Section 10.5 on page 190. Figure 306 Incoming Calls: Individual Configuration PHONE 1 SIP 1 SIP 2 Internet PHONE 2 29.7 USB Device Connection The ZyXEL Device fails to detect my USB device. 1 Disconnect the USB device. 2 Reboot the ZyXEL Device. 3 If you are connecting a USB hard drive that comes with an external power supply, make sure it is connected to an appropriate power source that is on. 4 Re-connect your USB device to the ZyXEL Device. P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 469 Chapter 29 Troubleshooting 470 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide CHAPTER 30 Product Specifications The following tables summarize the ZyXEL Devices hardware and firmware features. Hardware Specifications Table 166 Hardware Specifications Dimensions Weight Power Specification Built-in Switch

(218 W) x (144 D) x (40 H) mm 460 g 18V 1A DC Four auto-negotiating, auto MDI/MDI-X 10/100 Mbps RJ-45 Ethernet ports One RJ11 DSL port One RJ45 WAN port 2 RJ-11 FXS POTS ports Restores factory defaults 1 second: Turn on or off WLAN 5 seconds: Start WPS One USB v2.0 port for file sharing or print server setup One attached external dipole antenna, 2.9 dBi 0 C ~ 40 C

-20 ~ 60 C 20% ~ 85% RH 20% ~ 90% RH 137.20mm M4 tap DSL Port WAN Port PHONE Ports RESET Button WLAN Button USB Port Antenna Operation Temperature Storage Temperature Operation Humidity Storage Humidity Distance between the centers of the holes

(for wall-mounting) on the devices back Screw size for wall-

mounting P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 471 Chapter 30 Product Specifications Firmware Specifications Table 167 Firmware Specifications 192.168.1.1 Default IP Address Default Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0 (24 bits) Default User Name Default Password DHCP Server IP Pool adminpldt 1234567890 Starting Address: 192.168.1.33 Static DHCP Addresses Content Filtering Static Routes Device Management Wireless Functionality

(wireless devices only) Firmware Upgrade Configuration Backup

& Restoration Network Address Translation (NAT) Port Forwarding IEEE 802.1Q and IEEE 802.1P DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) Size: 32 10 Web page blocking by URL keyword. 16 Use the web configurator to easily configure the rich range of features on the ZyXEL Device. Allow the IEEE 802.11b and/or IEEE 802.11g wireless clients to connect to the ZyXEL Device wirelessly. Enable wireless security

(WEP, WPA(2), WPA(2)-PSK) and/or MAC filtering to protect your wireless network. Download new firmware (when available) from the ZyXEL web site and use the web configurator, an FTP or a TFTP tool to put it on the ZyXEL Device. Note: Only upload firmware for your specific model!

Make a copy of the ZyXEL Devices configuration. You can put it back on the ZyXEL Device later if you decide to revert back to an earlier configuration. Each computer on your network must have its own unique IP address. Use NAT to convert your public IP address(es) to multiple private IP addresses for the computers on your network. If you have a server (mail or web server for example) on your network, you can use this feature to let people access it from the Internet. Use IEEE 802.1Q VLAN and IEEE 802.1P priority tags in implementing QoS. Configure VLANs based on port, PVC, and SSID. Specify a PVID to assign to untagged frames or priority-

tagged frames received on this port, SSID, or PVC. Assign a priority for the traffic transmitted through a port, SSID, or PVC. Use this feature to have the ZyXEL Device assign IP addresses, an IP default gateway and DNS servers to computers on your network. Your device can also act as a surrogate DHCP server

(DHCP Relay) where it relays IP address assignment from the actual real DHCP server to the clients. 472 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide Chapter 30 Product Specifications Table 167 Firmware Specifications (continued) Dynamic DNS Support With Dynamic DNS (Domain Name System) support, you can use a fixed URL, www.zyxel.com for example, with a dynamic IP address. You must register for this service with a Dynamic DNS service provider. IP multicast is used to send traffic to a specific group of computers. The ZyXEL Device supports versions 1 and 2 of IGMP

(Internet Group Management Protocol) used to join multicast groups (see RFC 2236). Get the current time and date from an external server when you turn on your ZyXEL Device. You can also set the time manually. These dates and times are then used in logs. Use logs for troubleshooting. You can send logs from the ZyXEL Device to an external syslog server. A UPnP-enabled device can dynamically join a network, obtain an IP address and convey its capabilities to other devices on the network. Your device has a stateful inspection firewall with DoS (Denial of Service) protection. By default, when the firewall is activated, all incoming traffic from the WAN to the LAN is blocked unless it is initiated from the LAN. The firewall supports TCP/UDP inspection, DoS detection and prevention, real time alerts, reports and logs. Content filtering allows you to block access to Internet web sites that contain key words (that you specify) in the URL. You can also schedule when to perform the filtering and give trusted LAN IP addresses unfiltered Internet access. You can efficiently manage traffic on your network by reserving bandwidth and giving priority to certain types of traffic and/or to particular computers. IP Multicast Time and Date Logs Universal Plug and Play (UPnP) Firewall Content Filtering QoS (Quality of Service) Remote Management This allows you to decide whether a service (HTTP or FTP traffic for Any IP PPPoE Support

(RFC2516) example) from a computer on a network (LAN or WAN for example) can access the ZyXEL Device. The Any IP feature allows a computer to access the Internet and the ZyXEL Device without changing the network settings (such as IP address and subnet mask) of the computer, when the IP addresses of the computer and the ZyXEL Device are not in the same subnet. PPPoE (Point-to-Point Protocol over Ethernet) emulates a dial-up connection. It allows your ISP to use their existing network configuration with newer broadband technologies such as ADSL. The PPPoE driver on your device is transparent to the computers on the LAN, which see only Ethernet and are not aware of PPPoE thus saving you from having to manage PPPoE clients on individual computers. IPSec VPN Capability Establish a Virtual Private Network (VPN) to connect with business partners and branch offices using data encryption and the Internet to provide secure communications without the expense of leased site-to-site lines. The ZyXEL Device VPN is based on the IPSec standard and is interoperable with other IPSec-based VPN products. The ZyXEL Device supports up to two simultaneous IPSec connections. P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 473 Chapter 30 Product Specifications Table 167 Firmware Specifications (continued) Other PPPoE Features PPPoE idle time out Multiple PVC

(Permanent Virtual Circuits) Support IP Alias Packet Filters ADSL Standards PPPoE dial on demand Your device supports one Permanent Virtual Circuits (PVCs). IP alias allows you to partition a physical network into logical networks over the same Ethernet interface. Your device supports three logical LAN interfaces via its single physical Ethernet interface with the your device itself as the gateway for each LAN network. Your devices packet filtering function allows added network security and management. Support ITU G.992.1 G.dmt EOC specified in ITU-T G.992.1 ADSL2 G.dmt.bis (G.992.3) ADSL2 G.lite.bis (G.992.4) ADSL 2/2+ AnnexM ADSL2+ (G.992.5) Reach-Extended ADSL (RE ADSL) SRA (Seamless Rate Adaptation) Auto-negotiating rate adaptation ADSL physical connection AAL5 (ATM Adaptation Layer type 5) Multi-protocol over AAL5 (RFC 2684/1483) PPP over ATM AAL5 (RFC 2364) PPP over Ethernet (RFC 2516) Multiple PPPoE VC-based and LLC-based multiplexing I.610 F4/F5 OAM 474 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide Chapter 30 Product Specifications Table 167 Firmware Specifications (continued) Other Protocol Support PPP (Point-to-Point Protocol) link layer protocol Transparent bridging for unsupported network layer protocols RIP I/RIP II ICMP ATM QoS SNMP v1 and v2c with MIB II support (RFC 1213) Management IP Multicasting IGMP v1 and v2 IGMP Proxy Embedded Web Configurator CLI (Command Line Interpreter) SNMP v1 & v2c with MIB II Embedded FTP/TFTP Server for firmware upgrade and configuration file backup and restore Telnet for remote management Remote Management Control: Telnet, FTP, Web, SNMP and DNS. Remote Firmware Upgrade Syslog Voice Specifications Note: To take full advantage of the supplementary phone services available through the ZyXEL Device's phone port, you may need to subscribe to the services from your VoIP service provider. Note: Not all features are supported by all service providers. Consult your service provider for more information. P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 475 Chapter 30 Product Specifications Table 168 Voice Features Call Park and Pickup Call park and pickup lets you put a call on hold (park) and then continue the call (pickup). The caller must still pay while the call is parked. When you park the call, you enter a number of your choice (up to eight digits), which you must enter again when you pick up the call. If you do not enter the correct number, you cannot pickup the call. This means that only someone who knows the number you have chosen can pick up the call. You can have more than one call on hold at the same time, but you must give each call a different number. With call return, you can place a call to the last number that called you (either answered or missed). The last incoming call can be through either SIP or PSTN. Phone standards and settings differ from one country to another, so the settings on your ZyXEL Device must be configured to match those of the country you are in. The country code feature allows you to do this by selecting the country from a list rather than changing each setting manually. Configure the country code feature when you move the ZyXEL Device from one country to another. This feature allows you to set your phone not to ring when someone calls you. You can set each phone independently using its keypad, or configure global settings for all phones using the command line interpreter. You can set the ZyXEL Device to automatically dial a specified number immediately whenever you lift a phone off the hook. Use the Web Configurator to set the specified number. Use the command line interpreter to have the ZyXEL Device wait a specified length of time before dialing the number. The phone config table allows you to customize the phone keypad combinations you use to access certain features on the ZyXEL Device, such as call waiting, call return, and call forward. The phone config table is configurable in command interpreter mode. If your service provider uses an auto provisioning server, you need to enter a personal identification number (supplied by your service provider) before you first use the feature. If your service provider uses this feature, you hear a recorded message when you pick up the phone when new firmware is available for your ZyXEL Device. Enter *99# in your phones keypad to have the ZyXEL Device upgrade the firmware, or enter #99# to not upgrade. If your service provider gave you different numbers to use, enter them instead. If you enter the code to not upgrade, you can make a call as normal. You will hear the recording again each time you pick up the phone, until you upgrade. This feature allows you to hear an alert when you are already using the phone and another person calls you. You can then either reject the new incoming call, put your current call on hold and receive the new incoming call, or end the current call and receive the new incoming call. Call Return Country Code Do not Disturb

(DnD) Auto Dial Phone config HTTP pincode Firmware update enable / disable Call waiting 476 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide Chapter 30 Product Specifications Table 168 Voice Features Call forwarding Caller ID REN Dynamic Jitter Buffer Multiple SIP Accounts Multiple Voice Channels Voice Activity Detection/Silence Suppression Comfort Noise Generation With this feature, you can set the ZyXEL Device to forward calls to a specified number, either unconditionally (always), when your number is busy, or when you do not answer. You can also forward incoming calls from one specified number to another. The ZyXEL Device supports caller ID, which allows you to see the originating number of an incoming call (on a phone with a suitable display). A Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) is used to determine the number of devices (like telephones or fax machines) that may be connected to the telephone line. Your device has a REN of three, so it can support three devices per telephone port. The built-in adaptive buffer helps to smooth out the variations in delay (jitter) for voice traffic. This helps ensure good voice quality for your conversations. You can simultaneously use multiple voice (SIP) accounts and assign them to the telephone port. Your device can simultaneously handle multiple voice channels

(telephone calls). Additionally you can answer an incoming phone call on a VoIP account, even while someone else is using the account for a phone call. Voice Activity Detection (VAD) reduces the bandwidth that a call uses by not transmitting when you are not speaking. Your device generates background noise to fill moments of silence when the other device in a call stops transmitting because the other party is not speaking (as total silence could easily be mistaken for a lost connection). Echo Cancellation You device supports G.168, an ITU-T standard for eliminating the QoS (Quality of Service) echo caused by the sound of your voice reverberating in the telephone receiver while you talk. Quality of Service (QoS) mechanisms help to provide better service on a per-flow basis. Your device supports Type of Service (ToS) tagging and Differentiated Services (DiffServ) tagging. This allows the device to tag voice frames so they can be prioritized over the network. P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 477 Chapter 30 Product Specifications Table 168 Voice Features SIP ALG Other Voice Features Wireless Features Your device is a SIP Application Layer Gateway (ALG). It allows VoIP calls to pass through NAT for devices behind it (such as a SIP-based VoIP software application on a computer). SIP version 2 (Session Initiatiion Protocol RFC 3261) SDP (Session Description Protocol RFC 2327) RTP (RFC 1889) RTCP (RFC 1890) Voice codecs (coder/decoders) G.711, G.729 Fax and data modem discrimination DTMF Detection and Generation DTMF: In-band and Out-band traffic (RFC 2833),(PCM), (SIP INFO) Point-to-point call establishment between two IADs Quick dialing through predefined phone book, which maps the phone dialing number and destination URL. Flexible Dial Plan (RFC3525 section 7.1.14) Table 169 Wireless Features External Antenna Multiple SSID WDS Wireless LAN MAC Address Filtering WEP Encryption Wi-Fi Protected Access WPA2 The ZyXEL Device is equipped with an attached antenna to provide a clear radio signal between the wireless stations and the access points. Multiple SSID allows the ZyXEL Device to operate up to 4 different wireless networks simultaneously, each with independently configurable wireless and security settings. WDS (Wireless Distribution System) lets the ZyXEL Device act as a bridge with other ZyXEL access points. Your device can check the MAC addresses of wireless stations against a list of allowed or denied MAC addresses. WEP (Wired Equivalent Privacy) encrypts data frames before transmitting over the wireless network to help keep network communications private. Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA) is a subset of the IEEE 802.11i security standard. Key differences between WPA and WEP are user authentication and improved data encryption. WPA 2 is a wireless security standard that defines stronger encryption, authentication and key management than WPA. 478 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide Chapter 30 Product Specifications Table 169 Wireless Features WPS Other Wireless Features Wi-Fi Protected Setup IEEE 802.11g Compliance Frequency Range: 2.4 GHz ISM Band Advanced Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing

(OFDM) Data Rates: 54Mbps, 11Mbps, 5.5Mbps, 2Mbps, and 1 Mbps Auto Fallback Turn on-off WLAN by WLAN button (press the WLAN button for one second to turn the WLAN on or turn off; five seconds to turn on WPS) IEEE 802.11i IEEE 802.11e Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP) Data Encryption 64/128/256 bit. WLAN bridge to LAN Up to 32 MAC Address filters IEEE 802.1x External RADIUS server using EAP-MD5, TLS, TTLS Scheduling lets you set when the WLAN is on. The following list, which is not exhaustive, illustrates the standards supported in the ZyXEL Device. Table 170 Standards Supported STANDARD RFC 867 RFC 868 RFC 1058 RFC 1112 RFC 1157 RFC 1305 RFC 1441 RFC 1483 RFC 1631 RFC 1661 RFC 1723 RFC 1901 RFC 2236 RFC 2364 DESCRIPTION Daytime Protocol Time Protocol. RIP-1 (Routing Information Protocol) IGMP v1 SNMPv1: Simple Network Management Protocol version 1 Network Time Protocol (NTP version 3) SNMPv2 Simple Network Management Protocol version 2 Multiprotocol Encapsulation over ATM Adaptation Layer 5 IP Network Address Translator (NAT) The Point-to-Point Protocol (PPP) RIP-2 (Routing Information Protocol) SNMPv2c Simple Network Management Protocol version 2c Internet Group Management Protocol, Version 2. PPP over AAL5 (PPP over ATM over ADSL) P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 479 Chapter 30 Product Specifications Table 170 Standards Supported (continued) STANDARD RFC 2408 RFC 2516 RFC 2684 RFC 2766 IEEE 802.11 IEEE 802.11b IEEE 802.11g IEEE 802.11d IEEE 802.11x IEEE 802.11e QoS ANSI T1.413, Issue 2 G dmt(G.992.1) DESCRIPTION Internet Security Association and Key Management Protocol

(ISAKMP) A Method for Transmitting PPP Over Ethernet (PPPoE) Multiprotocol Encapsulation over ATM Adaptation Layer 5. Network Address Translation - Protocol Also known by the brand Wi-Fi, denotes a set of Wireless LAN/

WLAN standards developed by working group 11 of the IEEE LAN/MAN Standards Committee (IEEE 802). Uses the 2.4 gigahertz (GHz) band Uses the 2.4 gigahertz (GHz) band Standard for Local and Metropolitan Area Networks: Media Access Control (MAC) Bridges Port Based Network Access Control. IEEE 802.11 e Wireless LAN for Quality of Service Asymmetric Digital Subscriber Line (ADSL) standard. G.992.1 Asymmetrical Digital Subscriber Line (ADSL) Transceivers ITU standard for ADSL using discrete multitone modulation. ITU standard for ADSL using discrete multitone modulation. ITU standard (also referred to as ADSL2) that extends the capability of basic ADSL in data rates. ITU standard (also referred to as ADSL2) that extends the capability of basic ADSL in data rates. ITU G.992.1 (G.DMT) ITU G.992.2 (G. Lite) ITU G.992.3

(G.dmt.bis) ITU G.992.4

(G.lite.bis) ITU G.992.5 (ADSL2+) ITU standard (also referred to as ADSL2+) that extends the Microsoft PPTP RFC 2383 TR-069 1.363.5 capability of basic ADSL by doubling the number of downstream bits. MS PPTP (Microsoft's implementation of Point to Point Tunneling Protocol) ST2+ over ATM Protocol Specification - UNI 3.1 Version TR-069 DSL Forum Standard for CPE Wan Management. Compliant AAL5 SAR (Segmentation And Re-assembly) Power Adaptor Specifications Table 171 Power Adaptor Specifications NORTH AMERICAN PLUG STANDARDS AC Power Adapter Model Input Power MT18-Y180100-A1 120V~60Hz 0.5A 480 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide Chapter 30 Product Specifications Table 171 Power Adaptor Specifications (continued) EUROPEAN PLUG STANDARDS AC Power Adapter Model Input Power UNITED KINGDOM PLUG STANDARDS AC Power Adapter Model Input Power MV18-Y180100-C5 230V~50Hz 0.5A MV18-Y180100-B2 230V~50Hz 0.5A Wall-mounting Instructions Do the following to hang your ZyXEL Device on a wall. Note: See Table 166 on page 471 for the size of screws to use and how far apart to place them. 1 Locate a high position on a wall that is free of obstructions. Use a sturdy wall. 2 Drill two holes for the screws. Make sure the distance between the centers of the holes matches what is listed in the product specifications appendix. Be careful to avoid damaging pipes or cables located inside the wall when drilling holes for the screws. 3 Do not screw the screws all the way into the wall. Leave a small gap of about 0.5 cm between the heads of the screws and the wall. 4 Make sure the screws are snugly fastened to the wall. They need to hold the weight of the ZyXEL Device with the connection cables. 5 Align the holes on the back of the ZyXEL Device with the screws on the wall. Hang the ZyXEL Device on the screws. Figure 307 Wall-mounting Example P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 481 Chapter 30 Product Specifications The following are dimensions of an M4 tap screw and masonry plug used for wall mounting. All measurements are in millimeters (mm). Figure 308 Masonry Plug and M4 Tap Screw 482 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide PART IV Appendices and Index Setting Up Your Computers IP Address

(485) Pop-up Windows, JavaScripts and Java Permissions (511) IP Addresses and Subnetting (521) Wireless LANs (533) Common Services (557) Legal Information (561) Index (565) 483 484 A APPENDIX Setting Up Your Computers IP Address Note: Your specific ZyXEL Device may not support all of the operating systems described in this appendix. See the product specifications for more information about which operating systems are supported. This appendix shows you how to configure the IP settings on your computer in order for it to be able to communicate with the other devices on your network. Windows Vista/XP/2000, Mac OS 9/OS X, and all versions of UNIX/LINUX include the software components you need to use TCP/IP on your computer. If you manually assign IP information instead of using a dynamic IP, make sure that your networks computers have IP addresses that place them in the same subnet. In this appendix, you can set up an IP address for:

Windows XP/NT/2000 on page 485 Windows Vista on page 489 Mac OS X: 10.3 and 10.4 on page 493 Mac OS X: 10.5 on page 497 Linux: Ubuntu 8 (GNOME) on page 500 Linux: openSUSE 10.3 (KDE) on page 505 Windows XP/NT/2000 The following example uses the default Windows XP display theme but can also apply to Windows 2000 and Windows NT. P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 485 Appendix A Setting Up Your Computers IP Address 1 Click Start > Control Panel. Figure 309 Windows XP: Start Menu 2 In the Control Panel, click the Network Connections icon. Figure 310 Windows XP: Control Panel 486 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide Appendix A Setting Up Your Computers IP Address 3 Right-click Local Area Connection and then select Properties. Figure 311 Windows XP: Control Panel > Network Connections > Properties 4 On the General tab, select Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) and then click Properties. Figure 312 Windows XP: Local Area Connection Properties P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 487 Appendix A Setting Up Your Computers IP Address 5 The Internet Protocol TCP/IP Properties window opens. Figure 313 Windows XP: Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties 6 Select Obtain an IP address automatically if your network administrator or ISP assigns your IP address dynamically. Select Use the following IP Address and fill in the IP address, Subnet mask, and Default gateway fields if you have a static IP address that was assigned to you by your network administrator or ISP. You may also have to enter a Preferred DNS server and an Alternate DNS server, if that information was provided. 7 Click OK to close the Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties window. 8 Click OK to close the Local Area Connection Properties window. Verifying Settings 1 Click Start > All Programs > Accessories > Command Prompt. 488 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide Appendix A Setting Up Your Computers IP Address 2 In the Command Prompt window, type "ipconfig" and then press [ENTER]. You can also go to Start > Control Panel > Network Connections, right-click a network connection, click Status and then click the Support tab to view your IP address and connection information. Windows Vista This section shows screens from Windows Vista Professional. 1 Click Start > Control Panel. Figure 314 Windows Vista: Start Menu 2 In the Control Panel, click the Network and Internet icon. Figure 315 Windows Vista: Control Panel P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 489 Appendix A Setting Up Your Computers IP Address 3 Click the Network and Sharing Center icon. Figure 316 Windows Vista: Network And Internet 4 Click Manage network connections. Figure 317 Windows Vista: Network and Sharing Center 5 Right-click Local Area Connection and then select Properties. Figure 318 Windows Vista: Network and Sharing Center Note: During this procedure, click Continue whenever Windows displays a screen saying that it needs your permission to continue. 490 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide Appendix A Setting Up Your Computers IP Address 6 Select Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4) and then select Properties. Figure 319 Windows Vista: Local Area Connection Properties P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 491 Appendix A Setting Up Your Computers IP Address 7 The Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4) Properties window opens. Figure 320 Windows Vista: Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4) Properties 8 Select Obtain an IP address automatically if your network administrator or ISP assigns your IP address dynamically. Select Use the following IP Address and fill in the IP address, Subnet mask, and Default gateway fields if you have a static IP address that was assigned to you by your network administrator or ISP. You may also have to enter a Preferred DNS server and an Alternate DNS server, if that information was provided.Click Advanced. 9 Click OK to close the Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties window. 10 Click OK to close the Local Area Connection Properties window. Verifying Settings 1 Click Start > All Programs > Accessories > Command Prompt. 492 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide Appendix A Setting Up Your Computers IP Address 2 In the Command Prompt window, type "ipconfig" and then press [ENTER]. You can also go to Start > Control Panel > Network Connections, right-click a network connection, click Status and then click the Support tab to view your IP address and connection information. Mac OS X: 10.3 and 10.4 The screens in this section are from Mac OS X 10.4 but can also apply to 10.3. 1 Click Apple > System Preferences. Figure 321 Mac OS X 10.4: Apple Menu P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 493 Appendix A Setting Up Your Computers IP Address 2 In the System Preferences window, click the Network icon. Figure 322 Mac OS X 10.4: System Preferences 3 When the Network preferences pane opens, select Built-in Ethernet from the network connection type list, and then click Configure. Figure 323 Mac OS X 10.4: Network Preferences 494 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide Appendix A Setting Up Your Computers IP Address 4 For dynamically assigned settings, select Using DHCP from the Configure IPv4 list in the TCP/IP tab. Figure 324 Mac OS X 10.4: Network Preferences > TCP/IP Tab. 5 For statically assigned settings, do the following:

From the Configure IPv4 list, select Manually. In the IP Address field, type your IP address. In the Subnet Mask field, type your subnet mask. P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 495 Appendix A Setting Up Your Computers IP Address In the Router field, type the IP address of your device. Figure 325 Mac OS X 10.4: Network Preferences > Ethernet 6 Click Apply Now and close the window. Verifying Settings Check your TCP/IP properties by clicking Applications > Utilities > Network Utilities, and then selecting the appropriate Network Interface from the Info tab. Figure 326 Mac OS X 10.4: Network Utility 496 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide Appendix A Setting Up Your Computers IP Address Mac OS X: 10.5 The screens in this section are from Mac OS X 10.5. 1 Click Apple > System Preferences. Figure 327 Mac OS X 10.5: Apple Menu 2 In System Preferences, click the Network icon. Figure 328 Mac OS X 10.5: Systems Preferences P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 497 Appendix A Setting Up Your Computers IP Address 3 When the Network preferences pane opens, select Ethernet from the list of available connection types. Figure 329 Mac OS X 10.5: Network Preferences > Ethernet 4 5 From the Configure list, select Using DHCP for dynamically assigned settings. For statically assigned settings, do the following:

From the Configure list, select Manually. In the IP Address field, enter your IP address. In the Subnet Mask field, enter your subnet mask. 498 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide Appendix A Setting Up Your Computers IP Address In the Router field, enter the IP address of your ZyXEL Device. Figure 330 Mac OS X 10.5: Network Preferences > Ethernet 6 Click Apply and close the window. P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 499 Appendix A Setting Up Your Computers IP Address Verifying Settings Check your TCP/IP properties by clicking Applications > Utilities > Network Utilities, and then selecting the appropriate Network interface from the Info tab. Figure 331 Mac OS X 10.5: Network Utility Linux: Ubuntu 8 (GNOME) This section shows you how to configure your computers TCP/IP settings in the GNU Object Model Environment (GNOME) using the Ubuntu 8 Linux distribution. The procedure, screens and file locations may vary depending on your specific distribution, release version, and individual configuration. The following screens use the default Ubuntu 8 installation. Note: Make sure you are logged in as the root administrator. Follow the steps below to configure your computer IP address in GNOME:

500 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide Appendix A Setting Up Your Computers IP Address 1 Click System > Administration > Network. Figure 332 Ubuntu 8: System > Administration Menu 2 When the Network Settings window opens, click Unlock to open the Authenticate window. (By default, the Unlock button is greyed out until clicked.) You cannot make changes to your configuration unless you first enter your admin password. Figure 333 Ubuntu 8: Network Settings > Connections P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 501 Appendix A Setting Up Your Computers IP Address 3 4 In the Authenticate window, enter your admin account name and password then click the Authenticate button. Figure 334 Ubuntu 8: Administrator Account Authentication In the Network Settings window, select the connection that you want to configure, then click Properties. Figure 335 Ubuntu 8: Network Settings > Connections 502 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide Appendix A Setting Up Your Computers IP Address 5 The Properties dialog box opens. Figure 336 Ubuntu 8: Network Settings > Properties In the Configuration list, select Automatic Configuration (DHCP) if you have a dynamic IP address. In the Configuration list, select Static IP address if you have a static IP address. Fill in the IP address, Subnet mask, and Gateway address fields. 6 Click OK to save the changes and close the Properties dialog box and return to the Network Settings screen. P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 503 Appendix A Setting Up Your Computers IP Address 7 If you know your DNS server IP address(es), click the DNS tab in the Network Settings window and then enter the DNS server information in the fields provided. Figure 337 Ubuntu 8: Network Settings > DNS 8 Click the Close button to apply the changes. Verifying Settings Check your TCP/IP properties by clicking System > Administration > Network Tools, and then selecting the appropriate Network device from the Devices 504 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide Appendix A Setting Up Your Computers IP Address tab. The Interface Statistics column shows data if your connection is working properly. Figure 338 Ubuntu 8: Network Tools Linux: openSUSE 10.3 (KDE) This section shows you how to configure your computers TCP/IP settings in the K Desktop Environment (KDE) using the openSUSE 10.3 Linux distribution. The procedure, screens and file locations may vary depending on your specific distribution, release version, and individual configuration. The following screens use the default openSUSE 10.3 installation. Note: Make sure you are logged in as the root administrator. Follow the steps below to configure your computer IP address in the KDE:

P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 505 Appendix A Setting Up Your Computers IP Address 1 Click K Menu > Computer > Administrator Settings (YaST). Figure 339 openSUSE 10.3: K Menu > Computer Menu 2 When the Run as Root - KDE su dialog opens, enter the admin password and click OK. Figure 340 openSUSE 10.3: K Menu > Computer Menu 506 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide Appendix A Setting Up Your Computers IP Address 3 When the YaST Control Center window opens, select Network Devices and then click the Network Card icon. Figure 341 openSUSE 10.3: YaST Control Center 4 When the Network Settings window opens, click the Overview tab, select the appropriate connection Name from the list, and then click the Configure button. Figure 342 openSUSE 10.3: Network Settings P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 507 Appendix A Setting Up Your Computers IP Address 5 When the Network Card Setup window opens, click the Address tab Figure 343 openSUSE 10.3: Network Card Setup 6 Select Dynamic Address (DHCP) if you have a dynamic IP address. Select Statically assigned IP Address if you have a static IP address. Fill in the IP address, Subnet mask, and Hostname fields. 7 Click Next to save the changes and close the Network Card Setup window. 508 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide Appendix A Setting Up Your Computers IP Address 8 If you know your DNS server IP address(es), click the Hostname/DNS tab in Network Settings and then enter the DNS server information in the fields provided. Figure 344 openSUSE 10.3: Network Settings 9 Click Finish to save your settings and close the window. P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 509 Appendix A Setting Up Your Computers IP Address Verifying Settings Click the KNetwork Manager icon on the Task bar to check your TCP/IP properties. From the Options sub-menu, select Show Connection Information. Figure 345 openSUSE 10.3: KNetwork Manager When the Connection Status - KNetwork Manager window opens, click the Statistics tab to see if your connection is working properly. Figure 346 openSUSE: Connection Status - KNetwork Manager 510 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide B APPENDIX Pop-up Windows, JavaScripts and Java Permissions In order to use the web configurator you need to allow:

Web browser pop-up windows from your device. JavaScripts (enabled by default). Java permissions (enabled by default). Note: Internet Explorer 6 screens are used here. Screens for other Internet Explorer versions may vary. Internet Explorer Pop-up Blockers You may have to disable pop-up blocking to log into your device. Either disable pop-up blocking (enabled by default in Windows XP SP (Service Pack) 2) or allow pop-up blocking and create an exception for your devices IP address. Disable Pop-up Blockers 1 In Internet Explorer, select Tools, Pop-up Blocker and then select Turn Off Pop-up Blocker. Figure 347 Pop-up Blocker You can also check if pop-up blocking is disabled in the Pop-up Blocker section in the Privacy tab. P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 511 Appendix B Pop-up Windows, JavaScripts and Java Permissions 1 In Internet Explorer, select Tools, Internet Options, Privacy. 2 Clear the Block pop-ups check box in the Pop-up Blocker section of the screen. This disables any web pop-up blockers you may have enabled. Figure 348 Internet Options: Privacy 3 Click Apply to save this setting. Enable Pop-up Blockers with Exceptions Alternatively, if you only want to allow pop-up windows from your device, see the following steps. 1 In Internet Explorer, select Tools, Internet Options and then the Privacy tab. 512 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide Appendix B Pop-up Windows, JavaScripts and Java Permissions 2 Select Settingsto open the Pop-up Blocker Settings screen. Figure 349 Internet Options: Privacy 3 Type the IP address of your device (the web page that you do not want to have blocked) with the prefix http://. For example, http://192.168.167.1. P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 513 Appendix B Pop-up Windows, JavaScripts and Java Permissions 4 Click Add to move the IP address to the list of Allowed sites. Figure 350 Pop-up Blocker Settings 5 Click Close to return to the Privacy screen. 6 Click Apply to save this setting. JavaScripts If pages of the web configurator do not display properly in Internet Explorer, check that JavaScripts are allowed. 514 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide Appendix B Pop-up Windows, JavaScripts and Java Permissions 1 In Internet Explorer, click Tools, Internet Options and then the Security tab. Figure 351 Internet Options: Security 2 Click the Custom Level... button. 3 Scroll down to Scripting. 4 Under Active scripting make sure that Enable is selected (the default). 5 Under Scripting of Java applets make sure that Enable is selected (the default). P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 515 Appendix B Pop-up Windows, JavaScripts and Java Permissions 6 Click OK to close the window. Figure 352 Security Settings - Java Scripting Java Permissions 1 From Internet Explorer, click Tools, Internet Options and then the Security tab. 2 Click the Custom Level... button. 3 Scroll down to Microsoft VM. 4 Under Java permissions make sure that a safety level is selected. 516 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide Appendix B Pop-up Windows, JavaScripts and Java Permissions 5 Click OK to close the window. Figure 353 Security Settings - Java JAVA (Sun) 1 From Internet Explorer, click Tools, Internet Options and then the Advanced tab. 2 Make sure that Use Java 2 for <applet> under Java (Sun) is selected. P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 517 Appendix B Pop-up Windows, JavaScripts and Java Permissions 3 Click OK to close the window. Figure 354 Java (Sun) Mozilla Firefox Mozilla Firefox 2.0 screens are used here. Screens for other versions may vary. You can enable Java, Javascripts and pop-ups in one screen. Click Tools, then click Options in the screen that appears. Figure 355 Mozilla Firefox: Tools > Options 518 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide Appendix B Pop-up Windows, JavaScripts and Java Permissions Click Content.to show the screen below. Select the check boxes as shown in the following screen. Figure 356 Mozilla Firefox Content Security P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 519 Appendix B Pop-up Windows, JavaScripts and Java Permissions 520 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide APPENDIX C IP Addresses and Subnetting This appendix introduces IP addresses and subnet masks. IP addresses identify individual devices on a network. Every networking device

(such as computers, servers, routers, and printers) needs an IP address to communicate across the network. These networking devices are also known as hosts. Subnet masks determine the maximum number of possible hosts on a network. You can also use subnet masks to divide one network into multiple sub-networks. Introduction to IP Addresses One part of the IP address is the network number, and the other part is the host ID. In the same way that houses on a street share a common street name, the hosts on a network share a common network number. Similarly, as each house has its own house number, each host on the network has its own unique identifying number - the host ID. Routers use the network number to send packets to the correct network, while the host ID determines to which host on the network the packets are delivered. Structure An IP address is made up of four parts, written in dotted decimal notation (for example, 192.168.1.1). Each of these four parts is known as an octet. An octet is an eight-digit binary number (for example 11000000, which is 192 in decimal notation). Therefore, each octet has a possible range of 00000000 to 11111111 in binary, or 0 to 255 in decimal. P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 521 Appendix C IP Addresses and Subnetting The following figure shows an example IP address in which the first three octets

(192.168.1) are the network number, and the fourth octet (16) is the host ID. Figure 357 Network Number and Host ID How much of the IP address is the network number and how much is the host ID varies according to the subnet mask. Subnet Masks A subnet mask is used to determine which bits are part of the network number, and which bits are part of the host ID (using a logical AND operation). The term subnet is short for sub-network. A subnet mask has 32 bits. If a bit in the subnet mask is a 1 then the corresponding bit in the IP address is part of the network number. If a bit in the subnet mask is 0 then the corresponding bit in the IP address is part of the host ID. The following example shows a subnet mask identifying the network number (in bold text) and host ID of an IP address (192.168.1.2 in decimal). Table 172 IP Address Network Number and Host ID Example IP Address (Binary) Subnet Mask (Binary) Network Number Host ID 522 2ND OCTET:

(168) 10101000 4TH 1ST OCTET OCTET:

(2)

(192) 11000000 00000010 11111111 11111111 11111111 00000000 11000000 10101000 00000001 3RD OCTET:

(1) 00000001 00000010 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide Appendix C IP Addresses and Subnetting By convention, subnet masks always consist of a continuous sequence of ones beginning from the leftmost bit of the mask, followed by a continuous sequence of zeros, for a total number of 32 bits. Subnet masks can be referred to by the size of the network number part (the bits with a 1 value). For example, an 8-bit mask means that the first 8 bits of the mask are ones and the remaining 24 bits are zeroes. Subnet masks are expressed in dotted decimal notation just like IP addresses. The following examples show the binary and decimal notation for 8-bit, 16-bit, 24-bit and 29-bit subnet masks. Table 173 Subnet Masks BINARY 1ST OCTET 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 8-bit mask 16-bit mask 24-bit mask 29-bit mask 2ND OCTET 00000000 11111111 11111111 11111111 3RD OCTET 00000000 00000000 11111111 11111111 4TH OCTET 00000000 00000000 00000000 11111000 DECIMAL 255.0.0.0 255.255.0.0 255.255.255.0 255.255.255.248 Network Size The size of the network number determines the maximum number of possible hosts you can have on your network. The larger the number of network number bits, the smaller the number of remaining host ID bits. An IP address with host IDs of all zeros is the IP address of the network

(192.168.1.0 with a 24-bit subnet mask, for example). An IP address with host IDs of all ones is the broadcast address for that network (192.168.1.255 with a 24-bit subnet mask, for example). As these two IP addresses cannot be used for individual hosts, calculate the maximum number of possible hosts in a network as follows:

Table 174 Maximum Host Numbers SUBNET MASK HOST ID SIZE 8 bits 16 bits 24 bits 29 bits 255.0.0.0 255.255.0.0 255.255.255.0 255.255.255.248 24 bits 16 bits 8 bits 3 bits MAXIMUM NUMBER OF HOSTS 16777214 65534 254 6 224 2 216 2 28 2 23 2 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 523 Appendix C IP Addresses and Subnetting Notation Since the mask is always a continuous number of ones beginning from the left, followed by a continuous number of zeros for the remainder of the 32 bit mask, you can simply specify the number of ones instead of writing the value of each octet. This is usually specified by writing a / followed by the number of bits in the mask after the address. For example, 192.1.1.0 /25 is equivalent to saying 192.1.1.0 with subnet mask 255.255.255.128. The following table shows some possible subnet masks using both notations. Table 175 Alternative Subnet Mask Notation SUBNET MASK ALTERNATIVE NOTATION

/24

/25

/26

/27

/28

/29

/30 LAST OCTET

(BINARY) 0000 0000 1000 0000 1100 0000 1110 0000 1111 0000 1111 1000 1111 1100 LAST OCTET

(DECIMAL) 0 128 192 224 240 248 252 255.255.255.0 255.255.255.128 255.255.255.192 255.255.255.224 255.255.255.240 255.255.255.248 255.255.255.252 Subnetting You can use subnetting to divide one network into multiple sub-networks. In the following example a network administrator creates two sub-networks to isolate a group of servers from the rest of the company network for security reasons. In this example, the company network address is 192.168.1.0. The first three octets of the address (192.168.1) are the network number, and the remaining octet is the host ID, allowing a maximum of 28 2 or 254 possible hosts. 524 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide Appendix C IP Addresses and Subnetting The following figure shows the company network before subnetting. Figure 358 Subnetting Example: Before Subnetting You can borrow one of the host ID bits to divide the network 192.168.1.0 into two separate sub-networks. The subnet mask is now 25 bits (255.255.255.128 or

/25). The borrowed host ID bit can have a value of either 0 or 1, allowing two subnets; 192.168.1.0 /25 and 192.168.1.128 /25. P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 525 Appendix C IP Addresses and Subnetting The following figure shows the company network after subnetting. There are now two sub-networks, A and B. Figure 359 Subnetting Example: After Subnetting In a 25-bit subnet the host ID has 7 bits, so each sub-network has a maximum of 27 2 or 126 possible hosts (a host ID of all zeroes is the subnets address itself, all ones is the subnets broadcast address). 192.168.1.0 with mask 255.255.255.128 is subnet A itself, and 192.168.1.127 with mask 255.255.255.128 is its broadcast address. Therefore, the lowest IP address that can be assigned to an actual host for subnet A is 192.168.1.1 and the highest is 192.168.1.126. Similarly, the host ID range for subnet B is 192.168.1.129 to 192.168.1.254. Example: Four Subnets The previous example illustrated using a 25-bit subnet mask to divide a 24-bit address into two subnets. Similarly, to divide a 24-bit address into four subnets, you need to borrow two host ID bits to give four possible combinations (00, 01, 10 and 11). The subnet mask is 26 bits

(11111111.11111111.11111111.11000000) or 255.255.255.192. 526 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide Appendix C IP Addresses and Subnetting Each subnet contains 6 host ID bits, giving 26 - 2 or 62 hosts for each subnet (a host ID of all zeroes is the subnet itself, all ones is the subnets broadcast address). Table 176 Subnet 1 IP/SUBNET MASK IP Address (Decimal) IP Address (Binary) Subnet Mask (Binary) Subnet Address:

192.168.1.0 Broadcast Address:

192.168.1.63 Table 177 Subnet 2 IP/SUBNET MASK IP Address IP Address (Binary) Subnet Mask (Binary) Subnet Address:

192.168.1.64 Broadcast Address:

192.168.1.127 Table 178 Subnet 3 IP/SUBNET MASK IP Address IP Address (Binary) Subnet Mask (Binary) Subnet Address:

192.168.1.128 Broadcast Address:

192.168.1.191 Table 179 Subnet 4 IP/SUBNET MASK IP Address IP Address (Binary) Subnet Mask (Binary) Subnet Address:

192.168.1.192 Broadcast Address:

192.168.1.255 NETWORK NUMBER 192.168.1. 11000000.10101000.00000001. 00000000 11111111.11111111.11111111. 11000000 Lowest Host ID: 192.168.1.1 LAST OCTET BIT VALUE 0 Highest Host ID: 192.168.1.62 NETWORK NUMBER LAST OCTET BIT VALUE 64 192.168.1. 11000000.10101000.00000001. 01000000 11111111.11111111.11111111. 11000000 Lowest Host ID: 192.168.1.65 Highest Host ID: 192.168.1.126 NETWORK NUMBER LAST OCTET BIT VALUE 128 192.168.1. 11000000.10101000.00000001. 10000000 11111111.11111111.11111111. 11000000 Lowest Host ID: 192.168.1.129 Highest Host ID: 192.168.1.190 NETWORK NUMBER 192.168.1. 11000000.10101000.00000001. 11111111.11111111.11111111. Lowest Host ID: 192.168.1.193 Highest Host ID: 192.168.1.254 LAST OCTET BIT VALUE 192 11000000 11000000 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 527 Appendix C IP Addresses and Subnetting Example: Eight Subnets Similarly, use a 27-bit mask to create eight subnets (000, 001, 010, 011, 100, 101, 110 and 111). The following table shows IP address last octet values for each subnet. Table 180 Eight Subnets SUBNET FIRST ADDRESS LAST SUBNET ADDRESS 0 32 64 96 128 160 192 224 1 33 65 97 129 161 193 225 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ADDRESS 30 62 94 126 158 190 222 254 BROADCAST ADDRESS 31 63 95 127 159 191 223 255 Subnet Planning The following table is a summary for subnet planning on a network with a 24-bit network number. NO. SUBNETS NO. HOSTS PER SUBNET MASK Table 181 24-bit Network Number Subnet Planning NO. BORROWED HOST BITS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 255.255.255.128 (/25) 255.255.255.192 (/26) 255.255.255.224 (/27) 255.255.255.240 (/28) 255.255.255.248 (/29) 255.255.255.252 (/30) 255.255.255.254 (/31) 2 4 8 16 32 64 128 The following table is a summary for subnet planning on a network with a 16-bit network number. Table 182 16-bit Network Number Subnet Planning NO. BORROWED HOST BITS 1 2 255.255.128.0 (/17) 255.255.192.0 (/18) SUBNET MASK 2 4 NO. SUBNETS NO. HOSTS PER SUBNET 126 62 30 14 6 2 1 SUBNET 32766 16382 528 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide Appendix C IP Addresses and Subnetting NO. SUBNETS NO. HOSTS PER SUBNET MASK Table 182 16-bit Network Number Subnet Planning (continued) NO. BORROWED HOST BITS 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 255.255.224.0 (/19) 255.255.240.0 (/20) 255.255.248.0 (/21) 255.255.252.0 (/22) 255.255.254.0 (/23) 255.255.255.0 (/24) 255.255.255.128 (/25) 255.255.255.192 (/26) 255.255.255.224 (/27) 255.255.255.240 (/28) 255.255.255.248 (/29) 255.255.255.252 (/30) 255.255.255.254 (/31) 8 16 32 64 128 256 512 1024 2048 4096 8192 16384 32768 SUBNET 8190 4094 2046 1022 510 254 126 62 30 14 6 2 1 Configuring IP Addresses Where you obtain your network number depends on your particular situation. If the ISP or your network administrator assigns you a block of registered IP addresses, follow their instructions in selecting the IP addresses and the subnet mask. If the ISP did not explicitly give you an IP network number, then most likely you have a single user account and the ISP will assign you a dynamic IP address when the connection is established. If this is the case, it is recommended that you select a network number from 192.168.0.0 to 192.168.255.0. The Internet Assigned Number Authority (IANA) reserved this block of addresses specifically for private use; please do not use any other number unless you are told otherwise. You must also enable Network Address Translation (NAT) on the ZyXEL Device. Once you have decided on the network number, pick an IP address for your ZyXEL Device that is easy to remember (for instance, 192.168.1.1) but make sure that no other device on your network is using that IP address. The subnet mask specifies the network number portion of an IP address. Your ZyXEL Device will compute the subnet mask automatically based on the IP address that you entered. You don't need to change the subnet mask computed by the ZyXEL Device unless you are instructed to do otherwise. P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 529 Appendix C IP Addresses and Subnetting Private IP Addresses Every machine on the Internet must have a unique address. If your networks are isolated from the Internet (running only between two branch offices, for example) you can assign any IP addresses to the hosts without problems. However, the Internet Assigned Numbers Authority (IANA) has reserved the following three blocks of IP addresses specifically for private networks:

10.0.0.0 10.255.255.255 172.16.0.0 172.31.255.255 192.168.0.0 192.168.255.255 You can obtain your IP address from the IANA, from an ISP, or it can be assigned from a private network. If you belong to a small organization and your Internet access is through an ISP, the ISP can provide you with the Internet addresses for your local networks. On the other hand, if you are part of a much larger organization, you should consult your network administrator for the appropriate IP addresses. Regardless of your particular situation, do not create an arbitrary IP address;

always follow the guidelines above. For more information on address assignment, please refer to RFC 1597, Address Allocation for Private Internets and RFC 1466, Guidelines for Management of IP Address Space. IP Address Conflicts Each device on a network must have a unique IP address. Devices with duplicate IP addresses on the same network will not be able to access the Internet or other resources. The devices may also be unreachable through the network. Conflicting Computer IP Addresses Example More than one device can not use the same IP address. In the following example computer A has a static (or fixed) IP address that is the same as the IP address that a DHCP server assigns to computer B which is a DHCP client. Neither can access the Internet. This problem can be solved by assigning a different static IP 530 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide Appendix C IP Addresses and Subnetting address to computer A or setting computer A to obtain an IP address automatically. Figure 360 Conflicting Computer IP Addresses Example Conflicting Router IP Addresses Example Since a router connects different networks, it must have interfaces using different network numbers. For example, if a router is set between a LAN and the Internet

(WAN), the routers LAN and WAN addresses must be on different subnets. In the following example, the LAN and WAN are on the same subnet. The LAN computers cannot access the Internet because the router cannot route between networks. Figure 361 Conflicting Computer IP Addresses Example Conflicting Computer and Router IP Addresses Example More than one device can not use the same IP address. In the following example, the computer and the routers LAN port both use 192.168.1.1 as the IP address. P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 531 Appendix C IP Addresses and Subnetting The computer cannot access the Internet. This problem can be solved by assigning a different IP address to the computer or the routers LAN port. Figure 362 Conflicting Computer and Router IP Addresses Example 532 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide APPENDIX D Wireless LANs Wireless LAN Topologies This section discusses ad-hoc and infrastructure wireless LAN topologies. Ad-hoc Wireless LAN Configuration The simplest WLAN configuration is an independent (Ad-hoc) WLAN that connects a set of computers with wireless adapters (A, B, C). Any time two or more wireless adapters are within range of each other, they can set up an independent network, which is commonly referred to as an ad-hoc network or Independent Basic Service Set (IBSS). The following diagram shows an example of notebook computers using wireless adapters to form an ad-hoc wireless LAN. Figure 363 Peer-to-Peer Communication in an Ad-hoc Network BSS A Basic Service Set (BSS) exists when all communications between wireless clients or between a wireless client and a wired network client go through one access point (AP). Intra-BSS traffic is traffic between wireless clients in the BSS. When Intra-BSS is enabled, wireless client A and B can access the wired network and communicate P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 533 Appendix D Wireless LANs with each other. When Intra-BSS is disabled, wireless client A and B can still access the wired network but cannot communicate with each other. Figure 364 Basic Service Set ESS An Extended Service Set (ESS) consists of a series of overlapping BSSs, each containing an access point, with each access point connected together by a wired network. This wired connection between APs is called a Distribution System (DS). This type of wireless LAN topology is called an Infrastructure WLAN. The Access Points not only provide communication with the wired network but also mediate wireless network traffic in the immediate neighborhood. 534 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide Appendix D Wireless LANs An ESSID (ESS IDentification) uniquely identifies each ESS. All access points and their associated wireless clients within the same ESS must have the same ESSID in order to communicate. Figure 365 Infrastructure WLAN Channel A channel is the radio frequency(ies) used by wireless devices to transmit and receive data. Channels available depend on your geographical area. You may have a choice of channels (for your region) so you should use a channel different from an adjacent AP (access point) to reduce interference. Interference occurs when radio signals from different access points overlap causing interference and degrading performance. Adjacent channels partially overlap however. To avoid interference due to overlap, your AP should be on a channel at least five channels away from a channel that an adjacent AP is using. For example, if your region has 11 channels and an adjacent AP is using channel 1, then you need to select a channel between 6 or 11. RTS/CTS A hidden node occurs when two stations are within range of the same access point, but are not within range of each other. The following figure illustrates a hidden node. Both stations (STA) are within range of the access point (AP) or P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 535 Appendix D Wireless LANs wireless gateway, but out-of-range of each other, so they cannot "hear" each other, that is they do not know if the channel is currently being used. Therefore, they are considered hidden from each other. Figure 366 RTS/CTS When station A sends data to the AP, it might not know that the station B is already using the channel. If these two stations send data at the same time, collisions may occur when both sets of data arrive at the AP at the same time, resulting in a loss of messages for both stations. RTS/CTS is designed to prevent collisions due to hidden nodes. An RTS/CTS defines the biggest size data frame you can send before an RTS (Request To Send)/CTS (Clear to Send) handshake is invoked. When a data frame exceeds the RTS/CTS value you set (between 0 to 2432 bytes), the station that wants to transmit this frame must first send an RTS

(Request To Send) message to the AP for permission to send it. The AP then responds with a CTS (Clear to Send) message to all other stations within its range to notify them to defer their transmission. It also reserves and confirms with the requesting station the time frame for the requested transmission. Stations can send frames smaller than the specified RTS/CTS directly to the AP without the RTS (Request To Send)/CTS (Clear to Send) handshake. You should only configure RTS/CTS if the possibility of hidden nodes exists on your network and the "cost" of resending large frames is more than the extra network overhead involved in the RTS (Request To Send)/CTS (Clear to Send) handshake. If the RTS/CTS value is greater than the Fragmentation Threshold value (see next), then the RTS (Request To Send)/CTS (Clear to Send) handshake will never occur as data frames will be fragmented before they reach RTS/CTS size. Note: Enabling the RTS Threshold causes redundant network overhead that could negatively affect the throughput performance instead of providing a remedy. 536 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide Fragmentation Threshold Appendix D Wireless LANs A Fragmentation Threshold is the maximum data fragment size (between 256 and 2432 bytes) that can be sent in the wireless network before the AP will fragment the packet into smaller data frames. A large Fragmentation Threshold is recommended for networks not prone to interference while you should set a smaller threshold for busy networks or networks that are prone to interference. If the Fragmentation Threshold value is smaller than the RTS/CTS value (see previously) you set then the RTS (Request To Send)/CTS (Clear to Send) handshake will never occur as data frames will be fragmented before they reach RTS/CTS size. Preamble Type Preamble is used to signal that data is coming to the receiver. Short and long refer to the length of the synchronization field in a packet. Short preamble increases performance as less time sending preamble means more time for sending data. All IEEE 802.11 compliant wireless adapters support long preamble, but not all support short preamble. Use long preamble if you are unsure what preamble mode other wireless devices on the network support, and to provide more reliable communications in busy wireless networks. Use short preamble if you are sure all wireless devices on the network support it, and to provide more efficient communications. Use the dynamic setting to automatically use short preamble when all wireless devices on the network support it, otherwise the ZyXEL Device uses long preamble. Note: The wireless devices MUST use the same preamble mode in order to communicate. IEEE 802.11g Wireless LAN IEEE 802.11g is fully compatible with the IEEE 802.11b standard. This means an IEEE 802.11b adapter can interface directly with an IEEE 802.11g access point

(and vice versa) at 11 Mbps or lower depending on range. IEEE 802.11g has P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 537 Appendix D Wireless LANs several intermediate rate steps between the maximum and minimum data rates. The IEEE 802.11g data rate and modulation are as follows:

MODULATION Table 183 IEEE 802.11g DATA RATE

(MBPS) 1 2 5.5 / 11 6/9/12/18/24/36/

48/54 DBPSK (Differential Binary Phase Shift Keyed) DQPSK (Differential Quadrature Phase Shift Keying) CCK (Complementary Code Keying) OFDM (Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing) Wireless Security Overview Wireless security is vital to your network to protect wireless communication between wireless clients, access points and the wired network. Wireless security methods available on the ZyXEL Device are data encryption, wireless client authentication, restricting access by device MAC address and hiding the ZyXEL Device identity. The following figure shows the relative effectiveness of these wireless security methods available on your ZyXEL Device. Table 184 Wireless Security Levels SECURITY LEVEL Least Secure SECURITY TYPE Unique SSID (Default) Unique SSID with Hide SSID Enabled MAC Address Filtering WEP Encryption IEEE802.1x EAP with RADIUS Server Authentication Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA) WPA2 Most Secure Note: You must enable the same wireless security settings on the ZyXEL Device and on all wireless clients that you want to associate with it. 538 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide Appendix D Wireless LANs IEEE 802.1x In June 2001, the IEEE 802.1x standard was designed to extend the features of IEEE 802.11 to support extended authentication as well as providing additional accounting and control features. It is supported by Windows XP and a number of network devices. Some advantages of IEEE 802.1x are:

User based identification that allows for roaming. Support for RADIUS (Remote Authentication Dial In User Service, RFC 2138, 2139) for centralized user profile and accounting management on a network RADIUS server. Support for EAP (Extensible Authentication Protocol, RFC 2486) that allows additional authentication methods to be deployed with no changes to the access point or the wireless clients. RADIUS RADIUS is based on a client-server model that supports authentication, authorization and accounting. The access point is the client and the server is the RADIUS server. The RADIUS server handles the following tasks:

Authentication Determines the identity of the users. Authorization Determines the network services available to authenticated users once they are connected to the network. Accounting Keeps track of the clients network activity. RADIUS is a simple package exchange in which your AP acts as a message relay between the wireless client and the network RADIUS server. Types of RADIUS Messages The following types of RADIUS messages are exchanged between the access point and the RADIUS server for user authentication:

Access-Request Sent by an access point requesting authentication. Access-Reject Sent by a RADIUS server rejecting access. Access-Accept Sent by a RADIUS server allowing access. P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 539 Appendix D Wireless LANs Access-Challenge Sent by a RADIUS server requesting more information in order to allow access. The access point sends a proper response from the user and then sends another Access-Request message. The following types of RADIUS messages are exchanged between the access point and the RADIUS server for user accounting:

Accounting-Request Sent by the access point requesting accounting. Accounting-Response Sent by the RADIUS server to indicate that it has started or stopped accounting. In order to ensure network security, the access point and the RADIUS server use a shared secret key, which is a password, they both know. The key is not sent over the network. In addition to the shared key, password information exchanged is also encrypted to protect the network from unauthorized access. Types of EAP Authentication This section discusses some popular authentication types: EAP-MD5, EAP-TLS, EAP-TTLS, PEAP and LEAP. Your wireless LAN device may not support all authentication types. EAP (Extensible Authentication Protocol) is an authentication protocol that runs on top of the IEEE 802.1x transport mechanism in order to support multiple types of user authentication. By using EAP to interact with an EAP-compatible RADIUS server, an access point helps a wireless station and a RADIUS server perform authentication. The type of authentication you use depends on the RADIUS server and an intermediary AP(s) that supports IEEE 802.1x. For EAP-TLS authentication type, you must first have a wired connection to the network and obtain the certificate(s) from a certificate authority (CA). A certificate

(also called digital IDs) can be used to authenticate users and a CA issues certificates and guarantees the identity of each certificate owner. EAP-MD5 (Message-Digest Algorithm 5) MD5 authentication is the simplest one-way authentication method. The authentication server sends a challenge to the wireless client. The wireless client proves that it knows the password by encrypting the password with the challenge and sends back the information. Password is not sent in plain text. 540 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide Appendix D Wireless LANs However, MD5 authentication has some weaknesses. Since the authentication server needs to get the plaintext passwords, the passwords must be stored. Thus someone other than the authentication server may access the password file. In addition, it is possible to impersonate an authentication server as MD5 authentication method does not perform mutual authentication. Finally, MD5 authentication method does not support data encryption with dynamic session key. You must configure WEP encryption keys for data encryption. EAP-TLS (Transport Layer Security) With EAP-TLS, digital certifications are needed by both the server and the wireless clients for mutual authentication. The server presents a certificate to the client. After validating the identity of the server, the client sends a different certificate to the server. The exchange of certificates is done in the open before a secured tunnel is created. This makes user identity vulnerable to passive attacks. A digital certificate is an electronic ID card that authenticates the senders identity. However, to implement EAP-TLS, you need a Certificate Authority (CA) to handle certificates, which imposes a management overhead. EAP-TTLS (Tunneled Transport Layer Service) EAP-TTLS is an extension of the EAP-TLS authentication that uses certificates for only the server-side authentications to establish a secure connection. Client authentication is then done by sending username and password through the secure connection, thus client identity is protected. For client authentication, EAP-

TTLS supports EAP methods and legacy authentication methods such as PAP, CHAP, MS-CHAP and MS-CHAP v2. PEAP (Protected EAP) Like EAP-TTLS, server-side certificate authentication is used to establish a secure connection, then use simple username and password methods through the secured connection to authenticate the clients, thus hiding client identity. However, PEAP only supports EAP methods, such as EAP-MD5, EAP-MSCHAPv2 and EAP-GTC (EAP-Generic Token Card), for client authentication. EAP-GTC is implemented only by Cisco. LEAP LEAP (Lightweight Extensible Authentication Protocol) is a Cisco implementation of IEEE 802.1x. P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 541 Appendix D Wireless LANs Dynamic WEP Key Exchange The AP maps a unique key that is generated with the RADIUS server. This key expires when the wireless connection times out, disconnects or reauthentication times out. A new WEP key is generated each time reauthentication is performed. If this feature is enabled, it is not necessary to configure a default encryption key in the wireless security configuration screen. You may still configure and store keys, but they will not be used while dynamic WEP is enabled. Note: EAP-MD5 cannot be used with Dynamic WEP Key Exchange For added security, certificate-based authentications (EAP-TLS, EAP-TTLS and PEAP) use dynamic keys for data encryption. They are often deployed in corporate environments, but for public deployment, a simple user name and password pair is more practical. The following table is a comparison of the features of authentication types. Table 185 Comparison of EAP Authentication Types Mutual Authentication Certificate Client Certificate Server Dynamic Key Exchange Credential Integrity Deployment Difficulty Client Identity Protection EAP-MD5 No No No No None Easy No EAP-TLS EAP-TTLS Yes Yes Yes Yes Strong Hard No Yes Optional Yes Yes Strong Moderate Yes LEAP PEAP Yes Yes No Optional No Yes Yes Yes Strong Moderate Moderate Moderate Yes No WPA and WPA2 Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA) is a subset of the IEEE 802.11i standard. WPA2

(IEEE 802.11i) is a wireless security standard that defines stronger encryption, authentication and key management than WPA. Key differences between WPA or WPA2 and WEP are improved data encryption and user authentication. If both an AP and the wireless clients support WPA2 and you have an external RADIUS server, use WPA2 for stronger data encryption. If you don't have an external RADIUS server, you should use WPA2-PSK (WPA2-Pre-Shared Key) that only requires a single (identical) password entered into each access point, wireless gateway and wireless client. As long as the passwords match, a wireless client will be granted access to a WLAN. 542 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide Appendix D Wireless LANs If the AP or the wireless clients do not support WPA2, just use WPA or WPA-PSK depending on whether you have an external RADIUS server or not. Select WEP only when the AP and/or wireless clients do not support WPA or WPA2. WEP is less secure than WPA or WPA2. Encryption Both WPA and WPA2 improve data encryption by using Temporal Key Integrity Protocol (TKIP), Message Integrity Check (MIC) and IEEE 802.1x. WPA and WPA2 use Advanced Encryption Standard (AES) in the Counter mode with Cipher block chaining Message authentication code Protocol (CCMP) to offer stronger encryption than TKIP. TKIP uses 128-bit keys that are dynamically generated and distributed by the authentication server. AES (Advanced Encryption Standard) is a block cipher that uses a 256-bit mathematical algorithm called Rijndael. They both include a per-

packet key mixing function, a Message Integrity Check (MIC) named Michael, an extended initialization vector (IV) with sequencing rules, and a re-keying mechanism. WPA and WPA2 regularly change and rotate the encryption keys so that the same encryption key is never used twice. The RADIUS server distributes a Pairwise Master Key (PMK) key to the AP that then sets up a key hierarchy and management system, using the PMK to dynamically generate unique data encryption keys to encrypt every data packet that is wirelessly communicated between the AP and the wireless clients. This all happens in the background automatically. The Message Integrity Check (MIC) is designed to prevent an attacker from capturing data packets, altering them and resending them. The MIC provides a strong mathematical function in which the receiver and the transmitter each compute and then compare the MIC. If they do not match, it is assumed that the data has been tampered with and the packet is dropped. By generating unique data encryption keys for every data packet and by creating an integrity checking mechanism (MIC), with TKIP and AES it is more difficult to decrypt data on a Wi-Fi network than WEP and difficult for an intruder to break into the network. The encryption mechanisms used for WPA(2) and WPA(2)-PSK are the same. The only difference between the two is that WPA(2)-PSK uses a simple common password, instead of user-specific credentials. The common-password approach makes WPA(2)-PSK susceptible to brute-force password-guessing attacks but its still an improvement over WEP as it employs a consistent, single, alphanumeric password to derive a PMK which is used to generate unique temporal encryption P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 543 Appendix D Wireless LANs keys. This prevent all wireless devices sharing the same encryption keys. (a weakness of WEP) User Authentication WPA and WPA2 apply IEEE 802.1x and Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP) to authenticate wireless clients using an external RADIUS database. WPA2 reduces the number of key exchange messages from six to four (CCMP 4-way handshake) and shortens the time required to connect to a network. Other WPA2 authentication features that are different from WPA include key caching and pre-

authentication. These two features are optional and may not be supported in all wireless devices. Key caching allows a wireless client to store the PMK it derived through a successful authentication with an AP. The wireless client uses the PMK when it tries to connect to the same AP and does not need to go with the authentication process again. Pre-authentication enables fast roaming by allowing the wireless client (already connecting to an AP) to perform IEEE 802.1x authentication with another AP before connecting to it. Wireless Client WPA Supplicants A wireless client supplicant is the software that runs on an operating system instructing the wireless client how to use WPA. At the time of writing, the most widely available supplicant is the WPA patch for Windows XP, Funk Software's Odyssey client. The Windows XP patch is a free download that adds WPA capability to Windows XP's built-in "Zero Configuration" wireless client. However, you must run Windows XP to use it. WPA(2) with RADIUS Application Example To set up WPA(2), you need the IP address of the RADIUS server, its port number

(default is 1812), and the RADIUS shared secret. A WPA(2) application example with an external RADIUS server looks as follows. "A" is the RADIUS server. "DS" is the distribution system. 1 2 The AP passes the wireless client's authentication request to the RADIUS server. The RADIUS server then checks the user's identification against its database and grants or denies network access accordingly. 3 A 256-bit Pairwise Master Key (PMK) is derived from the authentication process by the RADIUS server and the client. 544 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide Appendix D Wireless LANs 4 The RADIUS server distributes the PMK to the AP. The AP then sets up a key hierarchy and management system, using the PMK to dynamically generate unique data encryption keys. The keys are used to encrypt every data packet that is wirelessly communicated between the AP and the wireless clients. Figure 367 WPA(2) with RADIUS Application Example WPA(2)-PSK Application Example A WPA(2)-PSK application looks as follows. 1 2 3 First enter identical passwords into the AP and all wireless clients. The Pre-Shared Key (PSK) must consist of between 8 and 63 ASCII characters or 64 hexadecimal characters (including spaces and symbols). The AP checks each wireless client's password and allows it to join the network only if the password matches. The AP and wireless clients generate a common PMK (Pairwise Master Key). The key itself is not sent over the network, but is derived from the PSK and the SSID. P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 545 Appendix D Wireless LANs 4 The AP and wireless clients use the TKIP or AES encryption process, the PMK and information exchanged in a handshake to create temporal encryption keys. They use these keys to encrypt data exchanged between them. Figure 368 WPA(2)-PSK Authentication Security Parameters Summary Refer to this table to see what other security parameters you should configure for each authentication method or key management protocol type. MAC address filters are not dependent on how you configure these security features. Table 186 Wireless Security Relational Matrix AUTHENTICATION METHOD/ KEY MANAGEMENT PROTOCOL Open ENCRYPTIO N METHOD None No ENTER MANUAL KEY IEEE 802.1X Open WEP Shared WEP No Yes Yes No Yes WPA WPA-PSK WPA2 WPA2-PSK TKIP/AES TKIP/AES TKIP/AES TKIP/AES Yes No Yes No Yes Disable Enable without Dynamic WEP Key Enable with Dynamic WEP Key Enable without Dynamic WEP Key Disable Enable with Dynamic WEP Key Enable without Dynamic WEP Key Disable Enable Disable Enable Disable 546 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide Appendix D Wireless LANs Antenna Overview An antenna couples RF signals onto air. A transmitter within a wireless device sends an RF signal to the antenna, which propagates the signal through the air. The antenna also operates in reverse by capturing RF signals from the air. Positioning the antennas properly increases the range and coverage area of a wireless LAN. Antenna Characteristics Frequency An antenna in the frequency of 2.4GHz (IEEE 802.11b and IEEE 802.11g) or 5GHz

(IEEE 802.11a) is needed to communicate efficiently in a wireless LAN Radiation Pattern A radiation pattern is a diagram that allows you to visualize the shape of the antennas coverage area. Antenna Gain Antenna gain, measured in dB (decibel), is the increase in coverage within the RF beam width. Higher antenna gain improves the range of the signal for better communications. For an indoor site, each 1 dB increase in antenna gain results in a range increase of approximately 2.5%. For an unobstructed outdoor site, each 1dB increase in gain results in a range increase of approximately 5%. Actual results may vary depending on the network environment. Antenna gain is sometimes specified in dBi, which is how much the antenna increases the signal power compared to using an isotropic antenna. An isotropic antenna is a theoretical perfect antenna that sends out radio signals equally well in all directions. dBi represents the true gain that the antenna provides. Types of Antennas for WLAN There are two types of antennas used for wireless LAN applications. P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 547 Appendix D Wireless LANs Omni-directional antennas send the RF signal out in all directions on a horizontal plane. The coverage area is torus-shaped (like a donut) which makes these antennas ideal for a room environment. With a wide coverage area, it is possible to make circular overlapping coverage areas with multiple access points. Directional antennas concentrate the RF signal in a beam, like a flashlight does with the light from its bulb. The angle of the beam determines the width of the coverage pattern. Angles typically range from 20 degrees (very directional) to 120 degrees (less directional). Directional antennas are ideal for hallways and outdoor point-to-point applications. Positioning Antennas In general, antennas should be mounted as high as practically possible and free of obstructions. In point-topoint application, position both antennas at the same height and in a direct line of sight to each other to attain the best performance. For omni-directional antennas mounted on a table, desk, and so on, point the antenna up. For omni-directional antennas mounted on a wall or ceiling, point the antenna down. For a single AP application, place omni-directional antennas as close to the center of the coverage area as possible. For directional antennas, point the antenna in the direction of the desired coverage area. WiFi Protected Setup Your ZyXEL Device supports WiFi Protected Setup (WPS), which is an easy way to set up a secure wireless network. WPS is an industry standard specification, defined by the WiFi Alliance. WPS allows you to quickly set up a wireless network with strong security, without having to configure security settings manually. Each WPS connection works between two devices. Both devices must support WPS (check each devices documentation to make sure). Depending on the devices you have, you can either press a button (on the device itself, or in its configuration utility) or enter a PIN (a unique Personal Identification Number that allows one device to authenticate the other) in each of the two devices. When WPS is activated on a device, it has two minutes to find another device that also has WPS activated. Then, the two devices connect and set up a secure network by themselves. 548 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide Push Button Configuration Appendix D Wireless LANs WPS Push Button Configuration (PBC) is initiated by pressing a button on each WPS-enabled device, and allowing them to connect automatically. You do not need to enter any information. Not every WPS-enabled device has a physical WPS button. Some may have a WPS PBC button in their configuration utilities instead of or in addition to the physical button. Take the following steps to set up WPS using the button. 1 Ensure that the two devices you want to set up are within wireless range of one another. 2 3 Look for a WPS button on each device. If the device does not have one, log into its configuration utility and locate the button (see the devices Users Guide for how to do this - for the ZyXEL Device, see Section 8.6 on page 149). Press the button on one of the devices (it doesnt matter which). 4 Within two minutes, press the button on the other device. The registrar sends the network name (SSID) and security key through an secure connection to the enrollee. If you need to make sure that WPS worked, check the list of associated wireless clients in the APs configuration utility. If you see the wireless client in the list, WPS was successful. PIN Configuration Each WPS-enabled device has its own PIN (Personal Identification Number). This may either be static (it cannot be changed) or dynamic (you can change it to a new random number by clicking on a button in the configuration interface). When you use the PIN method, you must enter the enrollees PIN into the registrar. Then, when WPS is activated on the enrollee, it presents its PIN to the registrar. If the PIN matches, the registrar sends the network and security information to the enrollee, allowing it to join the network. The advantage of using the PIN method rather than the PBC method is that you can ensure that the connection is established between the devices you specify, not just the first two devices to activate WPS in the area. However, you need to log into the configuration interfaces of both devices. Take the following steps to set up WPS using the PIN method. P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 549 Appendix D Wireless LANs 1 Decide which device you want to be the registrar (usually the AP) and which you want to be the enrollee (usually the client). 2 3 Look for the enrollees WPS PIN; it may be displayed on the device. If you dont see it, log into the enrollees configuration interface and locate the PIN. Select the PIN connection mode (not PBC connection mode). See the devices Users Guide for how to do this - for the ZyXEL Device, see Section 8.5 on page 148. Log into the configuration utility of the registrar. Select the PIN connection mode

(not the PBC connection mode). Locate the place where you can enter the enrollees PIN (if you are using the ZyXEL Device, see Section 8.6 on page 149). Enter the PIN from the enrollee device. 4 Activate WPS on both devices within two minutes. Note: Use the configuration utility to activate WPS, not the push-button on the device itself. 5 On a computer connected to the wireless client, try to connect to the Internet. If you can connect, WPS was successful. If you cannot connect, check the list of associated wireless clients in the APs configuration utility. If you see the wireless client in the list, WPS was successful. 550 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide Appendix D Wireless LANs The following figure shows a WPS-enabled wireless client (installed in a notebook computer) connecting to the WPS-enabled AP via the PIN method. Figure 369 Example WPS Process: PIN Method ENROLLEE REGISTRAR WPS This devices WPS PIN: 123456 WPS Enter WPS PIN from other device:

WPS WPS START START WITHIN 2 MINUTES SECURE EAP TUNNEL SSID WPA(2)-PSK COMMUNICATION How WPS Works When two WPS-enabled devices connect, each device must assume a specific role. One device acts as the registrar (the device that supplies network and security settings) and the other device acts as the enrollee (the device that receives network and security settings. The registrar creates a secure EAP (Extensible Authentication Protocol) tunnel and sends the network name (SSID) and the WPA-

PSK or WPA2-PSK pre-shared key to the enrollee. Whether WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK is used depends on the standards supported by the devices. If the registrar is P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 551 Appendix D Wireless LANs already part of a network, it sends the existing information. If not, it generates the SSID and WPA(2)-PSK randomly. The following figure shows a WPS-enabled client (installed in a notebook computer) connecting to a WPS-enabled access point. Figure 370 How WPS works ACTIVATE WPS WITHIN 2 MINUTES ACTIVATE WPS ENROLLEE WPS HANDSHAKE SECURE TUNNEL SECURITY INFO COMMUNICATION REGISTRAR The roles of registrar and enrollee last only as long as the WPS setup process is active (two minutes). The next time you use WPS, a different device can be the registrar if necessary. The WPS connection process is like a handshake; only two devices participate in each WPS transaction. If you want to add more devices you should repeat the process with one of the existing networked devices and the new device. Note that the access point (AP) is not always the registrar, and the wireless client is not always the enrollee. All WPS-certified APs can be a registrar, and so can some WPS-enabled wireless clients. By default, a WPS devices is unconfigured. This means that it is not part of an existing network and can act as either enrollee or registrar (if it supports both functions). If the registrar is unconfigured, the security settings it transmits to the enrollee are randomly-generated. Once a WPS-enabled device has connected to another device using WPS, it becomes configured. A configured wireless client can still act as enrollee or registrar in subsequent WPS connections, but a configured access point can no longer act as enrollee. It will be the registrar in all 552 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide Appendix D Wireless LANs subsequent WPS connections in which it is involved. If you want a configured AP to act as an enrollee, you must reset it to its factory defaults. Example WPS Network Setup This section shows how security settings are distributed in an example WPS setup. The following figure shows an example network. In step 1, both AP1 and Client 1 are unconfigured. When WPS is activated on both, they perform the handshake. In this example, AP1 is the registrar, and Client 1 is the enrollee. The registrar randomly generates the security information to set up the network, since it is unconfigured and has no existing information. Figure 371 WPS: Example Network Step 1 ENROLLEE CLIENT 1 SECURITY INFO REGISTRAR AP1 In step 2, you add another wireless client to the network. You know that Client 1 supports registrar mode, but it is better to use AP1 for the WPS handshake with the new client since you must connect to the access point anyway in order to use the network. In this case, AP1 must be the registrar, since it is configured (it already has security information for the network). AP1 supplies the existing security information to Client 2. Figure 372 WPS: Example Network Step 2 REGISTRAR AP1 EXISTING CONNECTION O F Y I N R I T U C E S CLIENT 1 ENROLLEE CLIENT 2 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 553 Appendix D Wireless LANs In step 3, you add another access point (AP2) to your network. AP2 is out of range of AP1, so you cannot use AP1 for the WPS handshake with the new access point. However, you know that Client 2 supports the registrar function, so you use it to perform the WPS handshake instead. Figure 373 WPS: Example Network Step 3 CLIENT 1 REGISTRAR CLIENT 2 EXISTING CONNECTION N T I O C E N N O G C T I N X I S E SECURITY INFO AP1 ENROLLEE AP1 Limitations of WPS WPS has some limitations of which you should be aware. WPS works in Infrastructure networks only (where an AP and a wireless client communicate). It does not work in Ad-Hoc networks (where there is no AP). When you use WPS, it works between two devices only. You cannot enroll multiple devices simultaneously, you must enroll one after the other. For instance, if you have two enrollees and one registrar you must set up the first enrollee (by pressing the WPS button on the registrar and the first enrollee, for example), then check that it successfully enrolled, then set up the second device in the same way. WPS works only with other WPS-enabled devices. However, you can still add non-WPS devices to a network you already set up using WPS. WPS works by automatically issuing a randomly-generated WPA-PSK or WPA2-

PSK pre-shared key from the registrar device to the enrollee devices. Whether the network uses WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK depends on the device. You can check the configuration interface of the registrar device to discover the key the network is using (if the device supports this feature). Then, you can enter the key into the non-WPS device and join the network as normal (the non-WPS device must also support WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK). 554 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide Appendix D Wireless LANs When you use the PBC method, there is a short period (from the moment you press the button on one device to the moment you press the button on the other device) when any WPS-enabled device could join the network. This is because the registrar has no way of identifying the correct enrollee, and cannot differentiate between your enrollee and a rogue device. This is a possible way for a hacker to gain access to a network. You can easily check to see if this has happened. WPS works between only two devices simultaneously, so if another device has enrolled your device will be unable to enroll, and will not have access to the network. If this happens, open the access points configuration interface and look at the list of associated clients (usually displayed by MAC address). It does not matter if the access point is the WPS registrar, the enrollee, or was not involved in the WPS handshake; a rogue device must still associate with the access point to gain access to the network. Check the MAC addresses of your wireless clients

(usually printed on a label on the bottom of the device). If there is an unknown MAC address you can remove it or reset the AP. P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 555 Appendix D Wireless LANs 556 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide APPENDIX E Common Services The following table lists some commonly-used services and their associated protocols and port numbers. For a comprehensive list of port numbers, ICMP type/

code numbers and services, visit the IANA (Internet Assigned Number Authority) web site. Name: This is a short, descriptive name for the service. You can use this one or create a different one, if you like. Protocol: This is the type of IP protocol used by the service. If this is TCP/

UDP, then the service uses the same port number with TCP and UDP. If this is USER-DEFINED, the Port(s) is the IP protocol number, not the port number. Port(s): This value depends on the Protocol. Please refer to RFC 1700 for further information about port numbers. If the Protocol is TCP, UDP, or TCP/UDP, this is the IP port number. If the Protocol is USER, this is the IP protocol number. Description: This is a brief explanation of the applications that use this service or the situations in which this service is used. Table 187 Commonly Used Services NAME AH

(IPSEC_TUNNEL) PROTOCOL User-Defined PORT(S) DESCRIPTION 51 AIM/New-ICQ TCP AUTH BGP BOOTP_CLIENT BOOTP_SERVER CU-SEEME TCP TCP UDP UDP TCP DNS UDP TCP/UDP 5190 113 179 68 67 7648 24032 53 The IPSEC AH (Authentication Header) tunneling protocol uses this service. AOLs Internet Messenger service. It is also used as a listening port by ICQ. Authentication protocol used by some servers. Border Gateway Protocol. DHCP Client. DHCP Server. A popular videoconferencing solution from White Pines Software. Domain Name Server, a service that matches web names (for example www.zyxel.com) to IP numbers. P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 557 Appendix E Common Services Table 187 Commonly Used Services (continued) NAME ESP

(IPSEC_TUNNEL) PROTOCOL User-Defined PORT(S) DESCRIPTION 50 FINGER FTP H.323 HTTP HTTPS ICMP TCP TCP TCP TCP TCP TCP 79 20 21 1720 80 443 User-Defined 1 ICQ UDP 4000 IGMP

(MULTICAST) User-Defined 2 IKE IRC UDP TCP/UDP MSN Messenger TCP TCP TCP UDP TCP NEW-ICQ NEWS NFS NNTP PING 500 6667 1863 5190 144 2049 119 User-Defined 1 POP3 TCP 110 The IPSEC ESP (Encapsulation Security Protocol) tunneling protocol uses this service. Finger is a UNIX or Internet related command that can be used to find out if a user is logged on. File Transfer Program, a program to enable fast transfer of files, including large files that may not be possible by e-mail. NetMeeting uses this protocol. Hyper Text Transfer Protocol - a client/server protocol for the world wide web. HTTPS is a secured http session often used in e-commerce. Internet Control Message Protocol is often used for diagnostic or routing purposes. This is a popular Internet chat program. Internet Group Management Protocol is used when sending packets to a specific group of hosts. The Internet Key Exchange algorithm is used for key distribution and management. This is another popular Internet chat program. Microsoft Networks messenger service uses this protocol. An Internet chat program. A protocol for news groups. Network File System - NFS is a client/

server distributed file service that provides transparent file sharing for network environments. Network News Transport Protocol is the delivery mechanism for the USENET newsgroup service. Packet INternet Groper is a protocol that sends out ICMP echo requests to test whether or not a remote host is reachable. Post Office Protocol version 3 lets a client computer get e-mail from a POP3 server through a temporary connection (TCP/IP or other). 558 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide Table 187 Commonly Used Services (continued) NAME PPTP PROTOCOL TCP PORT(S) DESCRIPTION 1723 PPTP_TUNNEL

(GRE) User-Defined 47 RCMD REAL_AUDIO TCP TCP REXEC RLOGIN RTELNET RTSP TCP TCP TCP TCP/UDP SFTP SMTP TCP TCP SNMP TCP/UDP SNMP-TRAPS TCP/UDP SQL-NET TCP SSH STRM WORKS SYSLOG TCP/UDP UDP UDP TACACS TELNET UDP TCP 512 7070 514 513 107 554 115 25 161 162 1521 22 1558 514 49 23 Appendix E Common Services Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol enables secure transfer of data over public networks. This is the control channel. PPTP (Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol) enables secure transfer of data over public networks. This is the data channel. Remote Command Service. A streaming audio service that enables real time sound over the web. Remote Execution Daemon. Remote Login. Remote Telnet. The Real Time Streaming (media control) Protocol (RTSP) is a remote control for multimedia on the Internet. Simple File Transfer Protocol. Simple Mail Transfer Protocol is the message-exchange standard for the Internet. SMTP enables you to move messages from one e-mail server to another. Simple Network Management Program. Traps for use with the SNMP

(RFC:1215). Structured Query Language is an interface to access data on many different types of database systems, including mainframes, midrange systems, UNIX systems and network servers. Secure Shell Remote Login Program. Stream Works Protocol. Syslog allows you to send system logs to a UNIX server. Login Host Protocol used for (Terminal Access Controller Access Control System). Telnet is the login and terminal emulation protocol common on the Internet and in UNIX environments. It operates over TCP/IP networks. Its primary function is to allow users to log into remote host systems. P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 559 Appendix E Common Services Table 187 Commonly Used Services (continued) NAME TFTP PROTOCOL UDP PORT(S) DESCRIPTION 69 VDOLIVE TCP 7000 Trivial File Transfer Protocol is an Internet file transfer protocol similar to FTP, but uses the UDP (User Datagram Protocol) rather than TCP

(Transmission Control Protocol). Another videoconferencing solution. 560 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide APPENDIX F Legal Information Copyright Copyright 2009 by ZyXEL Communications Corporation. The contents of this publication may not be reproduced in any part or as a whole, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, translated into any language, or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, magnetic, optical, chemical, photocopying, manual, or otherwise, without the prior written permission of ZyXEL Communications Corporation. Published by ZyXEL Communications Corporation. All rights reserved. Disclaimer ZyXEL does not assume any liability arising out of the application or use of any products, or software described herein. Neither does it convey any license under its patent rights nor the patent rights of others. ZyXEL further reserves the right to make changes in any products described herein without notice. This publication is subject to change without notice. Trademarks ZyNOS (ZyXEL Network Operating System) is a registered trademark of ZyXEL Communications, Inc. Other trademarks mentioned in this publication are used for identification purposes only and may be properties of their respective owners. Certifications Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Interference Statement The device complies with Part 15 of FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

This device may not cause harmful interference. P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 561 Appendix F Legal Information This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operations. This device has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This device generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy, and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this device does cause harmful interference to radio/television reception, which can be determined by turning the device off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

1 Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. 2 Increase the separation between the equipment and the receiver. 3 Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. 4 Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. FCC Radiation Exposure Statement This transmitter must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. IEEE 802.11b or 802.11g operation of this product in the U.S.A. is firmware-

limited to channels 1 through 11. To comply with FCC RF exposure compliance requirements, a separation distance of at least 20 cm must be maintained between the antenna of this device and all persons.

562 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide Appendix F Legal Information Notices Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. This device has been designed for the WLAN 2.4 GHz network throughout the EC region and Switzerland, with restrictions in France. Viewing Certifications 1 Go to http://www.zyxel.com. 2 Select your product on the ZyXEL home page to go to that product's page. 3 Select the certification you wish to view from this page. ZyXEL Limited Warranty ZyXEL warrants to the original end user (purchaser) that this product is free from any defects in materials or workmanship for a period of up to two years from the date of purchase. During the warranty period, and upon proof of purchase, should the product have indications of failure due to faulty workmanship and/or materials, ZyXEL will, at its discretion, repair or replace the defective products or components without charge for either parts or labor, and to whatever extent it shall deem necessary to restore the product or components to proper operating condition. Any replacement will consist of a new or re-manufactured functionally equivalent product of equal or higher value, and will be solely at the discretion of ZyXEL. This warranty shall not apply if the product has been modified, misused, tampered with, damaged by an act of God, or subjected to abnormal working conditions. Note Repair or replacement, as provided under this warranty, is the exclusive remedy of the purchaser. This warranty is in lieu of all other warranties, express or implied, including any implied warranty of merchantability or fitness for a particular use or purpose. ZyXEL shall in no event be held liable for indirect or consequential damages of any kind to the purchaser. P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 563 Appendix F Legal Information To obtain the services of this warranty, contact your vendor. You may also refer to the warranty policy for the region in which you bought the device at http://

www.zyxel.com/web/support_warranty_info.php. Registration Register your product online to receive e-mail notices of firmware upgrades and information at www.zyxel.com for global products, or at www.us.zyxel.com for North American products. 564 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide Index Index Numerics 802.11 mode 144 802.1Q/1P 317 activation 324 example 319 group settings 325 management VLAN 324 port settings 327 priority 317, 328 PVC 318 PVID 328 tagging frames 318, 327 A AAL5 474 access point, See AP 133 accounting server WLAN accounting server 143 ACK message 207 activation 802.1Q/1P 324 content filtering 250 firewalls 231 wireless LAN scheduling 152 adding a printer example 396 Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) 130 ADSL2 474 Advanced Encryption Standard, see AES AES 151, 543 AH 274 alerts firewalls 236 ALG 174, 478 algorithms 274 alternative subnet mask notation 524 antenna 471 directional 548 gain 547 omni-directional 548 anti-probing 226 any IP 122, 129, 473 how it works 130 note 130 AP (Access Point) 133, 535 Application Layer Gateway 174, 478 applications Internet access 25 VoIP 27 asymmetrical routes 231 ATM Adaptation Layer 5 (AAL5) 110 ATM Adaptation Layer 5, see AAL5 audience 3 authentication server 143 auto dial 476 auto firmware upgrade 218 automatic logout 34 auto-negotiating rate adaptation 474 auto-provisioning 218 B backup 449 backup type 108 bandwidth management 329 Basic Service Set, see BSS blinking LEDs 29 bridge mode 104 BSS 533 BYE request 207 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 565 Index C CA 287, 541 call forwarding 477 call hold 214, 215, 220, 222 call park and pickup 476 call return 476 call service mode 213, 215, 219, 221 call transfer 214, 216, 221, 222 call waiting 214, 216, 220, 222, 476 caller ID 477 CBR 107 certificate creation 298 details 293 factory default 291 Certificate Authority, see CA certificates 287 and remote hosts 306 CA 287 creating 298 importing 297 remote hosts 310 replacing 291 storage space 291 thumbprint algorithms 290 thumbprints 290 trusted CAs 300, 301 verifying fingerprints 289 Certification Authority, see CA certifications 561 notices 563 viewing 563 channel 535 interference 535 channel ID 137 channel scan 137 CIFS (Common Internet File System) 381 Class of Service 211 Class of Service, see CoS client-server protocol 204 codecs 478 comfort noise generation 191, 477 command interface 28 Common Internet File System (CIFS) 381 configuration file 439 content filtering 247, 473 activation 250 example 248 keywords 250 schedules 251 trusted IP addresses 252 URL 247 Continuous Bit Rate, see CBR copyright 561 CoS 211, 343 country code 476 CTS (Clear to Send) 536 customized services 235, 236, 237 D default 451 default LAN IP address 33 Denial of Service, see DoS Denials of Service, see DoS device management command interface 28 Telnet 28 DH 282 DHCP 93, 118, 126, 345 server 127 static 123 DHCP relay 472 DHCP server 472 diagnostic 459 differentiated services 212 Differentiated Services, see DiffServ Diffie-Hellman key groups 282 DiffServ (Differentiated Services) 211 code points 211 marking rule 212, 343 disclaimer 561 DnD 476 DNS 118, 126, 357 DNS Server for VPN host 279 Do not Disturb, see DnD domain name system, see DNS 566 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide Index DoS 226 three-way handshake 238 thresholds 226, 237, 238, 239 DS (Differentiated Services) 343 DS field 212, 343 DSCP 211, 343 DSL firmware version 92 DSL mode 93 DSL/WAN switch 104 DTMF 209 detection and generation 478 Dual-Tone MultiFrequency, see DTMF dynamic DNS 345 Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol, see DHCP dynamic jitter buffer 477 dynamic secure gateway address 255 dynamic WEP key exchange 542 DYNDNS wildcard 345 E EAP Authentication 540 EAP-MD5 479 echo cancellation 191, 477 e-mail log example 421 encapsulated routing link protocol (ENET ENCAP) 110 encapsulation 101, 104, 109, 277 ENET ENCAP 110 PPP over Ethernet 110 PPPoA 110 RFC 1483 110 encryption 543 ESP 274 ESS 534 Europe type call service mode 213, 219 Extended Service Set, see ESS external accounting server 143 external antenna 478 external authentication server 143 external RADIUS 479 F F4/F5 OAM 474 FCC interference statement 561 file sharing 27, 381 and workgroup 383 web configurator 379, 383, 384 filename conventions 439, 440 filters content 247 activation 250 example 248 keywords 250 schedules 251 trusted IP addresses 252 URL 247 firewalls 225 actions 235 activation 231 address types 235 alerts 236 anti-probing 226 asymmetrical routes 231 configuration 230, 233, 239 customized services 235, 236, 237 default action 231 DoS 226 thresholds 226, 237, 238, 239 example 226 half-open sessions 240 ICMP 226 logs 235 maximum incomplete 240 P2P 239 packet direction 231 rules 232, 241 schedules 235 security 242 three-way handshake 238 thresholds 237 triangle route 231, 243 solutions 244 firmware 440 auto upgrade 218 upload 446 upload error 448 version 92 flash key 213, 219 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 567 Index flashing 213, 219 fragmentation threshold 144, 537 frequency range 479 FTP 168, 353 file upload 442, 456 restrictions 440 FTP restrictions 440 G G.168 191, 477 G.711 478 G.729 478 G.992.1 474 G.992.3 474 G.992.4 474 G.992.5 474 group key update timer 141, 143 H half-open sessions 240 hidden node 535 hide SSID 137 host 413 host name 92 HTTP (Hypertext Transfer Protocol) 446 HTTP pincode 218 humidity 471 I IAD 25 IANA 128, 530 IBSS 533 ICMP 226 ID type and content 280 idle timeout 141, 143 IEEE 802.11b 144 IEEE 802.11g 144, 537 IEEE 802.11g wireless LAN 478 IEEE 802.11i 478 IEEE 802.1Q VLAN 212 IGMP 121, 129 IGMP proxy 475 IGMP v1 475 IGMP v2 475 IKE phases 278 importing certificates 297 importing trusted CAs 301 importing trusted remote hosts 310 Independent Basic Service Set, see IBSS initialization vector (IV) 543 inside header 277 install UPnP 363 Windows Me 364 Windows XP 365 Integrated Access Device, see IAD intended audience 3 Internet wizard setup 41 Internet access 25, 41 wizard setup 41 Internet Assigned Numbers Authority See IANA Internet Assigned Numbers Authority, see IANA Internet Control Message Protocol, see ICMP Internet Group Multicast Protocol, see IGMP Internet Key Exchange 278 Internet Protocol Security, see IPSec Internet Service Provider, see ISP IP address 93, 127, 168, 170, 218 default 33 static 69 WAN 102 IP address assignment 111 ENET ENCAP 112 PPPoA or PPPoE 111 RFC 1483 112 IP alias 124, 474 IP multicasting 475 IP pool 120, 126 IPSec 253 algorithms 274 architecture 274 568 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide NAT 274 see also VPN standard 473 IPSec VPN capability 473 ISP 101 ITU-T 191 J jitter buffer 477 K keep alive 279 key combinations 223 keypad 223 L LAN 117 and USB printer 390 listening port 188 Local Area Network, see LAN logical networks 124 logout 34 automatic 34 logs 417, 433 firewalls 235 M MAC 92, 122 MAC address filter 135 action 147 MAC filter 147 Management Information Base, see MIB management VLAN 324 managing the device command interface 28 good habits 28 Index Telnet 28 using FTP. See FTP. Maximum Burst Size, see MBS maximum incomplete 240 Maximum Transmission Unit, see MTU MBS 107, 113 Media Access Control, see MAC Media Access Control, see MAC Address Message Integrity Check, see MIC metric 112 MIB 355 MIC 543 mode 104 model name 92 MTU 107 multicast 121, 129 multimedia 202 multiple BSSs 145 multiple PVC support 474 multiple SIP accounts 477 multiple voice channels 477 multiplexing 111 LLC-based 111 VC-based 111 multiprotocol encapsulation 110 my IP address 254 N nailed-up connection 112 NAT 127, 168, 169, 529 address mapping rule 173 application 178 definitions 175 how it works 176 IPSec 274 mapping types 178 mode 167 traversal 275, 361 tutorial 68, 85 what it does 176 negotiation mode 279 NetBIOS 122 Network Address Translation, see NAT P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 569 Index Network Basic Input/Output System, see NetBIOS non-proxy calls 196 PPP over Ethernet 474 PPP over Ethernet, see PPPoE PPPoE 101, 110, 473 O OAM 474 OK response 207, 209 operation humidity 471 operation temperature 471 output power 144 outside header 277 P P2P 239 packet direction 231 Pairwise Master Key (PMK) 543, 545 park 476 passphrase 139 PCR 107, 113 Peak Cell Rate, see PCR peer-to-peer calls 27, 196 Per-Hop Behavior, see PHB PHB 212, 343 phone book speed dial 196 phone config 476 phone functions 223 pickup 476 pincode 218 Point to Point Protocol over ATM Adaptation Layer 5 (AAL5) 110 point-to-point calls 478 Point-to-Point Protocol over Ethernet, see PPPoE ports 29 power adaptor 479 power specifications 471 PPP (Point-to-Point Protocol) Link Layer Protocol 475 PPP over ATM AAL5 474 benefits 110 preamble 144 preamble mode 537 pre-shared key 282 print server 27 printer sharing 389 and LAN 390 configuration 391 requirements 390 TCP/IP port 391 probing, firewalls 226 product registration 564 profile 65 protocol 101 PSK 151, 543 PSTN call setup signaling 209 pulse dialing 210 PVC 318 PVID 328 Q QoS 211, 329, 330, 342, 477 class configuration 335 Quality of Service 477 Quality of Service, see QoS quick dialing 478 Quick Start Guide 33 R RADIUS 479, 539 message types 539 messages 539 shared secret key 540 Reach-Extended ADSL 474 Real time Transport Protocol, see RTP re-authentication timer 141, 143 region 476 570 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide registration, product 564 related documentation 3 remote hosts, and certificates 306 remote management limitations 350 NAT 351 Telnet 352 REN 477 Request To Send, see RTS RESET button 30 restore configuration 441, 450, 455 RFC 1483 110, 474 RFC 1631 165 RFC 1889 206, 478 RFC 1890 478 RFC 2327 478 RFC 2364 474 RFC 2516 473, 474 RFC 2684 474 RFC 3261 478 Ringer Equivalence Number, see REN RIP 120, 125, 128 direction 128 version 129 romfile 439 router features 25 Routing Information Protocol see RIP Routing Information Protocol, see RIP routing mode 104 RTCP 478 RTP 206, 478 RTS (Request To Send) 536 threshold 535, 536 RTS/CTS threshold 144 S safety warnings 7 scan 137 schedules content filtering 251 firewalls 235 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide scheduling wireless LAN 152 SCR 107, 113 SDP 478 seamless rate adaptation 474 secure gateway address 254 security associations, see VPN Security Parameter Index 267 security, network 242 server 179, 415 service set 137, 146 Service Set IDentification, see SSID Service Set IDentity, see SSID Session Description Protocol 478 Session Initiation Protocol, see SIP setup 218 shared secret 143 sharing files 381 silence suppression 191, 477 Single User Account, see SUA SIP 202 account 54, 203 accounts 477 ALG 174, 478 Application Layer Gateway 174, 478 call progression 206 client 204 identities 203 INVITE request 207, 208 number 203 OK response 209 proxy server 204 redirect server 205 register server 206 server address 55 servers 204 service domain 203 settings 54 URI 203 user agent 204 version 2 478 SMTP error messages 421 SNMP 354, 475 manager 355 MIBs 355 speed dial 196, 217 Index 571 Index SPI 267 SRA 474 SSID 137, 145, 146 stateful inspection 473 static DHCP 123 static IP address 69 static route 313 status 91 status indicators 29 storage humidity 471 storage temperature 471 SUA 166 subnet 521 subnet mask 127, 522 subnetting 524 supplementary services 212, 219 Sustained Cell Rate, see SCR switch 104 syntax conventions 5 system name 92, 412 system timeout 351 T tagging frames 318, 327 TCP/IP 127 TCP/IP port 391 Telnet 28, 352 temperature 471 Temporal Key Integrity Protocol, see TKIP TFTP file upload 443, 457 TFTP and FTP over WAN 440 The 102 three-way conference 215, 216, 221, 222 three-way handshake 238 thresholds DoS 226, 237, 238, 239 P2P 239 TKIP 151, 543 TLS 479 ToS 211 572 trademarks 561 traffic priority 317, 328 traffic redirect 109, 115 traffic shaping 113 transparent bridging 475 transport mode 277 triangle route 231, 243 solutions 244 trusted CAs, and certificates 300 TTLS 479 tunnel mode 277 tutorial NAT 68, 85 VoIP 86 wireless 59 Type of Service, see ToS U UBR 107 Uniform Resource Identifier 203 Universal Plug and Play 361 application 362 Unspecified Bit Rate, see UBR upload firmware 442, 456 UPnP 361 forum 362 security issues 362 URL 247 USA type call service mode 215, 221 USB printer sharing 389 USB features 27 USB printer 27 V VAD 191, 477 Variable Bit Rate non real-time, see VB-nRT Variable Bit Rate real-time, see VB-RT VBR-nRT 107 VBR-RT 107 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide VCI 104, 111 version DSL 92 ZyNOS 92 Virtual Channel Identifier, see VCI Virtual Circuit (VC) 111 Virtual Local Area Network, see VLAN Virtual Path Identifier, see VPI Virtual Private Network, see VPN VLAN 212, 317 802.1P priority 317, 328 activation 324 example 319 group 212 group settings 325 ID 212 ID tags 212 management group 324 port settings 327 PVC 318 PVID 328 tagging frames 318, 327 voice activity detection 191, 477 voice channels 477 voice coding 209 VoIP 202 features 27 peer-to-peer calls 196 standards compliance 477 tutorial 86 wizard setup 54 VoIP features 27 VPI 104, 111 VPI & VCI 111 VPN 253, 473 established in two phases 254 IPSec 253 security associations (SA) 254 see also IKE SA, IPSec SA W WAN MTU 107 Wide Area Network, see WAN 101 Index warnings 7 warranty 563 note 563 WDS 150 Web 351 Web Configurator 33 WEP 53, 139, 478 Wi-Fi Protected Access, see WPA Windows Networking 122 Wired Equivalent Privacy, see WEP wireless client configuration 62 profile 65 security 52, 538 tutorial 59 wireless client 133 wireless client WPA supplicants 544 Wireless Distribution System, see WDS wireless LAN channel 137 MAC address filter 135, 478 scheduling 152 wireless network example 133 overview 133 wireless security 538 wizard setup Internet 41 VoIP 54 WLAN 133 802.11 mode 144 AES 151 authentication server 143 auto-scan channel 137 button 30 channel 137 fragmentation threshold 144 group key update timer 141, 143 hide SSID 137 idle timeout 141, 143 IEEE 802.11b 144 IEEE 802.11g 144 interference 535 more AP 145 multiple BSSs 145 output power 144 passphrase 139 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 573 Index preamble 144 PSK 151 re-authentication timer 141, 143 RTS/CTS threshold 144 scheduling 152 security parameters 546 see also wireless. TKIP 151 WDS 150 WEP 139 WPA 142 WPA-PSK 140 workgroup, and file sharing 383 WPA 142, 478, 542 key caching 544 pre-authentication 544 user authentication 544 vs WPA-PSK 543 wireless client supplicant 544 with RADIUS application example 544 WPA2 542 user authentication 544 vs WPA2-PSK 543 wireless client supplicant 544 with RADIUS application example 544 WPA2-Pre-Shared Key, see WPA2-PSK WPA2-PSK 542, 543 application example 545 WPA-PSK 52, 140, 543 application example 545 Z ZyNOS 440 F/W version 440 firmware version 92 ZyXEL Network Operating System, see ZyNOS 574 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide Index P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 575

Chapter 15 Certificates Table 96 Security > Certificates > Trusted CAs (continued) LABEL Subject DESCRIPTION This field displays identifying information about the certificates owner, such as CN (Common Name), OU (Organizational Unit or department), O (Organization or company) and C (Country). It is recommended that each certificate have unique subject information. This field displays identifying information about the certificates issuing certification authority, such as a common name, organizational unit or department, organization or company and country. With self-signed certificates, this is the same information as in the Subject field. This field displays the date that the certificate becomes applicable. The text displays in red and includes a Not Yet Valid! message if the certificate has not yet become applicable. This field displays the date that the certificate expires. The text displays in red and includes an Expiring! or Expired! message if the certificate is about to expire or has already expired. This field displays Yes if the certification authority issues Certificate Revocation Lists for the certificates that it has issued and you have selected the Issues certificate revocation lists (CRL) check box in the certificates details screen to have the ZyXEL Device check the CRL before trusting any certificates issued by the certification authority. Otherwise the field displays No. Click the Edit icon to open a screen with an in-depth list of information about the certificate. Click the Remove icon to remove the certificate. A window displays asking you to confirm that you want to delete the certificates. Note that subsequent certificates move up by one when you take this action. Click Import to open a screen where you can save the certificate of a certification authority that you trust, from your computer to the ZyXEL Device. Click this button to display the current validity status of the certificates. Issuer Valid From Valid To CRL Issuer Modify Import Refresh 15.6 Trusted CA Import Click Security > Certificates > Trusted CAs to open the Trusted CAs screen and then click Import to open the Trusted CA Import screen. Follow the instructions in this screen to save a trusted certification authoritys certificate to the ZyXEL Device. P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 301 Chapter 15 Certificates Note: You must remove any spaces from the certificates filename before you can import the certificate. Figure 179 Security > Certificates > Trusted CA > Import The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 97 Security > Certificates > Trusted CA > Import LABEL File Path DESCRIPTION Type in the location of the file you want to upload in this field or click Browse to find it. Click Browse to find the certificate file you want to upload. Click Back to return to the previous screen. Click Apply to save the certificate on the ZyXEL Device. Click Cancel to quit and return to the Trusted CAs screen. Browse Back Apply Cancel 15.7 Trusted CA Details Click Security > Certificates > Trusted CAs to open the Trusted CAs screen. Click the details icon to open the Trusted CA Details screen. Use this screen to view in-depth information about the certification authoritys certificate, change the certificates name and set whether or not you want the ZyXEL Device to check a 302 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide Chapter 15 Certificates certification authoritys list of revoked certificates before trusting a certificate issued by the certification authority. Figure 180 Security > Certificates > Trusted CA > Details P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 303 Chapter 15 Certificates The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 98 Security > Certificates > Trusted CA > Details LABEL Certificate Name DESCRIPTION This field displays the identifying name of this certificate. If you want to change the name, type up to 31 characters to identify this key certificate. You may use any character (not including spaces). Select this check box to have the ZyXEL Device check incoming certificates that are issued by this certification authority against a Certificate Revocation List (CRL). Clear this check box to have the ZyXEL Device not check incoming certificates that are issued by this certification authority against a Certificate Revocation List (CRL). Click the Refresh button to have this read-only text box display the end entitys certificate and a list of certification authority certificates that shows the hierarchy of certification authorities that validate the end entitys certificate. If the issuing certification authority is one that you have imported as a trusted certification authority, it may be the only certification authority in the list (along with the end entitys own certificate). The ZyXEL Device does not trust the end entitys certificate and displays Not trusted in this field if any certificate on the path has expired or been revoked. Click Refresh to display the certification path. These read-only fields display detailed information about the certificate. This field displays general information about the certificate. CA-signed means that a Certification Authority signed the certificate. Self-signed means that the certificates owner signed the certificate (not a certification authority). X.509 means that this certificate was created and signed according to the ITU-T X.509 recommendation that defines the formats for public-key certificates. This field displays the X.509 version number. This field displays the certificates identification number given by the certification authority. This field displays information that identifies the owner of the certificate, such as Common Name (CN), Organizational Unit (OU), Organization (O) and Country (C). This field displays identifying information about the certificates issuing certification authority, such as Common Name, Organizational Unit, Organization and Country. With self-signed certificates, this is the same information as in the Subject Name field. This field displays the type of algorithm that was used to sign the certificate. Some certification authorities use rsa-pkcs1-sha1 (RSA public-private key encryption algorithm and the SHA1 hash algorithm). Other certification authorities may use rsa-pkcs1-md5

(RSA public-private key encryption algorithm and the MD5 hash algorithm). This field displays the date that the certificate becomes applicable. The text displays in red and includes a Not Yet Valid! message if the certificate has not yet become applicable. Property Issues certificate revocation lists

(CRLs) Certificate Path Refresh Certificate Information Type Version Serial Number Subject Issuer Signature Algorithm Valid From 304 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide Chapter 15 Certificates Table 98 Security > Certificates > Trusted CA > Details (continued) LABEL Valid To DESCRIPTION This field displays the date that the certificate expires. The text displays in red and includes an Expiring! or Expired! message if the certificate is about to expire or has already expired. This field displays the type of algorithm that was used to generate the certificates key pair (the ZyXEL Device uses RSA encryption) and the length of the key set in bits (1024 bits for example). This field displays the certificates owners IP address (IP), domain name (DNS) or e-mail address (EMAIL). This field displays for what functions the certificates key can be used. For example, DigitalSignature means that the key can be used to sign certificates and KeyEncipherment means that the key can be used to encrypt text. This field displays general information about the certificate. For example, Subject Type=CA means that this is a certification authoritys certificate and Path Length Constraint=1 means that there can only be one certification authority in the certificates path. This field displays how many directory servers with Lists of revoked certificates the issuing certification authority of this certificate makes available. This field also displays the domain names or IP addresses of the servers. This is the certificates message digest that the ZyXEL Device calculated using the MD5 algorithm. You can use this value to verify with the certification authority (over the phone for example) that this is actually their certificate. This is the certificates message digest that the ZyXEL Device calculated using the SHA1 algorithm. You can use this value to verify with the certification authority (over the phone for example) that this is actually their certificate. This read-only text box displays the certificate or certification request in Privacy Enhanced Mail (PEM) format. PEM uses 64 ASCII characters to convert the binary certificate into a printable form. You can copy and paste the certificate into an e-mail to send to friends or colleagues or you can copy and paste the certificate into a text editor and save the file on a management computer for later distribution (via floppy disk for example). Click Back to return to the previous screen. Click this button and then Save in the File Download screen. The Save As screen opens, browse to the location that you want to use and click Save. Click Apply to save your changes back to the ZyXEL Device. You can only change the name and/or set whether or not you want the ZyXEL Device to check the CRL that the certification authority issues before trusting a certificate issued by the certification authority. Click Cancel to quit and return to the Trusted CAs screen. Key Algorithm Subject Alternative Name Key Usage Basic Constraint CRL Distribution Points MD5 Fingerprint SHA1 Fingerprint Certificate in PEM

(Base-64) Encoded Format Back Export Apply Cancel P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 305 Chapter 15 Certificates 15.8 Trusted Remote Hosts Click Security > Certificates > Trusted Remote Hosts to open the Trusted Remote Hosts screen. This screen displays a list of the certificates of peers that you trust but which are not signed by one of the certification authorities on the Trusted CAs screen. You do not need to add any certificate that is signed by one of the certification authorities on the Trusted CAs screen since the ZyXEL Device automatically accepts any valid certificate signed by a trusted certification authority as being trustworthy. Figure 181 Security > Certificates > Trusted Remote Hosts The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 99 Security > Certificates > Trusted Remote Hosts LABEL PKI Storage Space in Use DESCRIPTION This bar displays the percentage of the ZyXEL Devices PKI storage space that is currently in use. The bar turns from green to red when the maximum is being approached. When the bar is red, you should consider deleting expired or unnecessary certificates before adding more certificates. This field displays identifying information about the default self-signed certificate on the ZyXEL Device that the ZyXEL Device uses to sign the trusted remote host certificates. Issuer (My Default Self-

signed Certificate)

Name Subject Valid From This field displays the certificate index number. The certificates are listed in alphabetical order. This field displays the name used to identify this certificate. This field displays identifying information about the certificates owner, such as CN (Common Name), OU (Organizational Unit or department), O (Organization or company) and C (Country). It is recommended that each certificate have unique subject information. This field displays the date that the certificate becomes applicable. The text displays in red and includes a Not Yet Valid! message if the certificate has not yet become applicable. 306 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide Chapter 15 Certificates Table 99 Security > Certificates > Trusted Remote Hosts (continued) LABEL Valid To DESCRIPTION This field displays the date that the certificate expires. The text displays in red and includes an Expiring! or Expired! message if the certificate is about to expire or has already expired. Click the Edit icon to open a screen with an in-depth list of information about the certificate. Click the Remove icon to remove the certificate. A window displays asking you to confirm that you want to delete the certificate. Note that subsequent certificates move up by one when you take this action. Click Import to open a screen where you can save the certificate of a remote host (which you trust) from your computer to the ZyXEL Device. Click this button to display the current validity status of the certificates. Modify Import Refresh 15.9 Trusted Remote Host Certificate Details Click Security > Certificates > Trusted Remote Hosts to open the Trusted Remote Hosts screen. Click the details icon to open the Trusted Remote Host P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 307 Chapter 15 Certificates Details screen. Use this screen to view in-depth information about the trusted remote hosts certificate and/or change the certificates name. Figure 182 Security > Certificates > Trusted Remote Hosts > Details The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 100 Security > Certificates > Trusted Remote Hosts > Details LABEL Certificate Name DESCRIPTION This field displays the identifying name of this certificate. If you want to change the name, type up to 31 characters to identify this key certificate. You may use any character (not including spaces). Click the Refresh button to have this read-only text box display the end entitys own certificate and a list of certification authority certificates in the hierarchy of certification authorities that validate a certificates issuing certification authority. For a trusted host, the list consists of the end entitys own certificate and the default self-signed certificate that the ZyXEL Device uses to sign remote host certificates. Click Refresh to display the certification path. Certificate Path Refresh 308 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide Chapter 15 Certificates Table 100 Security > Certificates > Trusted Remote Hosts > Details (continued) LABEL Certificate Path Type Version Serial Number Subject Issuer Signature Algorithm Valid From Valid To Key Algorithm Subject Alternative Name Key Usage Basic Constraint MD5 Fingerprint DESCRIPTION These read-only fields display detailed information about the certificate. This field displays general information about the certificate. With trusted remote host certificates, this field always displays CA-signed. The ZyXEL Device is the Certification Authority that signed the certificate. X.509 means that this certificate was created and signed according to the ITU-T X.509 recommendation that defines the formats for public-key certificates. This field displays the X.509 version number. This field displays the certificates identification number given by the device that created the certificate. This field displays information that identifies the owner of the certificate, such as Common Name (CN), Organizational Unit (OU), Organization (O) and Country (C). This field displays identifying information about the default self-

signed certificate on the ZyXEL Device that the ZyXEL Device uses to sign the trusted remote host certificates. This field displays the type of algorithm that the ZyXEL Device used to sign the certificate, which is rsa-pkcs1-sha1 (RSA public-private key encryption algorithm and the SHA1 hash algorithm). This field displays the date that the certificate becomes applicable. The text displays in red and includes a Not Yet Valid! message if the certificate has not yet become applicable. This field displays the date that the certificate expires. The text displays in red and includes an Expiring! or Expired! message if the certificate is about to expire or has already expired. This field displays the type of algorithm that was used to generate the certificates key pair (the ZyXEL Device uses RSA encryption) and the length of the key set in bits (1024 bits for example). This field displays the certificates owners IP address (IP), domain name (DNS) or e-mail address (EMAIL). This field displays for what functions the certificates key can be used. For example, DigitalSignature means that the key can be used to sign certificates and KeyEncipherment means that the key can be used to encrypt text. This field displays general information about the certificate. For example, Subject Type=CA means that this is a certification authoritys certificate and Path Length Constraint=1 means that there can only be one certification authority in the certificates path. This is the certificates message digest that the ZyXEL Device calculated using the MD5 algorithm. You cannot use this value to verify that this is the remote hosts actual certificate because the ZyXEL Device has signed the certificate; thus causing this value to be different from that of the remote hosts actual certificate. See Section 15.1.3 on page 289 for how to verify a remote hosts certificate. P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 309 Chapter 15 Certificates Table 100 Security > Certificates > Trusted Remote Hosts > Details (continued) LABEL SHA1 Fingerprint DESCRIPTION This is the certificates message digest that the ZyXEL Device calculated using the SHA1 algorithm. You cannot use this value to verify that this is the remote hosts actual certificate because the ZyXEL Device has signed the certificate; thus causing this value to be different from that of the remote hosts actual certificate. See Section 15.1.3 on page 289 for how to verify a remote hosts certificate. This read-only text box displays the certificate or certification request in Privacy Enhanced Mail (PEM) format. PEM uses 64 ASCII characters to convert the binary certificate into a printable form. Certificate in PEM

(Base-64) Encoded Format Back Export Apply Cancel You can copy and paste the certificate into an e-mail to send to friends or colleagues or you can copy and paste the certificate into a text editor and save the file on a management computer for later distribution (via floppy disk for example). Click Back to return to the previous screen. Click this button and then Save in the File Download screen. The Save As screen opens, browse to the location that you want to use and click Save. Click Apply to save your changes back to the ZyXEL Device. You can only change the name of the certificate. Click Cancel to quit configuring this screen and return to the Trusted Remote Hosts screen. 15.10 Trusted Remote Hosts Import Click Security > Certificates > Trusted Remote Hosts to open the Trusted Remote Hosts screen and then click Import to open the Trusted Remote Host Import screen. Follow the instructions in this screen to save a trusted hosts certificate to the ZyXEL Device. 310 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide Chapter 15 Certificates Note: The trusted remote host certificate must be a self-signed certificate; and you must remove any spaces from its filename before you can import it. Figure 183 Security > Certificates > Trusted Remote Hosts > Import The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 101 Security > Certificates > Trusted Remote Hosts > Import LABEL File Path Type in the location of the file you want to upload in this field or click Browse DESCRIPTION Browse Back Apply Cancel to find it. Click Browse to find the certificate file you want to upload. Click Back to return to the previous screen. Click Apply to save the certificate on the ZyXEL Device. Click Cancel to quit and return to the Trusted Remote Hosts screen. P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 311 Chapter 15 Certificates 312 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide CHAPTER 16 Static Route 16.1 Overview The ZyXEL Device usually uses the default gateway to route outbound traffic from computers on the LAN to the Internet. To have the ZyXEL Device send data to devices not reachable through the default gateway, use static routes. For example, the next figure shows a computer (A) connected to the ZyXEL Devices LAN interface. The ZyXEL Device routes most traffic from A to the Internet through the ZyXEL Devices default gateway (R1). You create one static route to connect to services offered by your ISP behind router R2. You create another static route to communicate with a separate network behind a router R3 connected to the LAN. Figure 184 Example of Static Routing Topology A R3 LAN WAN Internet R1 R2 16.1.1 What You Can Do in the Static Route Screens Use the Static Route screens (Section 16.2 on page 314) to view and configure IP static routes on the ZyXEL Device. P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 313 Chapter 16 Static Route 16.2 Configuring Static Route Click Advanced > Static Route to open the Static Route screen. Figure 185 Advanced > Static Route The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 102 Advanced > Static Route LABEL

Active DESCRIPTION This is the number of an individual static route. This field indicates whether the rule is active or not. Name Destination Netmask Gateway Modify Apply Cancel Clear the check box to disable the rule. Select the check box to enable it. This is the name that describes or identifies this route. This parameter specifies the IP network address of the final destination. Routing is always based on network number. This parameter specifies the IP network subnet mask of the final destination. This is the IP address of the gateway. The gateway is a router or switch on the same network segment as the device's LAN or WAN port. The gateway helps forward packets to their destinations. Click the Edit icon to go to the screen where you can set up a static route on the ZyXEL Device. Click the Remove icon to remove a static route from the ZyXEL Device. A window displays asking you to confirm that you want to delete the route. Click this to apply your changes to the ZyXEL Device. Click this to return to the previously saved configuration. 314 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide Chapter 16 Static Route 16.2.1 Static Route Edit Select a static route index number and click Edit. The screen shown next appears. Use this screen to configure the required information for a static route. Figure 186 Advanced > Static Route > Edit The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 103 Advanced > Static Route > Edit LABEL Active Route Name DESCRIPTION This field allows you to activate/deactivate this static route. Enter the name of the IP static route. Leave this field blank to delete this static route. This parameter specifies the IP network address of the final destination. Routing is always based on network number. If you need to specify a route to a single host, use a subnet mask of 255.255.255.255 in the subnet mask field to force the network number to be identical to the host ID. Enter the IP subnet mask here. Enter the IP address of the gateway. The gateway is a router or switch on the same network segment as the device's LAN or WAN port. The gateway helps forward packets to their destinations. Click Back to return to the previous screen without saving. Click Apply to save your changes back to the ZyXEL Device. Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh. Destination IP Address IP Subnet Mask Gateway IP Address Back Apply Cancel P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 315 Chapter 16 Static Route 316 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide CHAPTER 17 802.1Q/1P 17.1 Overview A Virtual Local Area Network (VLAN) allows a physical network to be partitioned into multiple logical networks. A VLAN group can be treated as an individual device. Each group can have its own rules about where and how to forward traffic. You can assign any ports on the ZyXEL Device to a VLAN group and configure the settings for the group. You may also set the priority level for traffic transmitted through the ports. Figure 187 802.1Q/1P Ports 802.1Q VLAN Groups 802.1P Priority Levels 17.1.1 What You Can Do in the 802.1Q/1P Screens Use the Group Setting screen (Section 17.2 on page 324) to activate 802.1Q/

1P, specify the management VLAN group, display the VLAN groups and configure the settings for each VLAN group. Use the Port Setting screen (Section 17.3 on page 327) to configure the PVID and assign traffic priority for each port. 17.1.2 What You Need to Know About 802.1Q/1P IEEE 802.1P Priority IEEE 802.1P specifies the user priority field and defines up to eight separate traffic types by inserting a tag into a MAC-layer frame that contains bits to define class of service. P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 317 Chapter 17 802.1Q/1P IEEE 802.1Q Tagged VLAN Tagged VLAN uses an explicit tag (VLAN ID) in the MAC header to identify the VLAN membership of a frame across bridges - they are not confined to the device on which they were created. The VLAN ID associates a frame with a specific VLAN and provides the information that devices need to process the frame across the network. PVC A virtual circuit is a logical point-to-point circuit between customer sites. Permanent means that the circuit is preprogrammed by the carrier as a path through the network. It does not need to be set up or torn down for each session. Forwarding Tagged and Untagged Frames Each port on the device is capable of passing tagged or untagged frames. To forward a frame from an 802.1Q VLAN-aware device to an 802.1Q VLAN-unaware device, the ZyXEL Device first decides where to forward the frame and then strips off the VLAN tag. To forward a frame from an 802.1Q VLAN-unaware device to an 802.1Q VLAN-aware switch, the ZyXEL Device first decides where to forward the frame, and then inserts a VLAN tag reflecting the ingress port's default VID. The default PVID is VLAN 1 for all ports, but this can be changed. Whether to tag an outgoing frame depends on the setting of the egress port on a per-VLAN, per-port basis (recall that a port can belong to multiple VLANs). If the tagging on the egress port is enabled for the VID of a frame, then the frame is transmitted as a tagged frame; otherwise, it is transmitted as an untagged frame. 318 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide Chapter 17 802.1Q/1P 17.1.3 802.1Q/1P Example This example shows how to configure the 802.1Q/1P settings on the ZyXEL Device. Figure 188 802.1Q/1P Example ZyXEL Device 1 2 3 4 VoIP Network Internet - (PPPoE) Internet - (PPPoE) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 LAN1 and LAN2 are connected to ATAs (Analog Telephone Adapters) and used for VoIP traffic. You want to set a high priority for this type of traffic, so you will group these ports into one VLAN (VLAN2) and then set them to use a PVC (PVC1) with a high priority service level. You would start with the following steps. 1 Click Advanced > 802.1Q/1P > Group Setting > Edit to display the following screen. 2 3 In the Name field type VoIP to identify the group. In the VLAN ID field type in 2 to identify the VLAN group. 4 Select PVC1 from the Default Gateway drop-down list box. 5 In the Control field, select Fixed for LAN1, LAN2 and PVC1 to be permanent members of the VLAN group. P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 319 Chapter 17 802.1Q/1P 6 Click Apply. Figure 189 Advanced > 802.1Q/1P > Group Setting > Edit: Example To set a high priority for VoIP traffic, follow these steps. 1 Click Advanced > 802.1Q/1P > Port Setting to display the following screen. 2 Type 2 in the 802.1Q PVID column for LAN1, LAN2 and PVC1. 3 Select 7 from the 802.1P Priority drop-down list box for LAN1, LAN2 and PVC1. 320 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 4 Click Apply. Figure 190 Advanced > 802.1Q/1P > Port Setting: Example Chapter 17 802.1Q/1P Ports 3 and 4 are connected to desktop computers and are used for Internet traffic. You want to set a lower priority for this type of traffic, so you want to group these ports and PVC2 into one VLAN (VLAN3). PVC2 priority is set to low level of service. SSID1 and SSID2 are two wireless networks. You want to create medium priority for this type of traffic, so you want to group these ports and PVC3 into one VLAN

(VLAN4). PVC3 priority is set to medium level of service. P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 321 Chapter 17 802.1Q/1P Follow the same steps as in VLAN2 to configure the settings for VLAN3 and VLAN4. The summary screen should display as follows. Figure 191 Advanced > 802.1Q/1P > Group Setting: Example 322 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide The port screen should look like this. Figure 192 Advanced > 802.1Q/1P > Port Setting: Example Chapter 17 802.1Q/1P This completes the 802.1Q/1P setup. P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 323 Chapter 17 802.1Q/1P 17.2 The 802.1Q/1P Group Setting Screen Use this screen to activate 802.1Q/1P and display the VLAN groups. Click Advanced > 802.1Q/1P to display the following screen. Figure 193 Advanced > 802.1Q/1P > Group Setting The following table describes the labels in this screen. DESCRIPTION Table 104 Advanced > 802.1Q/1P > Group Setting LABEL 802.1P/1Q Active Management Vlan ID Select this check box to activate the 802.1P/1Q feature. Enter the ID number of a VLAN group. All interfaces (ports, SSIDs and PVCs) are in the management VLAN by default. If you disable the management VLAN, you will not be able to access the ZyXEL Device. 324 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide Chapter 17 802.1Q/1P DESCRIPTION Table 104 Advanced > 802.1Q/1P > Group Setting (continued) LABEL Summary

Name VID Port Number This field displays the index number of the VLAN group. This field displays the name of the VLAN group. This field displays the ID number of the VLAN group. These columns display the VLANs settings for each port. A tagged port is marked as T, an untagged port is marked as U and ports not participating in a VLAN are marked as . Click the Edit button to configure the ports in the VLAN group. Modify Apply Cancel Click the Remove button to delete the VLAN group. Click this to save your changes. Click this to restore your previously saved settings. 17.2.1 Editing 802.1Q/1P Group Setting Use this screen to configure the settings for each VLAN group. P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 325 Chapter 17 802.1Q/1P In the 802.1Q/1P screen, click the Edit button from the Modify filed to display the following screen. Figure 194 Advanced > 802.1Q/1P > Group Setting > Edit The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 105 Advanced > 802.1Q/1P > Group Setting > Edit LABEL Name DESCRIPTION Enter a descriptive name for the VLAN group for identification purposes. The text may consist of up to 8 letters, numerals, -, _ and @. Assign a VLAN ID for the VLAN group. The valid VID range is between 1 and 4094. Select the default gateway for the VLAN group. This field displays the types of ports available to join the VLAN group. VLAN ID Default Gateway Ports 326 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide Chapter 17 802.1Q/1P Table 105 Advanced > 802.1Q/1P > Group Setting > Edit (continued) LABEL Control DESCRIPTION Select Fixed for the port to be a permanent member of the VLAN group. Select Forbidden if you want to prohibit the port from joining the VLAN group. Select Tx Tagging if you want the port to tag all outgoing traffic transmitted through this VLAN. You select this if you want to create VLANs across different devices and not just the ZyXEL Device. Click this to return to the previous screen without saving. Click this to save your changes. Click this to restore your previously saved settings. Tx Tag Back Apply Cancel 17.3 The 802.1Q/1P Port Setting Screen Use this screen to configure the PVID and assign traffic priority for each port. Click Advanced > 802.1Q/1P > Port Setting to display the following screen. Figure 195 Advanced > 802.1Q/1P > Port Setting P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 327 Chapter 17 802.1Q/1P The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 106 Advanced > 802.1Q/1P > Port Setting LABEL Ports 802.1Q PVID DESCRIPTION This field displays the types of ports available to join the VLAN group. Assign a VLAN ID for the port. The valid VID range is between 1 and 4094. The ZyXEL Device assigns the PVID to untagged frames or priority-tagged frames received on this port, SSID, or PVC. 802.1P Priority Assign a priority for the traffic transmitted through the port, SSID, or PVC. Select Same if you do not want to modify the priority. You may choose a priority level from 0-7, with 0 being the lowest level and 7 being the highest level. Click this to save your changes. Click this to restore your previously saved settings. Apply Cancel 328 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide CHAPTER 18 Quality of Service (QoS) This chapter contains information about configuring QoS, editing classifiers and viewing the ZyXEL Devices QoS packet statistics. 18.1 Overview This chapter discusses the ZyXEL Devices QoS screens. Use these screens to set up your ZyXEL Device to use QoS for traffic management. Quality of Service (QoS) refers to both a networks ability to deliver data with minimum delay, and the networking methods used to control the use of bandwidth. QoS allows the ZyXEL Device to group and prioritize application traffic and fine-tune network performance. Without QoS, all traffic data is equally likely to be dropped when the network is congested. This can cause a reduction in network performance and make the network inadequate for time-critical application such as video-on-demand. The ZyXEL Device assigns each packet a priority and then queues the packet accordingly. Packets assigned a high priority are processed more quickly than those with low priority if there is congestion, allowing time-sensitive applications to flow more smoothly. Time-sensitive applications include both those that require a low level of latency (delay) and a low level of jitter (variations in delay) such as Voice over IP (VoIP) or Internet gaming, and those for which jitter alone is a problem such as Internet radio or streaming video. See Section 18.5 on page 341 for advanced technical information on SIP. 18.1.1 What You Can Do in the QoS Screens Use the General screen (Section 18.2 on page 333) to enable QoS on the ZyXEL Device, decide allowable bandwidth using QoS and configure priority mapping settings for traffic that does not match a custom class. Use the Class Setup screen (Section 18.3 on page 335) to set up classifiers to sort traffic into different flows and assign priority and define actions to be performed for a classified traffic flow. P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 329 Chapter 18 Quality of Service (QoS) Use the Monitor screen (Section 18.4 on page 341) to view the ZyXEL Devices QoS-related packet statistics. 18.1.2 What You Need to Know About QoS QoS versus Cos QoS is used to prioritize source-to-destination traffic flows. All packets in the same flow are given the same priority. CoS (class of service) is a way of managing traffic in a network by grouping similar types of traffic together and treating each type as a class. You can use CoS to give different priorities to different packet types. CoS technologies include IEEE 802.1p layer 2 tagging and DiffServ (Differentiated Services or DS). IEEE 802.1p tagging makes use of three bits in the packet header, while DiffServ is a new protocol and defines a new DS field, which replaces the eight-bit ToS (Type of Service) field in the IP header. Tagging and Marking In a QoS class, you can configure whether to add or change the DSCP (DiffServ Code Point) value, IEEE 802.1p priority level and VLAN ID number in a matched packet. When the packet passes through a compatible network, the networking device, such as a backbone switch, can provide specific treatment or service based on the tag or marker. 18.1.3 QoS Class Setup Example In the following figure, your Internet connection has an upstream transmission speed of 50 Mbps. You configure a classifier to assign the highest priority queue

(6) to VoIP traffic from the LAN interface, so that voice traffic would not get delayed when there is network congestion. Traffic from the bosss IP address

(192.168.1.23 for example) is mapped to queue 5. Traffic that does not match 330 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide Chapter 18 Quality of Service (QoS) these two classes are assigned priority queue based on the internal QoS mapping table on the ZyXEL Device. Figure 196 QoS Example VoIP: Queue 6 DSL 50 Mbps Internet Boss: Queue 5 IP=192.168.1.23 Figure 197 QoS Class Example: VoIP -1 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 331 Chapter 18 Quality of Service (QoS) Figure 198 QoS Class Example: VoIP -2 Figure 199 QoS Class Example: Boss -1 332 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide Figure 200 QoS Class Example: Boss -2 Chapter 18 Quality of Service (QoS) 18.2 The QoS General Screen Click Advanced > QoS to open the screen as shown next. Use this screen to enable or disable QoS, and select to have the ZyXEL Device automatically assign P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 333 Chapter 18 Quality of Service (QoS) priority to traffic according to the IEEE 802.1p priority level, IP precedence and/or packet length. Figure 201 Advanced > QoS > General The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 107 Advanced > QoS > General LABEL Active QoS Select the check box to turn on QoS to improve your network performance. DESCRIPTION WAN Managed Bandwidth You can give priority to traffic that the ZyXEL Device forwards out through the WAN interface. Give high priority to voice and video to make them run more smoothly. Similarly, give low priority to many large file downloads so that they do not reduce the quality of other applications. Enter the amount of bandwidth for the WAN interface that you want to allocate using QoS. The recommendation is to set this speed to match the interfaces actual transmission speed. For example, set the WAN interface speed to 100000 kbps if your Internet connection has an upstream transmission speed of 100 Mbps. Setting this number higher than the interfaces actual transmission speed will stop lower priority traffic from being sent if higher priority traffic uses all of the actual bandwidth. Traffic priority will be automatical ly assigned by If you set this number lower than the interfaces actual transmission speed, the ZyXEL Device will not use some of the interfaces available bandwidth. These fields are ignored if traffic matches a class you configured in the Class Setup screen. If you select ON and traffic does not match a class configured in the Class Setup screen, the ZyXEL Device assigns priority to unmatched traffic based on the IEEE 802.1p priority level, IP precedence and/or packet length. See Section 18.5.4 on page 343 for more information. If you select OFF, traffic which does not match a class is mapped to queue two. 334 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide Chapter 18 Quality of Service (QoS) Table 107 Advanced > QoS > General LABEL Apply Cancel DESCRIPTION Click Apply to save your settings back to the ZyXEL Device. Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh. 18.3 The Class Setup Screen Use this screen to add, edit or delete classifiers. A classifier groups traffic into data flows according to specific criteria such as the source address, destination address, source port number, destination port number or incoming interface. For example, you can configure a classifier to select traffic from the same protocol port (such as Telnet) to form a flow. Click Advanced > QoS > Class Setup to open the following screen. Figure 202 Advanced > QoS > Class Setup The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 108 Advanced > QoS > Class Setup LABEL Create a new Class Order DESCRIPTION Click Add to create a new classifier. Active Name Interface This is the number of each classifier. The ordering of the classifiers is important as the classifiers are applied in turn. Select the check box to enable this classifier. This is the name of the classifier. This shows the interface from which traffic of this classifier should come. P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 335 Chapter 18 Quality of Service (QoS) Table 108 Advanced > QoS > Class Setup (continued) LABEL Priority Filter Content Modify DESCRIPTION This is the priority assigned to traffic of this classifier. This shows criteria specified in this classifier. Click the Edit icon to go to the screen where you can edit the classifier. Apply Cancel Click the Remove icon to delete an existing classifier. Click Apply to save your changes back to the ZyXEL Device. Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh. 336 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide Chapter 18 Quality of Service (QoS) 18.3.1 The Class Configuration Screen Click the Add button or the Edit icon in the Modify field to configure a classifier. Figure 203 Advanced > QoS > Class Setup > Add P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 337 Chapter 18 Quality of Service (QoS) See Appendix E on page 557 for a list of commonly-used services. The following table describes the labels in this screen. DESCRIPTION Table 109 Advanced > QoS > Class Setup > Add LABEL Class Configuration Active Name Interface Priority Select the check box to enable this classifier. Enter a descriptive name of up to 20 printable English keyboard characters, including spaces. Select from which interface traffic of this class should come. Select a priority level (between 0 and 7) or select Auto to have the ZyXEL Device map the matched traffic to a queue according to the internal QoS mapping table. See Section 18.5.4 on page 343 for more information. Routing Policy

"0" is the lowest priority level and "7" is the highest. Select the next hop to which traffic of this class should be forwarded. WAN Index Gateway Address Order Tag Configuration DSCP Value Select By Routing Table to have the ZyXEL Device use the routing table to find a next hop and forward the matched packets automatically. Select To Gateway Address to route the matched packets to the router or switch you specified in the Gateway Address field. This field in not configurable at the time of writing. Enter the IP address of the gateway, which should be a router or switch on the same segment as the ZyXEL Devices interface(s), that can forward the packet to the destination. This shows the ordering number of this classifier. Select an existing number for where you want to put this classifier and click Apply to move the classifier to the number you selected. For example, if you select 2, the classifier you are moving becomes number 2 and the previous classifier 2 gets pushed down one. Select Same to keep the DSCP fields in the packets. Select Auto to map the DSCP value to 802.1 priority level automatically. Select Mark to set the DSCP field with the value you configure in the field provided. 338 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide Chapter 18 Quality of Service (QoS) Table 109 Advanced > QoS > Class Setup > Add (continued) LABEL 802.1Q Tag DESCRIPTION Select Same to keep the priority setting and VLAN ID of the frames. Select Auto to map the 802.1 priority level to the DSCP value automatically. Select Remove to delete the priority queue tag and VLAN ID of the frames. Select Mark to replace the 802.1 priority field and VLAN ID with the value you set in the fields below. Select Add to treat all matched traffic untagged and add a second priority queue tag and VLAN. Select a priority level (between 0 and 7) from the drop down list box. Specify a VLAN ID number between 2 and 4094. Use the following fields to configure the criteria for traffic classification. Select the check box and enter the source IP address in dotted decimal notation. A blank source IP address means any source IP address. Enter the source subnet mask. Refer to the appendix for more information on IP subnetting. Select the check box and enter the port number of the source. 0 means any source port number. See Appendix E on page 557 for some common services and port numbers. Select the check box and enter the source MAC address of the packet. Type the mask for the specified MAC address to determine which bits a packets MAC address should match. Enter f for each bit of the specified source MAC address that the traffics MAC address should match. Enter 0 for the bit(s) of the matched traffics MAC address, which can be of any hexadecimal character(s). For example, if you set the MAC address to 00:13:49:00:00:00 and the mask to ff:ff:ff:00:00:00, a packet with a MAC address of 00:13:49:12:34:56 matches this criteria. Select this option to exclude the packets that match the specified criteria from this classifier. Select the check box and enter the destination IP address in dotted decimal notation. Enter the destination subnet mask. Refer to the appendix for more information on IP subnetting. Select the check box and enter the port number of the destination. 0 means any source port number. See Appendix E on page 557 for some common services and port numbers. Select the check box and enter the destination MAC address of the packet. Ethernet Priority VLAN ID Filter Configuration Source Address Subnet Netmask Port MAC MAC Mask Exclude Destination Address Subnet Netmask Port MAC P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 339 Chapter 18 Quality of Service (QoS) Table 109 Advanced > QoS > Class Setup > Add (continued) LABEL DESCRIPTION Type the mask for the specified MAC address to determine which bits a packets MAC address should match. MAC Mask Exclude Others Service Protocol Packet Length DSCP Ethernet Priority VLAN ID Physical Port Exclude TCP ACK Back Apply Cancel Enter f for each bit of the specified destination MAC address that the traffics MAC address should match. Enter 0 for the bit(s) of the matched traffics MAC address, which can be of any hexadecimal character(s). For example, if you set the MAC address to 00:13:49:00:00:00 and the mask to ff:ff:ff:00:00:00, a packet with a MAC address of 00:13:49:12:34:56 matches this criteria. Select this option to exclude the packets that match the specified criteria from this classifier. This field simplifies classifier configuration by allowing you to select a predefined application. When you select a predefined application, you do not configure the rest of the filter fields. SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) is a signaling protocol used in Internet telephony, instant messaging and other VoIP (Voice over IP) applications. Select the check box and select VoIP(SIP) from the drop-down list box to configure this classifier for traffic that uses SIP. File Transfer Protocol (FTP) is an Internet file transfer service that operates on the Internet and over TCP/IP networks. A system running the FTP server accepts commands from a system running an FTP client. The service allows users to send commands to the server for uploading and downloading files. Select the check box and select FTP from the drop-down list box to configure this classifier for FTP traffic. Select this option and select the protocol (TCP or UDP) or select User defined and enter the protocol (service type) number. 0 means any protocol number. Select this option and enter the minimum and maximum packet length (from 28 to 1500) in the fields provided. Select this option and specify a DSCP (DiffServ Code Point) number between 0 and 63 in the field provided. Select this option and select a priority level (between 0 and 7) from the drop down list box.

"0" is the lowest priority level and "7" is the highest. Select this option and specify a VLAN ID number between 2 and 4094. Select this option and select a LAN port. Select this option to exclude the packets that match the specified criteria from this classifier. Select this option to set this classifier for TCP ACK (acknowledgement) packets. Click Back to go to the previous screen. Click Apply to save your changes back to the ZyXEL Device. Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh. 340 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide Chapter 18 Quality of Service (QoS) 18.4 The QoS Monitor Screen To view the ZyXEL Devices QoS packet statistics, click Advanced > QoS >

Monitor. The screen appears as shown. Figure 204 Advanced > QoS > Monitor The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 110 Advanced > QoS > Monitor LABEL Priority Queue DESCRIPTION This shows the priority queue number. Pass Drop Poll Interval(s) Set Interval Stop Traffic assigned to higher index queues gets through faster while traffic in lower index queues is dropped if the network is congested. This shows how many packets mapped to this priority queue are transmitted successfully. This shows how many packets mapped to this priority queue are dropped. Enter the time interval for refreshing statistics in this field. Click this button to apply the new poll interval you entered in the Poll Interval(s) field. Click Stop to stop refreshing statistics. 18.5 QoS Technical Reference This section provides some technical background information about the topics covered in this chapter. P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 341 Chapter 18 Quality of Service (QoS) 18.5.1 IEEE 802.1Q Tag The IEEE 802.1Q standard defines an explicit VLAN tag in the MAC header to identify the VLAN membership of a frame across bridges. A VLAN tag includes the 12-bit VLAN ID and 3-bit user priority. The VLAN ID associates a frame with a specific VLAN and provides the information that devices need to process the frame across the network. IEEE 802.1p specifies the user priority field and defines up to eight separate traffic types. The following table describes the traffic types defined in the IEEE 802.1d standard (which incorporates the 802.1p). Table 111 IEEE 802.1p Priority Level and Traffic Type PRIORITY LEVEL Level 7 TRAFFIC TYPE Typically used for network control traffic such as router configuration messages. Typically used for voice traffic that is especially sensitive to jitter (jitter is the variations in delay). Typically used for video that consumes high bandwidth and is sensitive to jitter. Typically used for controlled load, latency-sensitive traffic such as SNA

(Systems Network Architecture) transactions. Typically used for excellent effort or better than best effort and would include important business traffic that can tolerate some delay. This is for spare bandwidth. This is typically used for non-critical background traffic such as bulk transfers that are allowed but that should not affect other applications and users. Typically used for best-effort traffic. Level 6 Level 5 Level 4 Level 3 Level 2 Level 1 Level 0 18.5.2 IP Precedence Similar to IEEE 802.1p prioritization at layer-2, you can use IP precedence to prioritize packets in a layer-3 network. IP precedence uses three bits of the eight-

bit ToS (Type of Service) field in the IP header. There are eight classes of services

(ranging from zero to seven) in IP precedence. Zero is the lowest priority level and seven is the highest. 18.5.3 DiffServ QoS is used to prioritize source-to-destination traffic flows. All packets in the flow are given the same priority. You can use CoS (class of service) to give different priorities to different packet types. 342 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide Chapter 18 Quality of Service (QoS) DiffServ (Differentiated Services) is a class of service (CoS) model that marks packets so that they receive specific per-hop treatment at DiffServ-compliant network devices along the route based on the application types and traffic flow. Packets are marked with DiffServ Code Points (DSCPs) indicating the level of service desired. This allows the intermediary DiffServ-compliant network devices to handle the packets differently depending on the code points without the need to negotiate paths or remember state information for every flow. In addition, applications do not have to request a particular service or give advanced notice of where the traffic is going. DSCP and Per-Hop Behavior DiffServ defines a new DS (Differentiated Services) field to replace the Type of Service (TOS) field in the IP header. The DS field contains a 2-bit unused field and a 6-bit DSCP field which can define up to 64 service levels. The following figure illustrates the DS field. DSCP is backward compatible with the three precedence bits in the ToS octet so that non-DiffServ compliant, ToS-enabled network device will not conflict with the DSCP mapping. DSCP (6 bits) Unused (2 bits) The DSCP value determines the forwarding behavior, the PHB (Per-Hop Behavior), that each packet gets across the DiffServ network. Based on the marking rule, different kinds of traffic can be marked for different kinds of forwarding. Resources can then be allocated according to the DSCP values and the configured policies. 18.5.4 Automatic Priority Queue Assignment If you enable QoS on the ZyXEL Device, the ZyXEL Device can automatically base on the IEEE 802.1p priority level, IP precedence and/or packet length to assign priority to traffic which does not match a class. The following table shows you the internal layer-2 and layer-3 QoS mapping on the ZyXEL Device. On the ZyXEL Device, traffic assigned to higher priority queues P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 343 Chapter 18 Quality of Service (QoS) gets through faster while traffic in lower index queues is dropped if the network is congested. Table 112 Internal Layer2 and Layer3 QoS Mapping PRIORITY QUEUE 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 LAYER 2 IEEE 802.1P USER PRIORITY

(ETHERNET PRIORITY) 1 2 0 3 4 5 6 7 LAYER 3 TOS (IP PRECEDENCE) DSCP IP PACKET LENGTH (BYTE)

>1100 250~1100

<250 0 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 000000 000000 001110 001100 001010 001000 010110 010100 010010 010000 011110 011100 011010 011000 100110 100100 100010 100000 101110 101000 110000 111000 344 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide CHAPTER 19 Dynamic DNS Setup This chapter discusses how to configure your ZyXEL Device to use Dynamic DNS. 19.1 Overview Dynamic DNS allows you to update your current dynamic IP address with one or many dynamic DNS services so that anyone can contact you (in applications such as NetMeeting and CU-SeeMe). You can also access your FTP server or Web site on your own computer using a domain name (for instance myhost.dhs.org, where myhost is a name of your choice) that will never change instead of using an IP address that changes each time you reconnect. Your friends or relatives will always be able to call you even if they don't know your IP address. First of all, you need to have registered a dynamic DNS account with www.dyndns.org. This is for people with a dynamic IP from their ISP or DHCP server that would still like to have a domain name. The Dynamic DNS service provider will give you a password or key. 19.1.1 What You Can Do in the DDNS Screen Use the Dynamic DNS screen (Section 19.2 on page 346) to enable DDNS and configure the DDNS settings on the ZyXEL Device. 19.1.2 What You Need To Know About DDNS DYNDNS Wildcard Enabling the wildcard feature for your host causes *.yourhost.dyndns.org to be aliased to the same IP address as yourhost.dyndns.org. This feature is useful if you want to be able to use, for example, www.yourhost.dyndns.org and still reach your hostname. If you have a private WAN IP address, then you cannot use Dynamic DNS. P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 345 Chapter 19 Dynamic DNS Setup 19.2 Configuring Dynamic DNS To change your ZyXEL Devices DDNS, click Advanced > Dynamic DNS. The screen appears as shown. See Section 19.1 on page 345 for more information. Figure 205 Advanced > Dynamic DNS The following table describes the fields in this screen. DESCRIPTION Table 113 Advanced > Dynamic DNS LABEL Dynamic DNS Setup Active Dynamic DNS Service Provider Dynamic DNS Type Host Name Select this check box to use dynamic DNS. This is the name of your Dynamic DNS service provider. Select the type of service that you are registered for from your Dynamic DNS service provider. Type the domain name assigned to your ZyXEL Device by your Dynamic DNS provider. You can specify up to two host names in the field separated by a comma

(","). Type your user name. Type the password assigned to you. User Name Password 346 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide Chapter 19 Dynamic DNS Setup DESCRIPTION Select the check box to enable DynDNS Wildcard. Table 113 Advanced > Dynamic DNS (continued) LABEL Enable Wildcard Option Enable off line option This option is available when CustomDNS is selected in the DDNS Type field. Check with your Dynamic DNS service provider to have traffic redirected to a URL (that you can specify) while you are off line. IP Address Update Policy Use WAN IP Address Dynamic DNS server auto detect IP Address Select this option to update the IP address of the host name(s) to the WAN IP address. Select this option only when there are one or more NAT routers between the ZyXEL Device and the DDNS server. This feature has the DDNS server automatically detect and use the IP address of the NAT router that has a public IP address. Note: The DDNS server may not be able to detect the proper IP address if there is an HTTP proxy server between the ZyXEL Device and the DDNS server. Use specified IP Address Apply Cancel Type the IP address of the host name(s). Use this if you have a static IP address. Click Apply to save your changes back to the ZyXEL Device. Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh. P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 347 Chapter 19 Dynamic DNS Setup 348 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide CHAPTER 20 Remote Management Configuration 20.1 Overview Remote management allows you to determine which services/protocols can access which ZyXEL Device interface (if any) from which computers.The following figure shows remote management of the ZyXEL Device coming in from the WAN. Figure 206 Remote Management From the WAN LAN WAN HTTP Telnet Internet Note: When you configure remote management to allow management from the WAN, you still need to configure a firewall rule to allow access. You may manage your ZyXEL Device from a remote location via:

Internet (WAN only) ALL (LAN and WAN) LAN only, Neither (Disable). Note: When you choose WAN only or LAN & WAN, you still need to configure a firewall rule to allow access. To disable remote management of a service, select Disable in the corresponding Access Status field. P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 349 Chapter 20 Remote Management Configuration You may only have one remote management session running at a time. The ZyXEL Device automatically disconnects a remote management session of lower priority when another remote management session of higher priority starts. The priorities for the different types of remote management sessions are as follows. 1 Telnet 2 HTTP 20.1.1 What You Can Do in the Remote Management Screens Use the WWW screen (Section 20.2 on page 351) to configure through which interface(s) and from which IP address(es) users can use HTTP to manage the ZyXEL Device. Use the Telnet screen (Section 20.3 on page 352) to configure through which interface(s) and from which IP address(es) users can use Telnet to manage the ZyXEL Device. Use the FTP screen (Section 20.4 on page 353) to configure through which interface(s) and from which IP address(es) users can use FTP to access the ZyXEL Device. Use the SNMP screen (Section 20.5 on page 354) to configure your ZyXEL Devices settings for Simple Network Management Protocol management. Use the DNS screen (Section 20.6 on page 357) to configure through which interface(s) and from which IP address(es) users can send DNS queries to the ZyXEL Device. Use the ICMP screen (Section 20.7 on page 358) to set whether or not your ZyXEL Device will respond to pings and probes for services that you have not made available. 20.1.2 What You Need to Know About Remote Management Remote Management Limitations Remote management does not work when:

You have not enabled that service on the interface in the corresponding remote management screen. You have disabled that service in one of the remote management screens. The IP address in the Secured Client IP field does not match the client IP address. If it does not match, the ZyXEL Device will disconnect the session immediately. There is already another remote management session with an equal or higher priority running. You may only have one remote management session running at one time. There is a firewall rule that blocks it. 350 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide Chapter 20 Remote Management Configuration Remote Management and NAT When NAT is enabled:

Use the ZyXEL Devices WAN IP address when configuring from the WAN. Use the ZyXEL Devices LAN IP address when configuring from the LAN. System Timeout There is a default system management idle timeout of five minutes (three hundred seconds). The ZyXEL Device automatically logs you out if the management session remains idle for longer than this timeout period. The management session does not time out when a statistics screen is polling. 20.2 The WWW Screen To change your ZyXEL Devices World Wide Web settings, click Advanced >

Remote MGMT to display the WWW screen. Figure 207 Advanced > Remote Management > WWW The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 114 Advanced > Remote Management > WWW LABEL Port DESCRIPTION You may change the server port number for a service if needed, however you must use the same port number in order to use that service for remote management. Select the interface(s) through which a computer may access the ZyXEL Device using this service. Access Status P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 351 Chapter 20 Remote Management Configuration Table 114 Advanced > Remote Management > WWW LABEL Secured Client IP DESCRIPTION A secured client is a trusted computer that is allowed to communicate with the ZyXEL Device using this service. Select All to allow any computer to access the ZyXEL Device using this service. Choose Selected to just allow the computer with the IP address that you specify to access the ZyXEL Device using this service. Click Apply to save your settings back to the ZyXEL Device. Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh. Apply Cancel 20.3 The Telnet Screen You can use Telnet to access the ZyXEL Devices command line interface. Specify which interfaces allow Telnet access and from which IP address the access can come. Click Advanced > Remote MGMT > Telnet tab to display the screen as shown. Figure 208 Advanced > Remote Management > Telnet The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 115 Advanced > Remote Management > Telnet LABEL Port DESCRIPTION You may change the server port number for a service if needed, however you must use the same port number in order to use that service for remote management. Select the interface(s) through which a computer may access the ZyXEL Device using this service. Access Status 352 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide Chapter 20 Remote Management Configuration Table 115 Advanced > Remote Management > Telnet LABEL Secured Client IP DESCRIPTION A secured client is a trusted computer that is allowed to communicate with the ZyXEL Device using this service. Select All to allow any computer to access the ZyXEL Device using this service. Choose Selected to just allow the computer with the IP address that you specify to access the ZyXEL Device using this service. Click Apply to save your customized settings and exit this screen. Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh. Apply Cancel 20.4 The FTP Screen You can use FTP (File Transfer Protocol) to upload and download the ZyXEL Devices firmware and configuration files, please see the Users Guide chapter on firmware and configuration file maintenance for details. To use this feature, your computer must have an FTP client. To change your ZyXEL Devices FTP settings, click Advanced > Remote MGMT >

FTP. The screen appears as shown. Use this screen to specify which interfaces allow FTP access and from which IP address the access can come. Figure 209 Advanced > Remote Management > FTP The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 116 Advanced > Remote Management > FTP LABEL Port DESCRIPTION You may change the server port number for a service if needed, however you must use the same port number in order to use that service for remote management. Select the interface(s) through which a computer may access the ZyXEL Device using this service. Access Status P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 353 Chapter 20 Remote Management Configuration Table 116 Advanced > Remote Management > FTP LABEL Secured Client IP DESCRIPTION A secured client is a trusted computer that is allowed to communicate with the ZyXEL Device using this service. Select All to allow any computer to access the ZyXEL Device using this service. Choose Selected to just allow the computer with the IP address that you specify to access the ZyXEL Device using this service. Click Apply to save your customized settings and exit this screen. Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh. Apply Cancel 20.5 The SNMP Screen Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) is a protocol used for exchanging management information between network devices. SNMP is a member of the TCP/IP protocol suite. Your ZyXEL Device supports SNMP agent functionality, which allows a manager station to manage and monitor the ZyXEL Device through the network. The ZyXEL Device supports SNMP version one (SNMPv1) and version two (SNMPv2). The next figure illustrates an SNMP management operation. Note: SNMP is only available if TCP/IP is configured. Figure 210 SNMP Management Model An SNMP managed network consists of two main types of component: agents and a manager. 354 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide Chapter 20 Remote Management Configuration An agent is a management software module that resides in a managed device (the ZyXEL Device). An agent translates the local management information from the managed device into a form compatible with SNMP. The manager is the console through which network administrators perform network management functions. It executes applications that control and monitor managed devices. The managed devices contain object variables/managed objects that define each piece of information to be collected about a device. Examples of variables include such as number of packets received and node port status. A Management Information Base (MIB) is a collection of managed objects. SNMP allows a manager and agents to communicate for the purpose of accessing these objects. SNMP itself is a simple request/response protocol based on the manager/agent model. The manager issues a request and the agent returns responses using the following protocol operations:

Get - Allows the manager to retrieve an object variable from the agent. GetNext - Allows the manager to retrieve the next object variable from a table or list within an agent. In SNMPv1, when a manager wants to retrieve all elements of a table from an agent, it initiates a Get operation, followed by a series of GetNext operations. Set - Allows the manager to set values for object variables within an agent. Trap - Used by the agent to inform the manager of some events. Supported MIBs The ZyXEL Device supports MIB II, which is defined in RFC-1213 and RFC-1215. The focus of the MIBs is to let administrators collect statistical data and monitor status and performance. SNMP Traps The ZyXEL Device will send traps to the SNMP manager when any one of the following events occurs:

Table 117 SNMP Traps TRAP # TRAP NAME 0 coldStart (defined in RFC-

1215) warmStart (defined in RFC-

1215) authenticationFailure (defined in RFC-1215) whyReboot (defined in ZYXEL-

MIB) 1 4 6 DESCRIPTION A trap is sent after booting (power on). A trap is sent after booting (software reboot). A trap is sent to the manager when receiving any SNMP get or set requirements with the wrong community (password). A trap is sent with the reason of restart before rebooting when the system is going to restart

(warm start). P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 355 Chapter 20 Remote Management Configuration Table 117 SNMP Traps TRAP # TRAP NAME 6a For intentional reboot:

6b For fatal error:

20.5.1 Configuring SNMP DESCRIPTION A trap is sent with the message "System reboot by user!" if reboot is done intentionally, (for example, download new files, CI command "sys reboot"). A trap is sent with the message of the fatal code if the system reboots because of fatal errors. To change your ZyXEL Devices SNMP settings, click Advanced > Remote MGMT

> SNMP. The screen appears as shown. Figure 211 Advanced > Remote Management > SNMP The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 118 Advanced > Remote Management > SNMP LABEL SNMP Port DESCRIPTION Access Status You may change the server port number for a service if needed, however you must use the same port number in order to use that service for remote management. Select the interface(s) through which a computer may access the ZyXEL Device using this service. 356 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide Chapter 20 Remote Management Configuration Table 118 Advanced > Remote Management > SNMP LABEL Secured Client IP A secured client is a trusted computer that is allowed to DESCRIPTION communicate with the ZyXEL Device using this service. Select All to allow any computer to access the ZyXEL Device using this service. Choose Selected to just allow the computer with the IP address that you specify to access the ZyXEL Device using this service. SNMP Configuration Get Community Set Community Trap Community Destination Apply Cancel Enter the Get Community, which is the password for the incoming Get and GetNext requests from the management station. The default is public and allows all requests. Enter the Set community, which is the password for incoming Set requests from the management station. The default is public and allows all requests. Type the trap community, which is the password sent with each trap to the SNMP manager. The default is public and allows all requests. Type the IP address of the station to send your SNMP traps to. Click Apply to save your customized settings and exit this screen. Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh. 20.6 The DNS Screen Use DNS (Domain Name System) to map a domain name to its corresponding IP address and vice versa. Refer to Chapter 7 on page 117 for background information. Click Advanced > Remote MGMT > DNS to change your ZyXEL Devices DNS settings. Use this screen to set from which IP address the ZyXEL Device will accept DNS queries and on which interface it can send them your ZyXEL Devices DNS P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 357 Chapter 20 Remote Management Configuration settings. This feature is not available when the ZyXEL Device is set to bridge mode. Figure 212 Remote Management: DNS The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 119 Remote Management: DNS LABEL Port Access Status DESCRIPTION The DNS service port number is 53 and cannot be changed here. Select the interface(s) through which a computer may send DNS queries to the ZyXEL Device. A secured client is a trusted computer that is allowed to send DNS queries to the ZyXEL Device. Secured Client IP Apply Cancel Select All to allow any computer to send DNS queries to the ZyXEL Device. Choose Selected to just allow the computer with the IP address that you specify to send DNS queries to the ZyXEL Device. Click Apply to save your customized settings and exit this screen. Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh. 20.7 The ICMP Screen To change your ZyXEL Devices security settings, click Advanced > Remote MGMT > ICMP. The screen appears as shown. If an outside user attempts to probe an unsupported port on your ZyXEL Device, an ICMP response packet is automatically returned. This allows the outside user to know the ZyXEL Device exists. Your ZyXEL Device supports anti-probing, which prevents the ICMP response packet from being sent. This keeps outsiders from discovering your ZyXEL Device when unsupported ports are probed. 358 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide Chapter 20 Remote Management Configuration Note: If you want your device to respond to pings and requests for unauthorized services, you may also need to configure the firewall anti probing settings to match. Figure 213 Advanced > Remote Management > ICMP The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 120 Advanced > Remote Management > ICMP LABEL ICMP Respond to Ping on Do not respond to requests for unauthorized services DESCRIPTION Internet Control Message Protocol is a message control and error-

reporting protocol between a host server and a gateway to the Internet. ICMP uses Internet Protocol (IP) datagrams, but the messages are processed by the TCP/IP software and directly apparent to the application user. The ZyXEL Device will not respond to any incoming Ping requests when Disable is selected. Select LAN to reply to incoming LAN Ping requests. Select WAN to reply to incoming WAN Ping requests. Select LAN & WAN to reply to both incoming LAN and WAN Ping requests. Select WLAN & WAN to reply to both incoming WLAN and WAN Ping requests. Select WLAN & LAN to reply to both incoming WLAN and LAN Ping requests. Select WLAN to reply to incoming WLAN Ping requests. Select this option to prevent hackers from finding the ZyXEL Device by probing for unused ports. If you select this option, the ZyXEL Device will not respond to port request(s) for unused ports, thus leaving the unused ports and the ZyXEL Device unseen. If this option is not selected, the ZyXEL Device will reply with an ICMP port unreachable packet for a port probe on its unused UDP ports and a TCP reset packet for a port probe on its unused TCP ports. Note that the probing packets must first traverse the ZyXEL Device's firewall rule checks before reaching this anti-probing mechanism. Therefore if a firewall rule stops a probing packet, the ZyXEL Device reacts based on the firewall rule to either send a TCP reset packet for a blocked TCP packet (or an ICMP port-unreachable packet for a blocked UDP packets) or just drop the packets without sending a response packet. P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 359 Chapter 20 Remote Management Configuration Table 120 Advanced > Remote Management > ICMP LABEL Apply Cancel DESCRIPTION Click Apply to save your customized settings and exit this screen. Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh. 360 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 21 CHAPTER Universal Plug-and-Play (UPnP) 21.1 Overview Universal Plug and Play (UPnP) is a distributed, open networking standard that uses TCP/IP for simple peer-to-peer network connectivity between devices. A UPnP device can dynamically join a network, obtain an IP address, convey its capabilities and learn about other devices on the network. In turn, a device can leave a network smoothly and automatically when it is no longer in use. 21.1.1 What You Can Do in the UPnP Screen Use the UPnP screen (Section 21.2 on page 363) to enable UPnP on the ZyXEL Device and allow UPnP-enabled applications to automatically configure the ZyXEL Device. 21.1.2 What You Need to Know About UPnP How do I know if I'm using UPnP?

UPnP hardware is identified as an icon in the Network Connections folder

(Windows XP). Each UPnP compatible device installed on your network will appear as a separate icon. Selecting the icon of a UPnP device will allow you to access the information and properties of that device. NAT Traversal UPnP NAT traversal automates the process of allowing an application to operate through NAT. UPnP network devices can automatically configure network addressing, announce their presence in the network to other UPnP devices and enable exchange of simple product and service descriptions. NAT traversal allows the following:

Dynamic port mapping Learning public IP addresses Assigning lease times to mappings P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 361 Chapter 21 Universal Plug-and-Play (UPnP) Windows Messenger is an example of an application that supports NAT traversal and UPnP. See the NAT chapter for more information on NAT. Cautions with UPnP The automated nature of NAT traversal applications in establishing their own services and opening firewall ports may present network security issues. Network information and configuration may also be obtained and modified by users in some network environments. When a UPnP device joins a network, it announces its presence with a multicast message. For security reasons, the ZyXEL Device allows multicast messages on the LAN only. All UPnP-enabled devices may communicate freely with each other without additional configuration. Disable UPnP if this is not your intention. UPnP and ZyXEL ZyXEL has achieved UPnP certification from the Universal Plug and Play Forum UPnP Implementers Corp. (UIC). ZyXEL's UPnP implementation supports Internet Gateway Device (IGD) 1.0. See the following sections for examples of installing and using UPnP. 362 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide Chapter 21 Universal Plug-and-Play (UPnP) 21.2 The UPnP Screen Click Advanced > UPnP to display the screen shown next. See Section 21.1 on page 361 for more information. Figure 214 Advanced > UPnP > General The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 121 Advanced > UPnP > General DESCRIPTION LABEL Select this check box to activate UPnP. Be aware that anyone Active the Universal Plug and Play (UPnP) Feature could use a UPnP application to open the web configurator's login screen without entering the ZyXEL Device's IP address

(although you must still enter the password to access the web configurator). Select this check box to allow UPnP-enabled applications to automatically configure the ZyXEL Device so that they can communicate through the ZyXEL Device, for example by using NAT traversal, UPnP applications automatically reserve a NAT forwarding port in order to communicate with another UPnP enabled device; this eliminates the need to manually configure port forwarding for the UPnP enabled application. Click Apply to save the setting to the ZyXEL Device. Click Cancel to return to the previously saved settings. Allow users to make configuration changes through UPnP Apply Cancel 21.3 Installing UPnP in Windows Example This section shows how to install UPnP in Windows Me and Windows XP. P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 363 Chapter 21 Universal Plug-and-Play (UPnP) Installing UPnP in Windows Me Follow the steps below to install the UPnP in Windows Me. 1 Click Start and Control Panel. Double-click Add/Remove Programs. 2 Click the Windows Setup tab and select Communication in the Components selection box. Click Details. Figure 215 Add/Remove Programs: Windows Setup: Communication 364 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide Chapter 21 Universal Plug-and-Play (UPnP) 3 In the Communications window, select the Universal Plug and Play check box in the Components selection box. Figure 216 Add/Remove Programs: Windows Setup: Communication: Components 4 Click OK to go back to the Add/Remove Programs Properties window and click Next. 5 Restart the computer when prompted. Installing UPnP in Windows XP Follow the steps below to install the UPnP in Windows XP. 1 Click Start and Control Panel. 2 Double-click Network Connections. 3 In the Network Connections window, click Advanced in the main menu and select Optional Networking Components . Figure 217 Network Connections P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 365 Chapter 21 Universal Plug-and-Play (UPnP) 4 The Windows Optional Networking Components Wizard window displays. Select Networking Service in the Components selection box and click Details. Figure 218 Windows Optional Networking Components Wizard 366 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide Chapter 21 Universal Plug-and-Play (UPnP) 5 In the Networking Services window, select the Universal Plug and Play check box. Figure 219 Networking Services 6 Click OK to go back to the Windows Optional Networking Component Wizard window and click Next. 21.4 Using UPnP in Windows XP Example This section shows you how to use the UPnP feature in Windows XP. You must already have UPnP installed in Windows XP and UPnP activated on the ZyXEL Device. Make sure the computer is connected to a LAN port of the ZyXEL Device. Turn on your computer and the ZyXEL Device. Auto-discover Your UPnP-enabled Network Device 1 Click Start and Control Panel. Double-click Network Connections. An icon displays under Internet Gateway. P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 367 Chapter 21 Universal Plug-and-Play (UPnP) 2 Right-click the icon and select Properties. Figure 220 Network Connections 368 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide Chapter 21 Universal Plug-and-Play (UPnP) 3 In the Internet Connection Properties window, click Settings to see the port mappings there were automatically created. Figure 221 Internet Connection Properties P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 369 Chapter 21 Universal Plug-and-Play (UPnP) 4 You may edit or delete the port mappings or click Add to manually add port mappings. Figure 222 Internet Connection Properties: Advanced Settings Figure 223 Internet Connection Properties: Advanced Settings: Add 5 When the UPnP-enabled device is disconnected from your computer, all port mappings will be deleted automatically. 370 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide Chapter 21 Universal Plug-and-Play (UPnP) 6 Select Show icon in notification area when connected option and click OK. An icon displays in the system tray. Figure 224 System Tray Icon 7 Double-click on the icon to display your current Internet connection status. Figure 225 Internet Connection Status Web Configurator Easy Access With UPnP, you can access the web-based configurator on the ZyXEL Device without finding out the IP address of the ZyXEL Device first. This comes helpful if you do not know the IP address of the ZyXEL Device. Follow the steps below to access the web configurator. 1 Click Start and then Control Panel. 2 Double-click Network Connections. P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 371 Chapter 21 Universal Plug-and-Play (UPnP) 3 Select My Network Places under Other Places. Figure 226 Network Connections 4 An icon with the description for each UPnP-enabled device displays under Local Network. 372 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide Chapter 21 Universal Plug-and-Play (UPnP) 5 Right-click on the icon for your ZyXEL Device and select Invoke. The web configurator login screen displays. Figure 227 Network Connections: My Network Places 6 Right-click on the icon for your ZyXEL Device and select Properties. A properties window displays with basic information about the ZyXEL Device. Figure 228 Network Connections: My Network Places: Properties: Example P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 373 Chapter 21 Universal Plug-and-Play (UPnP) 374 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide CHAPTER 22 File Sharing 22.1 Overview Share files on a USB memory stick or hard drive connected to your ZyXEL Device with users on your network. The following figure is an overview of the ZyXEL Devices file server feature. Computers A and B can access files on a USB device (C) which is connected to the ZyXEL Device. Figure 229 File Sharing Overview B A C See Section 22.1.2 on page 376 for an explanation of file-sharing terms. See Section 22.1.4 on page 377 for file-sharing examples. 22.1.1 What You Can Do in the File-Sharing Screens Use the Server Settings screen (Section 22.2 on page 381) to configure your file-sharing server. Use the User Name and Password screen (Section 22.3 on page 383) to set up and edit a file-sharing account. Use the Share Configuration screen (Section 22.4 on page 384) to configure your the file path of your shares. P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 375 Chapter 22 File Sharing 22.1.2 What You Need to Know About File-Sharing User Account This gives you access to the file-sharing server. It includes your user name and password. Workgroup name This is the name given to a set of computers that are connected on a network and share resources such as a printer or files. Windows automatically assigns the workgroup name when you set up a network. Shares When settings are set to default, each USB device connected to the ZyXEL Device is given a folder, called a share. If a USB hard drive connected to the ZyXEL Device has more than one partition, then each partition will be allocated a share. You can also configure a share to be a sub-folder or file on the USB device. File Systems A file system is a way of storing and organizing files on your hard drive and storage device. Often different operating systems such as Windows or Linux have different file systems. The file-sharing feature on your ZyXEL Device supports File Allocation Table (FAT) and FAT32 file systems. Common Internet File System The ZyXEL Device uses Common Internet File System (CIFS) protocol for its file sharing functions. CIFS compatible computers can access the USB file storage devices connected to the ZyXEL Device. CIFS protocol is supported on Microsoft Windows, Linux Samba and other operating systems (refer to your systems specifications for CIFS compatibility). File Transfer Protocol This is a method of transferring data from one computer to another over a network such as the Internet. 22.1.3 Before You Begin Make sure the ZyXEL Device is connected to your network and turned on. 376 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide Chapter 22 File Sharing 1 Connect the USB device to one of the ZyXEL Devices USB ports. Make sure the ZyXEL Device is connected to your network. 2 The ZyXEL Device detects the USB device and makes its contents available for browsing. If you are connecting a USB hard drive that comes with an external power supply, make sure it is connected to an appropriate power source that is on. Note: If your USB device cannot be detected by ZyXEL Device, see the troubleshooting for suggestions. 22.1.4 File-Sharing Examples In this section you can:

Set up File-Sharing Share Your Files 22.1.4.1 Set Up File-Sharing To set up file-sharing you need to set up a user account, enable file-sharing and set up your share(s). Set up a User Account Before you can share files you need a user account. 1 Click Advanced > File Sharing > User Name and Password to display the following screen. Click Add to set up a user name and password. Figure 230 Advanced > File-Sharing > User Name and Password Example P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 377 Chapter 22 File Sharing 2 3 The following screen appears. Select Active, and enter a user name and password as shown in the example screen below. Click Apply to save your settings. Figure 231 Advanced > File-Sharing > User Name and Password: Add Example This sets up your user account, now you are ready to set up file-sharing on your ZyXEL Device. Set up File-Sharing on Your ZyXEL Device You also need to set up file-sharing on your ZyXEL Device in order to share files. 1 Go to Advanced > File Sharing > Server Setting to enter a workgroup name and select the type of characters used in your USB device, as shown in the screen below. If you want to use default share names, select Default Share Directory List in this screen. If you want to use your own share names and add, modify or delete shares, select User-Defined Share Directory List in this screen, as shown in the example screen below. 2 Click Apply to save your settings. Figure 232 Advanced > File Sharing > Server Setting Example 3 This sets up the file-sharing server. 378 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide Chapter 22 File Sharing If you have selected Default Share Directory List, you are ready to file-share. Go to Section 22.1.4.2 on page 380 for an example on sharing your files. If you have selected User-Defined Share Directory List, go to the next section to set up your shares. Set up Your Share(s) If you have selected User-Defined Share Directory List when you set up your file-sharing server, you can add, edit or delete your shares. 1 Go to Advanced > File Sharing > Share Configuration and click Add as shown in the following screen. Figure 233 Advanced > File Sharing > Share Configuration Example 2 Set up a file path for the server to find your shares. In the screen that appears, type the name of your share and a description as shown in the following example screen. Click Browse. Figure 234 Advanced > File Sharing > Share Configuration: Add Example P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 379 Chapter 22 File Sharing 3 Another screen appears, letting you set the file path of your share. Click Apply. Figure 235 Advanced > File Sharing > Share Configuration: Add: Browse Example 4 You are now ready to file-share. Go to Section 22.1.4.2 on page 380 to share your files. 22.1.4.2 Access Your Shared Files From a Computer You can use Windows to access the file storage devices connected to the ZyXEL Device. Note: The examples in this Users Guide show you how to use Microsofts Windows XP to browse your shared files. Refer to your operating systems documentation for how to browse your file structure. Use Windows Explorer to Share Files Open Windows Explorer to access Bobs Share using Windows Explorer browser. 380 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide Chapter 22 File Sharing 1 In Windows Explorers Address bar type a double backslash \\ followed by the IP address of the ZyXEL Device (the default IP address of the ZyXEL Device is 192.168.1.1) and press [ENTER]. A screen asking for password authentication appears. Type the user name and password and click OK. Figure 236 File Sharing via Windows Explorer Note: Once you login to the file Bobs Share via your ZyXEL Device, you do not have to relogin unless you restart your computer. 22.2 The Server Settings Screen In the Server Settings screen you need to configure your ZyXEL Devices Workgroup Name. The ZyXEL Device will not be able to join the workgroup if your local area network has restrictions set up that do not allow devices to join a workgroup. In this case, contact your network administrator. P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 381 Chapter 22 File Sharing Use this screen to set up file sharing via the ZyXEL Device. To access this screen, click Advanced > File Sharing. Figure 237 File Sharing > Server Configuration Each field is described in the following table. DESCRIPTION Select this to enable file sharing through the ZyXEL Device. Table 122 File Sharing > Server Configuration LABEL Enable File Sharing Services Workgroup Name You can add the ZyXEL Device to an existing or a new workgroup on your network. Enter the name of the workgroup which your ZyXEL Device automatically joins. System Code Page Server Configuration Apply Reset You can set the ZyXEL Devices workgroup name to be exactly the same as the workgroup name to which your computer belongs to. Select the character set of the files contained on your storage device. For example, if your files were created on an operating system which used the Russian alphabet, select cp866 (Russian). If the file or folder names on your USB storage device appear as unrecognizable (or jumbled) characters, you should double check this setting to make sure it is set correctly. Select Default Share Directory List to use the preset share names. Select User-Defined Share Directory List to use your own share names and set access levels. Click this to save your changes to the ZyXEL Device. Click this to set every field in this screen to its last-saved value. 382 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide Chapter 22 File Sharing 22.3 The User Name and Password Screen Use this screen to configure a user account. To access this screen, click Advanced

> File Sharing > User Name and Password. Figure 238 File Sharing > User Name and Password Each field is described in the following table. Table 123 File Sharing > User Name and Password LABEL

DESCRIPTION This is a read-only index number of the user name on the ZyXEL Device. This shows whether the user name is active (able to access shares via the ZyXEL Device) or inactive (unable to access shares via the ZyXEL Device). This field shows the list of user names already configured on the ZyXEL Device. Click the Edit icon to change the settings of an existing user account. Click the Remove icon to delete this entry in the list. Click this button to configure another user name and include it in the list. Active User Name Modify Add P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 383 Chapter 22 File Sharing 22.3.1 Add or Edit a User Account Use this screen to add or edit a user account. To access this screen, click Advanced > File Sharing > User Configuration and click the Edit icon in the Modify column or the Add button. Figure 239 File Sharing > User Configuration > Add/Edit Each field is described in the following table. Table 124 File Sharing > User Configuration > Add/Edit LABEL Active DESCRIPTION Select this to set whether the user name is active (able to access shares via the ZyXEL Device) or inactive (unable to access shares via the ZyXEL Device). This field is not configurable if you click the Edit icon in the Modify column to configure an existing user account. User Name Password Retype to Confirm Back Apply Reset Enter the user name of the account. The user name can be 31 alpha-

numeric characters long. Enter the password for this account. The password can be 31 alpha-

numeric characters long. Retype the password. Click this button to return to the previous screen without saving your settings. Click this to save your changes to the ZyXEL Device. Click this to set the fields in this screen to their defaults. 22.4 The Share Configuration Screen Two possible screens appear depending on your Server Configuration settings in the Server Setting screen. See Section 22.2 on page 381 for details. 384 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide Chapter 22 File Sharing 22.4.1 Default Share Directory List If you selected Default Share Directory List in the Server Settings screen, the following screen appears when you click Advanced > File Sharing > Share Configuration. Figure 240 File Sharing > Share Configuration: Default Each field is described in the following table. Table 125 File Sharing > Share Configuration: Default LABEL Default Share Directory List

DESCRIPTION These fields identify the default shares on the ZyXEL Device. This is a read-only index number of the default share on the ZyXEL Device. When more than one USB disk (or a USB hard drive with multiple shares) is connected to the ZyXEL Device this index number identifies the different disks. The first disk connected is 1, the second 2 and so on. This field displays the default share names on the ZyXEL Device. Share Name Share Directory This field displays the share directories (folders) on the ZyXEL Device. These are the directories (folders) you can enter when you browse to your USB storage device. 22.4.2 User-Defined Share Directory List If you selected User-Defined Directory List in the Server Settings screen, the following screen appears when you click Advanced > File Sharing > Share Configuration. Figure 241 File Sharing > Share Configuration: User-Defined P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 385 Chapter 22 File Sharing Each field is described in the following table. Table 126 File Sharing > Share Configuration: User-Defined LABEL User-Defined Share Directory List

DESCRIPTION These fields identify the shares you configured on the ZyXEL Device. This is a read-only index number of the user-defined share on the ZyXEL Device. Share Name This field displays the user-defined share name on the ZyXEL Device. Share Directory This field displays the user-defined share directories (folders) on the ZyXEL Device. These are the directories (folders) you can enter when you browse to your USB storage device. This field displays information about the share. You can add share descriptions to user-defined shares in the Share Configuration Add/

Edit screen. Click the Edit icon to change the settings of an existing user-defined share. Share Description Modify Add Click the Remove icon to delete this share in the list. Click this to set up a new user-defined share on the ZyXEL Device. 22.4.3 Add or Edit a User-Defined Share Figure 242 File Sharing > Share Configuration: User-Defined > Add/Edit Each field is described in the following table. Table 127 File Sharing > Share Configuration: User-Defined > Add/Edit LABEL Share Name DESCRIPTION Enter the name you want the user-defined share to have in the network. Share Directory Manually enter the file path for the user-defined share, or click the Browse Browse button. Click this button to select the file path for the user-defined share directory. This is the folder that will be visible to a user browsing to the USB storage device. A user can access any files and sub-folders in this folder. 386 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide Chapter 22 File Sharing Table 127 File Sharing > Share Configuration: User-Defined > Add/Edit LABEL Share Description Back DESCRIPTION You can either enter a short description of the share, or leave this field blank. Click this button to return to the previous screen without saving your settings. Click this button to save your settings. Click this button to return all fields in this screen to their previous values. Apply Reset 22.4.4 Browse To select the file path for the user-defined share directory, click Browse in the Share Configuration Add/Edit screen. Figure 243 File Sharing > Share Configuration: User-Defined > Browse Each field is described in the following table. Table 128 File Sharing > Share Configuration: User-Defined > Browse LABEL File System Parent Directory Current Directory DESCRIPTION Use this section to set up the directory path for the share. Click the Parent Directory icon (

) to go up one level. This field displays the file path of the share. This is the folder that will be visible to a user browsing to the USB storage device. A user can access any files and sub-folders in this folder. This displays the name of the folder in the Current Directory of the connected USB storage device. Click on a folder name to add that folder to the directory path for the share Click this button to return to the previous screen without saving your settings. Click this button to save your settings. Name Back Apply P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 387 Chapter 22 File Sharing 388 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide CHAPTER 23 Sharing a USB Printer This chapter describes how you can share a USB printer via your ZyXEL Device. 23.1 Overview The ZyXEL Device allows you to share a USB printer on your LAN. You can do this by connecting a USB printer to one of the USB ports on the ZyXEL Device and then configuring a TCP/IP port on the computers connected to your network. Figure 244 Sharing a USB Printer 23.1.1 What You Need to Know About Printer Sharing Print Server This is a computer or other device which manages one or more printers, and which sends print jobs to each printer from the computer itself or other devices. Operating System An operating system (OS) is the interface which helps you manage a computer. Common examples are Microsoft Windows, Mac OS or Linux. P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 389 Chapter 23 Sharing a USB Printer TCP/IP TCP/IP (Transmission Control Protocol/ Internet Protocol) is a set of communications protocols that most of the Internet runs on. Port A port maps a network service such as http to a process running on your computer, such as a process run by your web browser. When traffic from the Internet is received on your computer, the port number is used to identify which process running on your computer it is intended for. Line Printer Remote Protocol The Line Printer Remote (LPR) Protocol is software that provides printer spooling and print-server features using TCP/IP to connect printers and computers on a network. Supported OSs Your operating system must support TCP/IP ports for printing and be compatible with the LPR protocol. The following OSs support ZyXEL Devices printer sharing feature. Microsoft Windows 95, Windows 98 SE (Second Edition), Windows Me, Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, Windows XP or Macintosh OS X. 23.1.2 Before You Begin To configure the print server you need the following:

Your ZyXEL Device must be connected to your computer and any other devices on your network. The USB printer must be connected to your ZyXEL Device. A USB printer with the driver already installed on your computer. The computers on your network must have the printer software already installed before they can create a TCP/IP port for printing via the network. Follow your printer manufacturers instructions on how to install the printer software on your computer. Note: Your printers installation instructions may ask that you connect the printer to your computer. Connect your printer to the ZyXEL Device instead. 23.1.3 What You Can Do with Printer Sharing In this section you can:

390 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide Chapter 23 Sharing a USB Printer Configure a TCP/IP Printer Port Add a New Printer Using Windows Add a New Printer Using Macintosh OS X Configure a TCP/IP Printer Port This example shows how you can configure a TCP/IP printer port. This example is done using the Windows 2000 Professional operating system. Some menu items may look different on your operating system. The TCP/IP port must be configured with the IP address of the ZyXEL Device and must use the LPR protocol to communicate with the printer. Consult your operating systems documentation for instructions on how to do this or follow the instructions below if you have a Windows 2000/XP operating system. 1 Click Start > Settings, then right click on Printers and select Open. Figure 245 Open Printers Window The Printers folder opens up. First you need to open up the properties windows for the printer you want to configure a TCP/IP port. 2 Locate your printer. P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 391 Chapter 23 Sharing a USB Printer 3 Right click on your printer and select Properties. Figure 246 Open Printer Properties 4 Select the Ports tab and click Add Port... Figure 247 Printer Properties Window 392 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide Chapter 23 Sharing a USB Printer 5 A Printer Ports window appears. Select Standard TCP/IP Port and click New Port... Figure 248 Add a Port Window 6 Add Standard TCP/IP Printer Port Wizard window opens up. Click Next to start configuring the printer port. Figure 249 Add a Port Wizard 7 Enter the IP address of the ZyXEL Device to which the printer is connected in the Printer Name or IP Address: field. In our example we use the default IP address of the ZyXEL Device, 192.168.1.1. The Port Name field updates automatically to reflect the IP address of the port. Click Next. P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 393 Chapter 23 Sharing a USB Printer Note: The computer from which you are configuring the TCP/IP printer port must be on the same LAN in order to use the printer sharing function. Figure 250 Enter IP Address of the ZyXEL Device 8 Select Custom under Device Type and click Settings. Figure 251 Custom Port Settings 9 Confirm the IP address of the ZyXEL Device in the IP Address field. 10 Select LPR under Protocol. 11 Type the LPR queue name of your printer model in the Queue Name field and click OK. Refer to your printer documentation for the LPR queue name. Some 394 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide Chapter 23 Sharing a USB Printer printer models accept any name you want to use, in this case you can enter a short descriptive name for the Queue Name. Figure 252 Custom Port Settings 12 Continue through the wizard, apply your settings and close the wizard window. Figure 253 Finish Adding the TCP/IP Port 13 Repeat steps 1 to 12 to add this printer to other computers on your network. P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 395 Chapter 23 Sharing a USB Printer Add a New Printer Using Windows This example shows how to connect a printer to your ZyXEL Device using the Windows XP Professional operating system. Some menu items may look different on your operating system. 1 Click Start > Control Panel > Printers and Faxes to open the Printers and Faxes screen. Click Add a Printer. Figure 254 Printers Folder 2 The Add Printer Wizard screen displays. Click Next. Figure 255 Add Printer Wizard: Welcome 396 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 3 Select Local printer attached to this computer and click Next. Figure 256 Add Printer Wizard: Local or Network Printer Chapter 23 Sharing a USB Printer 4 Select Create a new port and Standard TCP/IP Port. Click Next. Figure 257 Add Printer Wizard: Select the Printer Port P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 397 Chapter 23 Sharing a USB Printer 5 Add Standard TCP/IP Printer Port Wizard window opens up. Click Next to start configuring the printer port. Figure 258 Add a Port Wizard 6 Enter the IP address of the ZyXEL Device to which the printer is connected in the Printer Name or IP Address: field. In our example we use the default IP address of the ZyXEL Device, 192.168.1.1. The Port Name field updates automatically to reflect the IP address of the port. Click Next. Note: The computer from which you are configuring the TCP/IP printer port must be on the same LAN in order to use the printer sharing function. Figure 259 Enter IP Address of the ZyXEL Device 398 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 7 Select Custom under Device Type and click Settings. Figure 260 Custom Port Settings Chapter 23 Sharing a USB Printer 8 Confirm the IP address of the ZyXEL Device in the Printer Name or IP Address field. 9 Select LPR under Protocol. 10 Type LP1 in the Queue Name field and click OK to go back to the previous screen and click Next. Figure 261 Custom Port Settings P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 399 Chapter 23 Sharing a USB Printer 11 Click Finish to close the wizard window. Figure 262 Finish Adding the TCP/IP Port 12 Select the make of the printer that you want to connect to the print server in the Manufacturer list of printers. 13 Select the printer model from the list of Printers. 14 If your printer is not displayed in the list of Printers, you can insert the printer driver installation CD/disk or download the driver file to your computer, click Have Disk and install the new printer driver. 15 Click Next to continue. Figure 263 Add Printer Wizard: Printer Driver 400 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide Chapter 23 Sharing a USB Printer 16 If the following screen displays, select Keep existing driver radio button and click Next if you already have a printer driver installed on your computer and you do not want to change it. Otherwise, select Replace existing driver to replace it with the new driver you selected in the previous screen and click Next. Figure 264 Add Printer Wizard: Use Existing Driver 17 Type a name to identify the printer and then click Next to continue. Figure 265 Add Printer Wizard: Name Your Printer 18 The ZyXEL Device is a print server itself and you do not need to have your computer act as a print server by sharing the printer with other users in the same P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 401 Chapter 23 Sharing a USB Printer network; just select Do not share this printer and click Next to proceed to the following screen. Figure 266 Add Printer Wizard: Printer Sharing 19 Select Yes and then click the Next button if you want to print a test page. A pop-

up screen displays to ask if the test page printed correctly. Otherwise select No and then click Next to continue. Figure 267 Add Printer Wizard: Print Test Page 402 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide Chapter 23 Sharing a USB Printer 20 The following screen shows your current printer settings. Select Finish to complete adding a new printer. Figure 268 Add Printer Wizard Complete Add a New Printer Using Macintosh OS X Complete the following steps to set up a print server driver on your Macintosh computer. 1 Click the Print Center icon located in the Macintosh Dock (a place holding a series of icons/shortcuts at the bottom of the desktop). Proceed to step 6 to continue. If the Print Center icon is not in the Macintosh Dock, proceed to the next step. 2 On your desktop, double-click the Macintosh HD icon to open the Macintosh HD window. Figure 269 Macintosh HD 3 Double-click the Applications folder. Figure 270 Macintosh HD folder P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 403 Chapter 23 Sharing a USB Printer 4 Double-click the Utilities folder. Figure 271 Applications Folder 5 Double-click the Print Center icon. Figure 272 Utilities Folder 6 Click the Add icon at the top of the screen. Figure 273 Printer List Folder 7 Set up your printer in the Printer List configuration screen. Select IP Printing from the drop-down list box. 8 In the Printers Address field, type the IP address of your ZyXEL Device. 9 Deselect the Use default queue on server check box. 10 Type LP1 (a parallel port) in the Queue Name field. 404 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide Chapter 23 Sharing a USB Printer 11 Select your Printer Model from the drop-down list box. If the printer's model is not listed, select Generic. Figure 274 Printer Configuration 12 Click Add to select a printer model, save and close the Printer List configuration screen. Figure 275 Printer Model 13 The Name LP1 on 192.168.1.1 displays in the Printer List field. The default printer Name displays in bold type. Figure 276 Print Server 14 Your Macintosh print server driver setup is complete. You can now use the ZyXEL Devices print server to print from a Macintosh computer. P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 405 Chapter 23 Sharing a USB Printer 23.2 ZyXEL Device Print Server Compatible USB Printers The following is a list of USB printer models compatible with the ZyXEL Device print server. Table 129 Compatible USB Printers BRAND Brother CANON CANON CANON CANON CANON CANON CANON CANON CANON EPSON EPSON EPSON EPSON EPSON EPSON EPSON EPSON EPSON EPSON EPSON EPSON EPSON HP HP HP HP MODEL MFC7420 BJ F9000 PIXMA MP450 PIXMA MP730 PIXMA MP780 PIXMA MP830 PIXUS ip2500 PIXMA ip4200 PIXMA ip5000 PIXUS 990i CX3500 CX3900 EPL-5800 EPL-6200L LP-2500 LP-8900 RX 510 RX 530 Stylus 830U Stylus 1270 Stylus C43UX Stylus C60 Stylus Color 670 Deskjet 5550 Deskjet 5652 Deskjet 830C Deskjet 845C 406 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide Table 129 Compatible USB Printers (continued) Chapter 23 Sharing a USB Printer BRAND HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP IBM LEXMARK LEXMARK OKI SAMSUNG SAMSUNG MODEL Deskjet 1125C Deskjet 1180C Deskjet 1220C Deskjet F4185 Laserjet 1200 Laserjet 2200D Laserjet 2420 Color Laserjet 1500L Laserjet 3015 Officejet 4255 Officejet 5510 Officejet 5610 Officejet 7210 Officejet Pro L7380 Photosmart 2610 Photosmart 3110 Photosmart 7150 Photosmart 7830 Photosmart C5280 Photosmart D5160 PSC 1350 PSC 1410 Infoprint 1332 Z55 Z705 B4350 ML-1710 SCX-4016 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 407 Chapter 23 Sharing a USB Printer 408 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide PART III Maintenance, Troubleshooting and Specifications System (411) Logs (417) Tools (439) Diagnostic (459) Troubleshooting (461) Product Specifications (471) 409 410 CHAPTER 24 System 24.1 Overview This chapter shows you how to configure system related settings, such as system time, password, name, the domain name and the inactivity timeout interval. 24.1.1 What You Can Do in the System Settings Screens Use the General screen (Section 24.2 on page 412) to configure system settings. Use the Time Setting screen (Section 24.3 on page 414) to set the system time. 24.1.2 What You Need to Know About System Settings Domain Name This is a network address that identifies the owner of a network connection. For example, in the network address www.zyxel.com/support/files, the domain name is www.zyxel.com. DHCP DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) is a method of allocating IP addresses to devices on a network from a DHCP Server. Often your ISP or a router on your network performs this function. LAN A LAN (local area network) is typically a network which covers a small area, made up of computers and other devices which share resources such as Internet access and printers. P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 411 Chapter 24 System 24.2 The General Screen Use the General screen to configure system settings such as the system and domain name, inactivity timeout interval and system password. The System Name is for identification purposes. However, because some ISPs check this name you should enter your computer's "Computer Name". Find the system name of your Windows computer by following one of the steps below. In Windows XP, click start, My Computer, View system information and then click the Computer Name tab. Note the entry in the Full computer name field and enter it as the ZyXEL Device System Name. Click Maintenance > System to open the General screen. Figure 277 Maintenance > System > General The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 130 Maintenance > System > General LABEL General Setup System Name Choose a descriptive name for identification purposes. It is DESCRIPTION recommended you enter your computers Computer name in this field. This name can be up to 30 alphanumeric characters long. Spaces are not allowed, but dashes - and underscores "_" are accepted. Domain Name Enter the domain name (if you know it) here. If you leave this field blank, the ISP may assign a domain name via DHCP. The domain name entered by you is given priority over the ISP assigned domain name. 412 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide Chapter 24 System Table 130 Maintenance > System > General LABEL Administrator Inactivity Timer DESCRIPTION Type how many minutes a management session (either via the web configurator or telnet) can be left idle before the session times out. The default is 5 minutes. After it times out you have to log in with your password again. Very long idle timeouts may have security risks. A value of "0" means a management session never times out, no matter how long it has been left idle (not recommended). Password Old Password Type the default password or the existing password you use to access the system in this field. New Password Type your new system password (up to 30 characters). Note that as you type a password, the screen displays a (*) for each character you type. After you change the password, use the new password to access the ZyXEL Device. Type the new password again for confirmation. Retype to Confirm Apply Cancel Click Apply to save your changes back to the ZyXEL Device. Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh. P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 413 Chapter 24 System 24.3 The Time Setting Screen To change your ZyXEL Devices time and date, click Maintenance > System >

Time Setting. The screen appears as shown. Use this screen to configure the ZyXEL Devices time based on your local time zone. Figure 278 Maintenance > System > Time Setting The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 131 Maintenance > System > Time Setting LABEL Current Time and Date Current Time DESCRIPTION This field displays the time of your ZyXEL Device. Current Date Each time you reload this page, the ZyXEL Device synchronizes the time with the time server. This field displays the date of your ZyXEL Device. Each time you reload this page, the ZyXEL Device synchronizes the date with the time server. Time and Date Setup Manual Select this radio button to enter the time and date manually. If you configure a new time and date, Time Zone and Daylight Saving at the same time, the new time and date you entered has priority and the Time Zone and Daylight Saving settings do not affect it. 414 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide Chapter 24 System Table 131 Maintenance > System > Time Setting (continued) LABEL New Time DESCRIPTION This field displays the last updated time from the time server or the last time configured manually.

(hh:mm:ss) New Date

(yyyy/mm/dd) Get from Time Server Time Protocol Time Server Address Time Zone Setup Time Zone Daylight Savings Start Date When you set Time and Date Setup to Manual, enter the new time in this field and then click Apply. This field displays the last updated date from the time server or the last date configured manually. When you set Time and Date Setup to Manual, enter the new date in this field and then click Apply. Select this radio button to have the ZyXEL Device get the time and date from the time server you specified below. Select the time service protocol that your time server sends when you turn on the ZyXEL Device. Not all time servers support all protocols, so you may have to check with your ISP/network administrator or use trial and error to find a protocol that works. The main difference between them is the format. Daytime (RFC 867) format is day/month/year/time zone of the server. Time (RFC 868) format displays a 4-byte integer giving the total number of seconds since 1970/1/1 at 0:0:0. The default, NTP (RFC 1305), is similar to Time (RFC 868). Enter the IP address or URL (up to 20 extended ASCII characters in length) of your time server. Check with your ISP/network administrator if you are unsure of this information. Choose the time zone of your location. This will set the time difference between your time zone and Greenwich Mean Time (GMT). Daylight saving is a period from late spring to early fall when many countries set their clocks ahead of normal local time by one hour to give more daytime light in the evening. Select this option if you use Daylight Saving Time. Configure the day and time when Daylight Saving Time starts if you selected Daylight Savings. The o'clock field uses the 24 hour format. Here are a couple of examples:

Daylight Saving Time starts in most parts of the United States on the second Sunday of March. Each time zone in the United States starts using Daylight Saving Time at 2 A.M. local time. So in the United States you would select Second, Sunday, March and type 2 in the o'clock field. Daylight Saving Time starts in the European Union on the last Sunday of March. All of the time zones in the European Union start using Daylight Saving Time at the same moment (1 A.M. GMT or UTC). So in the European Union you would select Last, Sunday, March. The time you type in the o'clock field depends on your time zone. In Germany for instance, you would type 2 because Germany's time zone is one hour ahead of GMT or UTC (GMT+1). P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 415 Chapter 24 System Table 131 Maintenance > System > Time Setting (continued) LABEL End Date DESCRIPTION Configure the day and time when Daylight Saving Time ends if you selected Daylight Savings. The o'clock field uses the 24 hour format. Here are a couple of examples:

Daylight Saving Time ends in the United States on the first Sunday of November. Each time zone in the United States stops using Daylight Saving Time at 2 A.M. local time. So in the United States you would select First, Sunday, November and type 2 in the o'clock field. Daylight Saving Time ends in the European Union on the last Sunday of October. All of the time zones in the European Union stop using Daylight Saving Time at the same moment (1 A.M. GMT or UTC). So in the European Union you would select Last, Sunday, October. The time you type in the o'clock field depends on your time zone. In Germany for instance, you would type 2 because Germany's time zone is one hour ahead of GMT or UTC (GMT+1). Click Apply to save your changes back to the ZyXEL Device. Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh. Apply Cancel 416 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide CHAPTER 25 Logs 25.1 Overview The web configurator allows you to choose which categories of events and/or alerts to have the ZyXEL Device log and then display the logs or have the ZyXEL Device send them to an administrator (as e-mail) or to a syslog server. 25.1.1 What You Can Do in the Log Screens Use the View Log screen (Section 25.2 on page 417) to see the logs for the categories that you selected in the Log Settings screen. Use The Log Settings screen (Section 25.3 on page 418) to configure to where the ZyXEL Device is to send logs; the schedule for when the ZyXEL Device is to send the logs and which logs and/or immediate alerts the ZyXEL Device is to record. 25.1.2 What You Need To Know About Logs Alerts and Logs An alert is a type of log that warrants more serious attention. They include system errors, attacks (access control) and attempted access to blocked web sites. Some categories such as System Errors consist of both logs and alerts. You may differentiate them by their color in the View Log screen. Alerts display in red and logs display in black. 25.2 The View Log Screen Click Maintenance > Logs to open the View Log screen. Use the View Log screen to see the logs for the categories that you selected in the Log Settings screen (see Section 25.3 on page 418). P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 417 Chapter 25 Logs Log entries in red indicate alerts. The log wraps around and deletes the old entries after it fills. Click a column heading to sort the entries. A triangle indicates ascending or descending sort order. Figure 279 Maintenance > Logs > View Log The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 132 Maintenance > Logs > View Log LABEL Display DESCRIPTION The categories that you select in the Log Settings screen display in the drop-down list box. Select a category of logs to view; select All Logs to view logs from all of the log categories that you selected in the Log Settings page. Email Log Now Click Email Log Now to send the log screen to the e-mail address specified in the Log Settings page (make sure that you have first filled in the E-mail Log Settings fields in Log Settings). Click Refresh to renew the log screen. Click Clear Log to delete all the logs. This field is a sequential value and is not associated with a specific entry. This field displays the time the log was recorded. This field states the reason for the log. This field lists the source IP address and the port number of the incoming packet. This field lists the destination IP address and the port number of the incoming packet. This field displays additional information about the log entry. Refresh Clear Log

Time Message Source Destination Notes 25.3 The Log Settings Screen Use the Log Settings screen to configure to where the ZyXEL Device is to send logs; the schedule for when the ZyXEL Device is to send the logs and which logs 418 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide Chapter 25 Logs and/or immediate alerts the ZyXEL Device is to record. See Section 25.1 on page 417 for more information. To change your ZyXEL Devices log settings, click Maintenance > Logs > Log Settings. The screen appears as shown. Alerts are e-mailed as soon as they happen. Logs may be e-mailed as soon as the log is full. Selecting many alert and/or log categories (especially Access Control) may result in many e-mails being sent. Figure 280 Maintenance > Logs > Log Settings P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 419 Chapter 25 Logs The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 133 Maintenance > Logs > Log Settings LABEL E-mail Log Settings Mail Server DESCRIPTION Mail Subject Send Log to Enter the server name or the IP address of the mail server for the e-mail addresses specified below. If this field is left blank, logs and alert messages will not be sent via E-mail. Type a title that you want to be in the subject line of the log e-mail message that the ZyXEL Device sends. Not all ZyXEL Device models have this field. The ZyXEL Device sends logs to the e-mail address specified in this field. If this field is left blank, the ZyXEL Device does not send logs via e-mail. Send Alerts to Alerts are real-time notifications that are sent as soon as an event, such as a DoS attack, system error, or forbidden web access attempt occurs. Enter the E-mail address where the alert messages will be sent. Alerts include system errors, attacks and attempted access to blocked web sites. If this field is left blank, alert messages will not be sent via E-mail. SMTP (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol) is the message-exchange standard for the Internet. SMTP enables you to move messages from one e-mail server to another. Enable SMTP Authentication Select the check box to activate SMTP authentication. If mail server authentication is needed but this feature is disabled, you will not receive the e-mail logs. Enter the user name (up to 31 characters) (usually the user name of a mail account). Enter the password associated with the user name above. This drop-down menu is used to configure the frequency of log messages being sent as E-mail:

User Name Password Log Schedule Daily Weekly Hourly When Log is Full None. If you select Weekly or Daily, specify a time of day when the E-mail should be sent. If you select Weekly, then also specify which day of the week the E-mail should be sent. If you select When Log is Full, an alert is sent when the log fills up. If you select None, no log messages are sent. Use the drop down list box to select which day of the week to send the logs. Enter the time of the day in 24-hour format (for example 23:00 equals 11:00 pm) to send the logs. Select this to delete all the logs after the ZyXEL Device sends an E-mail of the logs. The ZyXEL Device sends a log to an external syslog server. Click Active to enable syslog logging. Day for Sending Log Time for Sending Log Clear log after sending mail Syslog Logging Active 420 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide Chapter 25 Logs Table 133 Maintenance > Logs > Log Settings LABEL Syslog IP Address Log Facility DESCRIPTION Enter the server name or IP address of the syslog server that will log the selected categories of logs. Select a location from the drop down list box. The log facility allows you to log the messages to different files in the syslog server. Refer to the syslog server manual for more information. Active Log and Alert Log Send Immediate Alert Apply Cancel Select the categories of logs that you want to record. Select log categories for which you want the ZyXEL Device to send E-mail alerts immediately. Click Apply to save your customized settings and exit this screen. Click Cancel to return to the previously saved settings. 25.4 SMTP Error Messages If there are difficulties in sending e-mail the following error message appears. SMTP action request failed. ret= ??". The ??"are described in the following table. Table 134 SMTP Error Messages

-1 means ZyXEL Device out of socket

-2 means tcp SYN fail

-3 means smtp server OK fail

-4 means HELO fail

-5 means MAIL FROM fail

-6 means RCPT TO fail

-7 means DATA fail

-8 means mail data send fail 25.4.1 Example E-mail Log An "End of Log" message displays for each mail in which a complete log has been sent. The following is an example of a log sent by e-mail. You may edit the subject title. The date format here is Day-Month-Year. The date format here is Month-Day-Year. The time format is Hour-Minute-

Second. P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 421 Chapter 25 Logs

"End of Log" message shows that a complete log has been sent. Figure 281 E-mail Log Example Subject:

Firewall Alert From Date:

Fri, 07 Apr 2000 10:05:42 From:

user@zyxel.com To:

user@zyxel.com 1|Apr 7 00 |From:192.168.1.1 To:192.168.1.255 |default policy |forward

| 09:54:03 |UDP src port:00520 dest port:00520 |<1,00> |

2|Apr 7 00 |From:192.168.1.131 To:192.168.1.255 |default policy |forward

| 09:54:17 |UDP src port:00520 dest port:00520 |<1,00> |

3|Apr 7 00 |From:192.168.1.6 To:10.10.10.10 |match |forward

| 09:54:19 |UDP src port:03516 dest port:00053 |<1,01> |

..{snip}.. .{snip}.. 126|Apr 7 00 |From:192.168.1.1 To:192.168.1.255 |match |forward

| 10:05:00 |UDP src port:00520 dest port:00520 |<1,02> |

127|Apr 7 00 |From:192.168.1.131 To:192.168.1.255 |match |forward

| 10:05:17 |UDP src port:00520 dest port:00520 |<1,02> |

128|Apr 7 00 |From:192.168.1.1 To:192.168.1.255 |match |forward

| 10:05:30 |UDP src port:00520 dest port:00520 |<1,02> |

End of Firewall Log 25.5 Log Descriptions This section provides descriptions of example log messages. Table 135 System Maintenance Logs LOG MESSAGE Time calibration is successful Time calibration failed WAN interface gets IP: %s DHCP client IP expired DHCP server assigns %s Successful WEB login WEB login failed Successful TELNET login TELNET login failed Successful FTP login DESCRIPTION The router has adjusted its time based on information from the time server. The router failed to get information from the time server. A WAN interface got a new IP address from the DHCP, PPPoE, or dial-up server. A DHCP client's IP address has expired. The DHCP server assigned an IP address to a client. Someone has logged on to the router's web configurator interface. Someone has failed to log on to the router's web configurator interface. Someone has logged on to the router via telnet. Someone has failed to log on to the router via telnet. Someone has logged on to the router via ftp. 422 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide Chapter 25 Logs Table 135 System Maintenance Logs (continued) LOG MESSAGE FTP login failed NAT Session Table is Full!

DESCRIPTION Someone has failed to log on to the router via ftp. The maximum number of NAT session table entries has been exceeded and the table is full. Starting Connectivity Monitor. Starting Connectivity Monitor Time initialized by Daytime Server Time initialized by Time server Time initialized by NTP server Connect to Daytime server fail Connect to Time server fail Connect to NTP server fail Too large ICMP packet has been dropped Configuration Change: PC =

0x%x, Task ID = 0x%x Successful SSH login SSH login failed Successful HTTPS login HTTPS login failed The router got the time and date from the Daytime server. The router got the time and date from the time server. The router got the time and date from the NTP server. The router was not able to connect to the Daytime server. The router was not able to connect to the Time server. The router was not able to connect to the NTP server. The router dropped an ICMP packet that was too large. The router is saving configuration changes. Someone has logged on to the routers SSH server. Someone has failed to log on to the routers SSH server. Someone has logged on to the router's web configurator interface using HTTPS protocol. Someone has failed to log on to the router's web configurator interface using HTTPS protocol. Table 136 System Error Logs LOG MESSAGE

%s exceeds the max. number of session per host!

setNetBIOSFilter: calloc error readNetBIOSFilter: calloc error WAN connection is down. DESCRIPTION This attempt to create a NAT session exceeds the maximum number of NAT session table entries allowed to be created per host. The router failed to allocate memory for the NetBIOS filter settings. The router failed to allocate memory for the NetBIOS filter settings. A WAN connection is down. You cannot access the network through this interface. P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 423 Chapter 25 Logs Table 137 Access Control Logs LOG MESSAGE Firewall default policy: [ TCP |

UDP | IGMP | ESP | GRE | OSPF ]

<Packet Direction>

Firewall rule [NOT] match:[ TCP

| UDP | IGMP | ESP | GRE | OSPF

] <Packet Direction>, <rule:%d>

Triangle route packet forwarded:

[ TCP | UDP | IGMP | ESP | GRE |

OSPF ]

Packet without a NAT table entry blocked: [ TCP | UDP | IGMP |

ESP | GRE | OSPF ]

Router sent blocked web site message: TCP DESCRIPTION Attempted TCP/UDP/IGMP/ESP/GRE/OSPF access matched the default policy and was blocked or forwarded according to the default policys setting. Attempted TCP/UDP/IGMP/ESP/GRE/OSPF access matched (or did not match) a configured firewall rule (denoted by its number) and was blocked or forwarded according to the rule. The firewall allowed a triangle route session to pass through. The router blocked a packet that didn't have a corresponding NAT table entry. The router sent a message to notify a user that the router blocked access to a web site that the user requested. Table 138 TCP Reset Logs LOG MESSAGE Under SYN flood attack, sent TCP RST Exceed TCP MAX incomplete, sent TCP RST Peer TCP state out of order, sent TCP RST Firewall session time out, sent TCP RST DESCRIPTION The router sent a TCP reset packet when a host was under a SYN flood attack (the TCP incomplete count is per destination host.) The router sent a TCP reset packet when the number of TCP incomplete connections exceeded the user configured threshold. (the TCP incomplete count is per destination host.) Note: Refer to TCP Maximum Incomplete in the Firewall Attack Alerts screen. The router sent a TCP reset packet when a TCP connection state was out of order.Note: The firewall refers to RFC793 Figure 6 to check the TCP state. The router sent a TCP reset packet when a dynamic firewall session timed out.Default timeout values:ICMP idle timeout (s): 60UDP idle timeout (s): 60TCP connection (three way handshaking) timeout (s): 30TCP FIN-wait timeout (s): 60TCP idle (established) timeout

(s): 3600 424 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide Table 138 TCP Reset Logs (continued) LOG MESSAGE Exceed MAX incomplete, sent TCP RST Access block, sent TCP RST Chapter 25 Logs DESCRIPTION The router sent a TCP reset packet when the number of incomplete connections (TCP and UDP) exceeded the user-configured threshold. (Incomplete count is for all TCP and UDP connections through the firewall.)Note:

When the number of incomplete connections (TCP + UDP)

> Maximum Incomplete High, the router sends TCP RST packets for TCP connections and destroys TOS (firewall dynamic sessions) until incomplete connections <

Maximum Incomplete Low. The router sends a TCP RST packet and generates this log if you turn on the firewall TCP reset mechanism (via CI command: "sys firewall tcprst"). Table 139 Packet Filter Logs LOG MESSAGE

[ TCP | UDP | ICMP | IGMP |

Generic ] packet filter matched (set: %d, rule: %d) DESCRIPTION Attempted access matched a configured filter rule

(denoted by its set and rule number) and was blocked or forwarded according to the rule. For type and code details, see Table 148 on page 428. Table 140 ICMP Logs LOG MESSAGE Firewall default policy: ICMP

<Packet Direction>, <type:%d>,

<code:%d>

Firewall rule [NOT] match: ICMP

<Packet Direction>, <rule:%d>,

<type:%d>, <code:%d>

Triangle route packet forwarded:

ICMP Packet without a NAT table entry blocked: ICMP Unsupported/out-of-order ICMP:

ICMP Router reply ICMP packet: ICMP DESCRIPTION ICMP access matched the default policy and was blocked or forwarded according to the user's setting. ICMP access matched (or didnt match) a firewall rule (denoted by its number) and was blocked or forwarded according to the rule. The firewall allowed a triangle route session to pass through. The router blocked a packet that didnt have a corresponding NAT table entry. The firewall does not support this kind of ICMP packets or the ICMP packets are out of order. The router sent an ICMP reply packet to the sender. P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 425 Chapter 25 Logs Table 141 CDR Logs LOG MESSAGE board %d line %d channel %d, call %d, %s C01 Outgoing Call dev=%x ch=%x %s board %d line %d channel %d, call %d, %s C02 OutCall Connected %d %s board %d line %d channel %d, call %d, %s C02 Call Terminated DESCRIPTION The router received the setup requirements for a call. call is the reference (count) number of the call. dev is the device type (3 is for dial-up, 6 is for PPPoE, 10 is for PPTP). "channel" or ch is the call channel ID.For example,"board 0 line 0 channel 0, call 3, C01 Outgoing Call dev=6 ch=0 "Means the router has dialed to the PPPoE server 3 times. The PPPoE, PPTP or dial-up call is connected. The PPPoE, PPTP or dial-up call was disconnected. Table 142 PPP Logs LOG MESSAGE ppp:LCP Starting ppp:LCP Opening ppp:CHAP Opening ppp:IPCP Starting ppp:IPCP Opening ppp:LCP Closing ppp:IPCP Closing DESCRIPTION The PPP connections Link Control Protocol stage has started. The PPP connections Link Control Protocol stage is opening. The PPP connections Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol stage is opening. The PPP connections Internet Protocol Control Protocol stage is starting. The PPP connections Internet Protocol Control Protocol stage is opening. The PPP connections Link Control Protocol stage is closing. The PPP connections Internet Protocol Control Protocol stage is closing. Table 143 UPnP Logs LOG MESSAGE UPnP pass through Firewall DESCRIPTION UPnP packets can pass through the firewall. Table 144 Content Filtering Logs LOG MESSAGE

%s: block keyword DESCRIPTION The content of a requested web page matched a user defined keyword. The system forwarded web content. P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide

%s 426 Chapter 25 Logs For type and code details, see Table 148 on page 428. Table 145 Attack Logs LOG MESSAGE attack [ TCP | UDP | IGMP

| ESP | GRE | OSPF ]

attack ICMP (type:%d, code:%d) land [ TCP | UDP | IGMP |

ESP | GRE | OSPF ]

land ICMP (type:%d, code:%d) ip spoofing - WAN [ TCP |

UDP | IGMP | ESP | GRE |

OSPF ]

ip spoofing - WAN ICMP

(type:%d, code:%d) icmp echo : ICMP

(type:%d, code:%d) syn flood TCP ports scan TCP teardrop TCP teardrop UDP teardrop ICMP (type:%d, code:%d) illegal command TCP NetBIOS TCP ip spoofing - no routing entry [ TCP | UDP | IGMP

| ESP | GRE | OSPF ]

ip spoofing - no routing entry ICMP (type:%d, code:%d) vulnerability ICMP

(type:%d, code:%d) traceroute ICMP (type:%d, code:%d) DESCRIPTION The firewall detected a TCP/UDP/IGMP/ESP/GRE/OSPF attack. The firewall detected an ICMP attack. The firewall detected a TCP/UDP/IGMP/ESP/GRE/OSPF land attack. The firewall detected an ICMP land attack. The firewall detected an IP spoofing attack on the WAN port. The firewall detected an ICMP IP spoofing attack on the WAN port. The firewall detected an ICMP echo attack. The firewall detected a TCP syn flood attack. The firewall detected a TCP port scan attack. The firewall detected a TCP teardrop attack. The firewall detected an UDP teardrop attack. The firewall detected an ICMP teardrop attack. The firewall detected a TCP illegal command attack. The firewall detected a TCP NetBIOS attack. The firewall classified a packet with no source routing entry as an IP spoofing attack. The firewall classified an ICMP packet with no source routing entry as an IP spoofing attack. The firewall detected an ICMP vulnerability attack. The firewall detected an ICMP traceroute attack. Table 146 802.1X Logs LOG MESSAGE RADIUS accepts user. RADIUS rejects user. Pls check RADIUS Server. User logout because of session timeout expired. DESCRIPTION A user was authenticated by the RADIUS Server. A user was not authenticated by the RADIUS Server. Please check the RADIUS Server. The router logged out a user whose session expired. P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 427 Chapter 25 Logs DESCRIPTION The router logged out a user who ended the session. The router logged out a user from which there was no authentication response. Table 146 802.1X Logs (continued) LOG MESSAGE User logout because of user deassociation. User logout because of no authentication response from user. User logout because of idle timeout expired. User logout because of user request. No response from RADIUS. Pls There is no response message from the RADIUS check RADIUS Server. server, please check the RADIUS server. Use RADIUS to authenticate user. The RADIUS server is operating as the The router logged out a user whose idle timeout period expired. A user logged out. authentication server. There is no authentication server to authenticate a user. No Server to authenticate user. Table 147 ACL Setting Notes PACKET DIRECTION

(L to W) DIRECTION LAN to WAN

(W to L) WAN to LAN

(L to L/ZyXEL Device)

(W to W/ZyXEL Device) LAN to LAN/

ZyXEL Device WAN to WAN/

ZyXEL Device Table 148 ICMP Notes TYPE 0 CODE DESCRIPTION ACL set for packets traveling from the LAN to the WAN. ACL set for packets traveling from the WAN to the LAN. ACL set for packets traveling from the LAN to the LAN or the ZyXEL Device. ACL set for packets traveling from the WAN to the WAN or the ZyXEL Device. DESCRIPTION Echo Reply Echo reply message Destination Unreachable Net unreachable Host unreachable Protocol unreachable Port unreachable A packet that needed fragmentation was dropped because it was set to Don't Fragment (DF) Source route failed 3 0 0 1 2 3 4 5 428 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide Table 148 ICMP Notes (continued) TYPE 4 CODE Chapter 25 Logs DESCRIPTION Source Quench A gateway may discard internet datagrams if it does not have the buffer space needed to queue the datagrams for output to the next network on the route to the destination network. Redirect Redirect datagrams for the Network Redirect datagrams for the Host Redirect datagrams for the Type of Service and Network Redirect datagrams for the Type of Service and Host Echo Echo message Time Exceeded Time to live exceeded in transit Fragment reassembly time exceeded Parameter Problem Pointer indicates the error Timestamp Timestamp request message Timestamp Reply Timestamp reply message Information Request Information request message Information Reply Information reply message 0 0 1 2 3 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 5 8 11 12 13 14 15 16 Table 149 Syslog Logs LOG MESSAGE

<Facility*8 + Severity>Mon dd hr:mm:ss hostname src="<srcIP:srcPort>"

dst="<dstIP:dstPort>"

msg="<msg>" note="<note>"

devID="<mac address last three numbers>" cat="<category>

DESCRIPTION

"This message is sent by the system ("RAS"

displays as the system name if you havent configured one) when the router generates a syslog. The facility is defined in the web MAIN MENU->LOGS->Log Settings page. The severity is the logs syslog class. The definition of messages and notes are defined in the various log charts throughout this appendix. The devID is the last three characters of the MAC address of the routers LAN port. The cat is the same as the category in the routers logs. P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 429 Chapter 25 Logs Table 150 SIP Logs LOG MESSAGE SIP Registration Success by SIP:SIP Phone Number SIP Registration Fail by SIP:SIP Phone Number SIP UnRegistration Success by SIP:SIP Phone Number SIP UnRegistration Fail by SIP:SIP Phone Number DESCRIPTION The listed SIP account was successfully registered with a SIP register server. An attempt to register the listed SIP account with a SIP register server was not successful. The listed SIP accounts registration was deleted from the SIP register server. An attempt to delete the listed SIP accounts registration from the SIP register server failed. Table 151 RTP Logs LOG MESSAGE Error, RTP init fail Error, Call fail: RTP connect fail Error, RTP connection cannot close DESCRIPTION The initialization of an RTP session failed. A VoIP phone call failed because the RTP session could not be established. The termination of an RTP session failed. Table 152 FSM Logs: Caller Side LOG MESSAGE VoIP Call Start Ph[Phone Port Number] <- Outgoing Call Number VoIP Call Established Ph[Phone Port] ->

Outgoing Call Number DESCRIPTION Someone used a phone connected to the listed phone port to initiate a VoIP call to the listed destination. Someone used a phone connected to the listed phone port to make a VoIP call to the listed destination. VoIP Call End Phone[Phone Port]

A VoIP phone call made from a phone connected to the listed phone port has terminated. 430 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide Chapter 25 Logs Table 153 FSM Logs: Callee Side LOG MESSAGE VoIP Call Start from SIP[SIP Port Number]

VoIP Call Established Ph[Phone Port] <-

Outgoing Call Number VoIP Call End Phone[Phone Port]

DESCRIPTION A VoIP phone call came to the ZyXEL Device from the listed SIP number. A VoIP phone call was set up from the listed SIP number to the ZyXEL Device. A VoIP phone call that came into the ZyXEL Device has terminated. The following table shows RFC-2408 ISAKMP payload types that the log displays. Please refer to RFC 2408 for detailed information on each type. Table 154 RFC-2408 ISAKMP Payload Types LOG DISPLAY SA PROP TRANS KE ID CER CER_REQ HASH SIG NONCE NOTFY DEL VID PAYLOAD TYPE Security Association Proposal Transform Key Exchange Identification Certificate Certificate Request Hash Signature Nonce Notification Delete Vendor ID P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 431 Chapter 25 Logs 432 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide CHAPTER 26 Call History 26.1 Overview The ZyXEL Device keeps track of when you use the phone ports for calls. 26.1.1 What You Can Do in the Call History Screens Use the Summary screen (Section 26.2 on page 433) to view a summary of the calls performed via the ZyXEL Device within a certain period. Use the Call History screen (Section 26.3 on page 434) to see the details of the calls performed on the ZyXEL Device. Use the Call History Settings screen (Section 26.4 on page 435) to configure to where the ZyXEL Device is to send call records and the schedule for when the ZyXEL Device is to send or save the call records. 26.2 Call History Summary Screen Click Maintenance > Call History to open the Summary screen. Use the Summary screen to view a summary of the calls performed via the ZyXEL Device within a certain period. Figure 282 Maintenance > Call History > Summary P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 433 Chapter 26 Call History The following table describes the fields in this screen. DESCRIPTION This shows the time period. Table 155 Maintenance > Call History > Summary LABEL Type of Summary Start Time End Time Tx Packets This shows the date when the period starts. This shows the date when the period ends. This shows the number of voice packets the ZyXEL Device transmitted within this period. This shows the number of voice packets the ZyXEL Device received within this period. This shows how long the analog calls lasted within this period. This shows how long the Voice over Internet calls lasted within this period. Rx Packets Duration of PSTN Duration of VoIP 26.3 Viewing the Call History Click Maintenance > Call History > Call History to open the Call History screen. Use the Call History screen to see the details of the calls performed on the ZyXEL Device. The call history buffer can hold up to 150 entries. When the call history buffer fills, old records are deleted as new ones are added. Click a column heading to sort the entries. A triangle indicates ascending or descending sort order. Figure 283 Maintenance > Call History > Call History 434 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide The following table describes the fields in this screen. Chapter 26 Call History Table 156 Maintenance > Call History > Call History LABEL View Call History DESCRIPTION Select a category of call records to view. Select All Call History to view any call records on the ZyXEL Device. Select Missed Calls to view only calls which were not answered on the ZyXEL Device. Select Dialed Calls to view only calls which were dialed from the ZyXEL Device. Select Received Calls to view only calls which were received on the ZyXEL Device Email Log Now Click Email Log Now to send the log screen to the e-mail address specified in the Call History Settings page (make sure that you have first filled in the E-mail Log Settings fields in Call History Settings). Click Refresh to renew the call history screen. Click Clear Call History to delete all call records. Choose a page from the drop-down list box to display the corresponding summary page of the call records. This field is a sequential value and is not associated with a specific entry. This field displays the category of the call. This field displays the time the call was recorded. This field displays how long the call lasted. This field displays the phone number you used to make or receive this call. This field displays the phone number you called or from which this call is made. This field displays the number of packets the ZyXEL Device has transmitted for the call. This field displays the number of packets the ZyXEL Device has received for the call. This field displays the type of the call. Refresh Clear Call History Next Page

Type Time Duration Local Identity Peer Number TxPacket RxPacket Interface 26.4 Configuring Call History Settings Use the Call History Settings screen to configure to where the ZyXEL Device is to send call records and the schedule for when the ZyXEL Device is to send or save the call records. P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 435 Chapter 26 Call History To change your ZyXEL Devices call history settings, click Maintenance > Call History > Call History Settings. The screen appears as shown. Figure 284 Maintenance > Call History > Call History Settings The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 157 Maintenance > Call History > Call History Settings LABEL E-mail Call History Settings Mail Server DESCRIPTION Enter the server name or the IP address of the mail server for the e-mail addresses specified below. If this field is left blank, logs and alert messages will not be sent via E-mail. Type a title that you want to be in the subject line of the log e-mail message that the ZyXEL Device sends. Not all ZyXEL Device have this field. The ZyXEL Device sends logs to the e-mail address specified in this field. If this field is left blank, the ZyXEL Device does not send logs via e-mail. Mail Subject Send Call History to 436 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide Chapter 26 Call History Table 157 Maintenance > Call History > Call History Settings LABEL Enable SMTP Authentication DESCRIPTION SMTP (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol) is the message-exchange standard for the Internet. SMTP enables you to move messages from one e-mail server to another. Select the check box to activate SMTP authentication if your mail server requests you to log in to receive or send e-mails. If mail server authentication is needed but this feature is disabled, you will not receive the e-mail logs. User Name Enter the user name (up to 31 characters) that you use to log into your Password Send Call History Schedule mail server (usually the user name of a mail account). Enter the password associated with the user name above. This drop-down menu is used to configure the frequency of log messages being sent as E-mail:

Daily Weekly Hourly When Log is Full None. If you select Weekly or Daily, specify a time of day when the E-mail should be sent. If you select Weekly, then also specify which day of the week the E-mail should be sent. If you select When Log is Full, an alert is sent when the log fills up. If you select None, no log messages are sent. Use the drop down list box to select which day of the week to send the logs. Enter the time of the day in 24-hour format (for example 23:00 equals 11:00 pm) to send the logs. Select this to delete all the logs after the ZyXEL Device sends an E-mail of the logs. This drop-down menu is used to configure the frequency of log messages being saved:

Day for Sending Call History Time for Sending Call History Clear Call History after sending mail Save Call History Settings Save Call History Schedule Daily Weekly Hourly If you select Weekly or Daily, specify a time of day when the ZyXEL Device saves the records. If you select Weekly, then also specify which day of the week the ZyXEL Device saves the records. Use the drop down list box to select which day of the week to save the records. Enter the time of the day in 24-hour format (for example 23:00 equals 11:00 pm) to save the records. Day for Saving Call History Time for Saving Call History P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 437 Chapter 26 Call History DESCRIPTION Table 157 Maintenance > Call History > Call History Settings LABEL Summary of Call History Settings Start Date of Every Month Apply Cancel Select which day of a month (from 1 to 28) on which the Last Month summary of call history (displays in the Summary screen) starts. Click Apply to save your customized settings and exit this screen. Click Cancel to return to the previously saved settings. 438 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide CHAPTER 27 Tools Do not interrupt the file transfer process as this may PERMANENTLY DAMAGE your ZyXEL Device. 27.1 Overview Use the instructions in this chapter to change the devices configuration file or upgrade its firmware. After you configure your device, you can backup the configuration file to a computer. That way if you later misconfigure the device, you can upload the backed up configuration file to return to your previous settings. You can alternately upload the factory default configuration file if you want to return the device to the original default settings. The firmware determines the devices available features and functionality. You can download new firmware releases from your nearest ZyXEL FTP site (or www.zyxel.com) to use to upgrade your devices performance. Only use firmware for your devices specific model. Refer to the label on the bottom of your ZyXEL Device. 27.1.1 What You Can Do in the Tool Screens Use the Firmware Upgrade screen (Section 27.2 on page 446) to upload firmware to your device. Use the Configuration screen (Section 27.3 on page 449) to backup and restore device configurations. You can also reset your device settings back to the factory default. Use the Restart screen (Section 27.4 on page 452) to restart your ZyXEL device. 27.1.2 What You Need To Know About Tools Filename Conventions The configuration file (often called the romfile or rom-0) contains the factory default settings in the menus such as password, DHCP Setup, and TCP/IP Setup. It P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 439 Chapter 27 Tools arrives from ZyXEL with a rom filename extension. Once you have customized the ZyXEL Device's settings, they can be saved back to your computer under a filename of your choosing. ZyNOS (ZyXEL Network Operating System sometimes referred to as the ras file) is the system firmware and has a bin filename extension. Find this firmware at www.zyxel.com.With many FTP and TFTP clients, the filenames are similar to those seen next. ftp> put firmware.bin ras This is a sample FTP session showing the transfer of the computer file

"firmware.bin" to the ZyXEL Device. ftp> get rom-0 config.cfg This is a sample FTP session saving the current configuration to the computer file config.cfg. If your (T)FTP client does not allow you to have a destination filename different than the source, you will need to rename them as the ZyXEL Device only recognizes rom-0 and ras. Be sure you keep unaltered copies of both files for later use. The following table is a summary. Please note that the internal filename refers to the filename on the ZyXEL Device and the external filename refers to the filename not on the ZyXEL Device, that is, on your computer, local network or FTP site and so the name (but not the extension) may vary. After uploading new firmware, see the Status screen to confirm that you have uploaded the correct firmware version. Table 158 Filename Conventions FILE TYPE EXTERNAL NAME INTERNAL NAME Rom-0 Configuration File This is the configuration filename on the ZyXEL Device. Uploading the rom-0 file replaces the entire ROM file system, including your ZyXEL Device configurations, system-related data

(including the default password), the error log and the trace log. This is the generic name for the ZyNOS firmware on the ZyXEL Device. DESCRIPTIO N

*.rom

*.bin Firmware Ras FTP Restrictions FTP will not work when:

440 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide Chapter 27 Tools 1 2 3 The firewall is active (turn the firewall off or create a firewall rule to allow access from the WAN). You have disabled the FTP service in the Remote Management screen. The IP you entered in the Secured Client IP field does not match the client IP. If it does not match, the device will disallow the FTP session immediately. 27.1.3 Before You Begin Ensure you have either created a firewall rule to allow access from the WAN or turned the firewall off, otherwise the FTP will not function. Make sure the FTP service has not been disabled in the Remote Management screen. 27.1.4 Tool Examples Using FTP or TFTP to Restore Configuration This example shows you how to restore a previously saved configuration. Note that this function erases the current configuration before restoring a previous back up configuration; please do not attempt to restore unless you have a backup configuration file stored on disk. FTP is the preferred method for restoring your current computer configuration to your device since FTP is faster. Please note that you must wait for the system to automatically restart after the file transfer is complete. Do not interrupt the file transfer process as this may PERMANENTLY DAMAGE your device. When the Restore Configuration process is complete, the device automatically restarts. Restore Using FTP Session Example Figure 285 Restore Using FTP Session Example ftp> put config.rom rom-0 200 Port command okay 150 Opening data connection for STOR rom-0 226 File received OK 221 Goodbye for writing flash ftp: 16384 bytes sent in 0.06Seconds 273.07Kbytes/sec. ftp>quit Refer to Section 27.1.2 on page 439 to read about configurations that disallow TFTP and FTP over WAN. P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 441 Chapter 27 Tools FTP and TFTP Firmware and Configuration File Uploads These examples show you how to upload firmware and configuration files. Do not interrupt the file transfer process as this may PERMANENTLY DAMAGE your device. FTP is the preferred method for uploading the firmware and configuration. To use this feature, your computer must have an FTP client. The following sections give examples of how to upload the firmware and the configuration files. FTP File Upload Command from the DOS Prompt Example 1 Launch the FTP client on your computer. 2 Enter open, followed by a space and the IP address of your device. 3 Press [ENTER] when prompted for a username. 4 Enter your password as requested (the default is 1234). 5 Enter bin to set transfer mode to binary. 6 Use put to transfer files from the computer to the device, for example, put firmware.bin ras transfers the firmware on your computer (firmware.bin) to the device and renames it ras. Similarly, put config.rom rom-0 transfers the configuration file on your computer (config.rom) to the device and renames it rom-0. Likewise get rom-0 config.rom transfers the configuration file on the device to your computer and renames it config.rom. See earlier in this chapter for more information on filename conventions. 7 Enter quit to exit the ftp prompt. FTP Session Example of Firmware File Upload Figure 286 FTP Session Example of Firmware File Upload 331 Enter PASS command Password:

230 Logged in ftp> bin 200 Type I OK ftp> put firmware.bin ras 200 Port command okay 150 Opening data connection for STOR ras 226 File received OK ftp: 1103936 bytes sent in 1.10Seconds 297.89Kbytes/sec. ftp> quit 442 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide Chapter 27 Tools More commands (found in GUI-based FTP clients) are listed in this chapter. Refer to Section 27.1.2 on page 439 to read about configurations that disallow TFTP and FTP over WAN. TFTP File Upload The device also supports the uploading of firmware files using TFTP (Trivial File Transfer Protocol) over LAN. Although TFTP should work over WAN as well, it is not recommended. To use TFTP, your computer must have both telnet and TFTP clients. To transfer the firmware and the configuration file, follow the procedure shown next. 1 Use telnet from your computer to connect to the device and log in. Because TFTP does not have any security checks, the device records the IP address of the telnet client and accepts TFTP requests only from this address. 2 Enter the command sys stdio 0 to disable the management idle timeout, so the TFTP transfer will not be interrupted. Enter command sys stdio 5 to restore the five-minute management idle timeout (default) when the file transfer is complete. 3 Launch the TFTP client on your computer and connect to the device. Set the transfer mode to binary before starting data transfer. 4 Use the TFTP client (see the example below) to transfer files between the device and the computer. The file name for the firmware is ras. Note that the telnet connection must be active and the device in CI mode before and during the TFTP transfer. For details on TFTP commands (see following example), please consult the documentation of your TFTP client program. For UNIX, use get to transfer from the device to the computer, put the other way around, and binary to set binary transfer mode. TFTP Upload Command Example The following is an example TFTP command:

tftp [-i] host put firmware.bin ras Where i specifies binary image transfer mode (use this mode when transferring binary files), host is the devices IP address, put transfers the file source on the computer (firmware.bin name of the firmware on the computer) to the file destination on the remote host (ras - name of the firmware on the device). Commands that you may see in GUI-based TFTP clients are listed earlier in this chapter. P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 443 Chapter 27 Tools Using the FTP Commands to Back Up Configuration 1 Launch the FTP client on your computer. 2 Enter open, followed by a space and the IP address of your ZyXEL Device. 3 Press [ENTER] when prompted for a username. 4 Enter your password as requested (the default is 1234). 5 Enter bin to set transfer mode to binary. 6 Use get to transfer files from the ZyXEL Device to the computer, for example, get rom-0 config.rom transfers the configuration file on the ZyXEL Device to your computer and renames it config.rom. See earlier in this chapter for more information on filename conventions. 7 Enter quit to exit the ftp prompt. FTP Command Configuration Backup Example This figure gives an example of using FTP commands from the DOS command prompt to save your devices configuration onto your computer. Figure 287 FTP Session Example 331 Enter PASS command Password:

230 Logged in ftp> bin 200 Type I OK ftp> get rom-0 zyxel.rom 200 Port command okay 150 Opening data connection for STOR ras 226 File received OK ftp: 16384 bytes sent in 1.10Seconds 297.89Kbytes/sec. ftp> quit 444 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide Chapter 27 Tools Configuration Backup Using GUI-based FTP Clients The following table describes some of the commands that you may see in GUI-

based FTP clients. Table 159 General Commands for GUI-based FTP Clients COMMAND Host Address Login Type DESCRIPTION Enter the address of the host server. Anonymous. This is when a user I.D. and password is automatically supplied to the server for anonymous access. Anonymous logins will work only if your ISP or service administrator has enabled this option. Normal. The server requires a unique User ID and Password to login. Transfer files in either ASCII (plain text format) or in binary mode. Specify the default remote directory (path). Specify the default local directory (path). Transfer Type Initial Remote Directory Initial Local Directory Backup Configuration Using TFTP The ZyXEL Device supports the up/downloading of the firmware and the configuration file using TFTP (Trivial File Transfer Protocol) over LAN. Although TFTP should work over WAN as well, it is not recommended. To use TFTP, your computer must have both telnet and TFTP clients. To backup the configuration file, follow the procedure shown next. 1 Use telnet from your computer to connect to the ZyXEL Device and log in. Because TFTP does not have any security checks, the ZyXEL Device records the IP address of the telnet client and accepts TFTP requests only from this address. 2 Enter command sys stdio 0 to disable the management idle timeout, so the TFTP transfer will not be interrupted. Enter command sys stdio 5 to restore the five-minute management idle timeout (default) when the file transfer is complete. 3 Launch the TFTP client on your computer and connect to the ZyXEL Device. Set the transfer mode to binary before starting data transfer. 4 Use the TFTP client (see the example below) to transfer files between the ZyXEL Device and the computer. The file name for the configuration file is rom-0 (rom-

zero, not capital o). P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 445 Chapter 27 Tools Note that the telnet connection must be active before and during the TFTP transfer. For details on TFTP commands (see following example), please consult the documentation of your TFTP client program. For UNIX, use get to transfer from the ZyXEL Device to the computer and binary to set binary transfer mode. TFTP Command Configuration Backup Example The following is an example TFTP command:

tftp [-i] host get rom-0 config.rom where i specifies binary image transfer mode (use this mode when transferring binary files), host is the ZyXEL Device IP address, get transfers the file source on the ZyXEL Device (rom-0, name of the configuration file on the ZyXEL Device) to the file destination on the computer and renames it config.rom. Configuration Backup Using GUI-based TFTP Clients The following table describes some of the fields that you may see in GUI-based TFTP clients. Table 160 General Commands for GUI-based TFTP Clients COMMAN D Host DESCRIPTION Enter the IP address of the ZyXEL Device. 192.168.1.1 is the ZyXEL Devices default IP address when shipped. Use Send to upload the file to the ZyXEL Device and Fetch to back up the file on your computer. Enter the path and name of the firmware file (*.bin extension) or configuration file (*.rom extension) on your computer. This is the filename on the ZyXEL Device. The filename for the firmware is ras and for the configuration file, is rom-0. Transfer the file in binary mode. Stop transfer of the file. Send/

Fetch Local File Remote File Binary Abort Refer to Section 27.1.2 on page 439 to read about configurations that disallow TFTP and FTP over WAN. 27.2 Firmware Upgrade Screen Click Maintenance > Tools to open the Firmware screen. Follow the instructions in this screen to upload firmware to your ZyXEL Device. The upload process uses HTTP (Hypertext Transfer Protocol) and may take up to two minutes. After a successful upload, the system will reboot. See Section on page 442 for upgrading firmware using FTP/TFTP commands. 446 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide Chapter 27 Tools Do NOT turn off the ZyXEL Device while firmware upload is in progress!

Figure 288 Maintenance > Tools > Firmware Upgrade The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 161 Maintenance > Tools > Firmware Upgrade LABEL Current Firmware Version File Path DESCRIPTION This is the present Firmware version and the date created. Browse... Upload Type in the location of the file you want to upload in this field or click Browse ... to find it. Click Browse... to find the .bin file you want to upload. Remember that you must decompress compressed (.zip) files before you can upload them. Click Upload to begin the upload process. This process may take up to two minutes. P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 447 Chapter 27 Tools After you see the Firmware Upload in Progress screen, wait two minutes before logging into the ZyXEL Device again. Figure 289 Firmware Upload In Progress The ZyXEL Device automatically restarts in this time causing a temporary network disconnect. In some operating systems, you may see the following icon on your desktop. Figure 290 Network Temporarily Disconnected After two minutes, log in again and check your new firmware version in the Status screen. If the upload was not successful, the following screen will appear. Click Return to go back to the Firmware screen. Figure 291 Error Message 448 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide Chapter 27 Tools 27.3 The Configuration Screen See Section 27.5 on page 452 and Section on page 441 for transferring configuration files using FTP/TFTP commands. Click Maintenance > Tools > Configuration. Information related to factory defaults, backup configuration, and restoring configuration appears in this screen, as shown next. Figure 292 Maintenance > Tools > Configuration Backup Configuration Backup Configuration allows you to back up (save) the ZyXEL Devices current configuration to a file on your computer. Once your ZyXEL Device is configured and functioning properly, it is highly recommended that you back up your configuration file before making configuration changes. The backup configuration file will be useful in case you need to return to your previous settings. Click Backup to save the ZyXEL Devices current configuration to your computer. P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide 449 Chapter 27 Tools Restore Configuration Restore Configuration allows you to upload a new or previously saved configuration file from your computer to your ZyXEL Device. Table 162 Restore Configuration LABEL File Path DESCRIPTION Type in the location of the file you want to upload in this field or click Browse ... to find it. Browse... Click Browse... to find the file you want to upload. Remember that you must Upload decompress compressed (.ZIP) files before you can upload them. Click Upload to begin the upload process. Do not turn off the ZyXEL Device while configuration file upload is in progress. After you see a restore configuration successful screen, you must then wait one minute before logging into the ZyXEL Device again. Figure 293 Configuration Upload Successful The ZyXEL Device automatically restarts in this time causing a temporary network disconnect. In some operating systems, you may see the following icon on your desktop. Figure 294 Network Temporarily Disconnected If you uploaded the default configuration file you may need to change the IP address of your computer to be in the same subnet as that of the default device IP address (192.168.1.1). See Appendix A on page 485 for details on how to set up your computers IP address. 450 P-2612HWU-F1 Users Guide